JP7716072B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, gaming machines are known that can execute display effects using a display device when a gaming ball enters a starting hole (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Such gaming machines can display effects using character images, patterns, etc.

JP 2016-202930 A JP 2016-198339 A JP 2016-182376 A

However, even with the gaming machines mentioned above, there was still room for improvement in terms of technology to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The present invention was made to solve the above-mentioned problems and aims to increase the enjoyment of games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least some of the problems described above, and can be realized as the following application examples. Note that reference symbols and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this section indicate correspondence with the embodiments described below to aid in understanding the present invention, and do not in any way limit the present invention.

[Application Example 1]
A gaming machine,
When a predetermined row of performance symbols among those fluctuating in a plurality of rows is stopped to perform a reach formation performance, a color change stop performance can be executed in which a display color of a second pattern, which is a performance symbol to be temporarily stopped to form a reach, is changed for a first pattern, which is a performance symbol that has already been temporarily stopped, and then the second pattern is temporarily stopped;
In the color change stop effect , the display color of the second symbol is temporarily changed, and the display color of the second symbol is returned to the original display color at the stop position of the second symbol in accordance with the temporary stop of the second symbol,
In association with the color change stop effect, the second symbol is enlarged and displayed, and thereafter, when the second symbol is determined and stopped, the size of the second symbol returns to the original size before the enlarged display.
A gaming machine characterized by:

This invention can increase the enjoyment of games.

FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board of the gaming machine. FIG. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM. 1 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in gaming machines. 10A and 10B are diagrams for explaining decision tables T1 to T4 and T10. An explanatory diagram of the jackpot type determination table T5. An explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 when the time is not reduced. An explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 during time-saving mode. An explanatory diagram of the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of the large prize opening pattern determination table T8. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a V-type opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. 10 is a flowchart of a main control process. 10 is a flowchart of a main-side timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. This is a flowchart of the special diagram 2 pre-determination processing. This is a flowchart of the preliminary judgment processing of Special Figure 1. 10 is a flowchart of a normal operation process. 10 is a flowchart of a special action process. 10 is a flowchart of a special symbol waiting process. 10 is a flowchart of a jackpot determination process. This is a first flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. This is a second flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. This is a flowchart of processing during special pattern change. 10 is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. 10 is a flowchart of a game status management process. 10 is a flowchart of a game state reset process. 10 is a flowchart of special electric device processing. 10 is a flowchart of a V-type opening/closing member operation process. 10 is a flowchart of a game status setting process. 10 is a flowchart of a V-area sensor detection process. This is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a sub-control main process. 10 is a flowchart of a sub-side timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. 10 is a flowchart of a pre-reading effect determination process. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of a pre-determination information storage area. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a pre-reading effect pattern determination table T51. 10 is a flowchart of the variable effect start processing. An explanatory diagram of the core performance pattern determination table T52. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. This is a flowchart of processing during variable performance. 10 is a flowchart of a display control process. An explanatory diagram illustrating the second state of the third movable part 13. An explanatory diagram illustrating the second state of the first movable part 14. An explanatory diagram illustrating the second state of the second movable part 15. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display effects of the sub-display screen 64. FIG. This is the first figure to explain the pending icon switching effect A. This is the second figure to explain the pending icon switching effect A. A diagram to explain the pending icon switching effect B. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a change icon acquisition effect A. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a change icon acquisition effect B. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a change icon acquisition effect C. A diagram to explain the pending icon movement and change performance A. A diagram to explain the pending icon movement and change presentation B. A diagram to explain the pending icon movement and change presentation C. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining specific icon stock effect A. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining specific icon stock effect B. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific icon stock effect C. A diagram to explain operation stock presentation A (first half). A diagram to explain operation stock presentation A (second half). A diagram to explain operation stock presentation B (second half). A diagram to explain icon number pattern effect A. A diagram to explain icon number pattern presentation B. 10 is a diagram for explaining the icon number pattern effect C. FIG. A diagram to explain the pending icon presentation A when in reach. A diagram to explain the hold icon presentation B when in reach. A diagram to explain the hold icon presentation C when in reach. A diagram to explain special hold effect A. A diagram to explain special hold effect B. A diagram to explain special hold effect C. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating icon success/failure presentation A. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating icon success/failure presentation B. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an icon success/failure effect C. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an icon selection effect A. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an icon selection effect B. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an icon selection effect C. This is a table showing the probability of winning by icon. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating special icon change effect A. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating special icon change presentation B. A diagram to explain the variable icon jump effect A. A figure to explain the variable icon jump performance B. A diagram to explain the variable icon jump effect C. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an operation means appearance effect A. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an operation means appearance effect B. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an operation means appearance effect C. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining part assembly presentation A. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining part assembly presentation B. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining part assembly presentation C. This is a diagram to explain the decorative pattern presentation A when a win occurs. A diagram to explain the decorative pattern presentation B when reaching a win. A diagram to explain the decorative pattern presentation C when reaching a win. A diagram to explain group promotion effect A. A diagram to explain group promotion effect B. A diagram to explain group promotion effect C. A diagram to explain the stop decorative pattern appearance performance A. A diagram to explain the stop decorative pattern appearance effect B. A diagram to explain the stop decorative pattern appearance effect C. A diagram to explain pattern color change effect A. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the pattern color change effect B. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a pattern color change effect C. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a color change reach effect A. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a color change reach effect B. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a color change reach effect C. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a character attack effect A. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating character attack presentation B. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a character attack effect C. A diagram to explain decorative pattern color change performance A. A diagram to explain decorative pattern color change performance B. A diagram to explain the decorative pattern color change performance C. A diagram for explaining special pattern effect A. A diagram for explaining special pattern effect A. A diagram for explaining special pattern effect A. A diagram to explain decorative pattern visibility change performance A. A figure to explain decorative pattern visibility change performance B. 10 is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern visibility change performance C. FIG. A diagram to explain decorative pattern rotation stop display performance A. A diagram to explain decorative pattern rotation stop display performance B. A diagram to explain the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance C. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the expectation level number display effect A. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the expectation level number display effect B. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the expectation level number display effect C. This is a diagram to explain the specific effect execution suggestion effect A. This is a diagram to explain the specific effect execution suggestion effect B. A diagram to explain the specific effect execution suggestion effect C. A diagram to explain special direction suggestion effect A. A diagram to explain special direction suggestion effect B. A diagram to explain special direction suggestion effect C. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a sound effect performance A. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining sound effect presentation B. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a sound effect C. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining lyric image effect A. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining lyric image effect B. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining lyric image effect C. A diagram for explaining specific area variable effect A. A diagram to explain specific area variable effect B. A diagram for explaining specific area variable effect C. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the reliability of character appearance. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating reliability change effect A. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating reliability change effect B. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an item superimposition effect A. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an item superimposition effect B. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an item superimposition effect C. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a game board made of a transparent acrylic plate. A continuation of the diagram for explaining the game board of Figure 146. A diagram to explain the movable character decorative lighting performance. A diagram for explaining W mode display effect A. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the W mode display effect B. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating W mode display effect C. 10A and 10B are diagrams for explaining a method of locking the blade member to the upper tray. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a movable part operation warning display A. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a movable part operation warning display B.

First Embodiment
1. Structure of the Gaming Machine Figure 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to one embodiment of the present invention. In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as coinciding with the left-right direction as seen by a player facing the gaming machine 1. Furthermore, the front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 toward the player, and the rear direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player toward the gaming machine 1.

Gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that fires gaming balls based on the player's firing operation, and when a gaming ball lands on a specific winning device, a predetermined number of gaming balls is paid out to the player based on that winning. Gaming machine 1 comprises a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2, with the gaming board 2 attached to the inside of the gaming machine frame 50. In addition to a front frame (front frame portion) 53, gaming machine frame 50 comprises an outer frame (base frame portion) that forms the outer shell of the gaming machine, and an inner frame inside the outer frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit located at the front of the outer and inner frames, and includes a handle 60, a ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, a surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62, an effect button 63, sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U), a sword member 65, a frame lamp 66, and a speaker 67. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, through which the play area 3 of the game board 2 can be seen.

The handle 60 is located at the lower right end of the front frame 53 and launches game balls with a launch strength corresponding to the rotation angle. The ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is located below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is located below the ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball supply tray 61. The effect button 63 is an operating unit located near the ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and is operated (pressed) by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses. The sword member 65 is an operating unit shaped like a sword and can be pushed downward by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses. The sword member 65 is configured to be able to perform a first operation in which the entire sword member 65 is pushed downward, and a second operation in which the entire sword member 65 is pushed upward. The sub-display screen 64 is a screen of a liquid crystal display device and includes a right sub-display screen 64R, a left sub-display screen 64L, and an upper sub-display screen 64U. The right sub-display screen 64R is provided on the right side of the front frame 53, the left sub-display screen 64L is provided on the left side of the front frame 53, and the upper sub-display screen 64U is provided on the upper side of the front frame 53. The right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L are arranged in pairs across the game board 2. The upper sub-display screen 64U is arranged above the game board 2. The right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U are arranged to surround the opening of the front frame 53. The sub-display screen 64 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The frame lamps 66 include a right frame lamp and a left frame lamp, and are arranged above the front frame 53 to provide light effects during play. The right frame lamp is a diagonal light-emitting element arranged between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the right sub-display screen 64R. The left frame lamp is a diagonal light-emitting element arranged between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the left sub-display screen 64L. The speakers 67 are arranged at the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53, and provide sound effects during play.

The game board 2 includes a play area 3, rail members 4, board lamps 5, an image display device 7, a center decoration 10, a fixed winning device (center hole) 19, a regular variable winning device (electric chute) 22, a gate (through chucker) 28, a first large winning device (first attacker) 31, a second large winning device (second attacker) 36, a large winning opening start port 17, a regular winning opening 27 (regular winning opening 27), an outlet 16, and indicators 40.

The play area 3 is an area where game balls launched by operating the handle 60 flow down, and has multiple protruding game pegs that guide the game balls. The rail member 4 is located at the left end of the play area 3 and guides game balls launched by operating the handle 60 toward the top of the play area 3. The board lamps 5 are located on the rear side of the play area 3 and emit light from the rear side of the play area 3. Here, some of the board lamps 5 are connected to the right frame lamp and the left frame lamp, and are configured to have continuous shape and light emission.

The image display device 7 is located near the center of the play area 3 and has a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or other image display devices such as an organic EL display device, plasma display, projector, or dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has a performance symbol display area in which performance symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also called variable display), a hold image display area in which hold images 9A and 9B are displayed, and a hold digestion image display area (the hold display area) in which a hold digestion image 9C is displayed. The hold images 9A and 9B are images that represent a hold, and are also referred to as hold icons 9A and 9B. The hold digestion image 9C is an image that represents the hold, and is also referred to as the hold image 9C, the hold icon 9C, the variable icon 9C, or the variable icon 9C. The hold icon 9C may also be simply referred to as the hold icon.

The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas: left, center, and right. The left symbol display area displays a left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) 8L. The center symbol display area displays a center effect symbol (center decorative symbol) 8C. The right symbol display area displays a right effect symbol (right decorative symbol) 8R. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of multiple symbols representing the numbers "1" through "9," for example. The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first and second special symbols, described below. By combining the effect symbols displayed in the left, center, and right symbol display areas, the image display device 7 can clearly display to the player the results of the variable display of the first and second special symbols, displayed by the first special symbol display device 41a and second special symbol display device 41b, described below (the jackpot lottery results).

For example, if a jackpot is won, a static display of a repeating number such as "777" will be displayed. If a loss occurs, a static display of a random number such as "637" will be displayed. This makes it easier for players to understand the progress of the game. Players can understand the results of the jackpot lottery from the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, and the image display device 7. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. The variable display of the variable symbol may be a vertical scrolling display or another display. The combination of variable symbol symbols displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above and can be set arbitrarily. Hereinafter, the display of the variable symbol symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will be referred to as "variable symbol display," "variable decorative symbol display," or simply "variable display" or "variable display." Note that this decorative pattern variation effect counts the effect from when the special pattern starts to vary until it stops (also called the special pattern variation period) as one variation effect (one cycle of variation effect). Therefore, even if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the period from when the special pattern starts to vary until it stops, the effect of that temporary stop is included in the decorative pattern variation effect.

In addition to the effect symbol change effect, the image display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a jackpot effects that are performed in parallel with the jackpot game (an example of a special game), demo effects for waiting customers, and the like. In the effect symbol change effect, in addition to the effect symbol, effect images such as background images and character images may also be displayed. Furthermore, in addition to the effect symbol, the image display device 7 may display on the display screen 7a an identification display (fourth symbol, not shown) that can indicate that a special symbol is changing or the result of a special symbol lottery. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light-emitting device such as an LED provided in the play area 3.

The reserved image display area includes a first reserved display area that displays reserved image 9A according to the number of reserved first special symbols (described below), and a second reserved display area that displays reserved image 9B according to the number of reserved second special symbols (described below). By displaying reserved images 9A and 9B, the number of reserved first special symbols (displayed on the reserved first special symbol display 43a) and the number of reserved second special symbols (displayed on the reserved second special symbol display 43b) can be clearly displayed to the player. The reserved consumption image display area includes a reserved consumption display area that displays reserved consumption image 9C. Reserve consumption image 9C corresponds to the effect symbol (effect symbol 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on display screen 7a or display screen 7b, and by displaying reserved consumption image 9C, it can be clearly displayed to the player that the reserved first or reserved second special symbol is being consumed ("reserved special symbol consumption" described below).

On the right and left sides of the image display device 7, there are provided first movable board bodies 14 (also referred to as first movable gadgets 14), which are movable gimmicks. The first movable gadgets 14 are configured with two semi-ring-shaped members located on the left and right sides, which can move left and right. The first movable gadgets 14 are normally stationary in retracted positions (Figure 1) on the left and right sides of the image display device 7, and can move (advance) from the retracted positions toward the center of the display screen 7a so that they approach each other, and come to rest in an advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. When the left and right members of the first movable gadget 14 combine in the advanced position, a ring-shaped decorative part is formed, which covers part of the image display device 7.

A second movable board 15 (also called the second movable gadget 15), which is a movable gimmick, is provided above the image display device 7. The second movable gadget 15 is configured with a rectangular member (decorative part) marked "OARO" that can move up and down. The second movable gadget 15 is normally stationary in a retracted position above the image display device 7 (Figure 1), and can move (advance) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a and come to rest in an advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The second movable gadget 15 covers part of the image display device 7 when stopped in the advanced position.

On the right and left sides of the image display device 7, there are provided third movable boards 13 (also referred to as third movable gadgets 13), which are movable gimmicks. The third movable gadgets 13 are configured so that two members, located on each side, can move left and right. Each of the two members has a ring-shaped decorative portion, and a circular transparent portion is provided inside the ring shape. The third movable gadgets 13 normally remain stationary in retracted positions on the left and right sides of the image display device 7 (Figure 1). They can move (advance) from the retracted positions toward the center of the display screen 7a so that they approach each other, and then remain stationary in an advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. When the left and right members of the third movable gadget 13 are combined in the advanced position, the two ring-shaped decorative portions come close to each other, forming a pair of glasses that cover part of the image display device 7.

A stage section 11 is formed at the bottom of the center decorative body 10. The stage section 11 has a shape that allows it to guide game balls rolling on the top surface of the stage section 11 to the first starting hole 20, which will be described later. A warp section 12 is provided at the bottom left of the center decorative body 10. The warp section 12 has an entrance section through which game balls flow in and an exit section through which game balls flow out, and causes game balls that flow in from the entrance section to flow out from the exit section to the stage section 11.

The fixed winning device (navel) 19 is located below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and is equipped with a first starting hole (first starting winning hole, first ball hole, fixed starting hole) 20, which always has the same ease of entry for game balls. The entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 triggers a lottery for the first special symbol (jackpot lottery). In other words, the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 triggers the acquisition of a jackpot random number, etc., and the determination of a jackpot, etc.

The normal variable entry device (electric chute) 22 is located below the first start hole 20 in the game area 3 and includes a second start hole (second start entry hole, second ball entry hole, variable start hole) 21. Entry of a game ball into the second start hole 21 triggers a lottery for the second special symbol (a small win or big win lottery). The electric chute 22 includes a movable member 23 in front of the second start hole 21, which opens and closes the second start hole 21 by operating the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chute solenoid 24 (Figure 3). Game balls can enter the second start hole 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open position. It is sufficient for the electric chute 22 to make it easier for a ball to enter the second start hole 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open position than when it is in the closed position; it may also be possible for a ball to enter the second start hole 21 when the movable member 23 is in the closed position.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is located above the first big prize device (first attacker) 31 in the gaming area 3 and is configured to allow gaming balls to pass through. The passage of a gaming ball through the gate 28 triggers a normal symbol lottery that determines whether or not the electric chute 22 will open. In other words, the passage of a gaming ball through the gate 28 triggers the acquisition of a normal symbol random number (winning random number) and a win determination, etc.

Here, "special symbol jackpot lottery" refers to the process of obtaining a jackpot random number for determining a special symbol when a gaming ball enters the first starting slot 20 or the second starting slot 21, and comparing this obtained jackpot random number with a value corresponding to a predetermined "jackpot" to determine whether or not a jackpot has occurred. The result of this "jackpot" lottery is not immediately notified to the player; rather, the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b (described below) displays a variable special symbol, and after a predetermined period of time has passed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed as a static display (confirmed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. The image display device 7 plays a pattern matching game in which the display of effect symbols changes in synchronization with the display of the variable special symbols, and this pattern matching game more effectively notifies the player of the jackpot lottery result.

The "special symbol small prize lottery" refers to the process of obtaining a small prize random number for determining the special symbol when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 21, and comparing this obtained small prize random number with a value corresponding to a predetermined "small prize" to determine whether or not a small prize has been awarded. The result of this "small prize" lottery is not immediately notified to the player; rather, the second special symbol display 41b (described below) displays a variable special symbol, and after a predetermined period of time has passed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed as a static display (confirmed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. The image display device 7 plays a pattern matching game in which the display of performance symbols changes in synchronization with the display of the variable special symbols, and this pattern matching game more effectively notifies the player of the result of the small prize lottery.

Furthermore, "drawing a normal symbol" refers to the process of obtaining a random number for determining a normal symbol when a gaming ball passes through gate 28, and comparing this obtained random number with a predetermined value corresponding to a "win" to determine whether or not a win has occurred. The result of this normal symbol drawing is not immediately announced when the gaming ball passes through gate 28; rather, a fluctuating display of the normal symbol is performed on normal symbol display 42 (described below), and after a predetermined fluctuating time has passed, the normal symbol corresponding to the drawing result is displayed as a confirmed result (lit or extinguished), and the player is notified of the drawing result.

The first large prize device (first attacker, first special variable prize device) 31 is located above and to the right of the first starting hole 20 in the game area 3, and includes a first large prize hole (first special prize hole) 30, a V area 39, a non-V area 70, and a V-shaped opening/closing member 71. The first large prize hole 30 includes an opening/closing member (first special prize hole opening/closing member) 32 that swings open and close to allow or block the reception of game balls. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by a first large prize hole solenoid 33 (Figure 3). Game balls can enter the first large prize hole 30 when the opening/closing member 32 is in the open position.

The first large prize winning device 31 is equipped internally with a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (Figure 3), a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, a non-V area sensor 70a (Figure 3), a first large prize winning opening sensor 30a (Figure 3), a V-opening/closing member 71, and a V-opening/closing member solenoid 73 (Figure 3). The V area (specific area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specific area) 70 are configured as areas within the first large prize winning device 31 through which a gaming ball that has passed through the first large prize winning opening 30 can pass. The first large prize winning opening sensor 30a is positioned upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70, and detects the entry of a gaming ball into the first large prize winning opening 30. The V area sensor 39a is positioned in the V area 39, and detects the passage of a gaming ball into the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is disposed in the non-V area 70 and detects the passage of a gaming ball into the non-V area 70. The V-opening/closing member 71 distributes gaming balls that have passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. The V-opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V-opening/closing member 71. The V-opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise relative to the gaming board 2), and when the V-opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to enter a first state (rotating state) in which it distributes gaming balls to the V area 39. When the V-opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it enters a second state (stopped state) in which it is located at the origin and distributes gaming balls to the non-V area 70. The V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, and may have any function other than distributing game balls passing through the first large prize opening 30 to either the V-zone 39 or the non-V-zone 70. For example, it may be configured to move left and right relative to the game board 2. That is, when the V-shaped opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it enters a retreat state (first state) in which game balls are distributed to the V-zone 39. When the V-shaped opening/closing member solenoid 73 is deenergized, it enters an advance state (second state) in which game balls are distributed to the non-V-zone 70. In the gaming machine 1, the passage of a game ball into the V-zone 39 triggers a transition to the high-probability state described below. In other words, the V-zone 39 is a probability variable activation port. On the other hand, the non-V-zone 70 is not a probability variable activation port. The first large prize opening 31 of this embodiment further includes a first large prize opening discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first large prize opening 31. The first big prize device discharge sensor is located at the point where the V area 39 and non-V area 70 join downstream, and counts the number of game balls that pass through the V area sensor 39a or non-V area sensor 70a.

The second large prize device (second attacker, small prize attacker, second special variable prize device) 36 is located above and to the right of the first large prize opening 30 in the game area 3, and includes a second large prize opening (second special prize opening) 35. The second large prize opening 35 includes an opening/closing member (second special prize opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that blocks or allows the reception of game balls with a swing-type opening/closing action. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second large prize opening solenoid 38 (Figure 3). Game balls can enter the second large prize opening 35 when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open position. This second large prize device is a small prize attacker that is activated when a game ball enters the second starting opening 21 and wins the small prize lottery.

The large prize opening start opening 17 is located above the first large prize opening 30 in the game area 3, and the first large prize opening 30 opens when a game ball passes through.

The general winning opening 27 is located at the bottom of the play area 3. The outlet 16 is located at the bottom of the play area 3 and ejects game balls that do not enter any of the winning openings out of the play area 3. The indicators 40 are located near the center of the right side of the play board 2. Details of the indicators 40 will be described later. The general winning opening 29 is located at the bottom right of the play area 3, adjacent to the right side of the first large winning opening 30.

The gaming area 3 has a left gaming area 3A to the left of the center in the horizontal direction, and a right gaming area 3B to the right. Shooting a gaming ball so that it flows down through the left gaming area 3A is called a "left hit." On the other hand, shooting a gaming ball so that it flows down through the right gaming area 3B is called a "right hit." The gaming machine 1 is configured so that a left hit allows a player to aim for a win at the first starting gate 20. On the other hand, a right hit allows a player to aim for passing through the gate 28 and winning at the second starting gate 21, the first large winning gate 30, and the second large winning gate 35.

Figure 2 is an enlarged view of the displays 40. The displays 40 include a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol reserve display 43a, a second special symbol reserve display 43b, and a normal symbol reserve display 44. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays the normal symbol. The first special symbol reserve display 43a displays the number of reserved activations (first special symbol reserves) stored in the first special symbol display 41a. The second special symbol reserve display 43b displays the number of reserved activations (second special symbol reserves) stored in the second special symbol display 41b. The normal symbol reserve indicator 44 displays the number of reserved activations (normal symbol reserves) stored in the normal symbol indicator 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 21. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as "special symbols." Furthermore, the first special symbol indicator 41a and the second special symbol indicator 41b are collectively referred to as "special symbol indicator 41." Furthermore, the first special symbol reserve indicator 43a and the second special symbol reserve indicator 43b are collectively referred to as "special symbol reserve indicator 43."

The special symbol display 41 variably displays (changes in display) a special symbol (identification information), and then displays it in a stopped state to notify the result of the lottery (jackpot lottery) based on a win at the first start slot 20 or the second start slot 21. The stopped special symbol (stopped symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one special symbol selected from multiple types of special symbols by special symbol lottery. If the stopped symbol is a special symbol (jackpot symbol) with a predetermined jackpot stop pattern, a special game (jackpot game) is played in which the first large prize slot 30 or the second large prize slot 35 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of stopped jackpot symbol (type of jackpot won). The opening patterns of the large prize slots (first large prize slot 30 and second large prize slot 35) in the jackpot game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 variably displays (changes in display) a special symbol (identification information), and then displays it in a stopped state to announce the result of the lottery (small prize lottery) based on a win in the second starting slot 21. The special symbol (stopped symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) that is stopped is one special symbol selected from multiple types of special symbols by the special symbol lottery. If the stopped symbol is a special symbol (small prize symbol) with a predetermined small prize stopping pattern, a special game (small prize game) is played in which the second large prize slot 35 is opened in a predetermined opening pattern. The opening pattern of the second large prize slot 35 in the small prize game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged horizontally, and displays a special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol lottery according to the lighting pattern of the LEDs. For example, in the event of a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), a jackpot symbol is displayed with the first, second, fifth, and sixth LEDs from the left lit, such as "○○●●○○●●" (○: lit, ●: off). In the event of a minor jackpot, a minor jackpot symbol is displayed with the first and second LEDs from the left lit, such as "○○●●●●●●" (○: lit, ●: off). In the event of a loss, a losing symbol is displayed with only the rightmost LED lit, such as "●●●●●●●○." A losing symbol may also be displayed in which all LEDs are off. Before the special symbol is statically displayed, a variable display (variable display) of the special symbol is displayed for a predetermined period of time. The variable display may be, for example, such that each LED lights up to create a repeated flow of light from left to right. The variable display mode is not limited to the above modes and can be any lighting mode as long as the LEDs are not displayed as stopped (illuminated in a specific mode). For example, the variable display mode may be such that all LEDs flash simultaneously.

In the gaming machine 1, when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21, the values (numerical information) of various random numbers, such as the jackpot random number, obtained for that entry are temporarily stored in the special symbol reserve memory area 85 (Figure 5). Specifically, if the game ball enters the first start hole 20, it is stored as a first special symbol reserve in the first special symbol reserve memory area 85a (Figure 5), and if the game ball enters the second start hole 21, it is stored as a second special symbol reserve in the second special symbol reserve memory area 85b (Figure 5). There is a limit to the number of special symbol reserves that can be stored in each special symbol reserve memory area 85, and in this embodiment, the limit is four for both the first special symbol reserve memory area 85a and the second special symbol reserve memory area 85b. The special symbol reserves stored in the special symbol reserve memory area 85 are consumed when variable display of the special symbol based on that special symbol reserve becomes possible. "Consuming a reserved special symbol" refers to determining the jackpot random number or the like corresponding to that reserved special symbol and executing a variable display of a special symbol to indicate the result of the determination. Therefore, in gaming machine 1, even if the variable display of a special symbol based on a winning game ball entering first start slot 20 or second start slot 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning ball enters the game, i.e., even if a winning ball is entered while the variable display of special symbols is being executed or a special game is being executed, the right to enter a jackpot lottery for that winning ball can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of reserved special symbols is displayed on special symbol reserve indicator 43. First special symbol reserve indicator 43a and second special symbol reserve indicator 43b each consist of, for example, four LEDs. Each special symbol reserve indicator 43 displays the number of reserved special symbols by lighting up the LEDs equal to the number of reserved special symbols.

The variable display of the normal symbol is triggered by the passage of a gaming ball through gate 28. After variably displaying (variably displaying) the normal symbol, normal symbol display device 42 displays it in a static state, thereby announcing the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the gaming ball through gate 28. The statically displayed normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol, normal symbol derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one normal symbol selected from multiple types of normal symbols by the normal symbol lottery. If the normal symbol stop symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (a normal symbol with a predetermined stop pattern, i.e., a normal winning symbol), an auxiliary game is played in which second start hole 21 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the current game state. The opening pattern of second start hole 21 will be described later.

The normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery by changing the lighting pattern of the LEDs. For example, if the lottery result is a win, a normal winning symbol with both LEDs lit is displayed, as in "○○" (○: lit, ●: off). If the lottery result is a loss, a normal losing symbol with only the right LED lit is displayed, as in "●○". A mode in which all LEDs are turned off may also be used to indicate a normal losing symbol. Before the normal symbol is displayed as a static symbol, a variable display of the normal symbol is displayed for a predetermined variable time. The variable display pattern may, for example, be such that both LEDs are lit alternately. The variable display pattern is not limited to the above patterns and can be any lighting pattern as long as each LED is not displayed as a static symbol (a lit display in a specific pattern). For example, the variable display pattern may be such that all LEDs flash simultaneously.

In gaming machine 1, when a gaming ball passes through gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (winning random number) obtained for that passage is temporarily stored as a normal symbol reserve in normal symbol reserve memory area 86 (Figure 5). There is an upper limit to the number of normal symbol reserves that can be stored in normal symbol reserve memory area 86, and in this embodiment, the upper limit is four. The normal symbol reserves stored in normal symbol reserve memory area 86 are consumed when it becomes possible to variable display the normal symbol based on that normal symbol reserve. Consumption of a normal symbol reserve refers to determining the normal symbol random number (winning random number) corresponding to that normal symbol reserve and executing variable display of the normal symbol to indicate the result of that determination. Therefore, in gaming machine 1, even if variable display of the normal symbol based on the gaming ball's passage through gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, i.e., even if a prize is won while variable display of the normal symbol is being executed or while an auxiliary game is being executed, the right to draw a normal symbol for that passage can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of reserved general maps is displayed on the reserved general map display 44. The reserved general map display 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of reserved general maps by lighting up the LEDs equal to the number of reserved general maps.

2. Electrical Configuration of the Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 3 and 4. Figure 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board of the gaming machine 1. Figure 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (Figure 3), a sub-control board 90 (Figure 4), an image control board 100 (Figure 4), a lamp control board 107 (Figure 4), a sound control board 106 (Figure 4), and a payout control board 110 (Figure 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as jackpot lottery draws and game state transitions, and constitutes the main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is a presentation control board that controls presentations executed as the game progresses, and constitutes the sub-control unit together with the image control board 100, lamp control board 107, and sound control board 106. The sub-control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90.

The main control board 80 is equipped with a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80 and controls the progress of play on the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of play, a main RAM 84 used as work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and the storage areas provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 sends and receives data to and from other boards, etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port unit) 87. The input/output circuit 87 may be built into the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives signals from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. Examples of sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the large prize opening start gate sensor 17a, the first start gate sensor 20a, the second start gate sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first large prize gate sensor 30a, the second large prize gate sensor 35a, the V-area sensor 39a, the non-V-area sensor 70a, and the regular prize gate sensors 27a and 29a. Examples of solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric chute solenoid 24, the first large prize gate solenoid 33, the second large prize gate solenoid 38, and the V-opening/closing member solenoid 73. The large prize opening start opening sensor 17a is provided inside the large prize opening start opening 17 and detects game balls that have entered the large prize opening start opening 17. The first start opening sensor 20a is provided inside the first start opening 20 and detects game balls that have entered the first start opening 20. The second start opening sensor 21a is provided inside the second start opening 21 and detects game balls that have entered the second start opening 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects game balls that have passed through the gate 28. The first large prize opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first large prize opening 30 and detects game balls that have entered the first large prize opening 30. The second large prize opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second large prize opening 35 and detects game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 35. The V-area sensor 39a is provided in the V-area 39 inside the first large prize opening 30 and detects game balls that have passed through the V-area 39. The non-V-area sensor 70a is provided in the non-V-area 70 inside the first large prize opening 30 and detects game balls that have passed through the non-V-area 70. The regular prize opening sensor 27a is provided inside the regular prize opening 27 and detects game balls that have entered the regular prize opening 27. The regular prize opening sensor 29a detects game balls that have passed through the regular prize opening 29. The electric chute solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chute 22. The first large prize opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first large prize device 31. The second large prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second large prize device 36. The V-shaped opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 of the first big prize device 31.

Displays 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 controls the display of the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, the normal symbol display 42, the first special symbol reserve display 43a, the second special symbol reserve display 43b, and the normal symbol reserve display 44.

The payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via the input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 sends various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 to monitor payouts. The payout control board 110 is connected to the prize ball payout device 120, the loan ball payout device 130, and the card unit 135, and is also connected to the launching device 112 via a launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out prize balls. The paid-out prize balls are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The loan ball payout device 130 pays out loan balls. The payout control board 110 drives the ball dispensing motor 131 of the ball dispensing device 130 to dispense balls based on a signal from a card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1. Dispensed balls are detected by a ball dispensing sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is located adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information about ball dispensing based on information from an inserted prepaid card, etc. The launching device 112 includes a handle 60 (Figure 1), a launching motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a launching volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the launching device 112 detects contact with the handle 60 using the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 using the launching volume 115. The launching motor 113 is then driven to launch game balls with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal from the launching volume 115.

The sub-control board 90 (Figure 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub-control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that only allows signals to be transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. In other words, a unidirectional circuit (e.g., a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 as a means for restricting communication direction.

The sub-control board 90 includes a presentation control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95. The presentation control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer implemented on the sub-control board 90, and controls the presentation of games on the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The presentation control microcomputer 91 includes a sub-ROM 93 that stores programs for controlling presentations as games progress, a sub-RAM 94 used as work memory, and a sub-CPU 92 that executes the programs stored in the sub-ROM 93. Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and the storage area provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub-ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The presentation control microcomputer 91 sends and receives data to and from other boards, etc., via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built into the presentation control microcomputer 91. The sub-control board 90 is connected to the image control board 100, audio control board 106, lamp control board 107, and relay board 108 via an input/output circuit 95.

Image control board 100 includes image control microcomputer 101, input circuit 105a, and output circuit 105b. Image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer implemented on image control board 100, and controls the display of image display device 7 and sub-display screen 64 according to a program. Image control microcomputer 101 includes CPU 102, ROM 103, and RAM 104. ROM 103 stores programs for display control as well as still image data and video data to be displayed on image display device 7 and sub-display screen 64, specifically image data such as characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including effect designs) and background images. RAM 104 is used as memory for expanding image data. CPU 102 executes the programs stored in ROM 103. Based on commands received from the main control board 80, the performance control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64. Based on commands from the performance control microcomputer 91, the image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from ROM 103 and controls the display based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106, and the performance control microcomputer 91 outputs audio, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80. Audio data such as audio output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90. The audio control board 106 may also have a CPU implemented, and the CPU may be caused to execute audio control based on commands. The audio control board 106 may also have a ROM implemented, and audio data may be stored in the ROM. The speaker 67 may also be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may be caused to execute audio control. The audio data may also be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

The lamp control board 107 is connected to and controls the frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the first movable role element 14, the second movable role element 15, and the third movable role element 13. The performance control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on commands received from the main control board 80. In other words, the performance control microcomputer 91 creates lighting pattern data (data determining the on/off status, light color, etc., also known as lamp data) that determines the lighting mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5, and controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 according to the lighting pattern data. The lighting pattern data is created using data stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90. The performance control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable role element 14, the second movable role element 15, and the third movable role element 13 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The performance control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation modes of the first movable role element 14, the second movable role element 15, and the third movable role element 13, and controls the operation of the first movable role element 14, the second movable role element 15, and the third movable role element 13 according to the operation pattern data. Data stored in the sub-ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be configured to control the lighting of the lamps and the operation of the movable role elements 14 and 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a ROM, and data related to the light emission patterns and operation patterns may be stored in the ROM.

Connected to the relay board 108 are a performance button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a. The performance button detection switch 63a detects that the performance button 63 (Figure 1) has been pressed. When the performance button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the performance button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. Additionally, a sword component detection switch that detects when the sword component 65 has been pulled is also connected to the relay board 108.

3. Data Structure of the Gaming Machine The data structure of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 5 and 6. Figure 5(A) is a diagram illustrating tables stored in the main ROM 83. Figure 5(B) is a diagram illustrating storage areas provided in the main RAM 84. Figure 6(A) is a diagram illustrating tables stored in the sub ROM 93. Figure 6(B) is a diagram illustrating storage areas provided in the sub RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (Figure 5(A)) stores a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol win determination table T3, a normal symbol change pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, a change pattern determination table T6, an electric chute opening pattern determination table T7, a large prize opening pattern determination table T8, a V-shaped opening member opening pattern determination table T9, and a small win determination table T10. These determination tables are referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described below) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (Figure 5(B)) is provided with a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special action status set area 84d, a special symbol reserve memory area 85, and a normal symbol reserve memory area 86. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) where commands output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit are set during the main control main processing (described below), and is set with commands such as a pre-determination command, reserved ball count command, variable start command, variable stop command, opening command, round designation command, ending command, game state designation command, V pass command, and customer waiting standby command. The flag set area 84b is an area where flags indicating the state of the gaming machine and game state are set during the main control main processing (described below), and is set with flags such as a jackpot flag, jackpot end flag, first prize flag, second prize flag, small prize flag, V flag, probability change flag, and time-saving flag. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in the main control processing (described later) are set, such as a random number counter, round counter, probability variation counter, and time-saving counter. The special action status set area 84d is an area where statuses in the special action processing (described later) are set. The special symbol reserved memory area 85 includes a first special symbol reserved memory area 85a in which the first special symbol reserved is stored, and a second special symbol reserved memory area 85b in which the second special symbol reserved is stored. The first special symbol reserved memory area 85a is provided with a first memory area, a second memory area, a third memory area, and a fourth memory area for storing random number groups (reserved information) such as special symbol winning random numbers corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth first special symbol reserved symbols, respectively. The second special symbol reserved memory area 85b has a first memory area, a second memory area, a third memory area, and a fourth memory area for storing random number groups (reserved information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth reserved second special symbols, respectively. The normal symbol reserved memory area 86 has a first memory area, a second memory area, a third memory area, and a fourth memory area for storing random number groups (reserved information) such as normal symbol random numbers (winning random numbers) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth reserved normal symbols, respectively. In addition to the above areas, the main RAM 84 also has a winning type set buffer in which special symbol stop symbol data is set, and a drive data buffer in which drive data for driving the movable gimmicks 14, 15 and the frame movable body 600 is set.

The sub-ROM 93 (Figure 6(A)) stores a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51, a core effect pattern determination table T52, a chance-up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. These determination tables are referenced by the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control main processing (described below) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (Figure 6(B)) is provided with a command memory area 94a, a display command set area 94b, a pre-determination information memory area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command memory area 94a is an area (input buffer) where commands input from the main control unit during the sub-control main processing (described below) are stored, and includes pre-determination commands, reserved ball count commands, fluctuation start commands, fluctuation stop commands, opening commands, round designation commands, ending commands, game state designation commands, V-pass commands, and customer waiting commands. The display command set area 94b is an area (output buffer) where commands output from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, audio control board 106, lamp control board 107, and relay board 108 during the sub-control main processing (described below) are set, and includes a fluctuation display start command, a pre-fluctuation end command, a fluctuation display end command, an opening display start command, a round display start command, and an ending display start command. The pre-determination information storage area 94c stores pre-determination information during the sub-control main processing (described below). The counter set area 94d is an area where counters used during the sub-control main processing (described below) are set, including a random number counter, a first special symbol hold effect counter, a second special symbol hold effect counter, a normal symbol hold effect counter, a probability change effect counter, and a time-saving effect counter.

Figure 7 is a diagram explaining the various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. Figure 7 (A) shows the random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and Figure 7 (B) shows the random numbers acquired by the presentation control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control unit side. The game control microcomputer 81 is configured to acquire a "jackpot random number," a "jackpot type random number," a "reach random number," a "variable pattern random number," a "normal pattern random number (win random number)," and a "small win random number" at the timings described below. The "jackpot random number" is a random number used in the lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot has occurred (jackpot determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65,535. The "jackpot type random number" is a random number used in the lottery to determine the type of jackpot that has been won (jackpot type determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not a reach occurs in the symbol variation effect that indicates a jackpot result when the jackpot determination is a miss. It ranges from 0 to 127. A reach refers to a state in which only one of the multiple display symbols (decorative symbols) remains, and depending on which of the display symbols freezes, a combination of symbols indicating a jackpot win (e.g., a "7↓7" state) may result. Note that the display symbol frozen in the reach state may appear to fluctuate within the display screen 7a. The "variation pattern random number" is a random number used to determine the variation pattern, including the variation time. It ranges from 0 to 127. The "normal symbol random number (win random number)" is used in the lottery (normal symbol lottery) to determine whether or not to play the auxiliary game that opens the electric chute 22. The normal symbol random number ranges from 0 to 255. The "small win random number" is a random number used in the lottery to determine whether or not a small win has occurred (small win determination), and takes on a value ranging from 0 to 127. The "jackpot random number," "jackpot type random number," "reach random number," and "variation pattern random number" are obtained based on the ball entering the first starting gate 20 or the second starting gate 21. The "small win random number" is obtained based on the ball entering the second starting gate 21. The random number group obtained based on the ball entering the first starting gate 20 is stored in the first special symbol reserve memory area 85a, and the random number group obtained based on the ball entering the second starting gate 21 is stored in the second special symbol reserve memory area 85b. The "normal symbol random number (winning random number)" is obtained based on passage through gate 28. The obtained normal symbol random number value is stored in the normal symbol reserve memory area 86.

The performance control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "pre-reading performance random number" and a "chance up random number" at the timing described below. The "pre-reading performance random number" is a random number used to determine the pre-reading performance during a variable performance, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "chance up random number" is a random number used to determine the chance up performance during a variable performance, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "pre-reading performance random number" is acquired based on a pre-determination command being output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit. The acquired random number group is stored in sub-RAM 94. The "chance up random number" is acquired based on a variation start command being output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit. The acquired random number value is stored in sub-RAM 94.

Figure 8 is a diagram explaining the determination tables T1 to T4 and T10. Figure 8(A) shows a diagram explaining the big win determination table T1, Figure 8(B) shows a diagram explaining the reach determination table T2, Figure 8(C) shows a diagram explaining the normal pattern win determination table T3, Figure 8(D) shows a diagram explaining the normal pattern change pattern determination table T4, and Figure 8(E) shows a diagram explaining the small win determination table T10.

The jackpot determination table T1 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 during the main control main processing (described below) to determine whether the acquired jackpot random number value (any value between 0 and 65535) corresponds to a "jackpot" or a "miss." Figure 8 (A) shows that in the "normal probability state," if the jackpot random number value is between 0 and 164, it is determined to be a "jackpot" (approximately 1/397 probability), and if the jackpot random number value is a number other than 0 to 164 (165 to 65535) it is determined to be a "miss." Also, in the "high probability state," if the jackpot random number value is between 0 and 649, it is determined to be a "jackpot" (approximately 1/101 probability), and if the jackpot random number value is a number other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535) it is determined to be a "miss." The details of the "normal probability state" and "high probability state" will be described later.

The reach determination table T2 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 during the main control main processing (described below) to determine whether the acquired reach random number value (any value between 0 and 127) indicates "reach" or "no reach." Note that this reach determination table T2 is not referenced if the acquired jackpot random number value indicates "jackpot." Figure 8 (B) shows that in the "non-time-saving state," if the reach random number value is between 0 and 13, it is determined to be "reach," and if the reach random number value is a number other than 0 to 13 (14 to 127), it is determined to be "no reach." Also, in the "time-saving state," if the reach random number value is between 0 and 5, it is determined to be "reach," and if the reach random number value is a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127), it is determined to be "no reach." The details of the "time-saving state" and "non-time-saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, a reach is less likely to occur when a miss occurs in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. This is because in the time-saving state, a miss without a reach and a short variable time is more likely to be selected, which speeds up the consumption of reserved special symbols.

The normal symbol win determination table T3 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 during the main control main processing (described below) to determine whether the acquired normal symbol random number value (any value between 0 and 255) corresponds to a "win" or a "lose." Figure 8 (C) shows that in the "non-time-saving state," if the normal symbol random number value is between 0 and 2, it is determined to be a "win," and if the normal symbol random number value is a "number other than 0 and 2 (3 to 255)," it is determined to be a "lose." It also shows that in the "time-saving state," if the normal symbol random number value is between 0 and 254, it is determined to be a "win," and if the normal symbol random number value is a "number other than 0 and 254 (255)," it is determined to be a "lose."

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 references during the main control main processing (described below) to determine how many seconds the normal symbol fluctuation time is depending on the game state (non-time-saving state or time-saving state). Figure 8 (D) shows that in the "non-time-saving state," the normal symbol fluctuation time is determined to be "30 seconds," and in the "time-saving state," the normal symbol fluctuation time is determined to be "1 second."

The small win determination table T10 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 during the main control main processing (described below) to determine whether the acquired small win random number value (any value between 0 and 127) corresponds to a "small win" or a "miss." Note that this small win determination table T10 is not referenced if the acquired big win random number value corresponds to a "big win." Figure 8 (E) shows that in all states (regardless of game state), if the small win random number value is between 0 and 63, it is determined to be a "small win" (probability 1/2), and if the small win random number value is a number other than 0 to 63 (64 to 127), it is determined to be a "miss." Note that the small win determination table T10 is referenced when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 21 (it is not referenced when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 20). Note that the small win determination table T10 is not referenced when a "big win" is determined.

Figure 9 is a diagram illustrating the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 during the main control main process (described below) to determine the "jackpot type" and "special symbol type" according to the acquired jackpot type random number value (any value between 0 and 127). In Figure 9, when a first special symbol (special symbol 1) is selected in the lottery, if the jackpot type random number value is between 0 and 24, the jackpot type is determined to be a "16RV passing jackpot," and the special symbol 1 stopping symbol (special symbol stopping symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 1." If the jackpot type random number value is between 25 and 49, the jackpot type is determined to be a "16RV passing jackpot," and the special symbol stopping symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 2." When the jackpot type random number value is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined to be a "16R (effectively 15R) V-scheduled passing jackpot", and the special symbol stopping pattern is determined to be "jackpot pattern 3". When the jackpot type random number value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined to be a "16R (effectively 13R) V-scheduled passing jackpot", and the special symbol stopping pattern is determined to be "jackpot pattern 4". When the jackpot type random number value is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be a "16R (effectively 13R) V-scheduled non-passing jackpot", and the special symbol stopping pattern is determined to be "jackpot pattern 5". On the other hand, when the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is selected, if the jackpot type random number value is "0 to 40," the jackpot type is determined to be a "16RV passing jackpot," and the special symbol 2 stopping symbol (special symbol stopping symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 1." If the jackpot type random number value is "41 to 82," the jackpot type is determined to be a "16RV passing jackpot," and the special symbol 2 stopping symbol (special symbol stopping symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 2." If the jackpot type random number value is "83 to 127," the jackpot type is determined to be a "16R (effectively 13R) V non-passing jackpot," and the special symbol stopping symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 5." Furthermore, by referencing the jackpot type determination table T5, it is possible to identify the "special symbol stop symbol data" corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol, as well as the "opening (OP) command," "round designation command," and "ending (ED) command" for the special game. The specific details of the "16RV scheduled passing jackpot," "16R (effectively 15R) V scheduled passing jackpot," "16R (effectively 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot," and "16R (effectively 13R) V non-scheduled passing jackpot" will be described later.

Fig. 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time-shortening state. Fig. 11 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the time-shortening state. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 is a table that is referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) to determine a fluctuation pattern according to the acquired fluctuation pattern random number value (0 to 127).
In Figure 10, for example, when a ball enters the first starting hole 20 in a non-time-saving state, the ball is judged as a "miss" in the jackpot judgment table T1, is judged as a "reach" in the reach judgment table T2, the number of reserved balls is "1 to 2", and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 60", the fluctuation pattern is judged as "P7". In addition, when the reserved ball in the second starting port 21 is consumed in the non-time-saving state (because it is difficult to win in the second starting port 21 in the non-time-saving state, the reserved ball in the second starting port 21 is consumed when the time-saving state (high probability, high base state) ends and the normal state (non-time-saving state, low probability, low base state) is entered), it is determined as a "jackpot" in the jackpot determination table T1, and is determined as a "jackpot scheduled to pass 16RV" and "jackpot pattern 2 (21H)" in the jackpot type determination table T5, and when the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 127", the fluctuation pattern is determined as "P22". In addition, when the reserved ball in the second starting port 21 is consumed in the non-time-saving state, it is determined as a "small hit" in the small hit determination table T10, and when the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 127", the fluctuation pattern is determined as "P34".

In Figure 11, for example, if a ball enters the first starting slot 20 in the time-saving mode, the jackpot determination table T1 determines it as a "miss," the reach determination table T2 determines it as a "no reach," the number of reserved balls is "3 to 4," and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 127," the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P56." Also, if a ball enters the second starting slot 21 in the time-saving mode, the jackpot determination table T1 determines it as a "jackpot," the jackpot type determination table T5 determines it as a "16RV passing jackpot" and "jackpot symbol 2 (21H)," and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 127," the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P62." It also shows that if a prize is won at the second starting hole 21 during time-saving mode, a "small win" is determined in the small win determination table T10, and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 127," the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P74."

As shown in Figures 10 and 11, once the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. For example, if the reserved ball in the second starting slot 21 is consumed in the non-time-saving mode and a small win is determined, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P34" and the fluctuation time is determined to be 15,000 msec. Furthermore, if a ball enters the second starting slot 21 in the time-saving mode and a small win is determined, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P74" and the fluctuation time is determined to be 3,000 msec. Note that during the time-saving mode (high probability, high base mode), the small win rush period (described below) also occurs until the next big win occurs. In other words, during the small win rush period, when a ball enters the second starting slot 21, the fluctuation time is 3,000 msec and the probability of a small win is 1/2, so small wins occur frequently in a short period of time. Furthermore, during the small win rush period, players can aim for a big win while increasing the number of game balls they have in hand. In addition, when a reach occurs, it is also determined whether the reach will be a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). A super reach is a reach effect with a longer fluctuation time after the reach than a normal reach. Here, five types of super reaches (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) with different fluctuation times are set. SP1 to SP3 are executed in a progressive manner after a normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of a pseudo-consecutive win. In particular, SP5 is a special reach fluctuation pattern ("P62") in which a prize is awarded to the second starting hole 21 during the small win rush (RUSH) period that occurs in the time-saving state (high probability, high base state) described below, and a pseudo-jackpot suggestion effect is performed. SP5 may also occur during the consumption of reserved balls in the second starting slot 21 when the time-saving mode (high probability, high base mode) ends and the normal mode (non-time-saving mode, low probability, low base mode) is restored, and in this case, a pseudo-jackpot suggestion effect may also be displayed (variation pattern "P22").

Figure 12 is a diagram illustrating the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chute opening pattern determination table T7 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 during the main control main processing (described below) to determine the opening pattern of the electric chute 22 depending on the game state (non-time-saving state or time-saving state). Figure 12 (A) shows that in the "non-time-saving state," the opening pattern of the electric chute 22 is determined to be "opening pattern 11," and in the "time-saving state," the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 12." Figure 12 (B) shows the contents of opening pattern 11 and opening pattern 12. In opening pattern 11, the electric chute 22 is opened once, with an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In opening pattern 12, the electric chute 22 is opened three times, with an opening time of 2.0 seconds per opening, and an interval (opening interval) of 1.0 seconds. However, if a predetermined number of game balls have won (maximum of 10), the electric chute 22 will close even if there is still time left to open it.

13 is a diagram illustrating the large prize opening pattern determination table T8. The large prize opening pattern determination table T8 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control process (described later) to determine the opening patterns of the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 according to the special symbol stop symbol data (FIG. 9). In Figure 13 (A), when the special symbol stopping pattern data is "11H", "12H", "20H" or "21H", the opening pattern of the first large prize hole 30 and the second large prize hole 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 21", when the special symbol stopping pattern data is "14H", "15H" or "22H", the opening pattern of the first large prize hole 30 and the second large prize hole 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 22", and when the special symbol stopping pattern data is "13H", the opening pattern of the first large prize hole 30 and the second large prize hole 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 23". Also, Figure 13 (A) shows that, as for the large prize opening pattern in small prize games, when the special chart stopping pattern data is "20H", the opening pattern of the second large prize opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 25", and when the special chart stopping pattern data is "21H", the opening pattern of the second large prize opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 26".
13(B) shows the details of opening patterns 21, 22, and 23 as the large prize opening opening patterns in a large prize game. In opening pattern 21, the first large prize opening 30 is opened once and for a 29.5-second opening time (long opening) in rounds 1 to 13 and 15, and the second large prize opening 35 is opened once and for a 29.5-second opening time (long opening) in rounds 14 and 16. In opening pattern 22, the first large prize opening 30 is opened once and for a 29.5-second opening time (long opening) in rounds 1 to 13, the second large prize opening 35 is opened once and for a 0.1-second opening time (short opening) in rounds 14 and 16, and the first large prize opening 30 is opened once and for a 0.1-second opening time (short opening) in round 15. In opening pattern 23, in rounds 1 to 13 and 15, the first large prize opening 30 is opened once and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening), in round 14, the second large prize opening 35 is opened once and for an opening time of 0.1 seconds (short opening), and in round 16, the second large prize opening 35 is opened once and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening). However, if a predetermined number of game balls have won (a prescribed number of winnings, up to 9 balls), the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 will be closed even if there is remaining opening time.
FIG. 13(C) shows the details of opening pattern 25 and opening pattern 26 as the large prize opening patterns for small prize games. In opening pattern 25, the second large prize opening 35 is opened once for a 1.0-second opening time. In opening pattern 26, the second large prize opening 35 is opened five times for a 0.3-second opening time. In other words, in small prize games, the first large prize opening 30 is not opened, and only the second large prize opening 35 is opened. Opening pattern 25 is performed when a "16RV passing planned jackpot" occurs due to jackpot pattern 1 (20H) on special chart 2, during the small prize rush period after the jackpot game ends, and while the reserved second starting opening 21 is consumed after the small prize rush period ends. The opening pattern 26 is performed when a "16RV passing jackpot" is achieved by the jackpot pattern 2 (21H) on the special chart 2, during the small jackpot rush period after the jackpot game ends, and while the reserve in the second starting slot 21 is consumed after the small jackpot rush ends. In other words, the opening pattern 26 is the opening pattern for the small jackpot game that is performed after the jackpot game when a jackpot is achieved via the variable pattern ("P62") of the dedicated reach (SP5) in which the pseudo-jackpot suggestion effect described below is performed. In other words, the opening pattern for the large prize slot in the small jackpot game is different when a jackpot is achieved via the pseudo-jackpot suggestion effect and when a jackpot is achieved without the pseudo-jackpot suggestion effect.

Figure 14 is a diagram illustrating the V-opening/closing member release pattern determination table T9. The V-opening/closing member release pattern determination table T9 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 during the main control main processing (described below) to determine the release pattern of the V-opening/closing member 71 in accordance with the special symbol stop pattern data (Figure 9). Figure 14 (A) shows that when the special symbol stop pattern data is "11H," "12H," "20H," or "21H," the release pattern of the V-opening/closing member 71 is determined to be "release pattern 31." When the special symbol stop pattern data is "13H," the release pattern is determined to be "release pattern 32." When the special symbol stop pattern data is "14H," the release pattern is determined to be "release pattern 33." When the special symbol stop pattern data is "15H" or "22H," the release pattern is determined to be "release pattern 34." 14(B) shows the details of opening pattern 31, opening pattern 32, opening pattern 33, and opening pattern 34. In opening pattern 31, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30 in the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth rounds, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds. In the tenth and twelfth rounds, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a long time of up to 31.5 seconds. In opening pattern 32, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30 in the second, fourth, sixth, and twelfth rounds, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds. In the 8th and 10th races, when the first prize is won in the first major prize opening 30, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short mode with an opening time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a long mode with an opening time of up to 31.5 seconds. In opening pattern 33, in the 2nd and 6th races, when the first prize is won in the first major prize opening 30, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short mode with an opening time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a long mode with an opening time of up to 31.5 seconds. In the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th races, when the first prize is won in the first major prize opening 30, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short mode with an opening time of 0.1 seconds. In opening pattern 34, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30 on rounds 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, and 12, the V-shaped opening member 71 is short-circuited for an opening time of 0.1 seconds.

4. Explanation of Jackpots, etc. In the gaming machine 1, the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery) results in a "jackpot," a "small jackpot," and a "loss." In the event of a "jackpot," a "jackpot symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the event of a "small jackpot," a "small jackpot symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the event of a "loss," a "loss symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display 41. When a jackpot is won, a "jackpot game" is executed in which the large prize slots (first large prize slot 30 and second large prize slot 35) are opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of special symbol (type of jackpot) that is displayed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple rounds of play (unit opening games), an opening (OP) before the first round of play begins, and an ending (ED) after the final round of play ends. Each round of play begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round of play, and ends with the start of the next round of play. The time (interval time) during which the large prize opening is closed between rounds of play is included in the open round of play before that closure. When a small prize is won, a "small prize game" is executed in which the large prize opening (second large prize opening 35) is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of large prize that triggered the small prize rush, as described below.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in Figure 9. Here, the types of jackpots are roughly divided into two types: "V passing jackpot" and "V non-passing jackpot."
A "V-passing scheduled jackpot (probability variable jackpot)" is a jackpot that activates the opening/closing members 32, 37, and V-opening/closing members 71 in an opening pattern (V-passing scheduled opening pattern) that allows the game ball to pass through to the V area 39 during that jackpot game. Also, a "V-passing scheduled jackpot (probability variable jackpot)" is a jackpot that occurs from the end of the jackpot game until the start of the next jackpot game in a high-probability high base state, during which time the second starting hole 21 is frequently won and small jackpots occur, creating a small jackpot rush period. Here, jackpots with special symbol stop data of 11H to 14H, 20H, and 21H correspond to a "V-passing scheduled jackpot (probability variable jackpot)." When the combination of the opening patterns of the opening/closing members 32 and 37 shown in Figure 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in Figure 14 is (opening pattern 21: opening pattern 31), (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 33), or (opening pattern 23: opening pattern 32), the game ball can pass through to the V area 39 during the jackpot game.
A "V non-passing scheduled jackpot (regular jackpot)" is a jackpot that activates the opening/closing members 32, 37, and 71 in an opening pattern (a V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) that prevents the game ball from passing through the V area 39 during the jackpot game. Note that a "V non-passing scheduled jackpot (regular jackpot)" causes the game state to transition to a low-probability, low-base state after the jackpot game ends, making it difficult to win in the second starting slot 21 during that period. Therefore, a small jackpot rush period does not occur after the jackpot game ends. Here, a jackpot with special stop symbol data of 15H or 22H corresponds to a "V non-passing scheduled jackpot." When the opening pattern of the opening/closing members 32 and 37 shown in FIG. 13 is combined with the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), the game ball cannot pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game.
As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 serves as both a V-passing planned opening pattern and a V-non-passing planned opening pattern.

"V Passing Jackpot" includes "16RV Passing Jackpot," "16R (Actually 13R) V Passing Jackpot," and "16R (Actually 15R) V Passing Jackpot." A "16RV Passing Jackpot" has a total effective number of rounds of 16R. Rounds 1 through 13 and Round 15 open the first large prize opening 30 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per Round. Rounds 14 and 16 open the second large prize opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per Round (Figure 13: Opening Pattern 21). Rounds 10 and 12 open the V-opening member 71 for a long time (Figure 14: Opening Pattern 31), allowing easy passage to the V-zone 39 within the first large prize opening 30.

In a "16R (effectively 13R) V-Passing Jackpot," the total number of rounds is 16, but the actual total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from rounds 1 to 13, the first major prize slot 30 is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round, but in round 15, the first major prize slot 30 is only open for 0.1 seconds per round, and in rounds 14 and 16, the second major prize slot 35 is only open for 0.1 seconds per round (Figure 13: Opening Pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (effectively 13R) V-Passing Jackpot," the opening time of the major prize slot is extremely short from round 14 to round 16, making it a round in which no prize balls are expected to be awarded. In other words, a "16R (effectively 13R) V-Passing Jackpot" is effectively a 13R jackpot. In rounds 2 and 6, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is fully opened (Figure 14: opening pattern 33), allowing easy passage into the V-shaped area 39 inside the first large winning opening 30.

In a "16R (effectively 15R) V-Passing Jackpot," the total number of rounds is 16, but the actual total number of rounds is 15. In other words, from R1 to R13 and R15, the first major prize slot 30 is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R, and in R16, the second major prize slot 35 is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R, but in R14, the second major prize slot 35 is only open for 0.1 seconds per R (Figure 13: Opening Pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (effectively 15R) V-Passing Jackpot," the opening time of the major prize slot is extremely short in R14, making it a round in which no prize balls are expected to be awarded. In other words, a "16R (effectively 15R) V-Passing Jackpot" is effectively a 15R jackpot. In rounds 8 and 10, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is fully opened (Figure 14: opening pattern 32), allowing easy passage into the V-shaped area 39 inside the first large winning opening 30.

A "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a "16R (effectively 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" with opening pattern 22, which has a total number of rounds of 16, but an effective total of 13 rounds. In other words, from rounds 1 to 13, the first major prize slot 30 is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round, but in round 15, the first major prize slot 30 is only open for 0.1 seconds per round, and in rounds 14 and 16, the second major prize slot 35 is only open for 0.1 seconds per round (Figure 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (effectively 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot," the opening time of the major prize slot is extremely short from rounds 14 to 16, making it a round in which no prize balls are expected. In other words, a "16R (effectively 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is effectively a 13R jackpot. At 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened, but the opening is a short opening (Figure 14: opening pattern 34), making it nearly impossible for the game ball to pass through the V-shaped area 39 inside the first large prize opening 30.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9, the distribution rate of jackpots in the lottery for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is 68/128 (approximately 53%) for V-passing jackpots (jackpots with a small jackpot rush) and 60/128 (approximately 47%) for V-non-passing jackpots. In contrast, the distribution rate of jackpots in the lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is 83/128 (approximately 64.8%) for V-passing jackpots (jackpots with a small jackpot rush) and 45/128 (approximately 35.2%) for V-non-passing jackpots. In this way, the gaming machine 1 is set up so that the jackpot lottery (lottery for the second special symbol) held when a gaming ball enters the second start slot 21 is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot lottery (lottery for the first special symbol) held when a gaming ball enters the first start slot 20.

5. Description of Game States The game states of the gaming machine 1 will now be described. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability fluctuation control" and "variation time reduction control" for the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display 42, respectively. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 is performing probability fluctuation control on the special symbols on the special symbol display 41 is referred to as the "high probability state (high probability state, probability fluctuation state, probability variable state)," and the state in which probability fluctuation control is not performed is simply referred to as the "normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)." The game control microcomputer 81 achieves the high probability state by determining a jackpot using a jackpot determination table ( FIG. 8(A) ) in which the number of jackpot random number values determined as a jackpot is higher in the high probability state than in the normal probability state. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of a jackpot than the normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control on the special pattern of the special pattern display device 41, the probability that the display result (stop pattern) of the variable display of the special pattern by the special pattern display device 41 will be a jackpot pattern is higher than when the probability fluctuation control is not being executed.

The state in which the game control microcomputer 81 is controlling the time-shortening of the special symbol on the special symbol display 41 is referred to as the "time-shortening state," while the state in which the time-shortening control is not controlled is simply referred to as the "non-time-shortening state." In the time-shortening state, the special symbol's time of fluctuation (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the derived display of the display result) is shorter than in the non-time-shortening state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (Figures 10 and 11), which is determined so that a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is selected more frequently in the time-shortening state than in the non-time-shortening state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is controlling the time-shortening of the special symbol on the special symbol display 41, a short fluctuation time is more likely to be selected as the fluctuation time for the variable display of the special symbol compared to when the time-shortening control is not being executed. As a result, in the time-shortening state, the pace of consumption of reserved special symbols is accelerated, making it more likely that a valid win (a win that can be stored as a reserved special symbol) will occur in the starting slot. This allows for smooth gameplay and the chance to win a jackpot. The game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them. However, this example shows an embodiment in which probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control are simultaneously executed, as described below.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with fluctuation time reduction control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbols in the time-shortened state, but does not execute them in the non-time-shortened state. As the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbols, the game control microcomputer 81 performs hit determination (determination of the normal symbol) using a normal symbol hit determination table T3 (Figure 8 (C)), in which the number of normal symbol random number values (win random number values) determined to be a hit is higher in the time-shortened state than in the non-time-shortened state. Therefore, in the time-shortened state, the probability of a hit is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control on the normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 42, the probability that the display result (stopped symbol) of the variable normal symbol display by the normal symbol display device 42 will be a winning symbol is higher than when the probability fluctuation control is not being executed. In the time-saving state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. Here, the normal symbol fluctuation time is 30 seconds in the non-time-saving state, but 1 second in the time-saving state ( FIG. 8 (D) ). Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chute 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time-saving state ( FIG. 12 ). In other words, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing opening time extension control on the electric chute 22. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chute 22 opens in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time-saving state ( FIG. 12 ). In other words, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing opening number increase control on the electric chute 22. When the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 42, as well as control to extend the opening time and increase the number of openings for the electric chute 22, the electric chute 22 opens more frequently, and game balls land more frequently in the second starting hole 21 than when these controls are not being executed. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of balls fired, becomes higher. Therefore, a state in which these controls are executed is called a "high base state," and a state in which they are not executed is called a "low base state." In the high base state, players can aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing their available game balls. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control that supports the electric chute 22 in landing in the second starting hole 21) is being executed. The high base state (electric support control state) does not necessarily require the execution of all of the above controls. In other words, by executing one or more of the following controls: probability fluctuation control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, opening time extension control for the electric chute 22, and opening count increase control for the electric chute 22, it is sufficient if the electric chute 22 is made more likely to open than when that control is not being executed. Also, the high base state (electric support control state) may be controlled independently without being associated with the time-saving state.

In gaming machine 1, the game state after a jackpot game due to a winning V-passing jackpot is a high-probability state, a time-saving state, and a high base state if the player passes through V region 39 during the jackpot game. This game state is specifically referred to as the "high-probability, high-base state" or "high-probability, time-saving state." The high-probability, high-base state ends when the special symbol variable display is executed 10,000 times. In other words, the high-probability, high-base state essentially ends when the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and that jackpot game is executed. Furthermore, the game state after a jackpot game due to a winning V-non-passing jackpot is a normal-probability state (a non-high-probability state, i.e., a low-probability state), a non-time-saving state, and a low base state (a non-electric support control state) if the player does not pass through V region 39 during the jackpot game (which almost never happens). This game state is specifically referred to as the "low-probability, low-base state." The low-probability, low-base state is sometimes referred to as the "normal gaming state" or the "low-probability, non-time-saving state (also simply referred to as the non-time-saving state)." When gaming machine 1 is played for the first time, the gaming state after powering on is this low-probability, low-base state. Also, although not implemented in this example, there is also a gaming state that is a normal probability state (non-high probability state, i.e., low probability state), time-saving state, and high-base state (electric support control state), and these gaming states are particularly referred to as the "low-probability, high-base state" or "low-probability, time-saving state" (a state controlled to at least one of the high-probability state and the high-base state is referred to as a "specific gaming state"). Also, the state during which a special game (jackpot game) is being played is sometimes referred to as the "special gaming state (jackpot game state)."

In high-base states, such as high-probability high-base states and low-probability high-base states, hitting the ball with the right hand to enter the right play area 3B (Figure 1) can be advantageous for gameplay. This is because the electric support control makes the electric chute 22 more likely to open than in low-base states, making it easier to win in the second start gate 21 than in the first start gate 20. Therefore, in high-base states, hitting the ball with the right hand is performed to have the ball enter the second start gate 21 while passing through the gate 28, which triggers the normal symbol lottery. This allows for more start wins (wins in the second start gate 21) and more frequent small wins than hitting with the left hand, and also allows for more frequent small wins. Note that with gaming machine 1, gameplay is performed with the right hand even during jackpot play. On the other hand, in low-base states, hitting the ball with the left hand to enter the left play area 3A (Figure 1) can be advantageous for gameplay. This is because in the low electric base state, electric support control is not executed, making it more difficult for the electric chute 22 to open compared to the high base state, and winning in the second start hole 21 is more difficult. In other words, it is easier to win in the first start hole 20 than in the second start hole 21. For this reason, in the low base state, players hit the ball left in order to have the game ball win in the first start hole 20. This allows for more start wins (winning in the first start hole 20) than hitting with the right.

6. Operation of the Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (Fig. 3) will be explained based on Figs. 15 to 34. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the win/loss determination means (Fig. 23) and the win/loss advance determination means (Figs. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
15 is a flowchart of the main control process. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the gaming control microcomputer 81 reads out a program for executing the main control process from the main ROM 83. In the main control process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first performs initial settings (step S001). The initial settings include, for example, setting the main CPU 82 and resetting various flags, statuses, counters, etc. The initial value of the flag is "0" (i.e., "OFF"), the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the initial settings are performed only once after the power is turned on and are not performed thereafter.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 disables interrupt processing (step S002) and performs the normal and special symbol main random number update process (step S003). In this normal and special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 updates the various random number counter values (jackpot random number value, jackpot type random number value, reach random number value, variable pattern random number value, normal symbol random number value, and small jackpot random number value) shown in FIG. 7(A) by incrementing them by 1. When each random number counter value reaches its set upper limit, it returns to "0" and is incremented again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" and may be changed randomly. Furthermore, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit consisting of a counter IC or the like.

After the normal and special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 allows the interrupt process to be interrupted (step S004). While the interrupt is allowed, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (e.g., every 4 msec). In other words, the main timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined cycle (e.g., every 4 msec). Then, between the end of the main timer interrupt process and the start of the next main timer interrupt process, the update process of various counter values by the normal and special symbol main random number update process is repeatedly executed. Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 when the interrupt is disabled, the main timer interrupt process does not start immediately, but starts after the interrupt is allowed.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates the various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7(A). This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. In other words, the update process of the various random number counter values is performed both during the execution period of the main timer interrupt process and during other periods (the period from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process).

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs input processing (step S102). In the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1 and sets payout data for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning slot in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. The various sensors include, for example, the first starting slot sensor 20a, the second starting slot sensor 21a, the first large winning slot sensor 30a, the second large winning slot sensor 35a, the regular winning slot sensor 27a, and the regular winning slot sensor 29a (Figure 3).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 sequentially executes the start hole sensor detection process (step S103), normal operation process (step S104), special operation process (step S105), V-area sensor detection process (step S106), and reserved ball count process (step S107). Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball count process, the game control microcomputer 81 executes output process (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the commands, etc., set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each of the above processes to the sub-control board 90. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 executes other processes (step S109). In other processes, for example, based on the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 described below, the second special symbol reserved indicator 43b is controlled to a display mode indicating that number, and based on the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1, the first special symbol reserved indicator 43a is controlled to a display mode indicating that number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the start gate sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether a game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made based on whether a game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a. If a game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. If a game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is "4 (upper limit)" (step S202). The number of reserved balls for normal symbols is the number of reserved normal symbols, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of reserved normal symbols. If the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. If the number of reserved normal symbol balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved normal symbol balls (step S203), and then a normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: value of label-TRND-H), and stores the acquired random number value in a memory area corresponding to the current number of reserved normal symbol balls among the first to fourth memory areas of the normal symbol reserved memory area 86 of the main RAM 84.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether a game ball has entered the second start hole 21. This determination is made based on whether a game ball has been detected by the second start hole sensor 21a. If a game ball has not entered the second start hole 21 (step S205: NO), processing skips to step S210. If a game ball has entered (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is "4 (upper limit)" (step S206). The number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is the number of reserved second symbol symbols, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of reserved second symbol symbols. If the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is "4" (step S206: YES), processing skips to step S210. If the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is "3" or less (step S206: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 (step S207), and then a special symbol 2-related random number acquisition process is performed (step S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-AS), the value of the reach random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-RC), the value of the variation pattern random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-T1), and the value of the small jackpot random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-K) are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number group in a memory area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 among the first to fourth memory areas of the second special symbol reserved memory area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 also temporarily stores (retains) the acquired random number group in a buffer (pre-determination buffer) different from the second special symbol reserve memory area 85b for the special symbol 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 18) described below. After the special symbol 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special symbol 2 pre-determination process (step S209). The special symbol 2 pre-determination process will be described in detail later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether a game ball has entered the first start hole 20. This determination is made based on whether a game ball has been detected by the first start hole sensor 20a. If a game ball has not entered the first start hole 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. If a game ball has entered the first start hole 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "4 (upper limit)" (step S211). The number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is the number of reserved first special symbols, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of reserved first special symbols. If the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "4" (step S211: YES), this process ends. If the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "3" or less (step S211: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 (step S212), and then a special symbol 1-related random number acquisition process is performed (step S213). Here, the values of the jackpot random number counter, jackpot type random number counter, reach random number counter, and variation pattern random number counter are acquired in accordance with the special symbol 2-related random number acquisition process (step S208) described above. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number group in a memory area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 among the first to fourth memory areas of the first special symbol reserved memory area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 also temporarily stores (retains) the acquired random number group in a buffer (pre-determination buffer) separate from the first special symbol reserved memory area 85a for the special symbol 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 19) described below. After the special chart 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special chart 1 pre-determination process (step S214). Details of the special chart 1 pre-determination process will be described later.

[Special diagram 2 advance judgment processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special symbol 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability variable flag is ON (step S301). If the probability variable flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. In other words, if the probability variable flag is OFF, no pre-determination is performed. On the other hand, if the probability variable flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot pre-determination by referring to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special symbol 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the referenced jackpot determination table T1 ( FIG. 8 ) and the jackpot random number value to make a preliminary determination of whether or not a jackpot has occurred. Because the high probability state (the probability variable flag is ON) is being assumed here, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the high probability state (the jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") in the jackpot determination table T1 to make a preliminary determination of whether or not a jackpot has occurred. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "649," a "jackpot" is preliminarily determined, and when the value is any other value, a "miss" is preliminarily determined. Note that in this embodiment, the preliminary determination is made using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process ( FIG. 23 ) described later. However, in other embodiments, the preliminary determination may be made using a jackpot determination table for preliminary determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1.

If the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "miss" (step S304: NO), processing skips to step S306. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "jackpot" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-determination of the jackpot type (step S305). In the pre-determination of the jackpot type, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires the jackpot type random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (Figure 17: step S208). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (Figure 9). Here, regardless of whether the jackpot type random number value is "0" to "127," the pre-determination is a "16RV passing jackpot." In this embodiment, the preliminary determination is made using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described below, but in other embodiments, the preliminary determination may be made using a jackpot type determination table for preliminary determination that is different from the jackpot type determination table T5.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary determination of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires the fluctuation pattern random number value and the reach random number value as judgment values temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). Next, since the time-shortened state (the time-shortened flag is ON) is in effect, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time-shortened state (FIG. 11) and identifies the fluctuation pattern from the jackpot preliminary determination result of step S304, the reach preliminary determination result obtained from the reach random number value, and the fluctuation pattern random number value. Note that in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the selected fluctuation pattern may differ depending on the number of reserved balls. Here, it is assumed that all fluctuation patterns that could be selected depending on the number of reserved balls are selected. For example, if a reach or miss is determined in advance based on the jackpot advance determination result and the reach/no-reach advance determination result, and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "60," the game control microcomputer 81 selects two patterns: fluctuation pattern "P64," which is selected if the number of reserved balls is "1 to 2," and fluctuation pattern "P68," which is selected if the number of reserved balls is "3 to 4." In this embodiment, the advance determination is made using fluctuation pattern determination table T6, which is used in the fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described below. However, in other embodiments, the advance determination may be made using a fluctuation pattern determination table for advance determination that is different from fluctuation pattern determination table T6.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-determination command includes the jackpot pre-determination result (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type pre-determination result) and the fluctuation pattern pre-determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308) and ends this process.

[Special Figure 1 Pre-Determination Processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special symbol 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability variable flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the special symbol 2 pre-determination process described above, if the probability variable flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process is terminated. That is, if the probability variable flag is ON, no pre-determination is performed. On the other hand, if the probability variable flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot pre-determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains the jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special symbol 1 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S213). Next, since the normal probability state (the probability variable flag is OFF) is in effect, the game control microcomputer 81 pre-determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the table for the normal probability state (jackpot determination value: "0" to "164") in the jackpot determination table T1. That is, a "jackpot" is pre-determined when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "164," and a "miss" is pre-determined when the value is any other value. Note that the jackpot pre-determination may use a pre-determination jackpot determination table different from the jackpot determination table T1. The following steps S404 to S408 are the same as steps S304 to S308 in the special chart 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 18) described above, and therefore will not be described here.

[Normal operation processing]
20 is a flowchart of the normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the electric chute 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chute 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. If the electric chute 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the normal symbol is changing (step S502). If the normal symbol is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. If the normal symbol is not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for the normal symbol is "0" (step S503). If the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S503: YES), the process ends. If the number of reserved balls is one or more (step S503: NO), the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is decremented by one (step S504). Therefore, if a gaming ball passes through gate 28 while the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is "0," the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is temporarily set to "1" in step S203 of the start gate sensor detection process (FIG. 17). Then, the reserved balls are consumed in step S504, and the number of reserved balls for normal symbols immediately becomes "0." The same applies to the number of reserved balls for special symbols. That is, in steps S207 and S212 of the start gate sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved balls for special symbols is temporarily set to "1." Then, in steps S1404 and S1410 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22), the reserved balls are consumed and the number of reserved balls for special symbols becomes "0." Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a win has occurred by referring to the normal symbol win determination table T3 (FIG. 8(C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the normal symbol random number value (win random number value) stored in the first memory area (corresponding to the first normal symbol reserved) of the normal symbol reserved memory area 86 as a determination value. Then, it determines whether or not a win has occurred by using the normal symbol random number value, the game state (whether or not the time-saving state is active), and the normal symbol win determination table T3. For example, in the non-time-saving state, if the normal symbol random number value is between "0" and "2," it is determined to be a "win," and if the normal symbol random number value is anything other than that, it is determined to be a "lose" (see FIG. 8(C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern by referring to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (Figure 8 (D)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether or not it is in a time-saving state), and then selects the normal symbol variation time as a normal symbol variation pattern using the game state determination result and the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4. Here, when it is not in a time-saving state, the normal symbol variation time is determined to be "30 seconds," and when it is in a time-saving state, the normal symbol variation time is determined to be "1 second" (see Figure 8 (D)). The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol variation pattern, thereby starting the normal symbol variation display (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed and ended. The normal symbol fluctuation time is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see Figure 8 (D)). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the normal symbol fluctuation display continues. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the fluctuation display (step S509), and if the above-mentioned hit determination (step S505) results in a "miss" (step S510: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned hit determination results in a "win" (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chute opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chute 22 is selected by referring to the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7 (Figure 12 (A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not it is in a time-saving state), and selects the opening pattern of the electric chute 22 using the game state determination result and the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7. Here, when it is not in a time-saving state, "opening pattern 11" is selected, and when it is in a time-saving state, "opening pattern 12" is selected. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts operating the electric chute in accordance with the selected opening pattern (step S512) and ends this processing.

If the electric chute 22 is in operation in step S501 described above (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the electric chute 22 is met (step S520). The closing condition here is met when either the number of winning balls in the electric chute 22 reaches a specified maximum number of winning balls (e.g., six balls), or the operation time of the electric chute 22 has elapsed and it is time to close the electric chute 22. The operation time of the electric chute 22 is the operation time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. If the closing condition for the electric chute 22 is not met (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the electric chute 22 is met (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the electric chute 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and ends this processing.

[Special Action Processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the process for the special symbol display 41 and the special prize device (first special prize device 31 and second special prize device 36) is divided into four stages, each of which is referred to as a "special operation status" of "1,""2,""3," and "4." When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol standby processing (step S1302). In the special symbol standby processing, a jackpot determination, a small jackpot determination, a variation pattern selection, and the like are performed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), a special symbol variation processing is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol variation processing, a variation stop command is output after the variation time has elapsed. When the "special operation status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), a special symbol determination process is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol determination process, an opening command is output when a jackpot occurs, and the like. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), a special electric device process is performed (step S1308). In the special electric device process, a jackpot game or a small jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is initially set to "1".

The special operation processing may be configured to separate the processing related to the first special symbol display 41a and the processing related to the second special symbol display 41b, allowing simultaneous changes in which the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are executed in parallel. In this case, the processing related to the first special symbol display 41a and the large prize device (first large prize device 31 and second large prize device 36) is divided into four stages, each of which is referred to as "1," "2," "3," and "4" in the "special symbol 1 operation status." The processing related to the second special symbol display 41b and the large prize device is divided into four stages, each of which is referred to as "1," "2," "3," and "4" in the "special symbol 2 operation status." The initial setting for the "special symbol 1 operation status" and "special symbol 2 operation status" is "1." The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether either the "special chart 1 operation status" or the "special chart 2 operation status" is "4." When either the "special chart 1 operation status" or the "special chart 2 operation status" is "4," special electric device processing is performed. In the special electric device processing, a jackpot game or a small jackpot game is executed. Specifically, when the special chart 1 operation status is "4," a jackpot game due to a jackpot on special chart 1 is executed. When the special chart 2 operation status is "4," a jackpot game or a small jackpot game due to a jackpot on special chart 2 is executed. When neither the "special chart 1 operation status" nor the "special chart 2 operation status" is "4," the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the "special chart 1 operation status" is "1," "2," or "3." When the "special chart 1 operation status" is "1," special chart 1 standby processing is executed. In the special chart 1 standby process, hit determination for special chart 1 and selection of a variation pattern are performed. When the "special chart 1 operation status" is "2", special chart 1 during variation process is performed. In the special chart 1 during variation process, output of a variation stop command is performed after the variation time of special chart 1 has elapsed. When the "special chart 1 operation status" is "3", special chart 1 determination process is performed. In the special chart 1 determination process, output of an opening command is performed when a jackpot or small jackpot occurs in the special chart 1 lottery. After determining whether the "special chart 1 operation status" is "1", "2", or "3", the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the "special chart 2 operation status" is "1", "2", or "3". When the "special chart 2 operation status" is "1", special chart 2 standby process is performed. In the special chart 2 standby process, hit determination for special chart 2 and selection of a variation pattern are performed. When the "Special chart 2 operation status" is "2", special chart 2 during change processing is performed. In special chart 2 during change processing, a change stop command is output after the special chart 2 change time has elapsed. When the "Special chart 2 operation status" is "3", special chart 2 determination processing is performed. In special chart 2 determination processing, an opening command is output when a jackpot or small jackpot occurs in the special chart 2 lottery. As described above, according to the special operation processing of this embodiment, the standby processing, during change processing, and determination processing of special chart 1 and the standby processing, change processing, and determination processing of special chart 2 are executed in parallel. On the other hand, jackpot games and small jackpot games are executed with priority over the standby processing, change processing, and determination processing of special charts 1 and 2.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2 is "0" (step S1400). If the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2 is "0" (step S1400: YES), that is, if the second special symbol reserved memory area 85b does not store a random number group acquired as a result of winning the second starting hole 21, the process proceeds to step S1407. If the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2 is "1" or more (step S1400: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the small win determination process (step S1401). In the small win determination process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a small win determination by referring to the small win determination table T10 (FIG. 8). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads the small win random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first reserved second special symbol) of the second special symbol storage area 85b, and determines whether or not a small win has occurred using the read small win random number value and the small win determination table T10. Next, if the result of the small win determination is a "small win," the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the small win flag, sets the special symbol stop symbol data corresponding to the small win symbol in the buffer of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big win determination process (step S1402) and a variable pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later.

After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of the reserved information (various random number values) stored in the first to fourth memory areas of the second special symbol reserved memory area 85b by one location from the current location toward the read side, and clears the reserved information stored in the location farthest from the read side in the second special symbol reserved memory area 85b (step S1405). For example, if reserved information is stored in the first to third memory areas, the reserved information stored in the third memory area is cleared, and if reserved information is stored in the first to fourth memory areas, the reserved information stored in the fourth memory area is cleared. Through the above steps, the reserved second special symbols are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special symbol reserved storage area 85b (the leftmost reserved image 9B of the four reserved images 9B) shifts toward the reserved symbol consumption image display area and is displayed as reserved symbol consumption image 9C. Furthermore, the reserved images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special symbol reserved storage area 85b (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left of the four reserved images 9B) each shift one position to the left (Figure 1). This allows the player to recognize that one reserved second special symbol has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol 2 variation start processing (step S1406). In this special symbol 2 variation start processing, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, which starts the display of the second special symbol variation and sets the variation time timer. The variation time timer is set to a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2." The fluctuation start command (special chart 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special chart 2 fluctuation start process includes information regarding the special chart stop pattern data set in the small win determination process (step S1401), information regarding the special chart stop pattern data set in the big win determination process (step S1402), and information regarding the fluctuation pattern set in the fluctuation pattern selection process (step S1403) (including information regarding the fluctuation time).

In step S1401, if the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "0" (step S1407). If the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, if the first special symbol reserved memory area 85a does not store a random number group obtained as a result of winning at the first starting hole 20, processing proceeds to step S1413. If the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "1" or greater (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a jackpot determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage locations of the various random number values stored in the first through fourth memory areas of the first special symbol reservation memory area 85a by one position from their current positions toward the read side, and clears the reserved information stored in the first special symbol reservation memory area 85a in the location farthest from the read side (step S1411). Through these steps, the first reserved symbols are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first memory area of the first special symbol reservation memory area 85a (the rightmost reserved image 9A of the four reserved images 9A) shifts toward the reserved consumption image display area and is displayed as reserved consumption image 9C. Furthermore, the reserved images 9A corresponding to the second through fourth memory areas of the first special symbol reservation memory area 85a (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left of the four reserved images 9A) each shift one position to the right (Figure 1). This allows the player to recognize that one reserved first symbol has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol 1 variation start processing (step S1412). In the special symbol 1 variation start processing, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the display of the first special symbol variation is started, and a variation time timer is set. The variation time timer is set to a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection processing. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). Note that the variation start command set in the special symbol 1 variation start processing (special symbol 1 variation start command) includes information related to the special symbol stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination processing (step S1408) and information related to the variation pattern set in the variation pattern selection processing (step S1409) (including information related to the variation time).

If the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "0" in step S1407 (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1413). A standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may make this determination, for example, by checking the ON/OFF status of a demo screen display flag for waiting for customers. If the screen is a standby screen (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If the screen is not a standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for a predetermined standby time to elapse, sets a standby command for displaying the standby screen in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S1414), and then ends this process. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the reserved first special symbol is executed only when the reserved second special symbol is "0." In other words, the consumption of the second special symbol reservation is executed before the consumption of the first special symbol reservation. Also, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of this embodiment, a lottery based on the second special symbol reservation makes it easier for the player to win a jackpot (a jackpot scheduled to pass through V) that is more profitable for the player than a lottery based on the first special symbol reservation.

[Jackpot detection process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). The jackpot determination process for special symbol 2 (step S1402) and the jackpot determination process for special symbol 1 (step S1408) follow similar processing flows, so they will be described together. In the jackpot determination process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability variable flag is ON (step S1501). If the probability variable flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines a jackpot by referencing the high-probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a jackpot random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for special symbol 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first reserved second symbol) of the second reserved symbol storage area 85b is read. In the jackpot determination process for special symbol 1, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first reserved first symbol) of the first special symbol storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred using the jackpot determination table T1 and the jackpot random number value it references. Here, since the high probability state (probability variable flag is ON) is in effect, the jackpot determination is determined based on the table for the high probability state (jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") in the jackpot determination table T1.

In step S1501, if the probability variable flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (Figure 8) (step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value using the same method as in step S1502. Next, because the normal probability state is being reached (the probability variable flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the table for the normal probability state (jackpot determination value is "0" to "164") in the jackpot determination table T1.

If the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a jackpot type random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for special symbol 2, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first memory area of the second special symbol reserve memory area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process for special symbol 1, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first memory area of the first special symbol reserve memory area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read out jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (Figure 9). After determining the jackpot type, the special stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the identified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination in step S1503 or step S1505 is a "miss" (the result of the minor jackpot determination is also a "miss"), the special stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the missing symbol is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process ends.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). The variation pattern selection process for special chart 2 (step S1403) and the variation pattern selection process for special chart 1 (step S1409) have similar processing flows, so they will be described together. In the variation pattern selection process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the game state is in a time-saving state (step S1600). The determination of whether the game state is in a time-saving state is made by whether the time-saving flag is ON or not. If the game state is in a time-saving state (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. If the game state is not in a time-saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (step S1602). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the small jackpot flag is ON (step S1610). If the small jackpot flag is OFF (step S1610: NO), processing proceeds to step S1607. If the small jackpot flag is ON (step S1610: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern by referring to the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for a small jackpot in the non-time-saving state (step S1611). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads the fluctuation pattern random number value stored in the first memory area (corresponding to the first reserved second special symbol) of the second special symbol reservation memory area 85b. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 and the fluctuation pattern random number value. Here, as a table for a small win in a non-time-saving state, the part corresponding to the small win (the part where the fluctuation pattern is "P34") in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in Figure 10 is referenced (the address is set). From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, "P34" is selected as the fluctuation pattern.

If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot type is a V-passing jackpot (step S1604). The jackpot type is determined based on the special symbol stop pattern data set in the main RAM 84.

If the jackpot type is a V-pass scheduled jackpot (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern by referencing the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for a non-time-saving V-pass scheduled jackpot (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a fluctuation pattern random number value as a determination value. For example, in the fluctuation pattern selection process for special symbol 2, the fluctuation pattern random number value stored in the first memory area of the second special symbol reserve memory area 85b (corresponding to the first reserved second symbol). In the fluctuation pattern selection process for special symbol 1, the fluctuation pattern random number value stored in the first memory area of the first special symbol reserve memory area 85a (corresponding to the first reserved first symbol). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 and the fluctuation pattern random number value. Here, the table for non-time-saving state V-pass scheduled jackpots is set to an address that references the portion of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-saving states shown in FIG. 10 that corresponds to the V-pass scheduled jackpot (the portion with fluctuation patterns "P1" to "P3" in Special Chart 1, and the portion with fluctuation patterns "P21" and "P22" in Special Chart 2). From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P1" to "P3" is selected as the fluctuation pattern in Special Chart 1, and "P21" or "P22" is selected in Special Chart 2.

If the jackpot type is a V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern by referencing the table for a non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). Here, the table for a non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot is set to an address that references the portion of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. 10 that corresponds to a V non-passing scheduled jackpot (the portion with fluctuation patterns "P4" to "P6" in special chart 1, and the portion with fluctuation pattern "P23" in special chart 2). From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P4" to "P6" is selected as the fluctuation pattern for special chart 1, and "P23" is selected for special chart 2.

In step S1610, if the small win flag is OFF (step S1610: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the reach random number value is a reach-established random number value (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads the reach random number value as a determination value. In the special symbol 2 variation pattern selection process, the reach random number value stored in the first memory area (corresponding to the first second special symbol reserved) of the second special symbol reserved memory area 85b is read. In the special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process, the reach random number value stored in the first memory area (corresponding to the first first special symbol reserved) of the first special symbol reserved memory area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether a reach is established using the reach determination table T2 (Figure 8 (B)) and the reach random number value. In this case, since the time-saving state is not in effect, the presence or absence of a reach is determined based on the table for the non-time-saving state (the portion of the reach determination value (reach establishment random number value) between "0" and "13") in the reach determination table T2.

If the reach random number value is a reach-established random number value (step S1607: YES), i.e., if there is a reach but not a miss, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern by referring to the table for reach but not a miss in the non-time-saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (Figure 10). Here, as the table for reach but not a miss in the non-time-saving state, the section of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in Figure 10 that corresponds to reach but not a miss (the section with fluctuation patterns "P7" to "P14" for special chart 1, and the section with fluctuation patterns "P24" to "P31" for special chart 2) is referenced. In special chart 1, one of the fluctuation patterns "P7" to "P14" is selected as the fluctuation pattern based on the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current number of balls reserved for special chart 1 (1 to 4). For Special Chart 2, one of the fluctuation patterns "P24" to "P31" is selected based on the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 (1 to 4). Because the selected fluctuation pattern changes depending on the number of reserved balls, a shortened fluctuation function is activated according to the number of reserved balls. In other words, for both Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", fluctuation patterns with shorter fluctuation times are selected more frequently than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". This allows for faster consumption of reserved special charts when there are a large number of reserved balls.

If the reach random number value is not a reach-established random number value (step S1607: NO), i.e., if there is a miss without a reach, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern by referring to the table for non-time-saving state, no-reach misses in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (Figure 10) (step S1609). Here, as the table for non-time-saving state, no-reach misses, the section of the non-time-saving state fluctuation pattern determination table T6 shown in Figure 10 that corresponds to a no-reach miss (the section with fluctuation patterns "P15" to "P16" for special chart 1, and the section with fluctuation patterns "P32" to "P33" for special chart 2) is referenced. For special chart 1, either "P15" or "P16" is selected as the fluctuation pattern based on the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current number of balls reserved for special chart 1 (1 to 4). For Special Chart 2, either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the variation pattern based on the read variation pattern random number value and the current number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 (1-4). Here too, the variation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, so a shortened variation function is activated according to the number of reserved balls.

If it is determined in step S1600 that the game state is in the time-shortened state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (Figure 25: step S1612). Thereafter, the processing of steps S1614 to S1621 is the same as the processing of steps S1604 to S1611 described above, except for the following points, and therefore explanations will be omitted. The difference between the processing of steps S1614 to S1621 and the processing of steps S1604 to S1611 is that the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 referenced in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, and S1621 is different from that of the previously described steps S1605, S1606, S1608, S1609, and S1611. Specifically, in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, S1609, and S1611, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time-saving state is referenced, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, and S1621, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time-saving state is referenced. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is a V-passing jackpot, the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 11 that corresponds to the V-passing jackpot (the part where the fluctuation pattern is "P41" to "P43" in special chart 1, and the part where the fluctuation pattern is "P61" or "P62" in special chart 2) is referenced. From the read-out fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P41" to "P43" is selected as the fluctuation pattern in special chart 1, and "P61" or "P62" is selected in special chart 2. Also, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is a V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 11 corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (the part of the fluctuation pattern "P44" to "P46" in special chart 1, and the part of the fluctuation pattern "P63" in special chart 2) is referenced. From the read-out fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P44" to "P46" is selected as the fluctuation pattern in special chart 1, and "P63" is selected in special chart 2. Also, for example, in the case of step S1621, that is, in the case of a small win, the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 11 corresponding to the small win (the "P74" part) is referenced. From the read variation pattern random number value, "P74" is selected as the variation pattern.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above (steps S1605, S1606, S1608, S1609, S1611, S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, S1621), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends this processing. Information about the set variation pattern is included in a variation start command and sent to the sub-control board 90 in the output processing (Figure 16: step S108). This starts the variable display of the special symbol.

[Special pattern change processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol fluctuation processing (FIG. 21: step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed and ended (step S1701). The special symbol fluctuation time is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern selection processing (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this processing is terminated. That is, the special symbol fluctuation display started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby processing (FIG. 22) continues. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702) and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). The game control microcomputer 81 also performs other processing associated with the fluctuation stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs processing such as stopping the variable display of the special symbol at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing.

[Special design confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs game status management processing (step S1801). The details of the game status management processing will be described later. After the game status management processing, it determines whether the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the small jackpot flag is ON (step S1810). If the small jackpot flag is OFF (step S1810: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808) and terminates this processing. As a result, the jackpot game and small jackpot game are not started, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22), where the jackpot and small jackpot determinations for the next reserved ball are performed.

If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the large prize opening and the V-shaped opening/closing member according to the type of jackpot won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the large prize opening opening pattern determination table T8 (Figure 13), determines the opening pattern of the large prize opening from the special symbol stopping pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. For example, if the special symbol stopping pattern data is "11H," "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the large prize opening. The game control microcomputer 81 also refers to the V-shaped opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (Figure 14), determines the opening pattern of the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 from the special symbol stopping pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. For example, if the special symbol stopping pattern data is "11H," "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V-shaped opening/closing member 71. In conjunction with setting the opening pattern of the jackpot opening and V-shaped opening/closing member, the round counter value is set to the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot won. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. In this example, the round counter is set to "16" (Figure 13 (B)).

After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game status reset process (step S1804). The game status reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the probability change flag and time-saving flag, and its details will be described later. After the game status reset process, in order to start a jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and opening begins (step S1806). Thereafter, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the small win flag is ON (step S1810: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the large prize opening according to the type of large prize with small win rush that has been won (step S1811). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the large prize opening opening pattern determination table T8 (Figure 13), determines the opening pattern of the large prize opening from the special symbol stopping pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. For example, if the special symbol stopping pattern data is "20H," "opening pattern 25" is set as the opening pattern of the large prize opening. After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "4" (step S1807) and ends this processing.

[Game Status Management Processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the game status management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability variable flag is ON (step S2001). If the probability variable flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), processing skips to step S2005. If the probability variable flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variable counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variable counter counts the number of special symbol variations executed during the high probability state. Here, the probability variable counter is set to "10000" upon transition to the high probability state. The game control microcomputer 81 then determines whether the counter value has become "0" as a result of decrementing the probability variable counter by 1 (step S2003). If the value of the variable probability counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the value of the variable probability counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the variable probability flag is switched to OFF (step S2004). Note that if the variable probability counter is set to "10000", the value of the variable probability counter will not actually become "0".

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time-saving flag is ON or not. If the time-saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), processing skips to step S2009. If the time-saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time-saving counter counts the number of times the special pattern changes during the time-saving state. Here, the time-saving counter is set to "10000" upon transition to the time-saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the counter value has become "0" as a result of decrementing the time-saving counter by 1 (step S2007). If the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), processing skips to step S2009. If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time-saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008). Note that if the time-saving counter is set to "10000", the actual value of the time-saving counter will never become "0".

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 and ends this process. The game state designation command contains information about the current game state that has just been set (whether or not the game is in a special mode, the special mode counter value, whether or not the game is in a time-saving mode, the time-saving counter value, etc.).

[Game status reset process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the game state reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability variable flag is ON (step S2101). If the probability variable flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. If the probability variable flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability variable flag is switched OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time-saving flag is ON. If the time-saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), the process ends. If the time-saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time-saving flag is switched OFF (step S2104). In other words, during the execution of a jackpot game, the state is neither high-probability nor time-saving. In the gaming machine 1, the low base state is always maintained when the time-shortening state is not in effect, and the low base state is maintained during execution of a jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric device processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The "jackpot end flag" is a flag indicating that all of the large prize winning devices (first large prize winning device 31 and second large prize winning device 36) have been opened based on the opening pattern during the ongoing jackpot game. If the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), processing proceeds to step S2230. If the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), V-opening member operation processing is performed to activate the V-opening member 71 (step S2201). In this embodiment, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls enter the first large prize opening 30. In the V-shaped opening/closing member operation process, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period of time when a predetermined number of game balls enters the first large prize opening 30 according to the V-shaped opening/closing member opening pattern T9. Details of the V-shaped opening/closing member operation process will be described later. After the V-shaped opening/closing member operation process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the large prize openings (first large prize opening 30 and second large prize opening 35) are open (step S2202). If they are open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

If the special prize opening is not currently open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the conditions for opening the special prize opening are met (step S2203). To determine the conditions for opening the special prize opening, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether a ball has entered the special prize opening opening start opening 17. If no ball has entered the special prize opening opening start opening 17, the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the conditions are not met. If a ball has entered the special prize opening opening start opening 17, the game control microcomputer 81 then determines whether it is time (timing) to open the special prize opening. Examples of times for opening the special prize opening include when the opening time for a special prize opening has elapsed and it is time to start opening the special prize opening for the first round of play, and when the interval time (closing time) until the special prize opening is temporarily closed after opening has elapsed and it is time to start opening it again. If the above conditions are not met (step S2203: NO), processing proceeds to step S2220.

If the above conditions are met (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special prize opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the special prize opening (first special prize opening 30 or second special prize opening 35) according to an opening pattern (Figure 13) corresponding to the type of special prize. After the special prize opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information regarding the number of rounds of the special prize game currently being played, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. Note that in this embodiment, the special prize opening is not opened multiple times during one round of play. However, in another embodiment, if the large prize opening is opened multiple times during one round of play, the game control microcomputer 81 may determine whether the large prize opening is the first opening in one round, and set the round designation command only if it is the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this process ends.

If the special prize opening is open in step S2202 (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the special prize opening closure condition is met (step S2210). The closure condition here is met when either the number of prizes won by the special prize opening during that round of play reaches a specified maximum number of prizes (e.g., nine prizes per round), or the time to close the special prize opening has arrived (i.e., a predetermined opening time (Figure 13) has elapsed since the special prize opening was opened). If the special prize opening closure condition is not met (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 terminates this processing. On the other hand, if the special prize opening closure condition is met (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the special prize opening (step S2211).

If it is not the time (timing) to open the special prize opening in step S2203 described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round of play has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends a predetermined time (here, two seconds) after the special prize opening is closed. As described above, the time (interval time) for the special prize opening to be closed between rounds of play is included in the open round of play before that closure. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round of play has ended based on whether the predetermined interval time has passed since the special prize opening was closed. If the round of play has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 terminates this processing.

If the round of play has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the round counter value by 1 (step S2221) and determines whether the round counter value is "0" (step S2226). If the round counter value is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of rounds of play have not yet been played, this process ends in order to start the next round of play. On the other hand, if the round counter value is "0," the jackpot ending command is set (step S2227) and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228) as the jackpot ending process that ends the jackpot play. In this embodiment, the ending time (e.g., 18 seconds) when the gaming ball passes through the V region 39 in a "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" is the same length as the ending time when the gaming ball does not pass through the V region 39 in a "16R (effectively 13R) V-non-passing scheduled jackpot." This allows the player to recognize that the gaming ball did not pass through the V region 39 in a "16R (effectively 13R) V-non-passing scheduled jackpot," even if the gaming ball did pass through the V region 39 in a "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot." Note that the ending time when the gaming ball does not pass through the V region 39 in a "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" is also the same length. After the jackpot ending begins, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this processing ends.

If the jackpot end flag is ON in step S2200 (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, and the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot ending time has elapsed (step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns the jackpot end flag OFF (step S2231), turns the jackpot flag OFF (step S2232), and sets the special operation status to "1" (step S2233). As a result, the special symbol standby processing (step S1302) is executed again in the next special operation processing. After that, the game status setting processing (step S2234) described below is executed, and this processing ends.

In addition, the special electric device processing not only opens the large prize opening (first large prize opening 30 or second large prize opening 35) during a jackpot game as described above, but also opens the large prize opening (second large prize opening 35) during a small prize game. Although not shown, specifically, when the small prize flag is turned ON, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the large prize opening (second large prize opening 35) according to the opening pattern (Figure 13) corresponding to the type of jackpot with small prize rush that has been won. It then determines whether the closing condition for the large prize opening (Figure 13) is met, and if the closing condition for the large prize opening is met, it closes (blocks) the large prize opening (ends the small prize game). It then turns OFF the small prize flag and sets the special operation status to "1."

[V opening/closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V-opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the current round of play (the relevant round) is the opening round of the V-opening/closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth rounds correspond to the opening rounds of the V-opening/closing member 71. The game control microcomputer 81 can determine that the round is an opening round when the round counter value is "15,""13,""11,""9,""7," or "5." If the round is not the opening round of the V-opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process ends. This is because there is no need to operate the V-opening/closing member 71 in the relevant round.

If it is the round in which the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first ball has won the first large winning slot 30 in that round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), processing proceeds to step S2520. If the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), a determination is made as to whether the first winning ball has been detected (step S2503). If the first winning ball has not been detected (step S2503: NO), processing ends. This is because there has not yet been a winning ball in the first large winning slot 30 in that round, and there is no need to operate the V-shaped opening/closing member 71.

If the first ball is detected as having won (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V-opening/closing element 71 and performs the V-valid period setting process (step S2504). The V-opening/closing element 71 is short-opened to execute a short-opening (here, 0.1 seconds) when the first ball wins, regardless of whether the V-opening/closing element 71 opening pattern (Figure 14(B)) is "short-open" or "long-open." Note that with the short-opening of the V-opening/closing element 71, the opening time of the V-opening/closing element 71 is very short, so the first game ball that enters the first large prize opening 30 passes through the non-V region 70 without passing through the V region 39. In the V-valid period setting process, the period during which the V-opening/closing element 71 is open and for several seconds after the V-opening/closing element 71 is closed is set as the V-valid period during which game ball detection by the V-region sensor 39a is valid. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V-opening/closing member 71 (here, 0.1 seconds) according to the opening pattern of the V-opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), and sets the V-effective period to the period during which the V-opening/closing member 71 is open and 1 second after it is closed. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the period outside the V-effective period (including when a jackpot game is not being played) as the V-invalid period in which detection of a game ball by the V-area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. Here, "determining detection of a game ball by the V-area sensor 39a to be valid" means turning on the V flag based on detection of a game ball by the V-area sensor 39a (see the V-area sensor detection process (FIG. 33) described below). Also, "determining detection of a game ball by the V-area sensor 39a to be invalid" means not turning on the V flag even if a game ball is detected by the V-area sensor 39a. The V valid period includes several seconds (ball clearance period) after the V-opening/closing member 71 closes. This is because there is a physical distance between the V-opening/closing member 71 and the V-area sensor 39a, and it takes into account the time until the V-area sensor 39a detects the game ball that entered the V-area 39 immediately before the V-opening/closing member 71 closes. In other words, the V flag is turned ON only when a V passage (a game ball passing into the V-area 39) is detected during the V valid period, and the V flag is not turned ON when a V passage is detected outside the V valid period (V invalid period). When the V flag is ON, the probability variable flag is turned ON, i.e., the game state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability state (see the game state setting process (FIG. 32) described below). This prevents the V flag from being turned ON and the high probability state from being set based on a V passage due to fraudulent behavior. After the V-opening member 71 is short-circuited and the V-validity period is set, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505) and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, i.e., if the first ball has already won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the second winning flag is ON (step S2520). The "second winning flag" is a flag indicating that the second ball has won in the first large winning opening 30 if the opening pattern of the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 for that round is a long opening. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), processing proceeds to step S2540. If the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the opening pattern of the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 for that round is a long opening (step S2521). If it is not a long opening (step S2521: NO), i.e., if it is a short opening, processing proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, if the opening is long (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a winning ball has been detected for the second ball (step S2522). If a winning ball for the second ball has not been detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

If a second ball wins (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V-opening/closing element 71 for a long time and performs a V-validity period setting process (step S2523). The V-opening/closing element 71 is opened for a long time because, in the "long opening" pattern of the V-opening/closing element 71 (Figure 14(B)), a long opening (maximum of 31.5 seconds) is executed when the second ball wins. Note that the maximum play time for one round is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the large prize opening: 29.5 seconds + interval closing time: 2 seconds). Therefore, the time from the second ball winning to the end of the round is generally shorter than 31.5 seconds. As described below, the V-opening/closing element 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, so the long opening time of the V-opening/closing element 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, the long opening of the V-opening/closing member 71 is configured so that, because the V-opening/closing member 71 is kept open for a relatively long time, at least a portion of the second and subsequent game balls that enter the first large winning opening 30 pass through the V region 39. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the period while the V-opening/closing member 71 is open as the V valid period, and sets the V invalid period when the V-opening/closing member 71 closes at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V-opening/closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524) and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is open. If the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round of play has ended (step S2550). As previously mentioned, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round of play has ended based on whether a predetermined interval time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the big prize opening was closed.

If the round of play has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551) and performs the V-opening/closing member closing process and the V-invalid period setting process (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round of play, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V-opening/closing member 71, and sets the V-invalid period several seconds (here, 1 second) after the V-opening/closing member 71 is closed, and then ends this process.

If the round of play has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the V opening/closing member 71 is met (step S2560). For example, in the case of a short open, the closing condition for the V opening/closing member 71 may be that a predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 seconds) has elapsed since the V opening/closing member 71 was opened. If the closing condition is met (step S2560: YES), the V opening/closing member closing process and V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and this process ends. If the closing condition is not met (step S2560: NO), this process ends with the V opening/closing member 71 in the open state and the V valid period continuing.

In step S2540, if the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), it determines whether the round of play has ended (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572) and ends this processing. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), it ends this processing.

[Game Status Setting Processing]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game status setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the V flag is ON (step S2301). If the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 proceeds to step S2309. On the other hand, if the V flag is ON in step S2301 (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns the probability variable flag ON (step S2304), sets the probability variable counter to "10000" (step S2305), and turns the V flag OFF (step S2306). The game control microcomputer 81 also turns the time-saving flag ON (step S2307) and sets the time-saving counter to "10000" (step S2308). As a result, the game state after this jackpot game becomes a "high probability state," a "time-saving state," and a "high base state" (i.e., a high probability, high base state). This high probability, high base state ends when one of the following conditions is met: the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10,000 times, or the next jackpot is won.
In the high probability state, the probability of winning a jackpot is approximately 1/101, and in reality, a jackpot will almost always occur before 10,000 jackpot draws are performed in the high probability, high base state. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, if a jackpot with special symbol 2 (via the second start gate) in the time-saving state and a jackpot that is scheduled to pass through V (special symbol stop symbol data 20H, 21H) passes through V during that jackpot game, the game state after that jackpot will be in the high probability, high base state until the next jackpot, and a small jackpot rush is almost guaranteed.

In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 and ends this process. The game state designation command contains information about the currently set game state.

[V-area sensor detection process]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V-area sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether a game ball has been detected by the V-area sensor 39a (step S2601). If a game ball has not been detected by the V-area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if a game ball has been detected (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the V-effective period is in progress (step S2602). The V-effective period is the period set by the V-effective period setting process (steps S2504, S2523) of the V-opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V-effective period is set to a few seconds (ball sweep period) after the V-opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed during the second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth rounds. If the V valid period is not in progress (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the V valid period is in progress (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V pass command (step S2604), and ends this process.

[Reserved ball processing]
Figure 34 is a flowchart of the reserved ball count processing (Figure 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2, and the number of reserved balls for regular symbols stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a reserved ball count command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The reserved ball count command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the number of reserved balls, and includes information regarding the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2, and the number of reserved balls for regular symbols. After setting the reserved ball count command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing.

7. Operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 The operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be explained based on Figures 35 to 45. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94.

[Sub-control main processing]
35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main processing. When the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the performance control microcomputer 91 reads out a program for executing the sub-control main processing from the sub-ROM 93. In the sub-control main processing, the performance control microcomputer 91 first performs CPU initialization processing (step S4000). In the CPU initialization processing, for example, the sub-CPU 92 is set, and various flags, statuses, counters, etc. are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0" (i.e., "OFF"), the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the CPU initialization processing is executed only once after the power supply is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization process, the performance control microcomputer 91 disables interrupt processing (step S4015) and performs random number update processing (step S4020). In this random number update process, the performance control microcomputer 91 updates the random number counter value shown in Figure 7 (B) by adding 1. When each random number counter value reaches a set upper limit, it returns to "0" and is incremented again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" and may be changed randomly. Furthermore, instead of incrementing the random number value by 1, it may also be configured to increment by 2 or more. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the performance control microcomputer 91 allows the interrupt process to be interrupted (step S4025). While the interrupt is allowed, the sub-side timer interrupt process (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the sub-CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. In other words, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed at each predetermined cycle. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed between the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process and the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The presentation control microcomputer 91 first performs a received command analysis process (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis process will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the presentation control microcomputer 91 performs a variable presentation process (step S4305). The variable presentation process sets a pre-variation command at a specific timing during the variable presentation to execute a specific display effect on the display screen 7a. Details will be described later. After the variable presentation process, the presentation control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch process, the presentation control microcomputer 91 sets the display content of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the presentation button detection switch 63a. After the switch process, the presentation control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the performance control microcomputer 91 transmits the various commands set in the performance command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 during the received command analysis process, etc., to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108. Having received the various commands, the image control board 100 uses the image display device 7 to execute display performances according to the received commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106, having received the various commands, executes audio performances by outputting audio from the speaker 67 according to the received commands. The lamp control board 107, having received the various commands, executes lamp performances by controlling the illumination of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received commands. After the command transmission process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4320) and terminates this process. Examples of other processing include random number update processing.

[Received command analysis process]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The performance control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If a pre-determination command has been received (step S4415: YES), a pre-reading performance determination process is performed (step S4420). The "pre-reading performance determination process" is a process that determines whether or not a pre-reading performance will be executed, and if so, the pre-reading performance pattern. Details of the pre-reading performance determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if a pre-determination command has not been received (step S4415: NO), the above-mentioned pre-reading performance determination process is skipped. The pre-reading performance is a performance that suggests that the newly stored reserved information in the special chart reserved memory area 85 is likely to contain a jackpot, and is executed during the variable performance.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether a reserved ball count command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If so (step S4445: YES), it performs reserved ball display processing (step S4450). In the reserved ball display processing, the values of the first special symbol reserved effect counter, second special symbol reserved effect counter, and regular symbol reserved effect counter, which are provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94, are updated based on the information contained in the reserved ball count command regarding the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2, and the number of reserved balls for regular symbol. This allows information on the number of reserved balls to be retained not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub-control board 90 side. Furthermore, the effect control microcomputer 91 updates the reserved images 9A and 9B displayed on the display screen 7a based on the values of the first special symbol reserved effect counter, second special symbol reserved effect counter, and regular symbol reserved effect counter. On the other hand, if the reserved ball count command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the reserved ball display process described above is skipped.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If a fluctuation start command has been received (step S4455: YES), the fluctuation effect start process is performed (step S4460). The "fluctuation effect start process" is a process for selecting the fluctuation effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the special pattern fluctuation. Details of the fluctuation effect start process will be described later. On the other hand, if a fluctuation start command has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation effect start process is skipped.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If a fluctuation stop command has been received (step S4465: YES), a fluctuation effect end process is performed (step S4470). The "fluctuation effect end process" is a process for stopping the fluctuation effect executed while the special symbol is fluctuating. In the fluctuation effect end process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a counter based on the analysis result of the fluctuation stop command, and sets a fluctuation effect end command to end the fluctuation effect. This causes the decorative symbol corresponding to the currently fluctuating special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 to be displayed frozen. The effect control microcomputer 91 also performs the pre-determination information shift process (Figure 39), which will be described later. Note that if a fluctuation stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation effect end process is skipped.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If so (step S4475: YES), an opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process for selecting the opening effect pattern (contents) to be executed when the special game (jackpot game) starts. In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command and sets information contained in the opening command regarding the special symbol stop pattern data set when the jackpot win was determined in the sub-RAM 94. Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 selects a preset opening effect pattern corresponding to the type of win indicated by the special symbol stop pattern data, and sets an opening effect start command to start the selected opening effect in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100 in the command sending process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads a specified opening effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Note that if an opening command has not been received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

The presentation control microcomputer 91 then determines whether a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If a round designation command has been received (step S4485: YES), a round designation pattern determination process is performed (step S4490). The "round designation pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an open game designation pattern (content) to be executed during the opening of the jackpot opening or during the interval between openings during a special game (jackpot game). In the round designation pattern determination process, the presentation control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command and sets information about the special symbol stop pattern data and the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. The presentation control microcomputer 91 then selects a pre-defined round designation pattern corresponding to the type of win and the number of rounds indicated by the special symbol stop pattern data, and sets a round designation start command to start the selected round designation in the designation command setting area 94b of the sub-RAM 94. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a specified round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. Note that if a round designation command has not been received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Next, the presentation control microcomputer 91 determines whether an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If so (step S4495: YES), an ending presentation pattern determination process is performed (step S4500). The "ending presentation pattern determination process" is a process for selecting the ending presentation pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a special game (a big win game or a small win game). In the ending presentation pattern determination process, the presentation control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command and sets information regarding the special symbol stop pattern data contained in the ending command in the sub-RAM 94. Then, it selects an ending presentation pattern according to the type of win indicated by the special symbol stop pattern data, and sets an ending presentation start command to start the selected ending presentation in the output buffer of the sub-RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a specified ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If no ending command has been received (step S4495: NO), the above-mentioned ending effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Next, the presentation control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when the presentation control microcomputer 91 receives a game state designation command, it stores information about the game state included in the game state designation command (such as whether the game is in a high probability state, whether the game is in a time-saving state, the values of the probability change counter and the time-saving counter) in the sub-RAM 94. Furthermore, when the presentation control microcomputer 91 receives a V-pass command, it stores information about V-pass in the sub-RAM 94. Furthermore, the presentation control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than those mentioned above (such as a customer waiting command or a RAM clear notification command), and then ends this processing.

[Pre-reading performance decision processing]
38 is a flowchart of the pre-reading effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a pre-determination information rewrite process (step S4601). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 stores the jackpot pre-determination result (jackpot determination information), the jackpot type pre-determination result (jackpot type information), and the fluctuation pattern pre-determination result (fluctuation pattern information) contained in the pre-determination command received from the main control board 80 in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

Figure 39 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the pre-determination information storage area 94c. The pre-determination information storage area 94c stores the jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and variation pattern information described above, as well as predictive display pattern information. The predictive display pattern information indicates the content of the predictive display executed during the variation display and is selected in step S4604, described below. Figure 39(A) shows a state in which the jackpot determination information "Miss" and variation pattern information "P72" and "P73" are stored in the first to third storage areas as pre-determination results corresponding to the first to third reserved special symbol 2 symbols, respectively, and the pre-determination results corresponding to the variations are stored in the corresponding areas. Figure 39(B) shows a state in which, from the state shown in Figure 39(A), a special symbol 2 symbol wins, and the pre-determination information included in the pre-determination command received from the main control board 80 is stored in the fourth storage area corresponding to the fourth reserved special symbol 2 symbol. Here, the pre-determination information stored includes the jackpot determination information "Jackpot," the jackpot type information "21H," and the variation pattern information "P61." Additionally, "Pattern A" is set as pre-reading effect pattern information in the first through fourth storage areas corresponding to the first through fourth reserved special chart 2 symbols and the corresponding area. Figure 39(C) shows the state after the variation has ended and the pre-determination information shift process has been executed from the state shown in Figure 39(B). Specifically, the pre-determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the corresponding area, the pre-determination information stored in the second through fourth storage areas is shifted to the first through third storage areas, and the pre-determination information in the fourth storage area is cleared. The pre-determination information shift process is executed during the variation effect end process (Figure 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, the effect control microcomputer 91 then determines whether or not pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in the relevant area or any of the first to fourth storage areas of the pre-determination information storage area 94c. If pre-reading effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this processing is terminated. In other words, if pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in the relevant area or any of the first to fourth storage areas of the pre-determination information storage area 94c, no new pre-reading effect pattern information is selected and stored. On the other hand, if pre-reading effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is a "jackpot" or a "miss with reach" (step S4603). Whether the result is a "jackpot" or a "miss with reach" can be determined, for example, by the result of the preliminary fluctuation pattern determination (fluctuation pattern information). If the preliminary determination result included in the received preliminary determination command is "miss with no reach" (step S4603: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 terminates this process. This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead effect. On the other hand, if the preliminary determination result included in the received preliminary determination command is a "jackpot" or a "miss with reach" (step S4603: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a look-ahead effect execution determination to determine whether to perform a look-ahead effect and selects a look-ahead effect pattern (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 obtains the value of the look-ahead effect random number counter and, by referencing the obtained random number value and the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub-ROM 93, determines whether to perform a look-ahead effect and, if a look-ahead effect is to be performed, the look-ahead effect pattern.

Figure 40 is a diagram illustrating the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In Figure 40, if the pre-determination result is "jackpot" and the look-ahead effect random number value is "0-55," the look-ahead effect will be "none." If the look-ahead effect random number value is "56-67," "Pattern A" will be selected as the look-ahead effect. If the look-ahead effect random number value is "68-127," "Pattern B" will be selected as the look-ahead effect. Also, if the pre-determination result is "reach with miss" and the look-ahead effect random number value is "0-107," the look-ahead effect will be "none." If the look-ahead effect random number value is "108-114," "Pattern A" will be selected as the look-ahead effect. If the look-ahead effect random number value is "115-127," "Pattern B" will be selected as the look-ahead effect. The type, content, and range of random number values selected for the look-ahead effect pattern can be set arbitrarily.

Returning to FIG. 38, if it is determined in step S4604 that a look-ahead effect will be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c, the look-ahead effect pattern is stored not only in the storage area corresponding to the received look-ahead command among the first to fourth storage areas, but also in the storage area before the corresponding storage area and in that area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39(B), not only is "Pattern A" set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received look-ahead command, but "Pattern A" is also set in the first to third storage areas and that area. As a result, look-ahead effect pattern A is also executed in the variable effect executed before the variable effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed (the variable effect corresponding to that area and the first to third storage areas). Note that whether or not a look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to that area depends on the progress of that variable effect. In other words, if the timing for executing the look-ahead effect has already passed in the variable effect, the look-ahead effect will not be executed, but if it is before the timing for executing the look-ahead effect, it will be executed at that time. This will be described later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect will not be executed (step S4605: NO), processing ends.

[Variable performance start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the variable effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variable effect start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets information about the special symbol stop symbol data included in the variable effect start command and information about the variable pattern in the sub-RAM 94. The set information includes game status information indicating the current game status and symbol information indicating the symbol as the result of the hit determination process for special symbol 1 or special symbol 2. The game status information and symbol information acquired here can be referenced by the effect control microcomputer 91 as appropriate.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a core effect pattern determination process (step S5010). The core effect pattern determination process is a process for determining the basic configuration of the variable effect (for example, the display and switching of background images on the image display device 7, the display and movement of specified characters, the output of melodies and sound effects using the speaker 67, and the lighting control of lamps). The variable effect is completed by superimposing additional effects such as chance-up effects and pre-reading effects on this core effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines the core effect pattern by referencing the core effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

Figure 42 is a diagram illustrating the core effect pattern determination table T52. Figure 42 shows multiple core effect patterns for normal reach effects, multiple core effect patterns for SP1 effects, multiple core effect patterns for SP2 effects, multiple core effect patterns for SP3 effects, multiple core effect patterns for SP4 effects, multiple core effect patterns for SP5 effects (dedicated reach effect patterns that produce pseudo-jackpot suggestion effects, described below), multiple core effect patterns for no-reach miss effects, and multiple core effect patterns for small win effects. The type of core effect pattern can be set arbitrarily. For example, if the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P1," a core effect pattern for SP1 effects is selected. Furthermore, if the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P72," a core effect pattern for no-reach miss effects is selected. Additionally, if the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P74," the core performance pattern that produces a small win performance will be selected.

Returning to Figure 41, after determining the core effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a chance-up effect pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining additional effects to be superimposed on the variable effects. The effect control microcomputer 91 obtains the value of the chance-up random number counter, and determines the chance-up effect pattern by referring to the obtained random number value and the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

Figure 43 is a diagram illustrating the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only the portion of the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 that determines the variation effect pattern of special chart 1 when the time-saving mode is not active is shown. In other words, Figure 43 shows the chance-up effect patterns that are executed when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1" to "P16." Note that the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 may or may not include a portion that determines the chance-up effect pattern that is executed when the variation pattern is "P21" to "P34," "P41" to "P56," or "P61" to "P74."

In Figure 43, the chance-up effect patterns set are "2-NO", "2-SP1", "2-SP2", "2-SP3", "3-NO", "3-SP1", "3-SP2", "3-SP3", "4-NO", "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3", and "ANO". These chance effect patterns correspond to the various chance-up effects described below.

Returning to Figure 41, after determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 may further refer to the random number value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54 to determine a combination of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to be displayed as stopped symbols. This determines the type of effect to be used as the variable effect.

The performance control microcomputer 91 sets a variable performance start command in the performance command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 so that a variable performance based on the variable performance pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5015 above is realized (step S5020). When the variable performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 is sent to the image control board 100 in the command sending process (Figure 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads the variable performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the variable performance timer (step S5030) and ends this process. The variable performance timer is set to a variable time (Figure 42) corresponding to the variable performance pattern included in the variable performance start command. For example, when the variable performance pattern is "P1," the variable performance timer is set to "40 seconds."

[Processing during variable performance]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the processing during the variable effect (FIG. 36: step S4305). The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variable effect is in progress (step S4701). Whether or not a variable effect is in progress can be determined, for example, by whether or not the variable effect timer has reached zero. If a variable effect is not in progress (step S4701: NO), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if a variable effect is in progress (step S4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is time to set a pre-variation end command in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command that the effect control microcomputer 91 uses to notify the image control board 100 and other devices that a specific timing has occurred during the variable effect. Upon receiving the pre-variation end command, the image control board 100 switches the effect content, displays a specific image, or performs other actions according to the information contained in the pre-variation end command.

If it is not the time to set a pre-variation end command (step S4702: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is the time to set a pre-variation end command (step S4702: YES), a determination is made as to whether or not there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the corresponding area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the corresponding area (step S4703: YES), a pre-variation end command including the pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the corresponding area (step S4703: NO), a pre-variation end command not including the pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, if there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the corresponding area, a pre-variation end command including the pre-reading effect pattern information is sent to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the corresponding variation effect. The image control microcomputer 101 then starts a preview effect that displays a preview effect image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even if there is no preview effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command is sent to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variation. Here, if a preview image is already being displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a preview fade effect that fades the preview image.

8. Operation of the Image Control Microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. 45. The buffers and other components mentioned in the description of the operation of the image control microcomputer 101 are provided in RAM 104. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the display control process. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a program from ROM 103, and after CPU initialization processing, the display control processing is repeatedly executed. In the display control processing, the image control microcomputer 101 first determines whether a variable effect start command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5001). If a variable effect start command has been received (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the variable effect display (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variable effect start command, reads out from the ROM 103 a predetermined variable effect image instructed in the variable effect start command, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, if the command has not been received (step S5001: NO), the above-mentioned process is skipped.

Next, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether a pre-variation end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5003). If a pre-variation end command has been received (step S5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 initiates a pre-reading effect display (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the pre-variation end command, and if the pre-variation end command contains pre-variation effect pattern information, it reads a predetermined pre-variation effect image from ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Furthermore, even if the pre-variation end command does not contain pre-variation effect pattern information, if a preview image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a preview fade effect is performed in which the preview image fades. On the other hand, if a pre-variation end command has not been received (step S5003: NO), the above processing is skipped.

Next, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether a variable effect end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5005). If a variable effect end command has been received (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads from ROM 103 an image in which the variable effect has been stopped, and displays the stopped variable effect on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (step S5006). On the other hand, if a variable effect end command has not been received (step S5005: NO), the above-mentioned processing is skipped.

Next, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S5007). In other processing, for example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives an opening performance start command, it reads from ROM 103 the predetermined opening performance image specified in the opening performance start command and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Furthermore, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives a round performance start command, it reads from ROM 103 the predetermined round performance image specified in the round performance start command and displays it on the display screen 7a. Furthermore, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives an ending performance start command, it reads from ROM 103 the predetermined ending performance image specified in the ending performance start command and displays it on the display screen 7a, and then ends this processing.

9. Operation of the Movable Board and Display Effects on the Sub-Display Screen 64 Using Figures 46 to 49, the operation of the movable board (first movable role device 14, second movable role device 15, and third movable role device 13) and the display effects on the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U) will be described. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs drive control to operate the first movable role device 14, second movable role device 15, and third movable role device 13 during game performance (display performance) and in the initial operation when powered on. The effect control microcomputer 91 also performs display effects to display specific images on the sub-display screen 64 during game performance (display performance) and in the initial operation when powered on.

Figure 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second aspect of the third movable part 13. The third movable part 13 includes a left-side movable part 13L and a right-side movable part 13R. The left-side movable part 13L and the right-side movable part 13R are each configured to be movable left and right, and have ring-shaped decorative parts (left and right decorative parts) attached to their tips. That is, the left and right decorative parts each have a ring shape. The left and right decorative parts each have a transparent circular part inside the ring shape. As shown in Figure 1, the third movable part 13 can be stationary in a retracted position (home position) where the left-side movable part 13L is stored to the left of the display screen 7a and the right-side movable part 13R is stored to the right of the display screen 7a (first aspect). At this time, a portion of each of the left-side movable part 13L and the right-side movable part 13R is visible. The third movable accessory 13 advances from the state shown in FIG. 1 to the retracted position (deployed position) as shown in FIG. 46, with the left and right movable accessory parts 13L and 13R each moving toward the center of the display screen 7a (moving closer to each other). In this expanded position, the left and right decorative parts approach each other, forming a single decorative element (combined accessory) (second mode). Here, the combined accessory forms eyeglasses. That is, the left decorative part and the transparent part correspond to the left frame and lens, and the right decorative part and the transparent part correspond to the right frame and lens. In this second mode, the combined accessory formed by the left and right decorative parts covers a portion of the center of the display screen 7a on the front of the image display device 7 and remains stationary, allowing the display screen 7a to be viewed through the transparent part. The third movable accessory 13 can move from the expanded position shown in FIG. 46 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1 and remain stationary there.

Figure 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second aspect of the first movable part 14. As shown in Figure 47, the first movable part 14 includes a left-side movable part 14L and a right-side movable part 14R. The left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R are each configured to be movable left and right, and half of a ring-shaped decorative part (the left decorative part and the right decorative part) is attached to the tip. In other words, the left decorative part and the right decorative part each have an arc shape that is half of a ring. As shown in Figure 1, the first movable part 14 can be stationary in a retracted position (home position) where the left-side movable part 14L is stored to the left of the display screen 7a and the right-side movable part 14R is stored to the right of the display screen 7a (first aspect). At this time, a portion of each of the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R is visible. As shown in FIG. 47, the first movable role 14 advances from the state shown in FIG. 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a (in the direction toward each other), with the left and right movable roles 14L and 14R moving forward from the state shown in FIG. 1 to the advanced position (deployed position), where the left and right decorative parts combine to form a single decorative element (combined role) (second mode). Here, the combined role forms the outline of a face. In this second mode, the combined role, formed by combining the left and right decorative parts, rests in front of the image display device 7, covering a portion of the display screen 7a near the center and allowing the display screen 7a to be viewed through the opening in the center. In other words, the combined role forms only the outline of a face, with no central portion of the face, allowing the display screen 7a to be viewed instead. An image of a face is then displayed on the display screen 7a corresponding to the opening in the center of the combined role, completing the overall appearance of a human face. In other words, by displaying the missing part of the combined reel (for example, the center part of a face) as an image on the display screen 7a, it is possible to perform a combination performance of reels and images that complete a single object (for example, a human face). The first movable reel 14 can move from the advanced position shown in Figure 47 to the retracted position shown in Figure 1, and can stop there.

Figure 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second mode of the second movable part 15. The second movable part 15 has a rectangular decorative part marked "OARO" and is configured to be movable up and down. As shown in Figure 1, the second movable part 15 can be stopped in a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, a portion of the second movable part 15 becomes difficult to see. The second movable part 15 can move downward from the state shown in Figure 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a and can be stopped in the extended position (deployed position) shown in Figure 48 (second mode). In this second mode, the decorative part stops in front of the image display device 7, covering the center of the display screen 7a. The second movable part 15 can move upward (retract) from the extended position shown in Figure 48 to the retracted position shown in Figure 1, where it can be stopped.

Figure 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating display effects on the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U). The right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U can each display images independently. They can also display effects linked to the images on the display screen 7a.

10. Examples of Presentation, Effect, Modification, and Mode of the Present Embodiment Below, each example of presentation (display presentation example, role-moving presentation example) of the present embodiment will be described. Also, examples of effects, modifications, and modes for the presentation examples will be described. As described above, the presentations described below are realized by the presentation control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101) based on various information (jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81. The following display presentation examples are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Also, the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display presentation examples.

The pending icon switching effects A and B are explained below using Figures 50 to 52. The pending icon switching effect can be executed during the decorative pattern change effect, for example. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the pending icon switching effect, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Hold icon switching effect A]
50 and 51 are diagrams illustrating the pending icon switching effect A. The pending icon switching effect is an effect in which the status of multiple pending icons changes. The status of the pending icons includes the shape, color, movement, size, etc. of the pending icon. In the pending icon switching effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 50(A), in the normal state, three pending icons 9A and a variable icon (the pending icon in question) 9C are displayed while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner. All three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round (spherical) shape. In this state, when the game ball enters the fixed winning device (center) 19, a new fourth pending icon 9A is displayed on the far left, as shown in FIG. 50(B). At this time, the newly displayed pending icon has a star shape.

Next, as shown in FIG. 50(C), of the three round hold icons 9A displayed before the fourth hold icon 9A was added, the shape of the leftmost hold icon 9A (the third hold icon from the right) changes from a round to a star. Then, as shown in FIG. 50(D), the second hold icon 9A from the right changes from a round to a star, and as shown in FIG. 50(E), the first hold icon 9A from the right (the rightmost) changes from a round to a star. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 50(A) to (E), when a fourth hold icon 9A is newly added and displayed in a star shape, all previously displayed hold icons 9A change from a round to a star, starting with the one closest to the fourth hold icon. Here, the shapes of the three previously displayed hold icons change sequentially based on the prediction of the winning combination corresponding to the fourth hold icon.

Next, as shown in Figure 50 (F), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the round-shaped variable icon (the pending icon in question) 9C disappears. After that, as shown in Figure 50 (G), the four star-shaped variable icons 9A shift to the right, and the rightmost variable icon 9A moves to the variable icon display area (the pending display area in question, the pending consumption image display area) and becomes variable icon 9C. At the same time, the next variable begins. Here, along with the display of the variable decorative patterns, a mini-game video is played in which a humanoid character catches a star-shaped icon falling from above. The shape (star) of the icon falling from above corresponds to the shape (star) of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon in question) 9C. In other words, when a variable corresponding to a star-shaped variable icon occurs (when the pending consumption of the star-shaped variable icon occurs), a mini-game video in which this star-shaped icon falls is played.

As shown in Figure 50(H), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the star-shaped variable icon 9C disappears. When the humanoid character catches four star-shaped icons in the mini-game, the number of points equal to the number of icons caught is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. The number of points is represented by the number of black stars. Here, during this fluctuation, a game ball enters the fixed winning device (center) 19, and a new fourth reserved icon 9A is displayed on the far left. At this time, the newly displayed reserved icon has a round (spherical) shape. In other words, reserved icons that are displayed after the star-shaped reserved icon that was the subject of the pre-read (the star-shaped reserved icon 9A in Figure 50(B), the third reserved icon from the right in Figure 50(H)) are represented in a round shape.

As shown in Figure 50 (I), one round and three star-shaped hold icons 9A shift to the right, and the rightmost hold icon 9A (star-shaped) moves to the variable icon display area (the relevant hold display area) and becomes variable icon 9C. At the same time, the next change begins. When the change begins, a mini-game video similar to that shown in Figure 50 (G) is executed. In other words, because this time the change corresponds to the star-shaped variable icon 9C, a mini-game effect is executed in which star-shaped icons whose shape corresponds to the variable icons fall.

As shown in Figure 50 (J), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the star-shaped variable icon 9C disappears. If the doll character fails to catch a star-shaped icon (catches 0) during the mini-game, the points displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a do not change. In other words, the number of black stars does not change. Here, during this fluctuation, a game ball enters the fixed winning device (center) 19, and a new fourth reserved icon 9A is displayed on the far left. At this time, the newly displayed reserved icon has a round (spherical) shape. In other words, the reserved icon displayed after the star-shaped reserved icon that was the subject of the pre-read (the second reserved icon 9A from the right in Figure 50 (J)) is represented in a round shape, and therefore becomes the second round-shaped reserved icon.

Next, as shown in Figure 51 (A), the two round and two star-shaped hold icons 9A shift to the right, and the rightmost hold icon 9A (star-shaped) moves to the variable icon display area (the relevant hold display area) and becomes variable icon 9C. At the same time, the next change begins. When the change begins, a mini-game video similar to that shown in Figure 50 (G) is executed. In other words, because this time the change corresponds to the star-shaped variable icon 9C, a mini-game effect is executed in which star-shaped icons whose shape corresponds to the variable icons fall.

As shown in Figure 51 (B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the star-shaped variable icon 9C disappears. When the doll character catches two icons in the mini-game, the points displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a increase by two to six. In other words, the number of accumulated black stars becomes six. Here, during this fluctuation, a game ball enters the fixed winning device (center) 19, and a new fourth reserved icon 9A is displayed on the far left. At this time, the newly displayed reserved icon has a round (spherical) shape. In other words, the reserved icon displayed after the star-shaped reserved icon that was the subject of the pre-read (the first reserved icon 9A in Figure 51 (B)) is represented in a round shape, and therefore becomes the third round reserved icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 51(C), the three round and one star-shaped hold icons 9A shift to the right, and the rightmost hold icon 9A (star-shaped) moves to the variable icon display area (the relevant hold display area) and becomes variable icon 9C. In other words, the hold icon that was the target of the pre-read becomes a variable icon, and the corresponding variable begins. When the variable begins, an icon image ICG that resembles the round hold icon 9C and is larger than the hold icon 9C is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Six black star-shaped images representing points then move toward this icon image ICG and are absorbed into the icon image ICG. The icon image ICG changes color in sequence according to the number of black star-shaped images it absorbs. The color changes from a color indicating a low probability of winning a jackpot to a color indicating a high probability of winning a jackpot. For example, the order is blue → green → red. As a result, the more black star-shaped images it absorbs, the higher the probability of winning a jackpot the icon image ICG becomes.

As shown in Figure 51 (D), when the absorption of points (black star-shaped images) is complete, the icon image ICG moves toward the position where variable icon 9C is displayed. Here, a winning game ball occurs during this fluctuation, and a new fourth hold icon 9A is displayed on the far left. At this time, the newly displayed hold icon has a round (spherical) shape. In other words, a new hold icon displayed after the star-shaped hold icon that was the subject of the pre-read (variable icon 9C in Figure 51 (D)) is represented in a round shape, and therefore becomes the fourth round-shaped hold icon.

The icon image ICG moves while shrinking, comes into contact with the variable icon 9C, and becomes the variable icon 9C as shown in Figure 51 (E). After that, as shown in Figure 51 (F), the decorative pattern is displayed stationary, and the variation corresponding to this variable icon 9C ends.

In Figure 51 (G), the four round pending icons 9A shift to the right, and the rightmost pending icon 9A (round) moves to the variable icon display area (the relevant variable display area) and becomes variable icon 9C. At the same time, the next variation begins, but the mini-game video is not performed. In other words, since this is the variation corresponding to the round variable icon 9C, the mini-game video in which star-shaped icons, whose shape does not correspond to the variable icons, fall is not performed.

As shown in Figure 51 (H), at a specific timing during the change, the shape of the three hold icons 9A will all (simultaneously) change from a circle to a star. If a game ball subsequently enters during this change, a new fourth hold icon 9A will be displayed on the far left, as shown in Figure 51 (I). At this time, the newly displayed hold icon will have a circle shape. In other words, the new hold icon displayed after the hold icons 9A have all simultaneously changed from a circle to a star shape will be represented in a circle shape. Then, as shown in Figure 81 (J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R will stop and the round-shaped variable icon 9C will disappear.

[Hold icon switching effect B]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon switching effect B. The hold icon switching effect is an effect in which the state of multiple hold icons switches. The state of the hold icon includes the shape, color, movement, size, etc. of the hold icon. In the hold icon switching effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 52 (A), in the normal state, three hold icons 9A and a variable icon (the hold icon in question) 9C are displayed while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner. All three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round (spherical) shape.

In this state, when the game ball enters the fixed winning device (center) 19, a new fourth hold icon 9A is displayed on the far left, as shown in Figure 52 (B). At this time, the newly displayed hold icon has a shape representing the Roman letter "G." At the same time as this fourth hold icon 9A is newly displayed, the shape of all other hold icons 9A changes from a round shape to a G shape. Here, the shapes of the three hold icons that were previously displayed change simultaneously due to the prediction of the winning event corresponding to the fourth hold icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52(C), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the round-shaped variable icon 9C disappears. Then, as shown in FIG. 52(D), the four G-shaped reserved icons 9A shift to the right, and the rightmost reserved icon 9A moves to the variable icon display area (the reserved display area in question, the reserved consumption image display area) and becomes variable icon 9C. At the same time, the next variation begins. Here, along with the display of the decorative pattern variations, a battle image between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed. The name of the ally character CRA (here, "GORO") corresponds to the shape (G-shaped) of the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon (the reserved icon in question) 9C. In other words, when a variation occurs corresponding to a G-shaped variable icon, an image related to this "G" (here, the name of the ally character CRA includes a G) is displayed (a battle image including the ally character CRA).

As shown in Figure 52 (E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the G-shaped variable icon 9C disappears. In the battle video, when ally character CRA defeats (wins) enemy character CRB, the number of wins (points) is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. The number of wins (points) is represented by the number of black stars. Here, during this fluctuation, a game ball enters the fixed winning device (center) 19, and a new fourth reserve icon 9A is displayed on the far left. At this time, the newly added reserve icon displayed has a round (spherical) shape. In other words, reserve icons displayed after the G-shaped reserve icon that was the subject of the pre-read (the third reserve icon 9A from the right in Figure 52 (E)) are represented by a round shape.

As shown in Figure 52 (F), one round and three G-shaped hold icons 9A shift to the right, and the rightmost hold icon 9A (G-shaped) moves to the variable icon display area (the relevant hold display area) and becomes variable icon 9C. At the same time, the next change begins. When the change begins, a battle video similar to that shown in Figure 52 (D) is executed. That is, because this time the change corresponds to the G-shaped variable icon 9C, an effect is executed in which an image corresponding to the variable icon appears. That is, a battle effect is executed in which an ally character CRA with the name "GORO", which includes the Roman letter "G" represented by the variable icon, appears.

As shown in Figure 52 (G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the G-shaped variable icon 9C disappears. In the battle video, when ally character CRA loses (is defeated) to enemy character CRB, the number of wins displayed on the right side of display screen 7a does not change. In other words, the number of black stars does not change. Here, during this fluctuation, a game ball enters the fixed winning device (center) 19, and a new fourth reserve icon 9A is displayed on the far left. At this time, the newly displayed reserve icon has a round (spherical) shape. In other words, the reserve icon displayed after the G-shaped reserve icon that was the subject of the pre-read (the reserve icon 9A second from the right in Figure 52 (G)) is represented in a round shape, and therefore becomes the second round-shaped reserve icon.

Next, the two round and two G-shaped hold icons 9A shift to the right, and the rightmost hold icon 9A (G-shaped) moves to the variable icon display area (the relevant hold display area) and becomes variable icon 9C. At the same time, the next change begins. When the change begins, a battle video similar to that shown in Figure 52 (D) is executed. That is, because this time the change corresponds to the G-shaped variable icon 9C, an effect is executed in which an image corresponding to the variable icon appears. That is, a battle effect is executed in which an ally character CRA with the name "GORO", which includes the Roman letter "G" represented by the variable icon, appears.

As shown in Figure 52 (H), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop and the G-shaped variable icon 9C disappears. In the battle video, when ally character CRA defeats (wins) enemy character CRB, the number of wins displayed on the right side of display screen 7a increases by one to two. In other words, the number of accumulated black stars becomes six.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52(I), the two round and one G-shaped hold icons 9A shift to the right, and the rightmost hold icon 9A (G-shaped) moves to the variable icon display area (the relevant hold display area) and becomes variable icon 9C. In other words, the hold icon that was the target of the pre-read becomes a variable icon, and the corresponding variable begins. When the variable begins, an icon image ICG that resembles the round hold icon 9C and is larger than the hold icon 9C is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Then, two black star-shaped images representing the number of wins move toward this icon image ICG and are absorbed into the icon image ICG. The icon image ICG changes color in sequence according to the number of black star-shaped images it absorbs. The color changes from a color indicating a low probability of winning to a color indicating a high probability of winning. For example, blue → green → red. As a result, the more black star-shaped images it absorbs, the higher the probability of winning the icon image ICG becomes.

As shown in Figure 52 (J), when the icon image ICG finishes absorbing the point (black star-shaped image), it moves toward the position where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The icon image ICG shrinks as it moves, comes into contact with the variable icon 9C, and becomes the variable icon 9C.

[Example of effect]
Below is an example of the effect of the hold icon switching presentation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 50(C) to 50(E), a first effect is executed in which the three round-shaped reserved icons 9A change from round to star-shaped. After the first effect, a second effect is executed in which a new round-shaped reserved icon is additionally displayed as shown in Figure 50(H). After the second effect, a third effect is executed in which the additionally displayed round-shaped reserved icon and the three star-shaped reserved icons shift as shown in Figure 50(I). This configuration allows for unprecedented and innovative effects that can visually entertain players and increase their interest. The same applies to Figure 52.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 52 (B), in the first effect, the three circular reserved icons change from a circular shape to a G shape when a new reserved icon is added and displayed. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained by an unprecedented and innovative effect, thereby increasing the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 50 and 51, in the first effect, the three circular reserved icons change from a circular shape to a star shape based on the prediction corresponding to the new reserved icon, and the new reserved icon is also displayed in a star shape. This configuration allows for a visually entertaining and exciting experience for the player through a novel effect not previously seen. The same is true for Figure 52.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 50(G)-(J) and 51(A)-(B), after the third effect, during the fluctuation corresponding to the consumption of the reserved star-shaped icon, a fourth effect is executed using an image corresponding to the image represented by the reserved star-shaped icon. This configuration allows for unprecedented and innovative effects that can visually entertain the player and increase their interest. The same is true for Figure 52.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 51(C) to 51(E), in the fourth effect, points are accumulated during multiple variations, and during the variation corresponding to the last of the star-shaped reserved icons, the last reserved icon is changed to a form corresponding to the accumulated points. This configuration allows for unprecedented and innovative effects that can visually entertain players and increase their interest. The same is true for Figure 52.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 50(H), (J), 51(B), and (D), if a new winning occurs during the fourth presentation, a new reserved icon of the first type is additionally displayed. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained by an unprecedented and innovative presentation, and can increase the player's interest. The same is true for Figure 52.

[Modification]
Below are some variations on the pending icon switching presentation.
[Modification 1]
In the hold icon switching performance A, as shown in Figures 50(A) to (E), when a fourth hold icon 9A is newly added and displayed in a star shape, all previously displayed hold icons 9A change from round to star shape, while the variable icon 9C remains unchanged. However, in Figures 50(A) to (E), when a fourth hold icon 9A is newly added and displayed in a star shape and all previously displayed hold icons 9A change from round to star shape, the variable icon 9C may also change to a star shape. The same is true for the hold icon switching performance B (Figure 52).

[Modification 2]
In hold icon switching performance A, as shown in Figures 50(A) to 50(E), when a fourth hold icon 9A is newly added and displayed in a star shape, all previously displayed hold icons 9A change from a round shape to a star shape. However, in Figures 50(A) to 50(E), the fourth hold icon 9A may first be newly added and displayed in a round shape, then change to a star shape, and then all previously displayed hold icons 9A may change from a round shape to a star shape. The same applies to hold icon switching performance B (Figure 52). In Figure 52, the fourth hold icon 9A may be newly added and displayed in a round shape, and then all hold icons 9A, including the newly added hold icon, may change from a round shape to a star shape simultaneously.

[Modification 3]
The hold icon switching effects A and B are executed in the normal state. However, the hold icon switching effects A and B may be executed in the time-saving state. In this case, the effects executed by the hold icon 9A of the hold icon switching effects A and B may be executed by the hold icon 9B.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
A first effect in which the plurality of hold icons are switched from a first state to a second state;
After the first effect, a second effect in which a new hold icon of the first aspect is additionally displayed;
After the second effect, a third effect can be executed in which the hold icon of the first aspect and the plurality of hold icons of the second aspect that are additionally displayed are shifted.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A1-1,
In the first performance, the plurality of hold icons are switched from the first mode to the second mode at the timing when a new hold icon is additionally displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A1-2,
In the first performance, the plurality of hold icons are switched from the first mode to the second mode by a pre-read corresponding to the new hold icon, and the new hold icon is also displayed in the second mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A1-1 to A1-3,
After the third performance, during a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to the pending consumption of the plurality of pending icons of the second aspect, a fourth performance using an image corresponding to the image represented by the pending icon of the second aspect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A1-4,
In the fourth performance, points are accumulated during the plurality of variations, and during a variation corresponding to the last reserved icon among the plurality of reserved icons of the second aspect, the last reserved icon is changed to an aspect corresponding to the accumulated points.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A1-4 or A1-5,
If a new winning occurs during the fourth performance, a new hold icon of the first aspect is further displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The following explains the change icon acquisition effects A to C using Figures 53 to 55. In Figures 53 to 55, for ease of viewing, the first movable device 14, second movable device 15, and other movable devices arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted.

This change icon acquisition effect can be executed across multiple change effects (change displays) using decorative patterns. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (e.g., a change effect start command, a pre-determination command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a change icon acquisition effect is included, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The background image used in the transformation icon acquisition performance (referred to as a "specific background image") is a specific image not included in the normal background image, such as an image of the moon's surface, space, or the interior of a spaceship. The normal background image is a normal image such as a city image, forest image, ocean image, ocean floor image, or underground image. The specific background image and normal background image may be a still image or a video.

Here, we will first explain change icon acquisition effect A, then change icon acquisition effect B, and then change icon acquisition effect C.

[Change Icon Acquisition Performance A]
The change icon acquisition effect A will be described with reference to Fig. 53. Fig. 53 is a diagram for explaining the change icon acquisition effect A. The change icon acquisition effect A is performed over a plurality of change effects (change displays) using decorative patterns.

First, as shown in FIG. 53(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a left 3D decorative symbol 8L, a center 3D decorative symbol 8C, and a right 3D decorative symbol 8R, spinning from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a decorative symbol (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") variation effect (variable display) begins. When the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) begins, the stopped decorative symbol gradually increases in speed from a low speed, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state and changing at high speed. This allows the background image behind the decorative symbol to be viewed through the rapidly changing translucent decorative symbol. The decorative symbol slows down just before stopping, changing from a translucent state back to an opaque state, and then temporarily stops and then stops (temporarily stops and then stops and displays). When temporarily stops, the decorative symbol moves slowly up and down.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R currently changing as the first special symbol is consumed are displayed in the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area is provided for the first special symbol hold in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed in four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), allowing a maximum of four hold icons to be stored. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad.

Note that while the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, they may be the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the variable display position 9Cd is larger than the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the hold display position 9Ad (the vertical distance dimension is the same for both). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed in the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed in the hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icons are displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one hold icon that has not been consumed and is stored.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol change presentation (change display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the top center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, at the top center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, and are therefore difficult to distinguish from the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, these numbers are positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with the other images displayed behind them, so visibility is not obstructed by the other images.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icons are further set with increasing expectations of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

In Figure 53 (A), the decorative pattern change effect (change display) begins, and when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 20 and the change icon acquisition effect A begins due to the pre-reading effect, as shown in Figure 53 (B), the change display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the area where the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are displayed and the surrounding area become difficult to see (disappear) due to the flash FH. Note that as a result of the gaming ball entering the first starting hole 20, two hold icons 9A now exist.

For the sake of convenience, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

As the flashing light FH disappears, the presence of the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A can be seen, and at this time, the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A change before and after the flashing light FH is displayed.

Specifically, before the flashing FH is displayed, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd is a rectangular image positioned below the variable display position 9Cd, as shown in FIG. 53(B), whereas after the flashing FH is displayed, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd is an image in which only the four corners of the square shape surrounding the variable icon 9C are represented by white lines, as shown in FIG. 53(C). Also, before the flashing FH is displayed, the shapes of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are rectangular images positioned below the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, as shown in FIG. 53(B), whereas after the flashing FH is displayed, the shapes of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are an image in which only the bottom two corners of the square shape surrounding the hold icon 9A are represented by white lines, as shown in FIG. 53(C).

The shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad after the flashing FH is displayed are the shapes of specific display positions used in the effect of the variable icon acquisition effect A, and by displaying the shape of the variable display position 9Cd after the flashing FH and the shape of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad after the flashing FH are different, it is possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A. Furthermore, the change in shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad can also inform the player that the variable icon acquisition effect A has begun.

Furthermore, before the flashing FH is displayed, the variable icon 9C and reserved icon 9A are white spherical icons as shown in Figure 53 (B), whereas after the flashing FH is displayed, the variable icon 9C and reserved icon 9A are an effect button image (unlit) that resembles the effect button 63 as shown in Figure 53 (C). This effect button image is an image that prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, and does not indicate the expected probability of a win; it is a specific icon used in the effect in the variable icon acquisition effect A. In other words, the variable icon 9C and reserved icon 9A are switched to the same specific icon in the variable icon acquisition effect A.

In Figure 53 (C), when the flash FH disappears from the display screen 7a and the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, as well as the variable icon 9C and hold icon 9A, change, a message MG1 reading "Press the button to get the variable icon!" is displayed in small letters in a single line on the display screen 7a above the variable icon 9C and hold icon 9A. At this point, the effect button images of the variable icon 9C and hold icon 9A are all unlit, and even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, no effect is reflected.

After that, as shown in Figure 53(D), the left decorative pattern 8L stops and displays the number "1," the middle decorative pattern 8C stops and displays the number "2," and the right decorative pattern 8R stops and displays the number "3," resulting in a miss. Message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and as the variable effect (variable display) ends, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. In Figures 53(A) to 53(D), a city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a as the normal background image.

Next, the display screen 7a switches from the normal background image (city image THG1) to the specific background image (moon image THG2). As shown in FIG. 53(E), the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C. The variable icon 9C, which is the effect button image, begins to flash, informing the player that the operation (pressing) of the effect button 63 has been activated and prompting the player to operate (press) the effect button 63. At this time, a message MG1 reading "Press the button to acquire the variable icon!" appears in two lines in large letters (approximately four times the size of small letters) in the center of the display screen 7a. The variable areas of the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are rapidly displayed (varied). The left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are difficult to see during fluctuations.

Then, the message MG1, which was displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in large letters (approximately four times the size of the small letters) saying "Press the button to acquire a variation icon!", moves to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a and shrinks, displaying it in two lines, smaller than the large letters but larger than the small letters (approximately twice the size of the small letters). Thus, the display format of the message MG1 includes a single line in small letters as shown in FIG. 53(C), a two-line display in large letters (approximately four times the size of the small letters) as shown in FIG. 53(E), and a two-line display after FIG. 53(E) in larger letters than the small letters (approximately twice the size of the small letters). For a total of three display formats, the same content is displayed in three display formats during the variation icon acquisition effect A, making it possible to clearly and emphatically communicate the content of the message MG1 to the player using a novel method of expression.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53(F), when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds after the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R begin changing (changing display)) has elapsed without the player operating (pressing) the effect button 63, a message MG2 informing the player of whether or not a changing icon was acquired is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In this case, if a changing icon was not acquired, a message MG2 saying "Sorry!" is displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed as the number "2," the center decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as the number "1," and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as the number "3," resulting in a loss, and the changing icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the changing display (changing display) ends.

Next, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the effect button image that is the variable icon 9C begins to flash, informing the player that the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 has been validated and prompting them to operate (press) the effect button 63. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are rapidly changed (displayed as a variable).

Next, as shown in FIG. 53(G), when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds after the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R begin to change (change display)) has passed without the player operating (pressing) the effect button 63, a message MG2 informing the player of whether or not the change icon was acquired is displayed again in the center of the display screen 7a. In this case, the change icon was acquired and the message MG2 saying "Got it!" is displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R continue to change (change display) at high speed, and the change icon 9C does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Next, when message MG2 disappears from the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 53(H), a change icon HI is stocked and displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in Figure 53(I), the white spherical icon that was displayed as an icon increases in size by approximately 1.5 times and appears in the center of the display screen 7a accompanied by a flash of light, as shown in Figure 53(I). Then, when the stocked change icon HI is activated, lightning strikes from the change icon HI toward the white spherical icon that has appeared, and the size of the white spherical icon that has appeared increases, reaching a maximum size of approximately four times the size of the white spherical icon that was displayed as an icon.

After that, as shown in Figure 53 (J), the change icon HI disappears from the display screen 7a and changes from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, which then shrinks and moves towards the change display position 9Cd where the flashing change icon 9C, which is the effect button image, is displayed.

Then, as shown in Figure 53(K), the variable icon 9C, which is an effect button image, switches to a star-shaped icon. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, whose four corners of the square shape are represented by white lines, and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, whose two lower corners of the four square shapes are represented by white lines, disappear from the display screen 7a. After this, the message MG1 also disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that although the star-shaped icon shrinks as it moves, it is larger than the white spherical icon displayed in Figure 53(a), and is approximately 1.5 times larger.

After that, as shown in Figure 53(L), the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched back from the lunar surface image THG2 to the normal background image, the city image THG1 (at this time, the normal background image may be switched from the city image THG1 to another normal image, such as an underground image), and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which had been moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, return to their original variable areas and are rapidly variable (variable display), and the variable display position 9Cd of the rectangular image and the first to fourth pending display positions 9Ad of the rectangular image are again displayed on the display screen 7a. This ends the variable icon acquisition effect A. After the change icon acquisition effect A, various effects may continue, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern, a jackpot is awarded and the jackpot game (jackpot effect) begins, whereas when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed as the same pattern, a miss occurs.

[Change Icon Acquisition Performance B]
Next, the change icon acquisition effect B will be described with reference to Fig. 54. Fig. 54 is a diagram for explaining the change icon acquisition effect B. The change icon acquisition effect B is performed over a plurality of change effects (change displays) using decorative patterns.

First, as shown in FIG. 54(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a left three-dimensional decorative symbol 8L, a center three-dimensional decorative symbol 8C, and a right three-dimensional decorative symbol 8R, spinning from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a decorative symbol (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") variation effect (variable display) begins. When the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) begins, the stopped decorative symbol gradually increases in speed from a low speed, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state, and changing at high speed. This allows the background image behind the decorative symbol to be viewed through the rapidly changing translucent decorative symbol. The decorative symbol slows down just before stopping, changing from a translucent state back to an opaque state, and then temporarily stops and then stops (temporarily stops and then stops and displays). When temporarily stops, the decorative symbol moves slowly up and down.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R currently changing as the first special symbol is consumed are displayed in the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area is provided for the first special symbol hold in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed in four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), allowing a maximum of four hold icons to be stored. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad.

Note that while the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, they may be the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the variable display position 9Cd is larger than the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the hold display position 9Ad (the vertical distance dimension is the same for both). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed in the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed in the hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icons are displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one hold icon that has not been consumed and is stored.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol change presentation (change display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the top center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, at the top center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, and are therefore difficult to distinguish from the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, these numbers are positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with the other images displayed behind them, so visibility is not obstructed by the other images.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icons are further set with increasing expectations of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

In Figure 54 (A), the decorative pattern change effect (change display) begins, and when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 20 and the change icon acquisition effect B begins due to the pre-reading effect, as shown in Figure 54 (B), the change display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the area where the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are displayed and the surrounding area become difficult to see (disappear) due to the flash FH. Note that as a result of the gaming ball entering the first starting hole 20, two hold icons 9A now exist.

For the sake of convenience, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

As the flashing light FH disappears, the presence of the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A can be seen, and at this time, the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A change before and after the flashing light FH is displayed.

Specifically, before the flashing FH is displayed, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd is a rectangular image positioned below the variable display position 9Cd, as shown in FIG. 54(B), whereas after the flashing FH is displayed, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd is an image in which only the four corners of the square shape surrounding the variable icon 9C are represented by white lines, as shown in FIG. 54(C). Also, before the flashing FH is displayed, the shapes of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are rectangular images positioned below the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, as shown in FIG. 54(B), whereas after the flashing FH is displayed, the shapes of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are an image in which only the bottom two corners of the square shape surrounding the hold icon 9A are represented by white lines, as shown in FIG. 54(C).

The shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad after the flashing FH is displayed are the shapes of specific display positions used in the effect of the variable icon acquisition effect B, and by displaying the shape of the variable display position 9Cd after the flashing FH and the shape of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad after the flashing FH are different, it is possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A. Furthermore, the change in shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad can also inform the player that the variable icon acquisition effect B has begun.

Furthermore, before the flash FH is displayed, the variable icon 9C and reserved icon 9A are white spherical icons as shown in Figure 54 (B), whereas after the flash FH is displayed, the variable icon 9C and reserved icon 9A are sword images imitating the sword member 65 as shown in Figure 54 (C), and are specific icons used in the effect in the variable icon acquisition effect B. In other words, the variable icon 9C and reserved icon 9A are switched to the same specific icon in the variable icon acquisition effect B. Note that although the sword image imitates the sword member 65, even if the player presses the sword member 65, this is not reflected in any effect in the variable icon acquisition effect B.

In Figure 54 (C), when the flash FH disappears from the display screen 7a and the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, as well as the variable icon 9C and hold icon 9A, a message MG1 saying "Repel them and get the variable icon!" is displayed in small letters in a single line on the display screen 7a above the variable icon 9C and hold icon 9A.

After that, as shown in Figure 54(D), the left decorative pattern 8L stops and displays the number "1," the middle decorative pattern 8C stops and displays the number "2," and the right decorative pattern 8R stops and displays the number "3," resulting in a miss. Message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and as the variable effect (variable display) ends, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. In Figures 54(A) to 54(D), a city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a as the normal background image.

Next, the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, a city image THG1, is switched to a specific background image, a lunar image THG2. As shown in FIG. 54(E), the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C. A message MG1 reading "Repel the attack and obtain the variable icon!" is displayed in two lines in large letters (approximately four times the size of small letters) in the center of the display screen 7a on the display screen 7a. The variable areas of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are rapidly displayed (variable). The left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are difficult to see during the change.

Then, on the display screen 7a, the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB begin to fight, and the message MG1 that was displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in large letters (approximately four times the size of the small letters) saying "Repel them and acquire the transformation icon!" is then reduced and moved to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, where it is displayed in two lines, smaller than the large letters but larger than the small letters (approximately twice the size of the small letters). Thus, the display format of the message MG1 includes a single line in small letters as shown in FIG. 54(C), a two-line display in large letters (approximately four times the size of the small letters) as shown in FIG. 54(E), and a two-line display in larger letters than the small letters (approximately twice the size of the small letters) as shown in FIG. 54(E), for a total of three display formats. By displaying the same content in three display formats during the transformation icon acquisition effect B, the content of the message MG1 can be clearly and emphatically conveyed to the player through this unprecedented method of expression.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54(F), after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds after the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R begin to change (change display)), a message MG2 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, indicating whether or not a change icon was acquired. In this case, ally character CRA is defeated and enemy character CRB wins, so no change icon was acquired, and a message MG2 saying "Sorry!" is displayed to the left of enemy character CRB on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "2," the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "1," and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "3," resulting in a miss. As a result, the change display (change display) ends and the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, when the reserved icon 9A displayed in the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are rapidly variable (variable display). This causes the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB to begin fighting again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54(G), after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds after the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R begin to change (change display), a message MG2 informing players of whether or not the change icon was acquired is displayed again in the center of the display screen 7a. In this case, ally character CRA wins and enemy character CRB is defeated, so the change icon is acquired and the message MG2 "Acquired!" is displayed to the left of ally character CRA on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R continue to change (change display) at high speed, and the change icon 9C does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Next, when message MG2 disappears from the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 54(H), a change icon HI is stocked and displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in Figure 54(I), the white spherical icon that was displayed as an icon increases in size by approximately 1.5 times and appears in the center of the display screen 7a accompanied by a flash of light, as shown in Figure 54(I). Then, when the stocked change icon HI is activated, lightning flashes from the change icon HI toward the white spherical icon that has appeared, and the size of the white spherical icon that has appeared increases, reaching a maximum size of approximately four times the size of the white spherical icon that was displayed as an icon.

After that, as shown in Figure 54 (J), the change icon HI disappears from the display screen 7a and does not switch from the white spherical icon to another icon; in other words, it becomes the same as the white spherical icon displayed in Figure 54 (a), resulting in a failed icon change, and this white spherical icon shrinks and moves toward the change display position 9Cd where the sword image, which is the change icon 9C, is displayed.

Then, as shown in Figure 54 (K), the variable icon 9C, which is a sword image, changes to a white spherical icon shrunk to its original size. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, whose four corners of the square shape are represented by white lines, and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, whose two lower corners of the four square shapes are represented by white lines, disappear from the display screen 7a. After this, the message MG1 also disappears from the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in Figure 54 (L), the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched back from the lunar surface image THG2 to the normal background image, the city image THG1 (at this time, the normal background image may be switched from the city image THG1 to another normal image, such as an underground image), and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which had been moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, return to their original variable areas and are rapidly variable (variable display), and the variable display position 9Cd of the rectangular image and the first to fourth pending display positions 9Ad of the rectangular image are again displayed on the display screen 7a. This ends the variable icon acquisition effect B. After the change icon acquisition effect B, various effects may continue, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern, a jackpot is awarded and the jackpot game (jackpot effect) begins, whereas when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed as the same pattern, a miss occurs.

[Change Icon Acquisition Rendering C]
Next, the change icon acquisition effect C will be described with reference to Fig. 55. Fig. 55 is a diagram for explaining the change icon acquisition effect B. The change icon acquisition effect C is performed over multiple change effects (change displays) using decorative patterns.

First, as shown in FIG. 55(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a left 3D decorative symbol 8L, a center 3D decorative symbol 8C, and a right 3D decorative symbol 8R, spinning from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a decorative symbol (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") variation effect (variable display) begins. When the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) begins, the stopped decorative symbol gradually increases in speed from a low speed, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state and changing at high speed. This allows the background image behind the decorative symbol to be viewed through the rapidly changing translucent decorative symbol. The decorative symbol slows down just before stopping, changing from a translucent state back to an opaque state, and then temporarily stops (temporarily stops, then stops). When temporarily stops, the decorative symbol moves slowly up and down.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R currently changing as the first special symbol is consumed are displayed in the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area is provided for the first special symbol hold in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed in four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), allowing a maximum of four hold icons to be stored. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad.

Note that while the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, they may be the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the variable display position 9Cd is larger than the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the hold display position 9Ad (the vertical distance dimension is the same for both). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed in the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed in the hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the third hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icon is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there are three hold icons that have not been consumed and are stored.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol change presentation (change display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the top center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, at the top center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, and are therefore difficult to distinguish from the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, these numbers are positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with the other images displayed behind them, so visibility is not obstructed by the other images.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icons are further set with increasing expectations of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

In Figure 55 (A), the decorative pattern change effect (change display) begins, and when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 20 and the change icon acquisition effect C begins due to the pre-reading effect, as shown in Figure 55 (B), the change display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the area where the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are displayed and the surrounding area become difficult to see (disappear) due to the flash FH. Note that as a result of the gaming ball entering the first starting hole 20, four hold icons 9A are now present.

For the sake of convenience, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

As the flashing light FH disappears, the presence of the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A can be seen, and at this time, the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A change before and after the flashing light FH is displayed.

Specifically, before the flashing FH is displayed, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd is a rectangular image positioned below the variable display position 9Cd, as shown in FIG. 55(B), whereas after the flashing FH is displayed, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd is an image in which only the four corners of the square shape surrounding the variable icon 9C are represented by white lines, as shown in FIG. 55(C). Also, before the flashing FH is displayed, the shapes of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are rectangular images positioned below the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, as shown in FIG. 55(B), whereas after the flashing FH is displayed, the shapes of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are an image in which only the bottom two corners of the square shape surrounding the hold icon 9A are represented by white lines, as shown in FIG. 55(C).

The shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed are the shapes of specific display positions used in the effect of the variable icon acquisition effect C, and by displaying the shape of the variable display position 9Cd after the flash FH is displayed differently from the shapes of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed, it is possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A. Furthermore, the change in shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad can also inform the player that the variable icon acquisition effect C has begun.

Furthermore, before the flash FH is displayed, the variable icon 9C and reserved icon 9A are white spherical icons as shown in Figure 55(B), whereas after the flash FH is displayed, the variable icon 9C and reserved icon 9A are sword images imitating the sword member 65 as shown in Figure 55(C), and are specific icons used in the effect in the variable icon acquisition effect C. In other words, the variable icon 9C and reserved icon 9A are switched to the same specific icon in the variable icon acquisition effect C. Note that although the sword image is an axe imitating the sword member 65, even if the player presses the sword member 65, this is not reflected in any effect in the variable icon acquisition effect C.

In Figure 55 (C), when the flash FH disappears from the display screen 7a and the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, as well as the variable icon 9C and hold icon 9A, a message MG1 saying "Repel them and get the variable icon!" is displayed in small letters in a single line on the display screen 7a above the variable icon 9C and hold icon 9A.

After that, as shown in Figure 55(D), the left decorative pattern 8L stops and displays the number "1," the middle decorative pattern 8C stops and displays the number "2," and the right decorative pattern 8R stops and displays the number "3," resulting in a loss. Message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and as the variable effect (variable display) ends, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. In Figures 55(A) to 55(D), a city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a as the normal background image.

Next, the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, a city image THG1, is switched to a specific background image, a lunar image THG2. As shown in FIG. 55(E), the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C. A message MG1 reading "Repel the attack and obtain the variable icon!" is displayed in two lines in large letters (approximately four times the size of small letters) in the center of the display screen 7a on the display screen 7a. The variable areas of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are rapidly displayed (variable display). The left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are difficult to see during the change.

Then, on the display screen 7a, the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB begin to fight, and then the message MG1 that was displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in large letters (approximately four times the size of the small letters) saying "Repel them and acquire the transformation icon!" is shifted to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a and reduced in size, displayed in two lines in letters smaller than the large letters but larger than the small letters (approximately twice the size of the small letters). Thus, the display format of the message MG1 includes a single line in small letters as shown in FIG. 55(C), a two-line display in large letters (approximately four times the size of the small letters) as shown in FIG. 55(E), and a two-line display in letters larger than the small letters (approximately twice the size of the small letters) after the one shown in FIG. 55(E). For a total of three display formats, the same content is displayed in three display formats during the transformation icon acquisition effect C, making it possible to clearly and emphatically convey the content of the message MG1 to the player through this unprecedented method of presentation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55(F), after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds after the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R begin to change (change display)), a message MG2 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, indicating whether or not a change icon was acquired. In this case, ally character CRA is defeated and enemy character CRB wins, so no change icon was acquired, and a message MG2 saying "Sorry!" is displayed to the left of enemy character CRB on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "2," the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "1," and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "3," resulting in a miss. As a result, the change display (change display) ends and the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, when the reserved icon 9A displayed in the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are rapidly variable (variable display). This causes the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB to begin fighting again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55(G), after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds after the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R begin to change (change display)), a message MG2 informing the player of whether or not the change icon was acquired is displayed again in the center of the display screen 7a. In this case, because ally character CRA wins and enemy character CRB is defeated, the change icon is acquired, and the message MG2 "Got it!" is displayed to the left of ally character CRA on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1," the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "3," and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "2," resulting in a miss. As a result, the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the change display (change display) ends.

Next, when message MG2 disappears from the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 55 (H), a change icon HI is displayed in the stock display in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, and then the reserved icon 9A displayed in the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are rapidly changed (change displayed). This causes the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB to begin fighting again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55(I), after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds after the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R begin to change (change display)), a message MG2 informing the player of whether or not a change icon was acquired is displayed again in the center of the display screen 7a. In this case, ally character CRA is defeated and enemy character CRB wins, so the change icon could not be acquired and a message MG2 saying "Sorry!" is displayed to the left of enemy character CRB on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1," the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2," and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "3," resulting in a miss. As a result, the change display (change display) ends and the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, when the reserved icon 9A displayed in the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are rapidly variable (variable display). This causes the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB to begin fighting again.

Next, as shown in Figure 55 (J), after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds after the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R begin to change (change display), a message MG2 informing players of whether or not the change icon was acquired is displayed again in the center of the display screen 7a. In this case, because ally character CRA wins and enemy character CRB is defeated, the change icon is acquired, and the message MG2 "Acquired!" is displayed to the left of ally character CRA on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R continue to change (change display) at high speed, and the change icon 9C does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Next, when message MG2 disappears from display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 55(K), another change icon HI is displayed in stock above the change icon HI already displayed in stock in the lower right corner of display screen 7a, resulting in two change icons HI, HI arranged side by side, one above the other. After that, the white spherical icon that was displayed as an icon increases in size by approximately 1.5 times and appears in the center of display screen 7a accompanied by a flash of light. Then, as the two change icons HI, HI stored and arranged side by side above and below are activated, lightning bolts run from the two change icons HI, HI arranged side by side toward the newly appeared white spherical icon, and the size of the newly appeared white spherical icon increases, reaching a maximum size of approximately four times the size of the white spherical icon that was originally displayed as an icon.

After that, as shown in Figure 55 (L), the two change icons HI, HI arranged next to each other disappear from the display screen 7a, and a white spherical icon is replaced by a red smiling spherical icon, which then shrinks and moves towards the change display position 9Cd where the flashing change icon 9C, a sword image, is displayed.

Then, as shown in Figure 55(M), the variable icon 9C, which is a sword image, switches to a smiling sphere icon. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, whose four corners of the square shape are represented by white lines, and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, whose two lower corners of the four square shapes are represented by white lines, disappear from the display screen 7a. After this, the message MG1 also disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that although the smiling sphere icon shrinks as it moves, it is larger than the white sphere icon displayed in Figure 55(a), and is approximately 1.5 times larger.

After that, as shown in Figure 55(N), the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched back from the lunar surface image THG2 to the normal background image, the city image THG1 (at this time, the normal background image may be switched from the city image THG1 to another normal image, such as an underground image), and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which had been moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, return to their original variable areas and are rapidly variable (variable display), and the variable display position 9Cd of the rectangular image and the first to fourth pending display positions 9Ad of the rectangular image are again displayed on the display screen 7a. This ends the variable icon acquisition effect C. After the change icon acquisition effect C, various effects may continue, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern, a jackpot is awarded and the jackpot game (jackpot effect) begins, but when the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed as the same pattern, a miss occurs.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of obtaining a change icon.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the change icon acquisition performance A of FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition performance B of FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition performance C of FIG. 55, a first start opening 20 (ball entrance) through which a game ball can enter, and an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images are provided, and in relation to the entry of a game ball into the first start opening 20 (ball entrance), the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A are displayed as the same specific icon, and in the change icon acquisition performance A, the display is switched to a performance button image that imitates the performance button 63. In the variation icon acquisition effects B and C, a pre-reading effect can be executed in which a sword image resembling a sword component 65 is switched to and displayed. When the specific icon is selected, a first effect can be executed in which a variation icon HI that can change (increase) the probability of winning is displayed and the variation icon HI can be acquired (FIGS. 53(F) and (G) for variation icon acquisition effect A, FIG. 54(F) and (G) for variation icon acquisition effect B, and FIG. 55(F), (G), and (J) for variation icon acquisition effect C). This configuration contributes to eliminating monotony in the consumption pattern of the reserved icon 9A by switching the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A to the same specific icon, and provides the player with an opportunity to acquire a variation icon HI that can change (increase) the probability of winning. This increases the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the change icon acquisition effect A of Fig. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B of Fig. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C of Fig. 55, there may be one or more reserved icons 9A. With this configuration, the first effect can be executed even if there is one or more reserved icons 9A. Since the first effect can be executed as long as there is one or more reserved icons 9A, even if there is only one reserved icon 9A, it is possible to continue to give the player a sense of anticipation of an opportunity to acquire a change icon HI, which can increase the likelihood of a win, and it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing due to the number of reserved icons 9A.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effects in the change icon acquisition effect A of FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B of FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C of FIG. 55, it is possible to obtain as many opportunities to acquire a change icon HI as there are specific icons. With this configuration, since it is possible to obtain as many opportunities to acquire a change icon HI as there are specific icons, the occurrence of the change icon acquisition effect A, the change icon acquisition effect B, and the change icon acquisition effect C can give the player a sense of anticipation of an increased likelihood of winning. Note that the number of reserved icons 9A (i.e., the number of specific icons) and the number of acquireable change icons do not need to match. Even if there is only one reserved icon 9A, when the change icon acquisition effect A, the change icon acquisition effect B, or the change icon acquisition effect C is performed, it may be possible to obtain no change icon, one change icon, two change icons, or three change icons.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effects of the change icon acquisition effect A in Fig. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B in Fig. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C in Fig. 55, when the variable icon 9C that has switched to a specific icon is consumed and disappears upon the end of the variable effect (variable display), the reserved icon 9A that has switched to a specific icon can shift and move in a certain direction (to the variable display position 9Cd that displays the variable icon 9C). With this configuration, the decrease in the number of specific icons can be visually conveyed to the player, and the remaining number of opportunities to acquire a change icon can be conveyed.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effects in the change icon acquisition effect A of Figure 53, the change icon acquisition effect B of Figure 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C of Figure 55, the change icon HI cannot be acquired during the change effect (during the change display) at the time when the pre-reading effect switches the change icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A to a specific icon. Although the change icon 9C may be used as a notice (a "change effect" that changes the display mode) for the change effect (during the change display), the change icon 9C in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is not a notice for the change effect (during the change display), but is also used as a notice that notifies the start of the first effect that is about to begin (i.e., in the next change effect (next change display)), and in this respect, it differs from those that use the change icon 9C as a notice for the change effect (during the change display).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect of the change icon acquisition effect A of Fig. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B of Fig. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C of Fig. 55, when the reserved icon 9A that has switched to a specific icon becomes the change icon 9C and the change effect (change display) begins, it becomes possible to acquire a change icon HI during the change effect (change display), and the acquired change icon HI can be stocked. With this configuration, the acquired change icon HI is not consumed immediately upon acquisition but is stocked, so the player can grasp the number of acquired change icons HI, and the expectation for the effect of activating the stocked change icon HI, i.e., the expectation for an increased chance of winning, is increased.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, after the first effects in the change icon acquisition effect A of Fig. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B of Fig. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C of Fig. 55, a second effect can be executed in which lightning is emitted from the change icon HI stored in the first effect, and the variable icon 9C, which has been switched to a specific icon, is switched to an icon indicating the likelihood of a win (Fig. 53(I) for the change icon acquisition effect A, Fig. 54(I) for the change icon acquisition effect B, and Fig. 55(K) for the change icon acquisition effect C). With this configuration, when the second effect is executed, the effect of activating the already stored change icon HI is exerted, so the player can discover for himself the relationship (pattern) between the number of stored change icons HI and the increased likelihood of a win.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the effect of obtaining a change icon are shown.
[Modification 1]
The change icon acquisition effect A in Fig. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B in Fig. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C in Fig. 55 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, they are performed in a game state known as a left-handed hit. However, they may also be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21. In other words, they may also be performed in a game state known as a right-handed hit.

[Modification 2]
In the change icon acquisition effect A in Figure 53, the change icon acquisition effect B in Figure 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C in Figure 55, the game ball enters the first starting hole 20 and the effect is started by a pre-reading effect. However, the sub-control board 90 may decide whether or not to perform the change icon acquisition effect by its own lottery without using a pre-reading effect. In this case, in order to execute the change icon acquisition effect A, change icon acquisition effect B, or change icon acquisition effect C across multiple change effects (change displays) using decorative patterns, the sub-control board 90 must adjust the progress of the change icon acquisition effect in real time, taking into account the effect time indicated by the change effect start command from the main control board 80.

[Modification 3]
In the change icon acquisition effect A in Fig. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B in Fig. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C in Fig. 55, the change icon HI is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, it may also be displayed on the display screen of another image display device provided separately from the image display device 7. The other image display device may be provided on the game board 2 together with the image display device 7, or may be provided on the front frame 53. In this way, since there are multiple image display devices, it is possible to increase the variety of display modes provided by the multiple image display devices.

[Modification 4]
In the change icon acquisition presentation A in Fig. 53, the change icon acquisition presentation B in Fig. 54, and the change icon acquisition presentation C in Fig. 55, the change icon HI is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, it is also possible to provide a plurality of three-dimensional structures that resemble change icons on the game board 2 or the front frame 53, and to communicate to the player the number of change icons that have been acquired based on the number of times that these structures emit light.

[Modification 5]
In the change icon acquisition effect A of Fig. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B of Fig. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C of Fig. 55, lightning is emitted from the stored change icon HI and it disappears from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the stored change icon HI may disappear from the display screen 7a in a display mode in which it explodes due to the lightning it has emitted itself, or it may disappear from the display screen 7a in a display mode in which the stored change icon HI uses up all its energy due to the lightning it has emitted itself and its structure peels off into pieces.

[Modification 6]
The change icon acquisition effect A in FIG. 53 , the change icon acquisition effect B in FIG. 54 , and the change icon acquisition effect C in FIG. 55 are performed when the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are all white spherical icons, which have the lowest expected probability of winning. However, for example, they may be performed when the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are different icons. For example, when the variable icon 9C is a smiling spherical icon and the reserved icon 9A is a white spherical icon, one of the change icon acquisition effect A, the change icon acquisition effect B, and the change icon acquisition effect C may be performed. This is because, although the variable icon 9C may be used as a notice (a "change effect" that changes the display mode) for the variable effect (during the variable display), instead of being used as a notice for the variable effect (during the variable display), it is used as a notice announcing the start of the change icon acquisition effect A, the change icon acquisition effect B, or the change icon acquisition effect C, which will start in the next variable display (next variable display).

[Modification 7]
The change icon acquisition effect A in Figure 53, the change icon acquisition effect B in Figure 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C in Figure 55 may not include some of the effects described, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine comprising a ball entrance through which a gaming ball can enter and a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
A pre-reading effect can be executed in which the variable icon and the reserved icon are switched to the same specific icon in relation to the entry of the game ball into the ball entry port,
When the specific icon is displayed, a first effect can be executed in which a change icon capable of changing the probability of winning is displayed and the change icon can be acquired.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A2-1,
The hold icon may be one or more.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A2-1 or A2-2,
In the first effect, there are opportunities to acquire the variation icons as many times as the number of the specific icons.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A2-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A2-1 to A2-3,
In the first performance, when the variable icon that has been switched to the specific icon is consumed and disappears due to the end of the variable performance, the reserved icon that has been switched to the specific icon shifts and moves in a certain direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A2-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A2-1 to A2-4,
In the first performance, the change icon cannot be acquired during the change performance at the time when the pre-reading performance switches the change icon and the reserved icon to the specific icon.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect A2-6
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A2-1 to A2-5,
In the first performance, when the reserved icon that has been switched to the specific icon becomes the variable icon and the variable performance starts, the variable icon can be acquired during the variable performance, and the acquired variable icon is stocked.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A2-7]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A2-6,
After the first effect, a second effect can be executed in which lightning is emitted from the changing icon stocked by the first effect, and the changing icon that has been switched to the specific icon is switched to an icon indicating the probability of winning.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The following explains pending icon movement and change effects A to C using Figures 56 to 58. These pending icon movement and change effects can be executed during decorative pattern change effects, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a pending icon movement and change effect, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Pending icon movement change performance A]
FIG. 56 is a diagram illustrating the pending icon movement and change effect A. The pending icon movement and change effect is an effect in which the image representing the pending icon changes appearance as it moves. The appearance here includes the shape, color, movement, size, etc., of the image representing the pending icon. In the pending icon movement and change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 56(A), in the normal state, three pending icons 9A and the pending icon (variable icon) 9C are displayed while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Both the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a round (spherical) shape. Here, because the pending icon 9C and the pending icon 9A have the same shape (pending icon shape), they are collectively referred to simply as "pending icons 9A, 9C." The pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the pending display area (variable icon display area, pending digestion image display area) at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Below this pending display area, a horizontally long rectangular image is displayed to indicate the position of the pending display area.

As shown in Figure 56 (B), at a certain timing during the change, a text image of "Hold change pseudo consecutive starts!!" is displayed on the display screen 7a. At the same time, the hold icon (changing icon) 9C moves to the upper left. At this time, the three hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a (are not displayed). After that, as shown in Figure 56 (C), the hold icon 9C stops at a predetermined position (first position) in the lower left of the display screen 7a. The first position is located to the left of the hold display area. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a "6↓6" reach pattern.

As shown in Figure 56 (D), the hold icon 9C moves from the first position to the right toward the hold display area. In the reach state, the decorative pattern is replaced by the medium decorative pattern 8C, and a "hold change" text image temporarily stops. The color of the hold icon 9C changes in accordance with the temporary stopping of the "hold change" text image. In other words, during the pseudo-consecutive performance, when the "hold change" text image temporarily stops in place of the medium decorative pattern 8C, the state of the hold icon 9C changes. Here, the color of the hold icon 9C changes. The order in which the color of the hold icon 9C changes is from the color with the lowest probability of a jackpot to the color with the highest. For example, the order is blue → green → red.

As shown in Figure 56 (E), as a pseudo-consecutive effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that had been temporarily stopped begin to change again. The reserved icon 9C continues to move to the right. After that, as shown in Figure 56 (F), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stop again. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped at "567." This time, because the middle decorative pattern 8C is not temporarily stopped at the "reserved change" text image, the color of the reserved icon 9C does not change. The reserved icon 9C continues to move to the right.

As shown in Figure 56 (G), as a pseudo consecutive effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that had been temporarily stopped begin to change again. The reserved icon 9C continues to move to the right. After that, as shown in Figure 56 (H), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stop again. Here, after the "3↓3" reach state, the text image "reserved change" temporarily stops in place of the middle decorative symbol 8C. In accordance with the temporary stopping of the text image "reserved change," the color and shape of the reserved icon 9C change. In other words, when the text image "reserved change" temporarily stops again in place of the middle decorative symbol 8C during the pseudo consecutive effect, the color and shape of the reserved icon 9C change to a state with even higher expectations.

As shown in Figure 56 (I), as a pseudo-consecutive effect, the temporarily stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to change again. The reserved icon 9C continues to move to the right, reaching the reserved display area and stopping. In other words, the reserved icon 9C returns to its original position. Thereafter, as shown in Figure 56 (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in the form of a jackpot of "333."

[Pending icon movement change performance B]
FIG. 57 is a diagram illustrating the pending icon movement and change effect B. The pending icon movement and change effect is an effect in which the image representing the pending icon changes appearance as it moves. The appearance here includes the shape, color, movement, size, etc., of the image representing the pending icon. In the pending icon movement and change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 57(A), in the normal state, three pending icons 9A and the pending icon (variable icon) 9C are displayed while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Both the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a round (spherical) shape. Here, because the pending icon 9C and the pending icon 9A have the same shape (pending icon shape), they are collectively referred to simply as "pending icons 9A, 9C." The pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the pending display area (variable icon display area, pending digestion image display area) at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Below this pending display area, a horizontally long rectangular image is displayed to indicate the position of the pending display area.

As shown in Figure 57 (B), at a certain timing during the change, a text image of "Hold change pseudo consecutive wins begin!!" is displayed on the display screen 7a. At the same time, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C moves to the upper left. At this time, the three hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a (are not displayed). After that, as shown in Figure 57 (C), the hold icon 9C stops at a predetermined position (first position) in the lower left of the display screen 7a. In addition, a new specific image BG is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The specific image BG is a horizontally long rectangular image, with the left edge corresponding to the first position and the right edge corresponding to the hold display area. A new number image SG is displayed in the upper left of the hold icon 9C. The number image SG represents the remaining number of pseudo consecutive wins. In this case, "4" is displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R form a "6↓6" reach pattern.

As shown in Figure 57 (D), the hold icon 9C moves from the left edge to the right edge above the specific image BG. In other words, it moves from the first position to the right toward the hold display area. The position (display position) of the hold icon 9C relative to the specific image BG represents (notifies) the remaining period for which the pseudo-consecutive effect will be executed. The number image SG moves in conjunction with the movement of the hold icon 9C. In other words, the number image SG moves while maintaining the same distance from the moving hold icon 9C. In the reach state, the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, with the text image "Hold Change" replacing the medium decorative pattern 8C. In accordance with the temporary stopping of the text image "Hold Change," the color of the hold icon 9C changes. In other words, during the pseudo-consecutive effect, when the text image "Hold Change" temporarily stops in place of the medium decorative pattern 8C, the appearance of the hold icon 9C changes. Here, the color of the hold icon 9C changes. The color of the reserved icon 9C changes in order from a low to a high probability of winning. For example, blue → green → red. When the middle decorative pattern 8C temporarily stops, one of the pseudo-series wins is completed, and the number image SG changes from "4" to "3."

As shown in Figure 57(E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that had been temporarily stopped begin to change again as a pseudo-consecutive effect. The reserved icon 9C continues to move to the right above the specific image BG. Then, as shown in Figure 57(F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stop again. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stop at "5" and "7," and then the middle decorative symbol 8C temporarily stops on the "G!" text image. In conjunction with the temporary stopping of the "Point Get!" text image, black star-shaped points are displayed above the specific image BG. These black star-shaped points increase (accumulate) by one each time the "Point Get!" text image temporarily stops in place of the middle decorative symbol 8C during the pseudo-consecutive effect. Then, a performance using these points is executed during the final change of the pseudo-consecutive effect. When the middle decorative pattern 8C temporarily stops, one of the pseudo consecutive wins is completed, and the number image SG changes from "3" to "2."

As shown in Figure 57 (G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which had been temporarily stopped, begin to change again as a pseudo-consecutive effect. The reserved icon 9C continues to move to the right above the specific image BG. Then, as shown in Figure 57 (H), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stop again. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stop in a "3↓3" reach state, and then the text image "reserved change" temporarily stops in place of the middle decorative symbol 8C. In conjunction with this temporary stopping of the text image "reserved change," the color and shape of the reserved icon 9C change. In other words, if the text image "reserved change" temporarily stops again in place of the middle decorative symbol 8C during the pseudo-consecutive effect, the color and shape of the reserved icon 9C change to a more promising state. The temporary stopping of the middle decorative symbol 8C completes one of the pseudo-consecutive effects, and the number image SG changes from "2" to "1."

As shown in Figure 57(I), as a pseudo-consecutive effect, the temporarily stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to change again. The reserved icon 9C continues to move to the right and stops when it reaches the right edge of the specific image BG. At almost the same time, the specific image BG disappears. This causes the reserved icon 9C to stop in the reserved display area. In other words, the reserved icon 9C returns to its original position. For the final change in the pseudo-consecutive effect, an effect is executed using the accumulated black star-shaped points. Here, the black star-shaped points move while expanding, and a predetermined effect is executed in the center of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in Figure 57(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in the form of a jackpot of "333."

[Pending icon movement change effect C]
FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating the hold icon movement/change effect C. The hold icon movement/change effect is an effect in which the image representing the hold icon changes appearance as it moves. The appearance here includes the shape, color, movement, size, etc., of the image representing the hold icon. In the hold icon movement/change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 58(A), in the normal state, three hold icons 9A and the hold icon (variable icon) 9C are displayed while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Both the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round (spherical) shape. Here, because the hold icon 9C and the hold icon 9A have the same shape (hold icon shape), they are collectively referred to simply as "hold icons 9A, 9C." The hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the hold display area (variable icon display area, hold digestion image display area) at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Below this hold display area, a horizontally long rectangular image is displayed to indicate the position of the hold display area.

As shown in Figure 58 (B), at a certain timing during the change, a text image reading "Pending change pseudo consecutive wins begin!!" is displayed on the display screen 7a. At the same time, the pending icon (variable icon) 9C and the three pending icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a (are not displayed). After that, as shown in Figure 58 (C), a pending icon image 9D representing pending icons 9A and 9C is newly displayed in a predetermined position (first position) at the bottom left of the display screen 7a. The pending icon image 9D may be the pending icons 9A and 9C, or an image simulating the pending icons 9A and 9C. A new specific image BG is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The specific image BG is a horizontally long rectangular image, with the left edge corresponding to the first position and the right edge corresponding to the pending display area. A new number image SG is displayed in the upper left of the pending icon image 9D. A portion of the number image SG is displayed overlapping the pending icon image 9D. The number image SG represents the remaining number of pseudo consecutive wins. Here, "4" is displayed. Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form a "6↓6" reach pattern.

As shown in Figure 58 (D), the hold icon image 9D moves from the left edge to the right edge above the specific image BG. In other words, it moves from the first position to the right toward the hold display area. The position (display position) of the hold icon image 9D relative to the specific image BG represents (notifies) the remaining period for which the pseudo-consecutive effect will be executed. The number image SG moves as the hold icon image 9D moves. In other words, the number image SG moves while overlapping the upper left of the moving hold icon image 9D. In the reach state, the decorative pattern is replaced by the medium decorative pattern 8C, and a "hold change" text image temporarily stops. In accordance with the temporary stopping of this "hold change" text image, the color of the hold icon image 9D changes. In other words, when the "hold change" text image temporarily stops in place of the medium decorative pattern 8C during the pseudo-consecutive effect, the appearance of the hold icon image 9D changes. Here, the color of the hold icon image 9D changes. The order in which the colors of the reserved icon image 9D change is from the lowest to the highest likelihood of a jackpot. For example, blue → green → red. When the middle decorative pattern 8C temporarily stops, one of the pseudo-series spins is completed, and the number image SG changes from "4" to "3."

As shown in Figure 58(E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which had been temporarily stopped, begin to change again as a pseudo-consecutive effect. The reserved icon image 9D continues to move to the right above the specific image BG. Then, as shown in Figure 58(F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stop again. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stop at "5" and "7," and then the middle decorative symbol 8C temporarily stops on the text image "Point Get!". In conjunction with the temporary stopping of the "Point Get!" text image, black star-shaped points are displayed above the specific image BG. These black star-shaped points increase (accumulate) by one each time the middle decorative symbol 8C temporarily stops on the text image "Point Get!" during the pseudo-consecutive effect. Then, a performance using these points is executed during the final change of the pseudo-consecutive effect. When the middle decorative pattern 8C temporarily stops, one of the pseudo consecutive wins is completed, and the number image SG changes from "3" to "2."

As shown in Figure 58 (G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which had been temporarily stopped, begin to change again as a pseudo-consecutive effect. The reserved icon image 9D continues to move to the right above the specific image BG. Then, as shown in Figure 58 (H), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stop again. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stop in a "3↓3" reach state, and then the text image "reserved change" temporarily stops in place of the middle decorative symbol 8C. In conjunction with this temporary stopping of the text image "reserved change," the color and shape of the reserved icon image 9D change. In other words, if the text image "reserved change" temporarily stops again in place of the middle decorative symbol 8C during the pseudo-consecutive effect, the color and shape of the reserved icon image 9D change to a more promising state. The temporary stopping of the middle decorative symbol 8C completes one of the pseudo-consecutive effects, and the number image SG changes from "2" to "1."

As shown in Figure 58 (I), as a pseudo-consecutive effect, the temporarily stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to change again. The reserved icon image 9D continues to move to the right and stops when it reaches the right edge of the specific image BG. At almost the same time, the specific image BG disappears. Then, the reserved icon 9C, which has the same appearance as the reserved icon image 9D, is displayed in the reserved display area. In other words, an effect is created in which the reserved icon 9C returns to its original position. If the reserved icon image 9D is the reserved icon 9C itself, it has returned to its original position. For the final change in the pseudo-consecutive effect, an effect is executed using the accumulated black star-shaped points. Here, the black star-shaped points expand and move, and a predetermined effect is executed in the center of the display screen 7a. Then, as shown in Figure 58 (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in the form of a jackpot "333."

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the pending icon movement and change effects.
[Effect 1]
As shown in Figures 56 and 57, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment can execute a first effect in which the reserved icon 9C (an image representing the reserved icon) changes color as it moves, and a second effect in which the reserved icon 9C with the changed color is displayed in the reserved display area after the first effect. This configuration allows players to enjoy the game visually through innovative effects not previously available, thereby enhancing their interest. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 58, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment can execute a first effect in which the reserved icon image 9D (an image representing the reserved icon) changes color as it moves, and a second effect in which the reserved icon image 9D with the changed color is displayed in the reserved display area (variable icon display area, reserved consumption image display area) after the first effect. This configuration allows players to enjoy the game visually through innovative effects not previously available, thereby enhancing their interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 56(A), 57(A), and 58(A), before the first effect, a third effect can be executed in which the reserved icon 9C (an image representing the reserved icon) is displayed in the reserved display area (variable icon display area, reserved consumption image display area), and after the third effect, the first effect is executed. With this configuration, a novel effect that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player and increase their interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 56 and 57, in the first effect, the reserved icon 9C (an image representing the reserved icon) moves from a first position toward the reserved display area (variable icon display area, reserved consumption image display area). With this configuration, a novel effect not previously seen can be provided to visually entertain the player, thereby increasing interest. Also, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 58, in the first effect, the reserved icon image 9D (an image representing the reserved icon) moves from a first position toward the reserved display area (variable icon display area, reserved consumption image display area). With this configuration, a novel effect not previously seen can be provided to visually entertain the player, thereby increasing interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 56 and 57, the first effect involves a pseudo consecutive decorative symbol effect. When the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and a text image of "PENDING CHANGE" is displayed in place of the decorative symbol 8C, the color of the reserved icon 9C (the image representing the reserved icon) changes. This configuration allows for a visually entertaining and exciting experience for the player through a novel and unprecedented effect. Also, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 58, the first effect involves a pseudo consecutive decorative symbol effect. When the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and a text image of "PENDING CHANGE" is displayed in place of the decorative symbol 8C, the color of the reserved icon 9D (the image representing the reserved icon) changes. This configuration allows for a visually entertaining and exciting experience for the player through a novel and unprecedented effect.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 57, in the first effect, the number image SG representing the remaining number of pseudo-consecutive wins moves together with the hold icon 9C (image representing the hold icon). With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented and innovative effect, thereby increasing the player's interest. Also, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 58, in the first effect, the number image SG representing the remaining number of pseudo-consecutive wins moves together with the hold icon 9D (image representing the hold icon). With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented and innovative effect, thereby increasing the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57 , in the first effect, the hold icon 9C (an image representing the hold icon) moves over the specific image BG, and the display position of the hold icon 9C (an image representing the hold icon) relative to the specific image BG indicates the remaining time for which the pseudo consecutive effect will be executed. This configuration allows for a visually entertaining and exciting experience for the player through a novel effect not previously seen. Also, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58 , in the first effect, the hold icon 9D (an image representing the hold icon) moves over the specific image BG, and the display position of the hold icon 9D (an image representing the hold icon) relative to the specific image BG indicates the remaining time for which the pseudo consecutive effect will be executed. This configuration allows for a visually entertaining and exciting experience for the player through a novel effect not previously seen.

[Modification]
Below are some modified examples of the pending icon movement and change presentation.
[Modification 1]
In the pending icon movement change performances A and B, the pending icon 9C changes color as it moves as an image representing the pending icon. However, in the pending icon movement change performances A and B, the pending icon that changes color as it moves may not be the pending icon 9C, but may be an image (icon image) that imitates the pending icon 9C.

[Modification 2]
In the hold icon movement and change effects A and B, the hold icon 9C changes color as it moves as an image representing the hold icon. However, in the hold icon movement and change effects A and B, the hold icon that changes color as it moves may be the hold icons 9A and 9B instead of the hold icon 9C. In this case, the hold icons 9A and 9B may be configured to move toward the hold image display area rather than moving from the first position toward the hold display area (variable icon display area, hold digestion image display area).

[Modification 3]
In the hold icon movement and change effects A and B, the hold icon 9C that changes color as it moves and the hold icon 9C displayed in the hold display area (variable icon display area, hold digestion image display area) do not have to be the same. That is, the hold icon 9C may disappear from the display screen 7a when it moves from the hold display area or when it arrives at the hold display area, or the size, shape, or color may change while it is moving and when it is displayed in the hold display area, or its position may shift slightly before and after it arrives.

[Modification 4]
The pending icon movement change effects A to C are executed in the normal state. However, the pending icon movement change effects A to C may also be executed in the time-saving state. In this case, the pending icon C in the pending icon movement change effects A to C may move to the right and then to the left.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A3-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is an image representing a hold icon,
A first effect in which an image representing the hold icon moves and changes color;
A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing a second effect in which, after the first effect, an image representing the pending icon in a changed color is displayed in the pending icon display area.
◇[Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A3-1,
Before the first effect, a third effect can be executed in which an image representing the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first effect is executed after the third effect.
◇[Aspect A3-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A3-1 or A3-2,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first presentation, an image representing the hold icon moves from a first position different from the hold icon display area toward the hold icon display area.
◇[Aspect A3-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A3-1 to A3-3,
In the first effect, a pseudo consecutive effect of decorative symbols is executed, and when a predetermined image is displayed in place of the decorative symbol when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the color of the image representing the hold icon changes.
◇[Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A3-4,
In the first presentation, an image representing the remaining number of pseudo-consecutive wins moves together with an image representing the hold icon.
◇[Aspect A3-6]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A3-4 or A3-5,
In the first effect, an image representing the hold icon moves over a specific image, and the display position of the image representing the hold icon relative to the specific image indicates the remaining period for which the pseudo-consecutive effect is to be executed.

Specific icon stock effects A to C will be explained below using Figures 59 to 61. In Figures 59 to 61, for ease of viewing, the first movable device 14, second movable device 15, and other movable devices arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted.

This specific icon stock effect is one of several pseudo consecutive effects, and during the relevant variable effect (during the relevant variable display), the variable effect (variable display) using decorative symbols is performed multiple times in succession. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a specific icon stock effect is included, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The background image used in the specific icon stock effect (referred to as a "specific background image") is a specific image not included in the normal background image, such as an image of the moon's surface, space, or the interior of a spaceship. The normal background image is a normal image such as an image of a city, forest, ocean, ocean floor, or underground. The specific background image and normal background image may be a still image or a video.

Here, we will first explain specific icon stock effect A, then specific icon stock effect B, and then specific icon stock effect C.

[Specific Icon Stock Effects A]
The specific icon stock effect A will be described with reference to Fig. 59. Fig. 59 is a diagram for explaining the specific icon stock effect A. The specific icon stock effect A is one of a plurality of pseudo consecutive effects, and during the relevant variable effect (during the relevant variable display), variable effects (variable display) using decorative symbols are performed multiple times in succession.

First, as shown in Figure 59(A), a city image THG1 is displayed as the normal background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A display mode in which the reels rotate from top to bottom of the display screen 7a displays a three-dimensional left decorative symbol 8L, a three-dimensional center decorative symbol 8C, and a three-dimensional right decorative symbol 8R, and a decorative symbol (symbols: numbers "1" through "9") variation effect (variable display) begins. When the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) begins, the stopped decorative symbols gradually increase in speed, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state and rapidly varying. This allows the background image behind the decorative symbols to be viewed through the rapidly varying translucent decorative symbols. The decorative symbols slow down just before stopping, changing from a translucent state back to an opaque state, and then temporarily stopping (temporarily stopping, then stopping). When temporarily stopping, the decorative symbols move slowly up and down.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R currently changing as the first special symbol is consumed are displayed in the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area is provided for the first special symbol hold in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed in four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), allowing a maximum of four hold icons to be stored. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icons are displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one hold icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. For the sake of convenience, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol change presentation (change display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the top center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, at the top center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, and are therefore difficult to distinguish from the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, these numbers are positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with the other images displayed behind them, so visibility is not obstructed by the other images.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icons are further set with increasing expectations of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the decorative pattern change effect (change display) begins in Figure 59 (A), the left decorative pattern 8L is then stopped and displayed as the number "1," the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as the number "2," and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as the number "3," resulting in a loss, and the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 59 (B), the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, city image THG1, is switched to a specific background image, lunar image THG2, and the white spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the white spherical variable icon 9C. A number image (here, the number 4) 9Cz is then displayed in front of the variable icon 9C, and a message MG1 saying "Stock icons!" is displayed in a single line approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the variable display position 9Cd and hold display position 9Ad disappear from the display screen 7a.

The size of the variable icon 9C and the size of the number image 9Cz may be the same, or one may be larger. Furthermore, if the number image 9Cz is placed behind the variable icon 9C, it is better to make the size of the number image 9Cz larger than the size of the variable icon 9C in terms of visibility of the number image 9Cz.

At this point, the number 4 represented by the number image 9Cz indicates the remaining number of consecutive changes due to the pseudo-consecutive combination. In other words, this tells the player that in the change effect (change display) at this point, the change effect (change display) using decorative symbols will continue for the remaining four times.

Just before the first (initial) decorative pattern change effect (change display) due to the pseudo-consecutive combination begins, message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a. When the first (initial) decorative pattern change effect (change display) due to the pseudo-consecutive combination begins, as shown in FIG. 59(C), the left decorative pattern 8L is then temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3," the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2," and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1," ending the first (initial) decorative pattern change effect (change display) due to the pseudo-consecutive combination, and the number image 9Cz of the change icon 9C changes from the number 4 to the number 3. This informs the player that the decorative pattern change effect (change display) will continue for the remaining three times in the change effect (change display).

When the second decorative pattern change effect (change display) due to the pseudo consecutive win begins, as shown in Figure 59 (D), the left decorative pattern 8L is then temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "5", and the change icon HI appears as a specific icon from the change area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, activating the change icon HI to consume it without stocking it.

When this change icon HI appears, as shown in Figure 59 (E), the change icon HI moves downward in an arc toward the change icon 9C, causing it to collide with the change icon 9C. In this case, although the change icon HI collides with the change icon 9C, this collision prevents the white spherical change icon 9C from changing into an icon of another shape, resulting in a failure to change the change icon 9C.

As shown in Figure 59 (F), the change in the variable icon 9C fails, the second decorative pattern change effect (variable display) due to the pseudo consecutive combination ends, and the number image 9Cz of the variable icon 9C changes from the number 3 to the number 2. This informs the player that the decorative pattern change effect (variable display) will continue for the remaining two turns in the variable effect (variable display).

When the third decorative pattern change effect (change display) due to the pseudo consecutive win begins, as shown in Figure 59 (G), the left decorative pattern 8L is then temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "6", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "4", and the change icon HI appears again as a specific icon from the change area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, activating the change icon HI to consume it without stocking it.

When this change icon HI appears, as shown in Figure 59 (H), the change icon HI moves downward in an arc toward the change icon 9C, causing it to collide with the change icon 9C. In this case, although the change icon HI collides with the change icon 9C, this collision prevents the white spherical change icon 9C from changing into an icon of another shape, and the change of the change icon 9C again fails.

As shown in Figure 59 (I), the change in the variable icon 9C fails, the third decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) due to the pseudo consecutive combination ends, and the number image 9Cz of the variable icon 9C changes from the number 2 to the number 1. This informs the player that there is only one more decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) remaining in the variable effect (variable display).

When the fourth (final) decorative symbol change effect (change display) due to the pseudo-consecutive combination begins, as shown in FIG. 59(J), the left decorative symbol 8L is then temporarily stopped at the number "5," the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at the number "6," and the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "7." The fourth (final) decorative symbol change effect (change display) due to the pseudo-consecutive combination ends, and as shown in FIG. 59(K), the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a switches from the moon image THG2 back to the normal background image, the city image THG1 (at this time, the normal background image may also switch from the city image THG1 to another normal image, such as an underground image), and the change display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a. This ends the specific icon stock effect A.

After that, as shown in Figure 59 (L), the left decorative pattern 8L stops and displays the number "5", the middle decorative pattern 8C stops and displays the number "6", and the right decorative pattern 8R stops and displays the number "7", resulting in a miss. As a result, the white spherical variable icon 9C that was unable to change from a white spherical icon to another icon in the specific icon stock effect A disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Specific Icon Stock Effects B]
Next, the specific icon stock effect B will be described with reference to Fig. 60. Fig. 60 is a diagram for explaining the specific icon stock effect B. The specific icon stock effect B is one of a plurality of pseudo consecutive effects, and during the relevant variable effect (during the relevant variable display), variable effects (variable display) using decorative symbols are performed multiple times in succession.

First, as shown in Figure 60(A), a city image THG1 is displayed as the normal background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A display mode in which the reels rotate from top to bottom of the display screen 7a displays a three-dimensional left decorative symbol 8L, a three-dimensional center decorative symbol 8C, and a three-dimensional right decorative symbol 8R, and a decorative symbol (symbols: numbers "1" through "9") variation effect (variable display) begins. When the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) begins, the stopped decorative symbols gradually increase in speed, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state and rapidly varying. This allows the background image behind the decorative symbols to be viewed through the rapidly varying translucent decorative symbols. The decorative symbols slow down just before stopping, changing from a translucent state back to an opaque state, and then temporarily stopping (temporarily stopping, then stopping). When temporarily stopping, the decorative symbols move slowly up and down.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R currently changing as the first special symbol is consumed are displayed in the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area is provided for the first special symbol hold in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed in four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), allowing a maximum of four hold icons to be stored. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icons are displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one hold icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. For the sake of convenience, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol change presentation (change display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the top center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, at the top center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, and are therefore difficult to distinguish from the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, these numbers are positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with the other images displayed behind them, so visibility is not obstructed by the other images.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icons are further set with increasing expectations of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

In Figure 60 (A), when the decorative pattern change effect (change display) begins, the left decorative pattern 8L then stops and displays the number "1," the middle decorative pattern 8C stops and displays the number "2," and the right decorative pattern 8R stops and displays the number "3," resulting in a loss, and the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(B), the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, a city image THG1, is switched to a specific background image, a moon image THG2, and the white spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the white spherical variable icon 9C. A numeric image (here, the number 4) 9Cz is displayed in front of the variable icon 9C, and a message MG1 saying "Stock icons!" is displayed in a line approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad disappear from the display screen 7a. The size of the variable icon 9C and the numeric image 9Cz may be the same, or one may be larger. Furthermore, when the numeric image 9Cz is placed behind the variable icon 9C, it is preferable to make the size of the numeric image 9Cz larger than the size of the variable icon 9C to improve the visibility of the numeric image 9Cz.

At this point, the number 4 represented by the number image 9Cz indicates the remaining number of consecutive changes due to the pseudo-consecutive combination. In other words, this tells the player that in the change effect (change display) at this point, the change effect (change display) using decorative symbols will continue for the remaining four times.

Just before the first (initial) decorative pattern change effect (change display) due to the pseudo consecutive win begins, message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a. When the first (initial) decorative pattern change effect (change display) due to the pseudo consecutive win begins, as shown in FIG. 60(C), the left decorative pattern 8L is then temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3," the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2," and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1," ending the first (initial) decorative pattern change effect (change display) due to the pseudo consecutive win, and the number image 9Cz of the change icon 9C changes from the number 4 to the number 3. This informs the player that the decorative pattern change effect (change display) will continue for the remaining three times in the change effect (change display).

When the second decorative pattern change effect (change display) due to the pseudo consecutive win begins, as shown in Figure 60 (D), the left decorative pattern 8L is then temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "5", and the change icon HI appears as a specific icon from the change area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, activating the change icon HI to consume it without stocking it.

When this change icon HI appears, as shown in Figure 60 (E), the change icon HI moves downward in an arc toward the change icon 9C, causing it to collide with the change icon 9C.

When the change icon HI collides with the change icon 9C, the change icon 9C changes from a white sphere to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, as shown in Figure 60 (F), and the change of the change icon 9C is successful.

The change in the variable icon 9C is successful, and the second decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) due to the pseudo consecutive combination ends, and the number image 9Cz of the variable icon 9C changes from the number 3 to the number 2. This notifies the player that the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) will continue for the remaining two turns in the variable effect (variable display).

When the third decorative symbol change effect (change display) due to the pseudo-consecutive combination begins, as shown in FIG. 60(G), the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "6," the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "4," and a battle effect icon AI appears as a specific icon from the changing area of the center decorative symbol 8C. To stock the battle effect icon AI without consuming it, the battle effect icon AI moves in a curved line toward the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, passing between the temporarily stopped right decorative symbol 8R and the changing icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 60(H). The battle effect icon AI indicates a battle effect that will unfold (start, develop) after the specific icon stock effect B ends. This battle effect involves a battle between two characters (ally character CRA and enemy character CRB), creating a high probability of a jackpot.

When the battle effect icon AI moves to the bottom right corner of the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 60 (I), a text image AIa with the word "Stock" in a predetermined color (e.g., red) appears on the display screen 7a above the battle effect icon AI in a display mode that slopes downward to the left (upward to the right), indicating that the battle effect icon AI has been successfully stocked.

If the stock of the battle effect icon AI is successful, the second decorative pattern change effect (change display) due to the pseudo consecutive combination ends, and the number image 9Cz of the change icon 9C changes from the number 2 to the number 1. This informs the player that there is only one more decorative pattern change effect (change display) left in that change effect (that change display).

When the fourth (final) decorative symbol change effect (change display) due to the pseudo-consecutive combination begins, as shown in FIG. 60(J), the character image AIa disappears from the display screen. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5," the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6," and the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "7." The fourth (final) decorative symbol change effect (change display) due to the pseudo-consecutive combination ends, and as shown in FIG. 60(K), the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a switches again from the moon image THG2 to the normal background image, the city image THG1 (at this time, the normal background image may also be switched from the city image THG1 to another normal image, such as an underground image), and the change display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a. This ends the specific icon stock effect B.

After that, as shown in Figure 60 (L), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R begin to change again, and by activating the stored battle performance icon AI, the battle performance unfolds (starts, develops) as shown in Figures 60 (M) and (N), and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB begin to fight. In the battle effect, the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C (in this embodiment, if the reserved icon 9A does not exist at this time, but if the reserved icon 9A exists, the reserved icon 9A also disappears) also disappears from the display screen 7a. If the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as the same pattern, resulting in a jackpot, and then the jackpot game (jackpot effect) begins. However, if the ally character CRA loses and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed as the same pattern, resulting in a loss. When the battle effect ends and a jackpot or loss is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a. In this embodiment, although the hold icon 9A does not exist at this point, if the hold icon 9A exists, the hold icon 9A will also be displayed again on the display screen 7a.

[Specific Icon Stock Effects C]
Next, the specific icon stock effect C will be described with reference to Fig. 61. Fig. 61 is a diagram for explaining the specific icon stock effect C. The specific icon stock effect C is one of a plurality of pseudo consecutive effects, and during the corresponding variable effect (during the corresponding variable display), variable effects (variable display) using decorative symbols are performed multiple times in succession.

First, as shown in FIG. 61(A), a city image THG1 is displayed as the normal background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A display mode in which the reels rotate from top to bottom of the display screen 7a displays a three-dimensional left decorative symbol 8L, a three-dimensional center decorative symbol 8C, and a three-dimensional right decorative symbol 8R, and a decorative symbol (symbols: numbers "1" through "9") is displayed. When the decorative symbol display mode begins, the stopped decorative symbols gradually increase in speed, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state and rapidly changing. This allows the background image behind the decorative symbols to be viewed through the rapidly changing translucent decorative symbols. The decorative symbols slow down just before stopping, changing from a translucent state back to an opaque state, and then temporarily stopping (temporarily stopping, then stopping). When temporarily stopping, the decorative symbols move slowly up and down.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R currently changing as the first special symbol is consumed are displayed in the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area is provided for the first special symbol hold in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed in four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), allowing a maximum of four hold icons to be stored. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icons are displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one hold icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. For the sake of convenience, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol change presentation (change display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the top center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, at the top center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, and are therefore difficult to distinguish from the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, these numbers are positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with the other images displayed behind them, so visibility is not obstructed by the other images.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icons are further set with increasing expectations of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

In Figure 61 (A), when the decorative pattern change effect (change display) begins, the left decorative pattern 8L then stops and displays the number "1," the middle decorative pattern 8C stops and displays the number "2," and the right decorative pattern 8R stops and displays the number "3," resulting in a loss, and the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(B), the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, a city image THG1, is switched to a specific background image, a moon image THG2, and the white spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the white spherical variable icon 9C. A numeric image (here, the number 4) 9Cz is displayed in front of the variable icon 9C, and a message MG1 saying "Stock icons!" is displayed in a line approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad disappear from the display screen 7a. The size of the variable icon 9C and the numeric image 9Cz may be the same, or one may be larger. Furthermore, when the numeric image 9Cz is placed behind the variable icon 9C, it is preferable to make the size of the numeric image 9Cz larger than the size of the variable icon 9C to improve the visibility of the numeric image 9Cz.

At this point, the number 4 represented by the number image 9Cz indicates the remaining number of consecutive changes due to the pseudo-consecutive combination. In other words, this tells the player that in the change effect (change display) at this point, the change effect (change display) using decorative symbols will continue for the remaining four times.

Just before the first (initial) decorative pattern change effect (change display) due to the pseudo-consecutive combination begins, message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a. When the first (initial) decorative pattern change effect (change display) due to the pseudo-consecutive combination begins, as shown in FIG. 61(C), the left decorative pattern 8L is then temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3," the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2," and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1," ending the first (initial) decorative pattern change effect (change display) due to the pseudo-consecutive combination, and the number image 9Cz of the change icon 9C changes from the number 4 to the number 3. This informs the player that the decorative pattern change effect (change display) will continue for the remaining three times in that change effect (that change display).

When the second decorative pattern change effect (change display) due to the pseudo consecutive win begins, as shown in Figure 61 (D), the left decorative pattern 8L is then temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "5", and the change icon HI appears as a specific icon from the change area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, activating the change icon HI to consume it without stocking it.

When this change icon HI appears, as shown in Figure 61 (E), the change icon HI moves downward in an arc toward the change icon 9C, causing it to collide with the change icon 9C.

When the change icon HI collides with the change icon 9C, the change icon 9C changes from a white sphere to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, as shown in Figure 61 (F), and the change of the change icon 9C is successful.

The change in the variable icon 9C is successful, and the second decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) due to the pseudo consecutive combination ends, and the number image 9Cz of the variable icon 9C changes from the number 3 to the number 2. This notifies the player that the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) will continue for the remaining two turns in the variable effect (variable display).

When the third decorative pattern change effect (change display) due to the pseudo-consecutive combination begins, as shown in Figure 61 (G), the left decorative pattern 8L is then temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "4", and the button effect icon BI appears as a specific icon from the changing area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and in order to stock the button effect icon BI without consuming it, as shown in Figure 61 (H), the button effect icon BI moves in a curved line towards the bottom right corner of the display screen 7a, passing between the temporarily stopped right decorative pattern 8R and the changing icon 9C. The button effect icon BI indicates the button effect that will unfold (start, develop) after the specific icon stock effect C ends. This button effect encourages the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 to intervene in the ongoing effect and cause a change in the effect image. Compared to the battle effect described below, this effect has a lower chance of resulting in a jackpot, but because the player's operation (press) of the effect button 63 can cause a change in the effect image, the player can fully enjoy a sense of accomplishment from operating (pressing) the effect button 63 as the effect image changes.

When the button effect icon BI moves to the bottom right corner of the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 61 (I), a text image BIa with the word "Stock" in a predetermined color (e.g., red) is displayed on the display screen 7a above the button effect icon BI in a display mode that slopes downward to the left (upward to the right), indicating that the button effect icon BI has been successfully stocked.

If the button effect icon BI is successfully stocked, the second decorative pattern change effect (change display) due to the pseudo consecutive combination ends, and the number image 9Cz of the change icon 9C changes from the number 2 to the number 1. This informs the player that there is only one more decorative pattern change effect (change display) left in that change effect (that change display).

When the fourth (final) decorative symbol variable effect (variable display) due to the pseudo-consecutive win begins, as shown in FIG. 61(J), the character image BIa disappears from the display screen. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "5," the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "7," and a battle effect icon AI appears as a specific icon from the variable area of the center decorative symbol 8C. To stock the battle effect icon AI without consuming it, the battle effect icon AI moves in a curved line toward the bottom right corner of the display screen 7a, passing between the temporarily stopped right decorative symbol 8R and the variable icon 9C, and above the button effect icon BI that is already being stocked. The battle effect icon AI indicates a battle effect that will unfold (start, develop) after the specific icon stock effect C ends. This battle effect involves a battle between two characters (ally character CRA and enemy character CRB), creating a high probability of a jackpot.

When the battle effect icon AI moves above the button effect icon BI, as shown in Figure 61 (K), a text image AIa with the word "Stock" in a predetermined color (e.g., red) is displayed on the display screen 7a above the battle effect icon AI in a display mode that slopes downward to the left (upward to the right), indicating that the battle effect icon AI has been successfully stocked.

Then, the character image BIa disappears from the display screen, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "5", the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at the number "6", and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "7". The fourth (final) decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) due to the pseudo-consecutive combination ends, and as shown in FIG. 61(L), the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a switches again from the moon surface image THG2 to the normal background image, city image THG1 (at this time, the normal background image may also be switched from the city image THG1 to another normal image, such as an underground image), and the variable display position 9Cd and reserved display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a. This ends the specific icon stock effect C.

After that, as shown in Figure 61 (M), the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R begin to change again. In the order in which they were stored, first, the button effect icon BI that was stored first is activated, and the button effect unfolds (starts, develops) as shown in Figure 61 (N). A large button image BG resembling the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a message MG2 saying "Press it!" is displayed above the button image BG on the display screen 7a. This notifies the player that the button effect has unfolded (started, developed), and further encourages the player to operate (press) the effect button 63. At this time, the button effect icon BI disappears from the display screen 7a, and in its place, a character "corner" image CI, indicating that activation has been completed, is displayed on the display screen 7a.

Once the button effect is completed, the second stored battle effect icon AI is activated, and the battle effect unfolds (starts, develops), although not shown. At this time, the battle effect icon AI disappears from the display screen 7a, and in its place, a "corner" character image CI, indicating that activation is complete, is displayed on the display screen 7a. As a result, the "corner" image CI is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, arranged one above the other. When the battle effect unfolds (starts, develops), ally character CRA and enemy character CRB will fight. In the battle presentation, if ally character CRA wins and enemy character CRB loses, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R will stop and be displayed in the same pattern, resulting in a jackpot and then the jackpot game (jackpot presentation) will begin, whereas if ally character CRA loses and enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R will not stop and be displayed in the same pattern, resulting in a miss.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of specific icon stock effects.
[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes, for example, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying multiple types of images, and is capable of executing predetermined effects, such as the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. 61. This first effect (FIGS. 59(D)-(I) for the specific icon stock effect A, FIGS. 60(D)-(J) for the specific icon stock effect B, and FIGS. 61(D)-(K) for the specific icon stock effect C) displays a specific icon that can change (increase) the probability of winning each time a pseudo-consecutive win is achieved, allowing the player to acquire the specific icon. This configuration contributes to eliminating monotony in the effects and allows the player to acquire a specific icon that can change (increase) the probability of winning each time a pseudo-consecutive win is achieved. This configuration contributes to eliminating monotony in the effects and allows the player to acquire a specific icon that can change (increase) the probability of winning each time a pseudo-consecutive win is achieved, such as a change icon HI. This configuration improves the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific icon stock effect A of Fig. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of Fig. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of Fig. 61, the specific icons can include a first specific icon (change icon HI) that is consumed when a specific icon is acquired, and a second specific icon (battle effect icon AI, etc.) that is stocked without being consumed when a specific icon is acquired. With this configuration, the player does not know what type of specific icon will be displayed, and even when the specific icon stock effect begins, the player cannot predict which specific icon will appear. This makes it possible to maintain the novelty of the specific icon stock effect and increase the variety of the specific icon effects.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effects in the specific icon stock effect A of Fig. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of Fig. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of Fig. 61, when a first specific icon (changing icon HI) is acquired, the display mode of the variable icon 9C can be changed to another display mode. According to this configuration, when the first specific icon (changing icon HI) is acquired, the display mode of the variable icon 9C can be changed to another display mode, making it possible to increase expectations, and therefore attracting attention to the appearance of the first specific icon (changing icon HI).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effects of the specific icon stock effect A in Fig. 59, the specific icon stock effect B in Fig. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C in Fig. 61, when a pseudo-consecutive win is occurring, a reach is not formed with multiple symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, center decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R). According to this configuration, by performing a pseudo-consecutive win without forming a reach, it is possible to give the player a sense of speed in the progress of the specific icon stock effect, and this can contribute to reducing the player's frustration with the pseudo-consecutive win.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific icon stock effect B of Fig. 60 and the specific icon stock effect C of Fig. 61, when the pseudo consecutive wins end and the first effect ends, a second effect (Figs. 60(G)-(J) in the specific icon stock effect B, and Figs. 61(G)-(K) in the specific icon stock effect C) related to the second specific icon (such as the battle effect icon AI or the button effect icon BI) stocked in the first effect can be executed. With this configuration, the player can consecutively experience the effect period in which the second specific icon is stocked in the first effect during the pseudo consecutive wins, and the effect period in which the second specific icon stocked in the second effect is activated at the end of the pseudo consecutive wins. Furthermore, since other effects are developed (started and developed) consecutively after the specific icon stock effect, the player's expectations for a jackpot in the other effects can be heightened in the preceding effect of the specific icon stock effect.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effects of the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. 61, the reserved icon 9A may be displayed when a reserved ball is present. With this configuration, when expressing, for example, a worldview through the progression of the second effect, the reserved icon 9A can be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 if its presence does not interfere with the presentation, and can be removed from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 if its presence interferes with the presentation. In other words, by displaying or removing the reserved icon 9A on or from the display screen 7a when a reserved ball is present, the reserved icon 9A can be prevented from interfering with the second effect. Incidentally, the variable icon 9C can also be displayed or removed from the display screen 7a to prevent the reserved icon 9A from interfering with the second effect. In addition, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad can be displayed on or removed from the display screen 7a to prevent the hold icon 9A from interfering with the second performance.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the variable specific icon stock effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
The specific icon stock effect A in Fig. 59, the specific icon stock effect B in Fig. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C in Fig. 61 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, they are performed in a game state known as a left-handed hit. However, they may also be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21. In other words, they may also be performed in a game state known as a right-handed hit.

[Modification 2]
In the first effects of the specific icon stock effect A in Figure 59, the specific icon stock effect B in Figure 60, and the specific icon stock effect C in Figure 61, the variable icon 9C is displayed without moving from the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position) to another position. However, in the first effect, when the variable icon 9C moves from the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position) to another position, it may be made to move closer to the variable display position 9Cd each time a pseudo-consecutive win is performed. In this way, the variable icon 9C moves closer to the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position) each time a pseudo-consecutive win is performed, so that the remaining number of pseudo-consecutive wins can be intuitively and easily conveyed to the player the distance between the position where the variable icon 9C is displayed and the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position). The "other position" may be, for example, closer to the left or right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position), closer to the upper left or upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, or the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Modification 3]
In the first performance of the specific icon stock performance A in Fig. 59, the specific icon stock performance B in Fig. 60, and the specific icon stock performance C in Fig. 61, the variable icon 9C was displayed without moving from the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position) to another position. However, in the first performance, when the variable icon 9C moves from the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position) to another position, it approaches the variable display position 9Cd each time a pseudo-consecutive win is performed, and further, even if a reserved ball is present, the reserved icon 9A may not be displayed in the area where the variable icon 9C moves. In this way, each time a pseudo-consecutive win is made, the variable icon 9C approaches the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position), so that the remaining number of pseudo-consecutive wins can be intuitively and easily conveyed to the player the distance between the position where the variable icon 9C is displayed and the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position).Furthermore, if a reserve icon 9A indicating the presence of a reserved ball is displayed in the area where the variable icon 9C moves, the reserve icon 9A can be removed from the display screen 7a so as not to obstruct the visibility of the variable icon 9C, thereby preventing the reserve icon 9A from obstructing the moving variable icon 9C.In addition, the "other position" may be, for example, closer to the left or right side of the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, or closer to the upper left or right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Modification 4]
In the specific icon stock effect A in Fig. 59, the specific icon stock effect B in Fig. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C in Fig. 61, the number of pseudo consecutive wins was four. However, the number of pseudo consecutive wins may be five, six, seven, or eight. This increases the chances of winning a specific icon (such as a change icon HI).

[Modification 5]
In the specific icon stock effect A of Fig. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of Fig. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of Fig. 61, the number of pseudo consecutive wins is fixed at four in advance. However, the number of pseudo consecutive wins may be varied between four and eight each time a specific icon stock effect is performed. In this way, the chance of acquiring a specific icon (such as a change icon HI) can be varied each time a specific icon stock effect is performed, thereby increasing the variety of specific icon stock effects.

[Modification 6]
In the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. 61, a number image 9Cz is displayed in front of the variable icon 9C to indicate the number of pseudo-consecutive wins. However, an indicator may be displayed in a predetermined position on the display screen 7a (e.g., above the variable icon 9C) to indicate the number of pseudo-consecutive wins. In this way, the indicator's level gauge decreases each time a pseudo-consecutive win is achieved, thereby intuitively conveying the remaining number of pseudo-consecutive wins. The indicator may be displayed in a predetermined position on the display screen 7a with the number image 9Cz displayed in front of the variable icon 9C, or may be displayed in a predetermined position on the display screen 7a with the number image 9Cz removed from the variable icon 9C (the variable icon 9C alone).

[Modification 7]
In the specific icon stock effect A of Fig. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of Fig. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of Fig. 61, a number image 9Cz is displayed in front of the variable icon 9C to indicate the number of pseudo consecutive wins. However, each time a pseudo consecutive win is made, the variable icon 9C may move through the squares of the "sugoroku" game. In this case, each time a pseudo consecutive win is made, the variable icon 9C may advance one square at a time to reach the goal, or a dice image may be displayed on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C may advance through the squares corresponding to the number of dots rolled on the dice image toward the goal.

[Modification 8]
In the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. 61, the various symbols are number symbols and no character images are provided. However, character images may be provided for the odd numbers "1,""3,""5,""7," and "9," respectively, while no character images are provided for the even numbers "2,""4,""6," and "8." Furthermore, when the specific icon stock effect is initiated, the character images provided for the odd numbers "1,""3,""5,""7," and "9" may be deleted. This allows the player to clearly see that the special effect of the specific icon stock effect has been entered. Note that if the odd numbers "1,""3,""5,""7," and "9" all have the same bright green color and the even numbers "2,""4,""6," and "8" all have the same bright blue color, the various colors of the number symbols are retained and do not change to other colors even when the specific icon stock effect is initiated. This makes it possible to switch to a special effect called a specific icon stock effect, and even if the character images provided for the odd numbers "1,""3,""5,""7," and "9" are deleted, it is possible to make it difficult to affect the discrimination of the number patterns.

[Modification 9]
In the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59 , the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60 , and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. 61 , when a pseudo-consecutive win is occurring, a reach is not formed by multiple symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, center decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R). However, a reach may be formed. This can give the player a sense of speed with the progress of the specific icon stock effect during a pseudo-consecutive win until a reach is formed, which can contribute to reducing the player's frustration with the pseudo-consecutive win. Furthermore, when a reach is formed, the specific icon stock effect is stopped, and the variable effect (variable display) continues. If there is a second specific icon (such as a battle effect icon AI) that is stocked without being consumed when a specific icon is acquired, the second specific icon (such as a battle effect icon AI) is activated and consumed.

[Modification 10]
In the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. 61, the first special symbol reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 were displayed as numbers (not shown) at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, making them difficult to distinguish among the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a and intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, since they are positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, visibility is not obstructed by other images. In this embodiment, when the specific icon stock effect was initiated, a number image 9Cz was displayed in front of the variable icon 9C. The number image 9Cz indicated the remaining number of consecutive variations due to the pseudo-consecutive combination. This could lead to a player mistaking the number (number of reserved balls) displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a for the remaining number of consecutive wins due to the pseudo-consecutive win. Therefore, instead of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a number representing the number of reserved balls may be displayed on one of the sub-display screens 64 (the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U, for example, the right sub-display screen 64R). This eliminates the risk of a player mistaking the number representing the number of reserved balls for the remaining number of consecutive wins due to the pseudo-consecutive win. Furthermore, the number representing the number of reserved balls can be easily distinguished from the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making it easier to understand intuitively.

[Modification 11]
The specific icon stock effect A in Figure 59, the specific icon stock effect B in Figure 60, and the specific icon stock effect C in Figure 61 may not have some of the effects described, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
A first effect can be executed in which a specific icon whose expected probability of winning can be changed is displayed and the specific icon can be acquired each time a pseudo consecutive win is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A4-1,
The specific icons may include a first specific icon that is consumed when the specific icon is acquired, and a second specific icon that is stocked without being consumed when the specific icon is acquired.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A4-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A4-1 or A4-2,
In the first performance, when the first specific icon is acquired, it is possible to change the display mode of the variable icon (corresponding to the variable icon) to another display mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A4-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A4-1 to A4-3,
In the first performance, when the pseudo consecutive win is being performed, a reach may not be formed by a plurality of symbol images.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A4-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A4-1 to A4-4,
In the first performance, when the (corresponding) variable icon moves from the (corresponding) variable icon display position to another position, it approaches the (corresponding) variable icon display position each time the pseudo-consecutive win is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A4-6]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A4-5,
In the first effect, even if there is a reserved ball, the reserved icon is not displayed in the area where the (corresponding) variable icon moves.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A4-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A4-2 to A4-6,
When the pseudo consecutive wins are ended and the first effect is ended, a second effect related to the second specific icon stocked by the first effect can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A4-8]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A4-7,
In the second effect, a reserved icon may be displayed when a reserved ball exists.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Operation stock effect A (first half), operation stock effect A (second half), and operation stock effect B (second half) are explained below using Figures 62 to 64. This operation stock effect can be executed during the effect symbol variation effect. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute an operation stock effect, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Operation Stock A (first half)]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining operation stock presentation A (first half).
First, as shown in Figure 62 (A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols start to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reserved and the corresponding changing image 9C are displayed.

Next, a temporary stop effect is executed, as shown in Figure 62 (B) or Figure 62 (D). A temporary stop effect is an effect in which the effect symbol temporarily stops in a predetermined manner. There are two types of temporary stop effects. As shown in Figure 62 (B), a mode in which a special symbol temporarily stops in place of the middle effect symbol 8C, and as shown in Figure 62 (D), a mode in which the middle effect symbol 8C temporarily stops.

In the temporary stop effect shown in Figure 62 (B), the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops at "1", the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops at "2", and a special symbol temporarily stops in place of the center effect symbol 8C. The special symbol is represented by a button image BG that resembles the effect button 63. For example, the changing effect symbols temporarily stop in the order of left effect symbol 8L → right effect symbol 8R → special symbol.

When a special symbol temporarily stops instead of the middle symbol 8C as shown in Figure 62 (B), a stock effect is executed as shown in Figure 62 (C). In other words, the stock effect is an effect that is executed when a special symbol temporarily stops during a temporary stop effect. In the stock effect, the button image BG as the special symbol is reduced in size and moves from the center of the display screen 7a to the lower right as indicated by arrow Y. Then, a reduced button image BGS is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a.

In the temporary stop effect shown in Figure 62 (D), the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops at "4", the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops at "9", and the middle effect symbol 8C temporarily stops at "3". For example, the changing effect symbols temporarily stop in the order of left effect symbol 8L → right effect symbol 8R → middle effect symbol 8C.

After the stock effect shown in Figure 62 (C) or the temporary stop effect shown in Figure 62 (D), the variable start effect shown in Figure 62 (A) is executed, resulting in a pseudo consecutive effect. In this embodiment, a repeated pseudo consecutive effect is executed in which this pseudo consecutive effect is repeated seven times. Then, in the repeated pseudo consecutive effect, the button image BG as the special symbol stops instead of the medium effect symbol 8C (Figure 62 (B)), thereby executing the stock effect (Figure 62 (C)). The following explanation will continue assuming that the stock effect has been executed four times in the repeated pseudo consecutive effect.

After the repeat pseudo-consecutive effect ends, a reach formation effect is executed, as shown in Figure 62 (E). A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both temporarily stop at "5". At this time, the stocked reduced button images BGS are displayed stacked on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 62 (F), an operation prompting effect is executed. In this effect, the topmost reduced button image BGS of the reduced button images BGS piled up on the right side of the display screen 7a moves and enlarges as indicated by arrow Y, and a button image BG displaying the word "PUSH" is displayed. In addition, a message image MSG saying "Press" is displayed above the button image BG. We will now continue the explanation assuming that the player has pressed the effect button 63.

Next, as shown in Figure 62 (G), a development effect is executed. The development effect is an effect that notifies the player that a normal reach effect will develop into a super reach effect. Here, a message image MSG saying "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Also, at this time, reduced button images BGS are displayed stacked on the right side of the display screen 7a. Note that even if the player does not press the effect button 63 during the operation prompt effect of Figure 62 (F), the development effect will be executed after the valid period of the effect button 63.

Next, as shown in Figure 62 (H), a battle presentation (start) is executed. The battle presentation is a presentation in which a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. If the ally character CRA defeats the enemy character CRB, a jackpot is awarded. In the battle presentation (start), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed facing each other in the center of the display screen 7a.

[Operation Stock A (Second Half)]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining operation stock presentation A (second half).
First, as shown in Fig. 63(A), an operation prompting effect is executed. In the operation prompting effect, the topmost reduced button image BGS among the reduced button images BGS piled up on the right side of the display screen 7a moves and enlarges as indicated by arrow Y, and a button image BG displaying the word "PUSH" is displayed. In addition, a message image MSG saying "Press" is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in Figure 63 (B), a battle presentation (initial stage) is executed. In the battle presentation (initial stage), the enemy character CRB moves toward the ally character CRA, and the enemy character CRB gains the upper hand. At this time, reduced button images BGS are displayed stacked on the right side of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, if the player presses the presentation button 63 during the operation prompt presentation shown in Figure 63 (A), a message image MSG reading "Chance" is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. If the player does not press the presentation button 63 during the operation prompt presentation shown in Figure 63 (A), the message image MSG reading "Chance" is not displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 63 (C), an operation prompting effect is executed. In the operation prompting effect, the topmost reduced button image BGS of the reduced button images BGS piled up on the right side of the display screen 7a moves and enlarges as indicated by arrow Y, and a button image BG displaying the word "PUSH" is displayed. In addition, a message image MSG saying "Press" is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in Figure 63 (D), a battle presentation (middle stage) is executed. In the battle presentation (middle stage), ally character CRA moves toward enemy character CRB, and ally character CRA gains the upper hand. At this time, a reduced button image BGS is also displayed on the right side of display screen 7a. Furthermore, if the player presses presentation button 63 during the operation prompt presentation shown in Figure 63 (C), a message image MSG reading "Big Chance" is displayed on the right side of display screen 7a. If the player does not press presentation button 63 during the operation prompt presentation shown in Figure 63 (C), the message image MSG reading "Big Chance" is not displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 63 (E), an operation prompting effect is executed. In the operation prompting effect, the reduced button image BGS on the right side of the display screen 7a moves and enlarges as indicated by arrow Y, and a button image BG with the word "PUSH" displayed is displayed. In addition, a message image MSG saying "Press" is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in Figure 63 (F), the battle presentation (final stage) is executed. In the battle presentation (final stage), ally character CRA and enemy character CRB fight in the center. If the player presses presentation button 63 during the operation prompt presentation shown in Figure 63 (E), a message image MSG saying "Super Hot" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. If the player does not press presentation button 63 during the operation prompt presentation shown in Figure 63 (E), the message image MSG saying "Super Hot" is not displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 63 (G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies the player of the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, a win is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA has won. At this time, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a message image MSG saying "Victory" is displayed. In the case of a loss, for example, an enemy character is displayed and a message image saying "Defeat" is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 63 (H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. In a confirmed stop effect (win), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a winning manner. Here, the left, right, and center effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R all stop at a confirmed "5". In the case of a loss, for example, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R stop at a confirmed "5", and the center effect symbol 8C stops at a confirmed "6".

[Operation Stock Performance B (Second Half)]
64 is a diagram for explaining the operation stock effect B (second half). The operation stock effect B (first half) is assumed to be the same as the operation stock effect A (first half), and a description thereof will be omitted.
In the operation stock effect B (second half), first, an operation prompting effect is executed as shown in Fig. 64(A). In the operation prompting effect, the topmost reduced button image BGS among the reduced button images BGS piled up on the right side of the display screen 7a moves and enlarges as shown by arrow Y, and a button image BG displaying the word "PUSH" is displayed. In addition, a message image MSG saying "PUSH" is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in Figure 64 (B), a battle presentation (initial stage) is executed. In the battle presentation (initial stage), the enemy character CRB moves toward the ally character CRA, and the enemy character CRB gains the upper hand. At this time, reduced button images BGS are displayed stacked on the right side of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, if the player presses the presentation button 63 during the operation prompt presentation shown in Figure 64 (A), a message image MSG reading "Chance" is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. If the player does not press the presentation button 63 during the operation prompt presentation shown in Figure 64 (A), the message image MSG reading "Chance" is not displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 64 (C), an operation prompting effect is executed. In the operation prompting effect, the topmost reduced button image BGS of the reduced button images BGS piled up on the right side of the display screen 7a moves and enlarges as indicated by arrow Y, and a button image BG displaying the word "PUSH" is displayed. In addition, a message image MSG saying "Press" is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in Figure 64 (D), a battle presentation (middle stage) is executed. In the battle presentation (middle stage), ally character CRA moves toward enemy character CRB, and ally character CRA gains the upper hand. At this time, a reduced button image BGS is also displayed on the right side of display screen 7a. Furthermore, if the player presses presentation button 63 during the operation prompt presentation shown in Figure 64 (C), a message image MSG reading "Big Chance" is displayed on the right side of display screen 7a. If the player does not press presentation button 63 during the operation prompt presentation shown in Figure 64 (C), the message image MSG reading "Big Chance" is not displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 64 (E), an operation prompting effect is executed. In the operation prompting effect, the reduced button image BGS on the right side of the display screen 7a moves and enlarges as indicated by arrow Y, and a button image BG with the word "PUSH" displayed is displayed. In addition, a message image MSG saying "Press" is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in Figure 64 (F), a win confirmation effect is executed. The win confirmation effect is an effect that definitively notifies that a win has occurred. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a message image MSG saying "You've won" is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 64 (G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies the player of the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a message image MSG saying "Victory" is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 64 (H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. In a confirmed stop effect (win), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a confirmed winning state. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, right, and center all stop at "5."

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the operation stock effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the temporary stop effect (FIGS. 62(B)(D)), a change start effect (FIG. 62(A)) is executed, thereby executing a repeat pseudo consecutive effect that repeats the pseudo consecutive effect. Then, in this repeat pseudo consecutive effect, the button image BG as a special symbol stops instead of the medium effect symbol 8C (FIG. 62(B)), and a stock effect is executed (FIG. 62(C)). This configuration can surprise and anticipate the player, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the operation prompt effect is executed for each reduced button image BGS stocked in the stock effect (FIG. 62(B)), and operation of the effect button 63 is enabled (FIG. 62(F), FIG. 63(A)(C)(E), FIG. 64(A)(C)(E)). With this configuration, the more reduced button images BGS are stocked, the more the player is given anticipation, and the more the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the repeated pseudo consecutive effects consisting of seven pseudo consecutive effects, the button image BG as the special symbol stops instead of the medium effect symbol 8C (FIG. 62(B)), and a stock effect is executed (FIG. 62(C)). This configuration increases expectations for the predetermined number of pseudo consecutive effects, and can increase the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button image BG as the special symbol stops instead of the medium symbol 8C in the pseudo consecutive effect (FIG. 62(B)), and a stock effect is executed (FIG. 62(C)). In the stock effect, the button image BG as the special symbol is reduced in size and moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the lower right as indicated by the arrow Y, and is held there. This configuration makes it easier to understand the number of stocks, which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the operation promotion effect, the reduced button image BGS on the right side of the display screen 7a moves and enlarges as shown by the arrow Y, and a button image BG with the word "PUSH" displayed is displayed (FIG. 62(F), FIG. 63(A)(C)(E), FIG. 64(A)(C)(E)). This configuration can effectively promote the operation of the effect button 63, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the operation prompting effect (FIG. 62(F), FIG. 63(A)(C)(E), FIG. 64(A)(C)(E)) is executed after the reach formation effect (FIG. 62(E)). This configuration can create a sense of anticipation for the reach formation, and can increase the enjoyment of the game.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of operation stock effects are shown.
[Modification 1]
The above example shows the button image BG as a special pattern temporarily stopping in place of the middle performance pattern 8C, but the special pattern may also be made to temporarily stop in place of the left performance pattern 8L or the right performance pattern 8R.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the repeated pseudo consecutive effects are configured with seven pseudo consecutive effects, but they may be configured with fewer or more than seven. Furthermore, the number of pseudo consecutive effects may be dynamically changed. For example, the more pseudo consecutive effects there are, the higher the expectation of a win may be.

[Modification 3]
Although the above description has been given with an example in which four stock effects are performed, the number of stock effects is not particularly limited. For example, the more stock effects are performed, the higher the expectation of a win may be.

[Modification 4]
In the above, the operation of the effect button 63 is given as an example, but any operation unit that can be operated by the player is sufficient, and the operation is not limited to the operation of the effect button 63.

[Modification 5]
The above example shows the effect of the first special chart reserved, but it may also be the effect of the second special chart reserved.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect A5-1]
A gaming machine equipped with an operation unit that can be operated by a player,
In a repeat pseudo consecutive performance in which the performance pattern that has started to fluctuate temporarily stops and then starts to fluctuate again, a stock performance can be executed in which an operation unit image that imitates the operation unit is displayed and the operation unit image is held on the screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A5-1,
After the repeat pseudo-sequential performance, an operation unit performance can be executed in which the operation of the operation unit is enabled according to the number of the operation unit images held on the screen in the stock performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A5-1 or A5-2,
The repeated pseudo-sequential performance is constituted by a predetermined number of pseudo-sequential performances.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A5-1 to A5-3,
In the stock effect, when the effect symbol temporarily stops in the pseudo consecutive effect, the operation unit image is displayed as a special symbol, and then the operation unit image is reduced and held.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A5-2 to A5-4,
In the operation unit presentation, the operation unit image held on the screen is enlarged to promote operation of the operation unit.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A5-2 to A5-5,
The operation unit performance is executed through a reach formation performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a predetermined manner after the repeated pseudo-continuous performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A5-1 to A5-6,
When the operation unit is operated during a period in which the operation of the operation unit is valid in the operation unit performance, a confirmation notification performance can be executed to definitively notify that a win has occurred.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The icon number pattern effect will be explained below using Figures 65 to 67. This icon number pattern effect can be executed during the special pattern variation effect, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it matches a specified variation pattern, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a.

[Icon number pattern effect A]
65 is a diagram for explaining the icon number pattern effect A. In this icon number pattern effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 65(A), a decorative pattern change effect is performed. In this decorative pattern change effect, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change. In addition, in the decorative pattern change effect, the change icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 65(B), icon movement effect 1 is performed. In this icon movement effect 1, a number pattern 8X, which has the same appearance (same shape, same color, same pattern) as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, one reserved icon 9A, and a guide rail image XA1 are displayed. This number pattern 8X is a pattern that has the same appearance as one of the numbers 1 through 9 in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In the example of Figure 65(B), a pattern that has the same appearance as the decorative pattern "6" is displayed. Furthermore, this number pattern 8X randomly moves and stops on the display screen 7a. Furthermore, one reserved icon 9A displayed in icon movement effect 1 is one of the reserved icons 9A displayed in the decorative pattern change effect. In the example of Figure 65(B), it corresponds to the reserved icon closest to the changing icon 9C in Figure 65(A). The guide rail image XA1 is an image for guiding the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A is placed inside a cylindrical shape. The hold icon 9A then moves a predetermined distance toward the variable icon display area that displays the variable icon, and stops.

Next, as shown in Figure 65 (C), icon movement effect 2 is performed. In this icon movement effect 2, the number pattern 8X moves randomly from right to left and then stops. Also, in icon movement effect 2, the reserved icon 9A moves a predetermined distance along the guide portion of the guide rail image XA1 toward the variable icon display area and then stops.

Next, as shown in Figure 65 (D), icon movement effect 3 is performed. In this icon movement effect 3, the number pattern 8X moves randomly while the reserved icon 9A moves along the guide rail image XA1, reaching the variable icon display area and stopping. In this case, this reserved icon 9A will then function as the variable icon 9C.

Next, as shown in Figure 65(E), a decorative pattern stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern stop effect, the fluctuating decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop changing, forming a stopped pattern array. In the example of Figure 65(E), the stopped pattern array is "6 7 6," which is a losing pattern array. Also, in this decorative pattern stop effect, the reserved icon 9A that was moving in the icon movement effect becomes the fluctuating icon 9C.

In this icon number pattern presentation A, the more times the reserved icon 9A moves and stops, the higher the chance of winning.

[Icon number pattern effect B]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the icon number pattern effect B. In this icon number pattern effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 66(A), a decorative pattern change effect is performed. In this decorative pattern change effect, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change. In addition, in the decorative pattern change effect, the change icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A are displayed below the display screen 7a. These icons are circular and white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(B), icon movement effect 1 is performed. In this icon movement effect 1, a number pattern 8X, which has the same configuration (same shape, same color, same pattern) as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, one hold icon 9A, and a guide rail image XA1 are displayed. This number pattern 8X is a pattern that has the same configuration as one of the numbers 1 through 9 in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In the example of FIG. 66(B), a pattern that has the same configuration as the decorative pattern "6" is displayed. Furthermore, this number pattern 8X and one hold icon 9A are arranged adjacent to each other in correspondence. The one hold icon 9A displayed in icon movement effect 1 is one of the hold icons 9A displayed in the decorative pattern change effect, and in the example of FIG. 66(B), it corresponds to the hold icon closest to the change icon 9C in FIG. 66(A). The guide rail image XA1 is an image for guiding the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A (number design 8X) is arranged inside a cylindrical shape. The hold icon 9A (number design 8X) moves toward the variable icon display area that displays the variable icon and stops there. Note that this hold icon 9A remains white.

Next, as shown in Figure 66 (C), icon movement effect 2 is performed. In this icon movement effect 2, the number symbol 8X and the reserved icon 9A are continuously placed adjacent to each other. In this case, the number symbol 8X changes from a "6" symbol to a "5" symbol. The reserved icon 9A also changes from white to blue (shown by normal hatching in Figure 66 (C)). In icon movement effect 2, the reserved icon 9A moves along the guide portion of the guide rail image XA1 toward the variable icon display area and stops.

Next, as shown in Figure 66 (D), icon movement effect 3 is performed. In this icon movement effect 3, the hold icon 9A associated with the number pattern 8X moves along the guide rail image XA1 and stops when it reaches the variable icon display area. In this case, this hold icon 9A will then function as the variable icon 9C. Note that this hold icon 9A changes color from blue to green (indicated by cross-hatching in Figure 66 (D)).

Next, as shown in Figure 66(E), a decorative pattern stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern stop effect, the fluctuating decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop changing, forming a stopped pattern array. In the example of Figure 66(E), the stopped pattern array is "6 7 6," which is a losing pattern array. Also, in this decorative pattern stop effect, the reserved icon 9A (green), which was moving in the icon movement effect, becomes the fluctuating icon 9C.

In this icon number pattern presentation B, the more times the reserved icon 9A moves and stops, the higher the chance of winning. Also, the more times the reserved icon 9A moves and stops, the greater the chance of the reserved icon 9A changing.

[Icon Number Design Presentation C]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the icon number pattern effect C. In this icon number pattern effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 67(A), a decorative pattern change effect is performed. In this decorative pattern change effect, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change. In addition, in the decorative pattern change effect, the change icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A are displayed below the display screen 7a. These icons are circular and white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(B), icon movement effect 1 is performed. In this icon movement effect 1, a number pattern 8X, which has the same configuration (same shape, same color, same pattern) as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, one hold icon 9A, and a guide rail image XA1 are displayed. This number pattern 8X is a pattern that has the same configuration as one of the numbers 1 through 9 in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In the example of FIG. 67(B), a pattern that has the same configuration as the decorative pattern "6" is displayed. Furthermore, this number pattern 8X is positioned within one hold icon 9A. In this case, it can be said that the number pattern 8X corresponds to this hold icon 9A. One hold icon 9A displayed in icon movement effect 1 is one of the hold icons 9A displayed in the decorative pattern change effect, and in the example of FIG. 67(B), it corresponds to the hold icon closest to the change icon 9C in FIG. 67(A). The guide rail image XA1 is an image for guiding the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A (number design 8X) is arranged inside a cylindrical shape. The hold icon 9A (number design 8X) moves toward the variable icon display area that displays the variable icon and stops there. Note that this hold icon 9A remains white.

Next, as shown in Figure 67 (C), icon movement effect 2 is performed. In this icon movement effect 2, the number symbol 8X is continuously placed within the reserved icon 9A. In this case, the number symbol 8X changes from a "6" symbol to a "5" symbol. The reserved icon 9A also changes from white to blue (indicated by normal hatching in Figure 67 (C)). In icon movement effect 2, the reserved icon 9A moves along the guide portion of the guide rail image XA1 toward the variable icon display area and stops.

Next, as shown in Figure 67 (D), icon movement effect 3 is performed. In this icon movement effect 3, the hold icon 9A containing the number pattern 8X moves along the guide rail image XA1 and stops when it reaches the variable icon display area. In this case, this hold icon 9A will then function as the variable icon 9C. Note that this hold icon 9A has changed from blue to green (indicated by cross-hatching in Figure 67 (D)). Furthermore, the hold icon 9A still contains the number pattern 8X even when it reaches the variable icon display area.

Next, as shown in Figure 67(E), a decorative pattern stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern stop effect, the fluctuating decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop changing, forming a stopped pattern array. In the example of Figure 67(E), the stopped pattern array is "6 7 6," which is a losing pattern array. Also, in this decorative pattern stop effect, the reserved icon 9A (green) that was moving in the icon movement effect becomes the fluctuating icon 9C. Note that even in this case, the reserved icon 9C contains the number pattern 8X even when it reaches the fluctuating icon display area.

In this icon number pattern effect C, the more the reserved icon 9A moves and stops, the higher the chance of winning. Also, the more the reserved icon 9A moves and stops, the more chances there are for the reserved icon 9A to change.
In addition, the icon number pattern effects are effects that are performed with the same variation.

[Modification]
In the icon number pattern presentation of the above embodiment, the number pattern 8X has the same form as the decorative pattern, but this is not limited to this, and the number pattern 8X may have the same form as part of the decorative pattern, but part of it may be different from the decorative pattern.
In the above embodiments of icon number pattern effects B and C, when icon movement effect 1 is changed to icon movement effect 2, the pending icon 9A changes and the number pattern 8X associated with the pending icon 9A also changes, but this is not limited to this, and the configuration may also be such that the number pattern 8X does not change even when the pending icon 9A changes.

[Example of effect]
In the icon number pattern effect of the above embodiment, the reserved icon 9A and the number pattern 8X move. With this configuration, the movement of the reserved icon 9A and the number pattern 8X can realize an interesting effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.
In addition, in the icon number pattern effects B and C, the reserved icon 9A and the number pattern 8X are associated with each other and move together, so that the movement of the reserved icon 9A and the number pattern 8X can be emphasized to the player, thereby increasing the interest in the game.
Furthermore, since the number pattern 8X has the same appearance (shape, color) as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, a new effect can be displayed in which the reserved icon and the decorative pattern work together, thereby increasing the interest in the game.
In addition, in icon number pattern effects B and C, after the reserved icon 9A and the number pattern 8X are associated and move, the state (color, shape) of the reserved icon 9A changes, so the more the reserved icon and the number pattern 8X move, the more the player's expectations for a change in the reserved state increase, and the more interesting the game becomes.
In addition, in icon number pattern effects B and C, after the reserved icon 9A and the number pattern 8X are associated and moved, even if the appearance (color, shape) of the reserved icon 9A changes, the appearance of the number pattern 8X does not change, so the change in the reserved icon 9A can be more impressive to the player, increasing the interest in the game.
In addition, in the icon number pattern effects B and C, when the reserved icon 9A and the number pattern 8X move in association with each other, if the number pattern 8X changes, the reserved icon 9A may also change. With this configuration, if the number pattern changes, the reserved icon 9A can be expected to change, so the player will focus on both the number pattern and the reserved icon, which can increase the fun of the game.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect XA-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one effect of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of varying a decorative pattern,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a predetermined icon which is an icon representing a hold or the change and a number pattern including a number,
the third display effect is an effect in which the predetermined icon moves,
The fourth display effect is an effect in which the number pattern moves,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and then the third display effect and the fourth display effect are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-1,
In the combination performance, the fourth display performance is performed when the third display performance is being performed, and the predetermined icon in the third display performance and the number pattern in the fourth display performance move in association with each other.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-2,
The number pattern is the same as the decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-3,
In the combination performance, when the predetermined icon in the third display performance and the number pattern in the fourth display performance move in association with each other, the predetermined icon changes after moving.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-4,
In the combination effect, the predetermined icon in the third display effect and the number pattern in the fourth display effect move in association with each other, and when the predetermined icon changes after moving, the number pattern does not change.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-5,
In the combination performance, when the predetermined icon in the third display performance and the number pattern in the fourth display performance move in association with each other, the number pattern may change, and when the number pattern changes, the predetermined icon also changes.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The reach-time hold icon effects A to C are explained below using Figures 68 to 70. These reach-time hold icon effects can be executed during the decorative pattern change effect, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the reach-time hold icon effect, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Reach pending icon effect A]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon effect A during reach. The pending icon effect is an effect in which, in a reach effect executed when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a reach state, only the pending icon (variable icon) 9C is newly displayed from a state in which no pending icons are displayed. First, as shown in FIG. 68(A), when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a reach state (here, a "2↓2" reach), the pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. The pending icons 9A and 9B have disappeared from the display screen 7a. The pending icon (variable icon) 9C is rectangular and is displayed in the pending display area (variable icon display area, pending consumption image display area) at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Below this pending display area, a horizontally long rectangular image is displayed to indicate the position of the pending display area.

As shown in Figure 68 (B), while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R remain in the reach state, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C disappears (is no longer displayed) from the display screen 7a. In other words, all hold icons (hold icons 9A, 9B, and the hold icon 9C) are no longer displayed. Then, as shown in Figure 68 (C), while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R remain in the reach state, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed again on the display screen 7a. In other words, of the hold icons, only the hold icon 9C is displayed, and hold icons 9A and 9B are no longer displayed. When the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed again, it has the same appearance as before it disappeared. In this case, appearance includes the shape, color, movement, size, etc. of the hold icon (variable icon) 9C.

After that, as shown in Figure 68 (D), the state of the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C changes, and a text image representing the state of the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C after the change is displayed. Here, "representing the state" includes not only the shape, color, movement, and size of the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C, but also the content, name (e.g., character name), nickname, etc. represented by the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C. The order in which the state of the reserved icon 9C changes is from a state with a low expectation of a jackpot to a state with a high expectation of a jackpot. Here, the color of the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C changes, and a "red square" text image representing the shape and color of the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed.

After that, as shown in Figure 68 (E), while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be in a reach state, an effect is executed in which the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C and the text image rotate together. During the rotation, an effect is executed in which the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C changes, as shown in Figures 68 (F), (G), and (H). Specifically, the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C splits (divides) into two pieces, and a new star-shaped reserved icon (variable icon) 9C appears from the split, along with a text image representing the appearance of the new reserved icon (variable icon) 9C. Here, a "star-shaped" text image representing the shape of the new reserved icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. The two square-shaped pieces that remain after the split and the "red square" text image frame out. The new reserved icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the reserved display area (variable icon display area, reserved consumption image display area).

After that, as shown in Figure 68 (I), while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be in a reach state, an effect is executed in which the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C and the text image rotate together. While they are rotating, an effect is executed in which the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C changes, as shown in Figure 68 (J). Specifically, the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C and the text image are enlarged. After that, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stopped in the form of a jackpot (here, "222").

[Reach pending icon effect B]
FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating the reach-time hold icon effect B. The reach-time hold icon effect is a reach effect executed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a reach state, in which a hold icon (variable icon) 9C is newly displayed from a state in which no hold icons were displayed. First, as shown in FIG. 69(A), four hold icons 9A and the hold icon (variable icon) 9C are displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Both the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round (spherical) shape. Here, because the hold icon 9C and the hold icon 9A have the same shape (hold icon shape), they are collectively referred to simply as "hold icons 9A, 9C." The hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the hold display area (variable icon display area, hold consumption image display area) at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Below this hold display area, a horizontally long rectangular image is displayed to indicate the position of the hold display area.

After that, as shown in Figure 69(B), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R enter a reach state (here, a "2↓2" reach), and the hold icons 9A and 9B and the rectangular image indicating the position of the hold display area disappear from the display screen 7a, leaving only the hold icon (variable icon) 9C visible. As shown in Figure 69(C), while decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R remain in a reach state, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C disappears (is no longer displayed) from the display screen 7a. In other words, all hold icons (hold icons 9A, 9B, and the hold icon 9C) are no longer displayed. Then, a specific image TG resembling a bomb is displayed. The specific image TG appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and moves leftward, tracing a parabola. After that, as shown in Figure 69(D), while decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R remain in a reach state, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed again on the display screen 7a. In other words, of the hold icons, only the hold icon 9C is displayed, and hold icons 9A and 9B and the horizontally long rectangular image indicating the position of the hold display area are not displayed. When the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed again, it will have the same appearance as before it disappeared. In this case, "appearance" includes the shape, color, movement, size, etc. of the hold icon (variable icon) 9C.

After that, as shown in Figures 69(E) to (G), an effect is executed in which the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C changes. Specifically, as shown in Figure 69(E), a specific image TG resembling a bomb explodes, and as shown in Figure 69(F), the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C splits (is divided) into two. Then, as shown in Figure 69(G), a new doll's reserved icon (variable icon) 9C appears, and a text image representing the state of the new reserved icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. Here, "representing the state" includes not only the shape, color, movement, and size of the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C, but also the content, name (e.g., character name), nickname, etc., represented by the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C. Here, the text image "Character Reserved" is displayed, representing the content of the new reserved icon (variable icon) 9C.

After that, as shown in Figure 69(H), while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be in a ready state, an effect is executed in which the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C and the text image rotate together. After that, as shown in Figure 69(I), while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be in a ready state and the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C continues to rotate, the text image "Character Reserved" disappears from the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in Figure 69(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stopped in a jackpot state (here, "222").

[Reach pending icon effect C]
FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating the reach-time hold icon effect C. The reach-time hold icon effect is a reach effect executed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a reach state, in which the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is newly displayed from a state in which no hold icons were displayed. First, as shown in FIG. 70(A), four hold icons 9A and the hold icon (variable icon) 9C are displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Both the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round (spherical) shape. Here, since the hold icon 9C and the hold icon 9A have the same shape (hold icon shape), they are collectively referred to simply as "hold icons 9A, 9C." The hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the hold display area (variable icon display area, hold consumption image display area) at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Below this hold display area, a horizontally long rectangular image is displayed to indicate the position of the hold display area.

After that, as shown in Figure 70(B), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R enter a reach state (here, a "2↓2" reach), and the hold icons 9A and 9B and the rectangular image indicating the position of the hold display area disappear from the display screen 7a, leaving only the hold icon (variable icon) 9C displayed. As shown in Figure 70(C), while decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R remain in a reach state, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C disappears (is no longer displayed) from the display screen 7a. In other words, all hold icons (hold icons 9A, 9B, and the hold icon 9C) are no longer displayed. Then, a specific image TG resembling a person holding a sword is displayed. The specific image TG appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and runs leftward. After that, as shown in Figure 70(D), while decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R remain in a reach state, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed again on the display screen 7a. In other words, of the hold icons, only the hold icon 9C is displayed, and hold icons 9A and 9B and the horizontally long rectangular image indicating the position of the hold display area are not displayed. When the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed again, it will have the same appearance as before it disappeared. In this case, "appearance" includes the shape, color, movement, size, etc. of the hold icon (variable icon) 9C.

After that, as shown in Figures 70(E) to (G), an effect is executed in which the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C changes. Specifically, as shown in Figure 70(E), a specific image TG resembling a person holding a sword passes over the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C, and then, as shown in Figure 70(F), the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C splits (is divided) into two. Then, as shown in Figure 70(G), a new face-shaped reserved icon (variable icon) 9C appears, and a text image representing the appearance of the new reserved icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. Here, "representing appearance" includes not only the shape, color, movement, and size of the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C, but also the content, name (e.g., character name), nickname, etc., represented by the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C. Here, the text image "Face reserved" is displayed, representing the content of the new reserved icon (variable icon) 9C.

After that, as shown in Figure 70 (H), while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be in a ready state, an effect is executed in which the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C and the text image rotate together. After that, as shown in Figure 70 (I), while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be in a ready state and the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C continues to rotate, the text image "Face Reserved" disappears from the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in Figure 70 (J), an effect is executed in which a background image corresponding to the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. Specifically, a background image of the same face as the face represented by the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. After that, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stopped in a jackpot state (here, "222").

[Example of effect]
Below is an example of the effect of the hold icon presentation when a reach occurs.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 68(B), (C), 69(C), (D), 70(C), (D), during the reach effect, it is possible to execute a first effect in which, from a state in which no reserved icons are displayed on the display screen 7a, only the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C corresponding to the change is newly displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel effect, and to increase the interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 68(E) to (H), 69(E) to (G), and 70(E) to (G), after the first effect, a second effect can be executed in which the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C changes. With this configuration, a novel effect not seen in the past can be visually entertaining to the player, and the interest can be enhanced.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 68(E) to (H), 69(E) to (G), and 70(E) to (G), in the second effect, the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C in the first state is divided into multiple pieces, and then changes to the second state. According to this configuration, a novel effect that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 69(C) to (G) and 70(E) to (G), in the second effect, the specific image TG moves and passes the reserved icon 9C, and then the reserved icon 9C of the first aspect is divided into multiple pieces. According to this configuration, a novel effect that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player and increase the interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 68(H), 69(G), and 70(G), in the second effect, the reserved icon 9C of the second mode is displayed, and a character image representing the second mode is displayed. According to this configuration, a novel effect not seen in the past can visually entertain the player, and can increase the interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 68(I), 69(H), and 70(H), the reserved icon 9C of the second aspect rotates, and the character image also rotates. According to this configuration, a novel effect not seen in the past can be provided to the player visually, and the interest can be increased.

[Modification]
Below are some variations of the hold icon presentation when a win is reached.
[Modification 1]
In the reach-time hold icon effects A to C, a first effect is executed in which only the hold icon 9C is newly displayed from a state in which none of the hold icons 9A, 9B, 9C are displayed. However, in the reach-time hold icon effects A to C, a first effect in which only the hold icon 9A or the hold icon 9B is newly displayed from a state in which none of the hold icons 9A, 9B, 9C are displayed may also be executed.

[Modification 2]
In the effect of changing the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C shown in Figures 68(F) and (G) of the reserved icon effect A at the time of reaching, the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C is split (divided) into two, and a new star-shaped reserved icon (variable icon) 9C appears from the split. However, it may also be considered that an effect is being executed in which the square part of the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C is split (divided) into two, and a new star-shaped figure appears from the split.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A7-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
This gaming machine is characterized in that, during a reach effect, a first effect can be executed in which, from a state in which no pending icons are displayed on the display means, only the pending icons corresponding to the change are newly displayed.
◇[Aspect A7-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A7-1,
A gaming machine characterized in that, after the first effect, a second effect can be executed in which the reserved icon changes.
◇[Aspect A7-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A7-2,
In the second presentation, the pending icon in the first form is divided into multiple parts, and then changes to the second form.
◇[Aspect A7-4]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A7-3,
one of the plurality of types of images is a specific image;
A gaming machine characterized in that in the second presentation, the specific image moves and passes over the pending icon, and then the pending icon of the first aspect is divided into multiple parts.
◇[Aspect A7-5]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A7-3 or A7-4,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second presentation, the pending icon of the second mode is displayed and a text image representing the second mode is displayed.
◇[Aspect A7-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A7-1 to A7-5,
The gaming machine of the second aspect is characterized in that the hold icon rotates and the character image also rotates.

The special hold effect will be explained below using Figures 71 to 73. This special hold effect can be executed during the special symbol variation effect. In other words, it is an effect that is realized when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103, and displays the image on the display screen 7a. The special hold effect is an effect that occurs when the special symbol varies in the same way.

[Special hold effect A]
71 is a diagram for explaining the special reserved effect A. In this special reserved effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), an icon display effect is executed. In this icon display effect, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. In addition, a decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are circular and white.

Next, as shown in Figure 71 (B), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the ally character CRA is displayed. In this case, the reserved icon 9A is not displayed, and the variable icon 9C is displayed instead.

Next, as shown in Figure 71 (C), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB are displayed. In this case, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 71 (D), a decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a predetermined stop symbol arrangement. In the example of Figure 71 (D), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each 7 symbols and are displayed stopped in a jackpot symbol arrangement. In this case, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed.

[Special hold effect B]
72 is a diagram for explaining the special hold effect B. In this special hold effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 72 (A), an icon display effect is executed. In this icon display effect, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. In addition, a decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are circular and white.

Next, as shown in Figure 72 (B), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the ally character CRA is displayed. In this case, the reserved icon 9A is not displayed, and the variable icon 9C is displayed instead.

Next, as shown in Figure 72 (C), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed. In this case, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed. Also, in this super reach effect, the third movable device 13 is moved from the home position (retracted position) to the deployed position (deployed position) on the display screen 7a, thereby partially hiding the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in Figure 72 (D), a decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a predetermined stop symbol arrangement. In the example of Figure 72 (D), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each 7 symbols and are displayed stopped in a jackpot symbol arrangement. In this case, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed.

[Special hold effect C]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the special hold effect C. In this special hold effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 73(A), an icon display effect is executed. In this icon display effect, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, and a decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) is executed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are circular and white. At this time, the number of hold icons 9A is four, that is, the number of holds is four.
Furthermore, in the special hold effect C, the variable icon XB1 and the hold icon XB2 are displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R. This variable icon XB1 represents the effect status of the variable and corresponds to the hold icon 9C. The hold icon XB2 represents the hold status and corresponds to the hold icon 9A. Like the hold icon 9A, the hold icon XB2 indicates the hold count by the number of icons, and has the same number of icons as the hold icon 9A. In other words, when the hold count is three, the number of hold icons 9A is three, and similarly, the number of hold icons XB2 is three. This hold icon XB2 does not change. Note that the hold icon XB2 may change to correspond to the hold icon 9A, or may change to a different hold from the hold icon 9A. For example, the hold icon XB2 may change to a hold status some time after the hold icon 9A changes to a hold status.

Next, as shown in Figure 73 (B), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the ally character CRA is displayed. In this case, the reserved icon 9A is not displayed, and the variable icon 9C is displayed.
In this reach effect, the variable icon XB1 and the hold icon XB2 continue to be displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R.

Next, as shown in Figure 73 (C), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed. In this case, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed. In addition, in this super reach effect, the third movable device 13 is moved from the home position (retracted position) to the deployed position (deployed position) on the display screen 7a, and a part of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are hidden.
In this reach effect, the variable icon XB1 and the hold icon XB2 continue to be displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R.

Next, as shown in Figure 73 (D), a decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a predetermined stop symbol arrangement. In the example of Figure 73 (D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each 7 symbols and are displayed stopped in a jackpot symbol arrangement. In this case, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed.
In this reach effect, the variable icon XB1 and the hold icon XB2 continue to be displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R.

[Modification]
In the above-mentioned special hold effect C, the variable icon XB1 and the hold icon XB2 are displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R, but this is not limited to this and they may also be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the main display screen 7a.
The hold icons XB2 may be displayed in a manner that indicates the number of holds. For example, when there are three hold icons XB2, the number "3" may be displayed.
In the special hold effect, when the reach effect occurs, the hold icon 9A is not displayed and the variable icon 9C is displayed, but this is not limited to this. For example, when the variable icon 9C is in a form different from the normal form (circular and white in the embodiment) (for example, rectangular and red), the hold icon 9A may not be displayed.

[Example of effect]
In the special reserve effect of the above embodiment, an icon display effect that displays the variable icon 9C and the reserve icon 9A, and a reach effect that displays the variable icon 9C without displaying the reserve icon 9A are performed in the same variation. Then, after the icon display effect, a reach effect is performed. With this configuration, the reserve icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are recognized by the player during the icon display effect, and the variable icon 9C is emphasized more than the reserve icon 9A during the reach effect, so that the importance of the reach effect itself can be recognized by the player, and the sense of anticipation for the reach effect can be increased. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be increased.
In the special hold effect of the above embodiment, the same change includes an icon display effect that displays the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A, a reach effect that displays the variable icon 9C without displaying the hold icon 9A, and a super reach effect that does not display the hold icon 9A or the variable icon 9C. In this case, the reach effect is performed after the icon display effect, and then the super reach effect is performed. With this configuration, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are recognized by the player during the icon display effect, the variable icon 9C is emphasized more than the hold icon 9A during the reach effect, and further, the super reach effect can be emphasized during the super reach effect, so that the importance of the super reach effect itself can be recognized by the player, and the sense of anticipation for the super reach effect can be increased. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.
In addition, in the special reserve effect, in the super reach effect in which the reserve icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed, the third movable device 13 moves in front of the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, since the reserve icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed, the effect of the third movable device 13 can be emphasized to the player, and as a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect XB-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one effect of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a change icon representing the change and a hold icon representing the hold;
The second display effect is an effect of displaying the variable icon without displaying the hold icon,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-1,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-2,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is an effect in which the variable icon and the reserved icon are not displayed,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, after the first display effect, the second display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-3,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect, and the third display effect is performed after the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-4,
In the combination performance, when the third display performance is being performed, a movable role object performance in which a movable role object moves in front of the display means is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The icon success/failure effect will be explained below using Figures 74 to 76. This icon success/failure effect can be executed during the special symbol variation effect, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103, and displays the image on the display screen 7a.

[Icon success/failure effect A]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the icon success/failure effect A. In this icon success/failure effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 74(A), a decorative pattern change effect is executed. In this decorative pattern change effect, a reserved icon 9A and a corresponding change icon 9C are displayed. These reserved icon 9A and the corresponding change icon 9C are circular and white. In addition, the decorative pattern change is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in Figure 74 (B), an icon change effect is performed. In this icon change effect, the variable icon 9C changes from a circular white form to a form representing an ally character.

Next, as shown in Figure 74 (C), an icon enlargement effect is performed. In this icon enlargement effect, the variable icon 9C (also called the ally character 9C) jumps out of the variable icon display area where the variable icon is normally displayed, and then becomes even larger.

Next, as shown in Figure 74 (D), a success/fail effect is performed. In this success/fail effect, enemy character XC1 appears and engages in a battle with ally character 9C to see who will win; in other words, it is an effect that determines whether the battle will be successful or not. Note that success/failure effect broadly includes not only battle effects, but also effects that determine success or failure, such as effects that determine whether a player wins or loses a specified game. Note that during this success/failure effect, the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area, but the reserved icon 9A continues to be displayed in the reserved icon display area.

Next, as shown in Figure 74 (E), a success effect is displayed. In this success effect, the enemy character XC1 is not displayed, and the ally character 9C is displayed in the center of the main display screen 7a. Words and speed lines indicating victory are displayed, and a scene celebrating the victory unfolds.

Next, as shown in Figure 74 (F), icon promotion effect 1 is performed. In this icon promotion effect 1, the ally character icon 9C changes to a premium icon 9C. This premium icon 9C indicates an increased chance of winning, and an increased likelihood of winning a jackpot. This premium icon 9C may also indicate that a jackpot has been confirmed. Furthermore, the premium icon 9C is in a different form from the ally character's circular, white appearance before it changes in the icon change effect, and its appearance after it changes in the icon change effect, and is composed of an image that combines a circular image and a triangular image.

Next, as shown in Figure 74 (G), icon promotion effect 2 is performed. In this icon promotion effect 2, the premium icon C that changed in icon promotion effect 1 moves to the variable icon display area and functions as the variable icon 9C.

[Icon success/failure effect B]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the icon success/failure effect B. In this icon success/failure effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 75(A), a decorative pattern change effect is executed. In this decorative pattern change effect, a reserved icon 9A and a corresponding change icon 9C are displayed. These reserved icon 9A and the corresponding change icon 9C are circular and white. In addition, a change display of the decorative pattern is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in Figure 75 (B), an icon change effect is performed. In this icon change effect, the variable icon 9C changes from a circular white form to a form representing an ally character.

Next, as shown in Figure 75 (C), an icon enlargement effect is performed. In this icon enlargement effect, the variable icon 9C (also called the ally character 9C) jumps out of the variable icon display area where the variable icon is normally displayed, and then becomes even larger.

Next, as shown in Figure 75 (D), a success/fail effect is performed. In this success/fail effect, enemy character XC1 appears and engages in a battle with ally character 9C to see who will win; in other words, it is an effect that determines whether the battle will be successful or not. Note that success/failure effect broadly includes not only battle effects, but also effects that determine success or failure, such as effects that determine whether a player wins or loses a specified game. Note that during this success/failure effect, the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area, and the reserved icon 9A is not displayed in the reserved icon display area.

Next, as shown in Figure 75 (E), a success effect is displayed. In this success effect, the enemy character XC1 is not displayed, and the ally character 9C is displayed in the center of the main display screen 7a. Words and speed lines indicating victory are displayed, and a scene celebrating the victory unfolds.

Next, as shown in Figure 75 (F), icon promotion effect 1 is performed. In this icon promotion effect 1, icon 9C, which was an ally character, changes to premium icon 9C. This premium icon 9C indicates an increased chance of winning, and an increased likelihood of winning a jackpot. This premium icon 9C may also indicate a confirmed jackpot. Furthermore, the premium icon 9C is in a different form from the ally character's circular, white appearance before it changes in the icon change effect, and its appearance after it changes in the icon change effect, and is composed of an image that combines a circular image, a triangular image, and a sword image that is part of enemy character XC1. Without being limited to this, premium icon 9C may include the entire enemy character XC1.

Next, as shown in Figure 75 (G), icon promotion effect 2 is performed. In this icon promotion effect 2, the premium icon C that changed in icon promotion effect 1 moves to the variable icon display area and functions as the variable icon 9C.

[Icon success/failure effect C]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the icon success/failure effect C. In this icon success/failure effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 76(A), a decorative pattern change effect is executed. In this decorative pattern change effect, a reserved icon 9A and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed. These reserved icon 9A and the corresponding change icon 9C are circular and white. In addition, a change display of the decorative pattern is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in Figure 76 (B), an icon change effect is performed. In this icon change effect, the variable icon 9C changes from a circular white form to a form representing an ally character.

Next, as shown in Figure 76 (C), an icon enlargement effect is performed. In this icon enlargement effect, the variable icon 9C (also called the ally character 9C) jumps out of the variable icon display area where the variable icon is normally displayed, and then becomes even larger.

Next, as shown in Figure 76 (D), a success/fail effect is performed. In this success/fail effect, enemy character XC1 appears and engages in a battle with ally character 9C to see who will win; in other words, it is an effect that determines whether the battle will be successful or not. Note that success/failure effect broadly includes not only battle effects, but also effects that determine success or failure, such as effects that determine whether a player wins or loses a specified game. Note that during this success/failure effect, the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area, and the reserved icon 9A is not displayed in the reserved icon display area.

Next, as shown in Figure 76 (E), a success effect is displayed. In this success effect, the enemy character XC1 is not displayed, and the ally character 9C is displayed in the center of the main display screen 7a. Words and speed lines indicating victory are displayed, and a scene celebrating the victory unfolds.

Next, as shown in Figure 76 (F), icon promotion effect 1 is performed. In this icon promotion effect 1, the icon 9C that was an ally character changes to a premium icon 9C. This premium icon 9C indicates an increased chance of winning, and an increased likelihood of winning a jackpot. This premium icon 9C may also indicate a confirmed jackpot. Furthermore, the premium icon 9C is in a different form from the circular, white form before it changes in the icon change effect, and the ally character after it changes in the icon change effect, and is composed of an image that combines a circular image, a triangular image, a sword image that is part of the enemy character XC1, and a star-shaped emblem image that is part of the ally character 9C. It is not limited to this, and the premium icon 9C may include the entire ally character 9C.

Next, as shown in Figure 76 (G), icon promotion effect 2 is performed. In this icon promotion effect 2, the premium icon C that changed in icon promotion effect 1 moves to the variable icon display area and functions as the variable icon 9C.

[Modification]
In the icon success/failure effect, the variable icon 9C undergoes a first change in the icon change effect, and if the success/failure effect is successful (if the player wins), a success effect is performed and a second change is performed in icon promotion effect 1. However, this is not limited to this, and one of the reserved icons 9A may undergo a first change in the icon change effect, and if the success/failure effect is successful (if the player wins), a success effect is performed and a second change is performed in icon promotion effect 1. In this case, in icon promotion effect 2, the changed icon may return to the position where it was originally displayed, or may move to the position of a different icon and be replaced with the icon that was displayed in that location.
In the above-mentioned icon success/failure effect, the variable icon 9C is moved to the variable icon display area in the icon promotion effect 2, but this is not limited to this, and the variable icon 9C may also be moved to one of the other hold icons 9A and changed with that hold icon 9A.
In the above-mentioned icon success/failure effect, the variable icon 9C undergoes the first change in the icon change effect, but this is not limited to this. The pending icon 9A may undergo the icon change effect and undergo the first change, and then after becoming the variable icon 9C, the icon enlargement effect, success/failure effect, success effect, icon promotion effect 1, and icon promotion effect 2 may be performed.

[Example of effect]
In the icon success/failure effect of the above embodiment, the reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C is displayed, and then one of these icons changes, and then the success/failure effect is performed. If the success/failure effect is successful (if the battle is won), the one icon changes again. With this configuration, the success/failure effect is performed by changing one icon, and if the success/failure effect is successful, the icon changes again, so the gradual changes of the icons can be made more varied, and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.
Furthermore, when the reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C is displayed and one of these icons subsequently changes, the changed icon changes to an icon representing an ally character, and a success/failure effect is performed using this ally character and an enemy character. With this configuration, the success/failure effect is performed using the icon representing the character whose one icon has changed and the enemy character, so that the success/failure effect and the change in the one icon can be linked, and the success/failure effect can make the player feel like they are rooting for the ally character, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect XC-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one effect of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect in which a predetermined icon from a group of icons consisting of a change icon representing the change or a hold icon representing a hold is displayed in a first form,
the second display effect is an effect in which the predetermined icon displayed in the first form is changed and displayed in a second form,
The third display effect is an effect in which a success/failure effect is performed to determine success or failure using the predetermined icon displayed in the second form,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, then the second display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-1,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect in which, when the success/failure effect is successful, the predetermined icon displayed in the second form is changed to be displayed in a third form,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed, and then the fourth display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-2,
the predetermined icon of the second form is a first character;
A gaming machine characterized by the above [Aspect XC-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-3,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
the fifth display effect is an effect of displaying a second character different from the first character,
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-4,
In the combination presentation, the success/failure presentation is performed using the first character and the second character in the third display presentation.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The icon selection effect will be explained below using Figures 77 to 79. This icon selection effect can be executed during the special symbol variation effect. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103, and displays the image on the display screen 7a.

[Icon selection effect A]
FIG. 77 is a diagram illustrating the icon selection effect A. In this icon selection effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 77(A), a decorative pattern change effect is executed. In this decorative pattern change effect, a hold icon 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed. These hold icons 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are circular and white. Of the hold icons 9A, the hold icon 9A closest to the corresponding variable icon is also referred to as the first hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A second closest to the corresponding variable icon is also referred to as the second hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A third closest to the corresponding variable icon is also referred to as the third hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A farthest from the corresponding variable icon is also referred to as the fourth hold icon 9A. The hold corresponding to the first hold icon 9A is the oldest hold, the hold corresponding to the second hold icon 9A is the second oldest hold, the hold corresponding to the third hold icon 9A is the third oldest hold, and the hold corresponding to the fourth hold icon 9A is the newest hold. In the example of Figure 77 (A), the first hold icon 9A to the third hold icon 9A are displayed. In addition, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are used to display the changing decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in Figure 77 (B), icon selection effect 1 is performed. In this icon selection effect 1, the third hold icon 9A changes to selection image XD1, which includes character A and a star image. Character A included in selection image XD1 represents the likelihood of a jackpot, and this character A has a relatively low likelihood of a jackpot. Furthermore, the star image included in selection image XD1 represents the likelihood of a jackpot by the number of stars, and since this star image has one star, the likelihood of a jackpot is relatively low. In selection image XD1, character A and the star image are displayed in correspondence with each other.

Next, as shown in Figure 77 (C), icon selection effect 2 is performed. In this icon selection effect 2, the third hold icon 9A changes to selection image XD2, which includes character B and a star image. Character B included in selection image XD2 represents the likelihood of a jackpot, and this character B has a medium likelihood of a jackpot. Furthermore, the star image included in selection image XD2 represents the likelihood of a jackpot with the number of stars, and since this star image has two stars, the likelihood of a jackpot is medium. In selection image XD2, character B and the star image are displayed in correspondence with each other.

Next, as shown in Figure 77 (D), icon selection effect 3 is performed. In this icon selection effect 3, the third hold icon 9A changes to selection image XD3, which includes character C and a star image. Character C included in selection image XD3 represents the likelihood of a jackpot, and this character C has a relatively high likelihood of a jackpot. Furthermore, the star image included in selection image XD3 represents the likelihood of a jackpot with the number of stars, and as this star image has three stars, the likelihood of a jackpot is relatively high. In selection image XD3, character C and the star image are displayed in correspondence with each other.

After that, icon selection effects 1 to 3 are repeatedly executed, i.e., the third hold icon 9A is displayed changing rapidly between selection image XD1 to selection image XD3. Next, as shown in Figure 77(E), an icon determination effect is performed. In this icon determination effect, the third hold icon 9A is determined to be one of the third hold icons 9A in icon selection effects 1 to 3 and stops. In this case, the following description will be given assuming that the third hold icon 9A has been determined to be selection image XD2, as shown in Figure 77(E).

Next, as shown in Figure 77 (F), an icon movement effect is performed. In this icon movement effect, the third hold icon 9A, which was determined as the selected image XD2 in the icon determination effect described above, shifts to the second hold icon 9A, then to the first hold icon 9A, and finally to the variable icon display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(G), a battle effect is performed. In this battle effect, selection image XD2, which has shifted to the variable icon display area while in the selection image XD2 state, pops out of the variable icon display area, moves to approximately the center of the main display screen 7a, and is enlarged and displayed as selection image XD22. This selection image XD22 displays a giant star image representing two stars along with a giant character B and the word "Expectation Level." In selection image XD22, like selection image XD2, character B and the star image representing two stars indicate a medium likelihood of winning a jackpot. Furthermore, in the battle effect, a smiling face image XD4 is displayed, and a battle ensues between the smiling face image XD4 and character B of selection image XD22. If the player wins this battle, a jackpot is awarded, and a jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. If the player loses the battle, a loss is awarded, and a loss symbol arrangement is displayed using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Icon selection effect B]
FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating the icon selection effect B. In this icon selection effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 78(A), a decorative pattern change effect is executed. In this decorative pattern change effect, a hold icon 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed. These hold icons 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are circular and white. Of the hold icons 9A, the hold icon 9A closest to the corresponding variable icon is also referred to as the first hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A second closest to the corresponding variable icon is also referred to as the second hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A third closest to the corresponding variable icon is also referred to as the third hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A farthest from the corresponding variable icon is also referred to as the fourth hold icon 9A. The hold corresponding to the first hold icon 9A is the oldest hold, the hold corresponding to the second hold icon 9A is the second oldest hold, the hold corresponding to the third hold icon 9A is the third oldest hold, and the hold corresponding to the fourth hold icon 9A is the newest hold. In the example of Figure 78 (A), the first hold icon 9A to the third hold icon 9A are displayed. In addition, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are used to display the changing decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in Figure 78 (B), icon selection effect 1 is performed. In this icon selection effect 1, the third hold icon 9A changes to selection image XD1, which includes character A and a star image. Character A included in selection image XD1 represents the likelihood of a jackpot, and this character A has a relatively low likelihood of a jackpot. Furthermore, the star image included in selection image XD1 represents the likelihood of a jackpot with the number of stars, and since this star image has only one star, the likelihood of a jackpot is relatively low. In selection image XD1, character A and the star image are displayed in correspondence with each other.

Next, as shown in Figure 78 (C), icon selection effect 2 is performed. In this icon selection effect 2, the third hold icon 9A changes to selection image XD2, which includes character B and a star image. Character B included in selection image XD2 represents the likelihood of a jackpot, and this character B has a medium likelihood of a jackpot. Furthermore, the star image included in selection image XD2 represents the likelihood of a jackpot with the number of stars, and since this star image has two stars, the likelihood of a jackpot is medium. In selection image XD2, character B and the star image are displayed in correspondence with each other.

Next, as shown in Figure 78 (D), icon selection effect 3 is performed. In this icon selection effect 3, the third hold icon 9A changes to selection image XD3, which includes character C and a star image. Character C included in selection image XD3 represents the likelihood of a jackpot, and this character C has a relatively high likelihood of a jackpot. Furthermore, the star image included in selection image XD3 represents the likelihood of a jackpot with the number of stars, and as this star image has three stars, the likelihood of a jackpot is relatively high. In selection image XD3, character C and the star image are displayed in correspondence with each other.

After that, icon selection effects 1 to 3 are repeatedly executed, i.e., the third hold icon 9A is displayed changing rapidly between selection image XD1 to selection image XD3. Next, as shown in Figure 78 (E), an icon determination effect is performed. In this icon determination effect, the third hold icon 9A is determined to be one of the third hold icons 9A in icon selection effects 1 to 3 and stops. In this case, the following description will be given assuming that the third hold icon 9A has been determined to be selection image XD1, as shown in Figure 78 (E).

Next, as shown in Figure 78 (F), icon movement effect 1 is performed. In this icon movement effect 1, the third reserved icon 9A, which was determined to be the selected image XD1 in the icon determination effect described above, changes (is promoted) to the selected image XD2 when it shifts to the second reserved icon 9A.

Next, as shown in Figure 78 (G), icon movement effect 2 is performed. In this icon movement effect 2, the second hold icon 9A, which changed to the selection image XD2 in the above-mentioned icon movement effect 1, shifts to the first hold icon 9A in that state, and then finally shifts to the variable icon display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(H), a battle effect is performed. In this battle effect, selection image XD2, which has shifted to the variable icon display area while in the selection image XD2 state, pops out of the variable icon display area, moves to approximately the center of the main display screen 7a, and is enlarged and displayed as selection image XD22. This selection image XD22 displays a giant star image representing two stars along with a giant version of character B and the word "Expectation Level." In selection image XD22, like selection image XD2, character B and the star image representing two stars indicate a medium likelihood of winning a jackpot. Furthermore, in the battle effect, a smiling face image XD4 is displayed, and a battle ensues between the smiling face image XD4 and character B of selection image XD22. If the player wins this battle, a jackpot is awarded, and a jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. If the player loses the battle, a loss is awarded, and a loss symbol arrangement is displayed using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Icon selection effect C]
FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating the icon selection effect C. In this icon selection effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 79(A), a decorative pattern change effect is executed. In this decorative pattern change effect, a hold icon 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed. These hold icons 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are circular and white. Of the hold icons 9A, the hold icon 9A closest to the corresponding variable icon is also referred to as the first hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A second closest to the corresponding variable icon is also referred to as the second hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A third closest to the corresponding variable icon is also referred to as the third hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A farthest from the corresponding variable icon is also referred to as the fourth hold icon 9A. The hold corresponding to the first hold icon 9A is the oldest hold, the hold corresponding to the second hold icon 9A is the second oldest hold, the hold corresponding to the third hold icon 9A is the third oldest hold, and the hold corresponding to the fourth hold icon 9A is the newest hold. In the example of Figure 79 (A), the first hold icon 9A to the third hold icon 9A are displayed. In addition, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are used to display the changing decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in Figure 79 (B), icon selection effect 1 is performed. In this icon selection effect 1, the variable icon 9C changes to selection image XD1 including character A and a star image. Character A included in selection image XD1 represents the likelihood of a jackpot, and this character A has a relatively low likelihood of a jackpot. Furthermore, the star image included in selection image XD1 represents the likelihood of a jackpot by the number of stars, and since this star image has one star, the likelihood of a jackpot is relatively low. In selection image XD1, character A and the star image are displayed in correspondence with each other.

Next, as shown in Figure 79 (C), icon selection effect 2 is performed. In this icon selection effect 2, the variable icon 9C changes to selection image XD2 including character B and a star image. Character B included in selection image XD2 represents the likelihood of a jackpot, and this character B has a medium likelihood of a jackpot. Furthermore, the star image included in selection image XD2 represents the likelihood of a jackpot by the number of stars, and since this star image has two stars, the likelihood of a jackpot is medium. In selection image XD2, character B and the star image are displayed in correspondence with each other.

Next, as shown in Figure 79 (D), icon selection effect 3 is performed. In this icon selection effect 3, the variable icon 9C changes to selection image XD3, which includes character C and a star image. Character C included in selection image XD3 represents the likelihood of a jackpot, and this character C has a relatively high likelihood of a jackpot. Furthermore, the star image included in selection image XD3 represents the likelihood of a jackpot with the number of stars, and as this star image has three stars, the likelihood of a jackpot is relatively high. In selection image XD3, character C and the star image are displayed in correspondence with each other.

After that, icon selection effects 1 to 3 are repeatedly executed, i.e., the variable icon 9C is displayed changing rapidly between selection image XD1 to selection image XD3. Next, as shown in Figure 79 (E), an icon determination effect is performed. In this icon determination effect, the variable icon 9C is determined to be one of the variable icons 9C in icon selection effects 1 to 3 and stops. In this case, the following description will be given assuming that the variable icon 9C has been determined to be selection image XD2, as shown in Figure 79 (E).

Next, as shown in Figure 79 (F), a battle effect is displayed. In this battle effect, selection image XD2 pops out of the variable icon display area, moves to approximately the center of the main display screen 7a, and is enlarged and displayed as selection image XD22. In this selection image XD22, a giant star image representing two stars is displayed along with an enlarged version of character B and the word "expectation level." In selection image XD22, like selection image XD2, character B and the star image representing two stars indicate a medium level of expectation of a jackpot. Also, in the battle effect, a smiling face image XD4 is displayed, and a battle ensues between smiling face image XD4 and character B of selection image XD22. If the player wins this battle, a jackpot is awarded, and a jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. If the player loses the battle, a loss is awarded, and a loss symbol arrangement is displayed using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Modification]
In the icon selection effect A, during the battle effect, the star image (expectation level display) is in a different position than when the variable icon 9C is displayed (during the icon movement effect), but this is not limited to this and it may be in the same position as when the variable icon 9C is displayed (during the icon movement effect). Also, during the battle effect, the variable icon 9C is not displayed in the variable icon display area, but may be displayed. In this case, the same icon as the selection image XD2 during the icon movement effect is displayed.
In the above-mentioned icon selection effects, icon selection effects 1 to 3 each have a different character A to C, or a star image with a different number of stars, but this is not limited to this and the same character or star image with the same number of stars may also exist.
In the above-mentioned icon selection effect, after the icon movement effect, a battle effect is performed using character B of the selected image XD22, but this is not limited to this, and a super reach effect may also be performed using character B.
In the above-mentioned icon selection presentation, the selection images XD1 to XD3 display characters in association with star images that indicate the degree of expectation by the number of stars, but this is not limited to this, and the selection images XD1 to XD3 may also display the number of rounds when a jackpot is hit, the degree of probability of a jackpot, etc. in association with each other.

[Example of effect]
In the icon selection effect, decorative pattern change effects are performed to display the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A. Icon selection effect 1 is performed in which a predetermined icon from among the group of icons is displayed as a single star and character A, representing a relatively low level of expectation. Icon selection effect 2 is performed in which the predetermined reserved icon 9A is displayed as two stars and character B, representing a medium level of expectation. Icon selection effect 3 is performed in which the predetermined reserved icon 9A is displayed as three stars and character C, representing a relatively high level of expectation. Icon selection effects 1 to 3 are then repeated, and one icon is selected from the predetermined icons displayed in icon selection effects 1 to 3 in the icon selection effect. This configuration allows the player to focus on which icon with the expected level or which character icon is selected, thereby increasing interest in the game. As a result, the game's enjoyment is enhanced.
In the icon selection effect A, after performing icon selection effects 1 to 3 and deciding on one reserved icon 9A in the icon decision effect, the decided reserved icon 9A moves in the icon movement effect (reserved shift). This configuration allows the player to predict that this reserved icon 9A will become the variable icon 9C, allowing the player to continue to be interested in the subsequent developments. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect XD-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one effect of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
the first display effect is an effect of displaying a group of icons consisting of a plurality of icons,
the second display effect is an effect in which a predetermined icon among the group of icons changes in a plurality of ways,
The third display effect is an effect in which the predetermined icon that changes in the plurality of modes is determined to be one mode among the plurality of modes,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, then the second display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-1,
In the second display performance, when the predetermined icon changes in the plurality of modes, an expectation display indicating a jackpot expectation is included in each of the plurality of modes.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-2,
In the second display performance, when the predetermined icon changes in the plurality of modes, the expectation degree display and a character display representing a character are included in each of the plurality of modes,
The expectation level display and the character display are associated with each other.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-3,
The predetermined icon is a hold icon representing a hold.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-4,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect in which the predetermined icon determined in one of the plurality of effects moves in the determined state,
The combination effect includes the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed after the third display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The special icon change effect will be explained below using Figures 80 to 82. This special icon change effect can be executed during the special symbol change effect. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103, and displays the image on the display screen 7a.

[Expected jackpot by icon]
80 is an icon-specific jackpot expectation table XE1. Specifically, the icon-specific jackpot expectation table XE1 shown in FIG. 80 shows multiple patterns in which the reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C changes and the corresponding jackpot expectation. For example, the reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C can change to a circle or a square, and if it is a circle, it can be blue, green, or red, and if it is a square, it can be green, red, or gold. Furthermore, when the reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C changes to a circle and blue, the probability of a jackpot is 10%, when it changes to a circle and green, the probability of a jackpot is 30%, when it changes to a circle and red, the probability of a jackpot is 50%, when it changes to a square and green, the probability of a jackpot is 40%, when it changes to a square and red, the probability of a jackpot is 60%, and when it changes to a square and gold, the probability of a jackpot is 80%. The sub-control board 90 determines in advance whether it is a jackpot or a loss based on the variable pattern command sent from the image control microcomputer 101, and changes the reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C so that it becomes as shown in the icon-specific jackpot probability table XE1. Furthermore, the reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C is normally circular and white, but can change to any of the modes shown in the icon-specific jackpot expectation table XE1, and can then further change to another mode shown in the icon-specific jackpot expectation table XE1. In this case, when the icon changes, it changes to a mode that does not lower the jackpot expectation from the previous mode. For example, if the icon changes from a circular white to a circular green (jackpot expectation of 30%), the icon then changes to any of the following, which have higher jackpot expectation than the circular green: a circular red (jackpot expectation of 50%), a square green (jackpot expectation of 40%), a square red (jackpot expectation of 60%), or a square gold (jackpot expectation of 80%).

The following can be said about the icon-specific jackpot expectation table XE1: That is, among the multiple circular icon patterns, the red circular icon, which is the pattern with the highest jackpot expectation, has a higher jackpot expectation than the green square icon, which is the pattern with the lowest jackpot expectation among the multiple square icon patterns.
Furthermore, among the plurality of patterns of circular icons, the red circular icon, which is the pattern with the highest probability of expecting a big win, is configured to have a lower probability of expecting a big win than the red square icon, which is the pattern with the second highest probability of expecting a big win among the plurality of patterns of square icons.
Furthermore, among the multiple patterns of circular icons, the red circular icon, which is the pattern with the highest probability of winning a jackpot, has a configuration in which it is less likely to win a jackpot than the gold square icon, which is the pattern with the highest probability of winning a jackpot among the multiple patterns of square icons.
Furthermore, square icons are larger than circular icons.

[Special Icon Change A]
FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating the special icon change effect A. In this special icon change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 81(A), a decorative pattern change effect is executed. In this decorative pattern change effect, a hold icon 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed. These hold icons 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are normally circular and white. Of the hold icons 9A, the hold icon 9A closest to the corresponding variable icon is also referred to as the first hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A second closest to the corresponding variable icon is also referred to as the second hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A third closest to the corresponding variable icon is also referred to as the third hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A farthest from the corresponding variable icon is also referred to as the fourth hold icon 9A. The hold corresponding to the first hold icon 9A is the oldest hold, the hold corresponding to the second hold icon 9A is the second oldest hold, the hold corresponding to the third hold icon 9A is the third oldest hold, and the hold corresponding to the fourth hold icon 9A is the newest hold. In the example of Figure 81 (A), the first hold icon 9A to the third hold icon 9A are displayed. In addition, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are used to display the changing decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in Figure 81 (B), icon change effect 1 is performed. In this icon change effect, the third reserved icon 9A remains circular and changes to blue. At this point, the expected probability of a jackpot is 10%.

Next, as shown in Figure 81 (C), icon change effect 2 is performed. In this icon change effect 2, the third reserved icon 9A shifts to become the second reserved icon 9A, and while continuing to form a circle, it changes to green. At this point, the expected probability of a jackpot is 30%.

Next, as shown in Figure 81 (D), icon change effect 3 is performed. In this icon change effect 3, the second reserved icon 9A shifts and becomes the first reserved icon 9A, and the green color continues while changing from a circle to a square. At this point, the expected probability of a jackpot is 40%.

Next, as shown in Figure 81 (E), the variable effect is performed. In this variable effect, the first reserved icon 9A shifts to become the variable icon 9C, and various effects using the character CRA are performed. After that, in the case of a jackpot, a jackpot pattern arrangement is formed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and in the case of a loss, a loss pattern arrangement is formed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Special Icon Change Performance B]
FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating the special icon change effect B. In this special icon change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 82(A), a decorative pattern change effect is executed. In this decorative pattern change effect, a hold icon 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed. These hold icons 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are normally circular and white. Of the hold icons 9A, the hold icon 9A closest to the corresponding variable icon is also referred to as the first hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A second closest to the corresponding variable icon is also referred to as the second hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A third closest to the corresponding variable icon is also referred to as the third hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A farthest from the corresponding variable icon is also referred to as the fourth hold icon 9A. The hold corresponding to the first hold icon 9A is the oldest hold, the hold corresponding to the second hold icon 9A is the second oldest hold, the hold corresponding to the third hold icon 9A is the third oldest hold, and the hold corresponding to the fourth hold icon 9A is the newest hold. In the example of Figure 82 (A), the first hold icon 9A to the third hold icon 9A are displayed. In addition, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are used to display the changing decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in Figure 82 (B), icon change effect 1 is performed. In this icon change effect, the third reserved icon 9A remains circular and changes to blue. At this point, the expected probability of a jackpot is 10%.

Next, as shown in Figure 82 (C), icon change effect 2 is performed. In this icon change effect 2, the third hold icon 9A shifts to become the second hold icon 9A, and changes from a circle to a square and turns green. At this point, the expected probability of a jackpot is 40%.

Next, as shown in Figure 82 (D), icon change effect 3 is performed. In this icon change effect 3, the second reserved icon 9A shifts and becomes the first reserved icon 9A, and changes to red while remaining a square. At this point, the expected probability of a jackpot is 60%.

Next, as shown in Figure 82 (E), the change effect is performed. In this change effect, the first reserved icon 9A shifts and becomes the change effect icon 9C, and it changes to gold while remaining a square. At this point, the expected probability of a jackpot is 80%. In addition, in the change effect, various effects using the character CRA are performed. After that, in the event of a jackpot, a jackpot pattern arrangement is formed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and in the event of a miss, a miss pattern arrangement is formed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Modification]
In the special icon change effect, the icon may change from a low probability of expecting a jackpot to a high probability of expecting a jackpot, and then change back to the low probability of expecting a jackpot. In this case, the probability of expecting a jackpot may be higher after the icon changes from a low probability of expecting a jackpot to an icon with a high probability of expecting a jackpot than when the icon changes to an icon with a high probability of expecting a jackpot.
In the special icon change presentation, when the icon changes, the icon changes in a manner that does not decrease the probability of winning a jackpot compared to the previous one, but this is not limited to this, and the icon may change in a manner that decreases the probability of winning a jackpot compared to the previous one. In this case, as an exception, the rule may be broken and the jackpot may be confirmed.
In the special icon change effect, the icon may change into a circle, a square, or even a different shape (e.g., a triangle). In this case, if the icons are the same color, the square may have a higher chance of winning than the circle, and further, the triangle may have a higher chance of winning than the square.

[Example of effect]
In the special icon change effect, one of the reserved icons 9A or the variable icons 9C may be displayed in a circular or square shape, or in a different color. Furthermore, if the reserved icon 9A or one of the variable icons 9C is circular, it may be displayed in multiple patterns, including blue, green, and red. Furthermore, if the reserved icon 9A or one of the variable icons 9C is square, it may be displayed in multiple patterns, including green, red, and gold. This configuration allows the reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C to change in various patterns, providing players with a variety of icon change modes. As a result, players' interest in the icons can be heightened, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect XE-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
As one of the plurality of display effects, a predetermined icon from a group of icons consisting of the change icon representing the change or the hold icon representing the hold is displayed in either a first form or a second form different from the first form.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-1,
the predetermined icon of the first form has a plurality of patterns,
The plurality of patterns in the predetermined icon of the first form each have the same shape and each have a different aspect portion.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-2,
the predetermined icon of the second form has a plurality of patterns,
The plurality of patterns in the predetermined icon of the second form each have the same shape and each have a different aspect portion.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-3,
The plurality of patterns in the predetermined icon of the first form each have the same shape and each have a different color.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-4,
The plurality of patterns in the predetermined icon of the second form each have the same shape and each have a different color.
A gaming machine characterized by:
The above-described embodiment may be modified as follows.
The icon may change from a predetermined icon in a first form to an icon in a second form.
The pattern with the highest probability of expecting a big win among the plurality of patterns of the icon in the first form may be configured to have a higher probability of expecting a big win than the pattern with the lowest probability of expecting a big win among the plurality of patterns of the icon in the second form.
The pattern with the highest probability of expecting a big win among the plurality of patterns of the icon in the first form may be configured to have a lower probability of expecting a big win than the pattern with the second highest probability of expecting a big win among the plurality of patterns of the icon in the second form.
The pattern with the highest probability of expecting a big win among the plurality of patterns of the icon in the first form may be configured to have a lower probability of expecting a big win than the pattern with the highest probability of expecting a big win among the plurality of patterns of the icon in the second form.
The icon in the second form is larger than the icon in the first form.

These variable icon jump effects A to C are explained below using Figures 83 to 85. In Figures 83 to 85, for example, the first movable device 14, the second movable device 15, and other movable devices arranged around the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted for clarity of the drawings.

This variable icon jump effect can be executed while the decorative pattern is performing a variable effect (during variable display). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (e.g., a variable effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the variable icon jump effect is included, it reads corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays an image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (e.g., a variable effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and changes the position and light emission mode of the second movable device 15 provided on the game board 2.

Here, we will first explain the variable icon jump effect A, then the variable icon jump effect B, and then the variable icon jump effect C.

[The variable icon jump effect A]
The variable icon jump effect A will be described with reference to Fig. 83. Fig. 83 is a diagram for explaining the variable icon jump effect A. The variable icon jump effect A is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 83(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a left three-dimensional decorative symbol 8L, a center three-dimensional decorative symbol 8C, and a right three-dimensional decorative symbol 8R, spinning from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a decorative symbol (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") variation effect (variable display) begins. When the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) begins, the stopped decorative symbol gradually increases in speed from a low speed, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state and changing at high speed. This allows the background image behind the decorative symbol to be viewed through the rapidly changing translucent decorative symbol. The decorative symbol slows down just before stopping, changing from a translucent state back to an opaque state, and then temporarily stops and then stops (temporarily stops and then stops and displays). When temporarily stops, the decorative symbol moves slowly up and down.

In addition, a sub-variable area is provided in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, where small left decorative patterns 8Lz, small middle decorative patterns 8Cz, and small right decorative patterns 8Rz, corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed in a variable manner (variable display). The small decorative patterns are always opaque and do not become translucent even when the variable manner begins, nor do they disappear from the display screen 7a. When the variable manner (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R begins, the variable manner (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and small right decorative pattern 8Rz begins in the sub-variable area. The left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed as statically stopped, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and small right decorative pattern 8Rz are also displayed as statically stopped.

Even when one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as temporary stops (for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as temporary stops and a reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and small right decorative pattern 8Rz (for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a temporary stop, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz remains, and when the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a temporary stop, the small right decorative pattern 8Rz remains) all continue to display changing effects (changing displays).

In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they do not line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a miss, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or they may be completely different patterns.

In contrast, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a jackpot, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small center decorative pattern 8Cz, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz will line up to form the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R currently changing as the first special symbol is consumed are displayed in the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area is provided for the first special symbol hold in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed in four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), allowing a maximum of four hold icons to be stored. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, and no reserved icons are displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there are no reserved icons that have been stocked and have not been consumed. For the sake of convenience, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol variation presentation (variation display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, at the top center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, and are therefore difficult to distinguish from the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, these numbers are positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with the other images displayed behind them, so visibility is not obstructed by the other images.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icons are further set with increasing expectations of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

In Figure 83 (A), the decorative pattern change effect (change display) begins, and when the change icon jump effect A begins, as shown in Figure 83 (B), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed as the number "1," the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as the number "3," the change effect (change display) by the middle decorative pattern 8C continues, and a flash of light FH1 is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the change display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad are not made difficult to see at all by the flash of light FH1 and do not disappear from the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are made difficult to see by the flash of light FH1 and disappear completely from the display screen 7a. In contrast, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and small right decorative pattern 8Rz are not made difficult to see by the flash of light FH1 and do not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Then, when the flash FH1 disappears, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R remain completely disappeared from the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C at the variable display position 9Cd jumps up (starts moving) toward the center of the display screen 7a, increasing in size.

When the variable icon 9C reaches the center of the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 83 (C), the size of the variable icon 9C becomes approximately 2.5 times larger than the size of the variable icon 9C at the variable display position 9Cd.

Next, as shown in Figure 83 (D), a flash of light FH2 is emitted from the center of the variable icon 9C. Then, as shown in Figure 83 (E), the flash of light FH2 makes the variable icon 9C difficult to see and it disappears from the display screen 7a. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd and pending display position 9Ad also become difficult to see due to the flash of light FH2 and temporarily disappear from the display screen 7a. In contrast, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and small right decorative pattern 8Rz are not difficult to see due to the flash of light FH2 and do not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Next, when the flash FH2 disappears, as shown in Figure 83(F), the left decorative pattern 8L, which has stopped at the number "1," and the right decorative pattern 8R, which has stopped at the number "3," are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the white spherical variable icon 9C changes to a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C. In other words, the icon change of the variable icon 9C is successful. This star-shaped variable icon 9C repeatedly spins around in a display mode in which its left side passes through the front and faces its right side. Note that in Figure 83(F), the icon change of the variable icon 9C is successful, changing from the white spherical variable icon 9C to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C. However, if the white spherical variable icon 9C does not change to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C and remains as the white spherical variable icon 9C, the icon change of the variable icon 9C is unsuccessful.

Next, when cracks run through the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8 and they are shattered, the variable icon 9C begins to move downward (start moving) while shrinking toward the variable display position 9Cd while continuing to spin. As the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8 are shattered, the variable performance (variable display) begins again with the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, when the variable icon 9C has completed moving to the variable display position 9Cd, as shown in Figure 83 (G), the size of the variable icon 9C returns to the size it was before it jumped up (i.e., the size of the white spherical variable icon 9C at the variable display position 9Cd shown in Figure 83 (B)), and it begins to spin around.

After that, as shown in Figure 83 (H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as a temporary stop with the same pattern (number) (here, they are temporarily stopped at the number "7"), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a variable (variable display), forming a reach. At this time, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed as a temporary stop, and the variable (variable display) display continues for the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and small right decorative pattern 8Rz.

Then, as shown in Figure 83 (I), the second movable device 15 advances (moves) from a stationary state in a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 to a position (lower advance position (lower performance position)) in front of (in front of) the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and near the bottom edge, where it stops for a predetermined period of time (for example, approximately 1.5 seconds), and then, as shown in Figure 83 (J), it returns to the retracted position (home position).

The various effects may then continue. When the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as the same pattern (here, the number "7"), a jackpot is awarded and the jackpot game (jackpot effect) begins. However, when the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed as the same pattern (here, the number "7"), a loss occurs. When the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as the same pattern, a small left decorative pattern 8L, a small center decorative pattern 8C, and a small right decorative pattern 8R are also displayed as the same pattern. When a jackpot or loss is confirmed, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the second movable device 15 is stopped in front of (in front of) the display screen 7a and near the bottom edge (lower advance position (lower performance position)) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., approximately 1.5 seconds), the second movable device 15 is positioned in front of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, and hold display position 9Ad, making the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, and hold display position 9Ad difficult for the player to see. Furthermore, if the hold icon 9A is present, of course, the second movable device 15 is positioned in front of the variable icon 9C, hold icon 9A, variable display position 9Cd, and hold display position 9Ad, making the variable icon 9C, hold icon 9A, variable display position 9Cd, and hold display position 9Ad difficult for the player to see.

When the second movable device 15 stops in front of (in front of) the display screen 7a and near the bottom (downward advance position (downward performance position)) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., approximately 1.5 seconds), the variable icon 9C may change to another icon, suggesting an increased likelihood of a jackpot. By positioning the second movable device 15 in front of the variable icon 9C, hold icon 9A, variable display position 9Cd, and hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, hold icon 9A, variable display position 9Cd, and hold display position 9Ad are difficult for the player to see, allowing the player to anticipate an increased likelihood of a jackpot. In this case, the variable icon 9C may remain unchanged, but the variable display position 9Cd and hold display position 9Ad may change color or shape. In this case, the player can still anticipate an increased likelihood of a jackpot.

[The variable icon jump effect B]
Next, the variable icon jump effect B will be described with reference to Fig. 84. Fig. 84 is a diagram for explaining the variable icon jump effect B. The variable icon jump effect B is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 84(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a left 3D decorative symbol 8L, a center 3D decorative symbol 8C, and a right 3D decorative symbol 8R, spinning from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a decorative symbol (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") variation effect (variable display) begins. When the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) begins, the stopped decorative symbol gradually increases in speed from a low speed, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state and changing at high speed. This allows the background image behind the decorative symbol to be viewed through the rapidly changing translucent decorative symbol. The decorative symbol slows down just before stopping, changing from a translucent state back to an opaque state, and then temporarily stops and then stops (temporarily stops and then stops and displays). When temporarily stops, the decorative symbol moves slowly up and down.

In addition, a sub-variable area is provided in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, where small left decorative patterns 8Lz, small middle decorative patterns 8Cz, and small right decorative patterns 8Rz, corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed in a variable manner (variable display). The small decorative patterns are always opaque and do not become translucent even when the variable manner begins, nor do they disappear from the display screen 7a. When the variable manner (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R begins, the variable manner (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and small right decorative pattern 8Rz begins in the sub-variable area. The left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed as statically stopped, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and small right decorative pattern 8Rz are also displayed as statically stopped.

Even when one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as temporary stops (for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as temporary stops and a reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and small right decorative pattern 8Rz (for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a temporary stop, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz remains, and when the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a temporary stop, the small right decorative pattern 8Rz remains) all continue to display changing effects (changing displays).

In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they do not line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a miss, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or they may be completely different patterns.

In contrast, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a jackpot, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small center decorative pattern 8Cz, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz will line up to form the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R currently changing as the first special symbol is consumed are displayed in the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area is provided for the first special symbol hold in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed in four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), allowing a maximum of four hold icons to be stored. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, and no reserved icons are displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there are no reserved icons that have been stocked and have not been consumed. For the sake of convenience, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol variation presentation (variation display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, at the top center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, and are therefore difficult to distinguish from the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, these numbers are positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with the other images displayed behind them, so visibility is not obstructed by the other images.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icons are further set with increasing expectations of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

In Figure 84 (A), the decorative pattern change effect (change display) begins, and when the change icon jump effect B begins, a disk image EG appears from the left edge of the display screen 7a as shown in Figure 84 (B), and the disk image EG moves at high speed toward and collides with the change icon 9C at the change display position 9Cd. Note that the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R during the change effect (change display) all disappear from the display screen 7a before the disk image EG appears.

When the disk image EG collides with the variable icon 9C, the variable icon 9C jumps up (starts moving) toward the center of the display screen 7a, and as shown in Figure 84 (C), a flash of light FH is emitted from the variable display position 9Cd to the top edge of the display screen 7a, making the variable icon 9C difficult to see due to the flash of light FH. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd may temporarily become difficult to see due to the flash of light FH and disappear from the display screen 7a, whereas the pending display position 9Ad is not difficult to see due to the flash of light FH and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and small right decorative pattern 8Rz are not difficult to see due to the flash of light FH and do not disappear from the display screen 7a.

As the flash FH1 begins to disappear, the presence of the variable icon 9C gradually becomes visible in the center of the display screen 7a. As shown in FIG. 84(D), the variable icon 9C changes from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, and a message MG1, "UP!" indicating an increased likelihood of a jackpot, appears on the display screen 7a above the variable icon 9C, tilted upward to the right. In other words, the variable icon 9C successfully changes. This star-shaped variable icon 9C repeatedly spins around in a display mode in which its left side passes through the front and points toward its right side. Note that in FIG. 84(D), the variable icon 9C successfully changes from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C. However, if the white spherical variable icon 9C does not change to a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C and remains as a white spherical variable icon 9C, the variable icon 9C fails to change.

When the fluctuation icon 9C changes from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, the size of the star-shaped fluctuation icon 9C becomes approximately 2.5 times larger than the size of the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C at the fluctuation display position 9Cd.

Next, as shown in Figure 84 (E), when the variable icon 9C starts to move downward (start moving) toward the variable display position 9Cd while still spinning, the message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a. Then, when the variable icon 9C has completed moving to the variable display position 9Cd, the variable icon 9C continues to spin, as shown in Figure 84 (F).

Then, as shown in Figure 84 (G), the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently being displayed (changing) will appear again on the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in Figure 84 (H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as temporarily stopped with the same pattern (number) (here, temporarily stopped at the number "7"), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a variable effect (variable display), forming a reach. At this time, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed as temporarily stopped, and the variable effect (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and small right decorative pattern 8Rz continues.

Then, as shown in Figure 84 (I), the second movable device 15 advances (moves) from a stationary state in a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 to a position (lower advance position (lower performance position)) in front of (in front of) the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and near the bottom edge, where it stops for a predetermined period of time (for example, approximately 1.5 seconds), and then, as shown in Figure 84 (J), it returns to the retracted position (home position).

The various effects may then continue, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R stop and display the same pattern (here, the number "7"), a jackpot is reached and the jackpot game (jackpot effect) begins. However, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R do not stop and display the same pattern (here, the number "7"), a loss occurs. When a jackpot or loss is confirmed, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the second movable device 15 is stopped in front of (in front of) the display screen 7a and near the bottom edge (lower advance position (lower performance position)) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., approximately 1.5 seconds), the second movable device 15 is positioned in front of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, and hold display position 9Ad, making the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, and hold display position 9Ad difficult for the player to see. Furthermore, if the hold icon 9A is present, of course, the second movable device 15 is positioned in front of the variable icon 9C, hold icon 9A, variable display position 9Cd, and hold display position 9Ad, making the variable icon 9C, hold icon 9A, variable display position 9Cd, and hold display position 9Ad difficult for the player to see.

When the second movable device 15 stops in front of (in front of) the display screen 7a and near the bottom (downward advance position (downward performance position)) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., approximately 1.5 seconds), the variable icon 9C may change to another icon, suggesting an increased likelihood of a jackpot. By positioning the second movable device 15 in front of the variable icon 9C, hold icon 9A, variable display position 9Cd, and hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, hold icon 9A, variable display position 9Cd, and hold display position 9Ad are difficult for the player to see, allowing the player to anticipate an increased likelihood of a jackpot. In this case, the variable icon 9C may remain unchanged, but the variable display position 9Cd and hold display position 9Ad may change color or shape. In this case, the player can still anticipate an increased likelihood of a jackpot.

[The variable icon jump effect C]
Next, the variable icon jump effect C will be described with reference to Fig. 85. Fig. 85 is a diagram for explaining the variable icon jump effect C. The variable icon jump effect C is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 85(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a left three-dimensional decorative symbol 8L, a center three-dimensional decorative symbol 8C, and a right three-dimensional decorative symbol 8R, spinning from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a decorative symbol (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") variation effect (variable display) begins. When the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) begins, the stopped decorative symbol gradually increases in speed from a low speed, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state, and changing at high speed. This allows the background image behind the decorative symbol to be viewed through the rapidly changing translucent decorative symbol. The decorative symbol slows down just before stopping, changing from a translucent state back to an opaque state, and then temporarily stops and then stops (temporarily stops and then stops and displays). When temporarily stops, the decorative symbol moves slowly up and down.

In addition, a sub-variable area is provided in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, where small left decorative patterns 8Lz, small middle decorative patterns 8Cz, and small right decorative patterns 8Rz, corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed in a variable manner (variable display). The small decorative patterns are always opaque and do not become translucent even when the variable manner begins, nor do they disappear from the display screen 7a. When the variable manner (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R begins, the variable manner (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and small right decorative pattern 8Rz begins in the sub-variable area. The left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed as statically stopped, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and small right decorative pattern 8Rz are also displayed as statically stopped.

Even when one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as temporary stops (for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as temporary stops and a reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and small right decorative pattern 8Rz (for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a temporary stop, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz remains, and when the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a temporary stop, the small right decorative pattern 8Rz remains) all continue to display changing effects (changing displays).

In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they do not line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a miss, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or they may be completely different patterns.

In contrast, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a jackpot, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small center decorative pattern 8Cz, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz will line up to form the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R currently changing as the first special symbol is consumed are displayed in the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area is provided for the first special symbol hold in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed in four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), allowing a maximum of four hold icons to be stored. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, and no reserved icons are displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there are no reserved icons that have been stocked and have not been consumed. For the sake of convenience, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol variation presentation (variation display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, at the top center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, and are therefore difficult to distinguish from the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, these numbers are positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with the other images displayed behind them, so visibility is not obstructed by the other images.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icons are further set with increasing expectations of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

In Figure 85 (A), the decorative pattern change effect (change display) begins, and when the change icon jump effect C begins, the change display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad disappear from the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 85 (B). Then, the change icon 9C displayed at the change display position 9Cd jumps up (starts moving) toward the center of the display screen 7a.

When the variable icon 9C reaches the center of the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 85(C), the variable icon 9C expands (i.e., the size of the white spherical icon increases) and explodes. At this time, the size of the variable icon 9C is approximately 2.5 times larger than the size of the variable icon 9C at the variable display position 9Cd. Note that in Figure 85(C), there are also cases where the variable icon 9C does not expand (i.e., the size of the white spherical icon increases) and explode, but instead cracks and shatters.

The left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R during the change effect (change display) disappear from the display screen 7a before the change icon 9C expands (i.e., the white spherical icon increases in size) and explodes, or before the change icon 9C expands (i.e., the white spherical icon increases in size) and cracks and shatters. In contrast, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small center decorative pattern 8Cz, and small right decorative pattern 8Rz during the change effect (change display) do not disappear from the display screen 7a.

When the variable icon 9C expands (i.e., the white spherical icon becomes larger) and explodes, or when the variable icon 9C expands (i.e., the white spherical icon becomes larger) and cracks and shatters, it changes from a white spherical variable icon 9C to a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C, as shown in Figure 85(D). In other words, the icon change of the variable icon 9C is successful. This star-shaped variable icon 9C repeatedly rotates in a display mode in which its left side passes through the front and faces its right side. Note that in Figure 85(D), the variable icon 9C successfully changes from a white spherical variable icon 9C to a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C, but if the white spherical variable icon 9C does not change to a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C and remains as a white spherical variable icon 9C, the icon change of the variable icon 9C is considered unsuccessful. Also, in Figure 85 (C), if the variable icon 9C does not expand (i.e., the size of the white spherical icon increases) but instead shrinks back to its original size, the variable icon 9C will remain as a white spherical icon, and the icon change of the variable icon 9C will have failed.

Then, while the variable icon 9C continues to spin, it begins to shrink and move down (starts moving) towards the variable display position 9Cd, and when the variable icon 9C has completed moving to the position it was in before it jumped up, the size of the variable icon 9C returns to the size it was before it jumped up (i.e., the size of the white spherical variable icon 9C at the variable display position 9Cd shown in Figure 85 (B)), and it continues to spin. After that, as shown in Figure 85 (E), the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad appear again on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 85 (F), the second movable device 15 advances (moves) from a stationary state in a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 to a position (lower advance position (lower performance position)) in front of (in front of) the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and closer to the bottom, where it stops for a predetermined period of time (for example, approximately 1.5 seconds), and then, as shown in Figure 85 (G), it returns to the retracted position (home position), and the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently being displayed (changing display) appear again on the display screen 7a.

When the second movable device 15 is stopped in front of (in front of) the display screen 7a and near the bottom edge (lower advance position (lower performance position)) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., approximately 1.5 seconds), the second movable device 15 is positioned in front of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, and hold display position 9Ad, making the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, and hold display position 9Ad difficult for the player to see. Furthermore, if the hold icon 9A is present, of course, the second movable device 15 is positioned in front of the variable icon 9C, hold icon 9A, variable display position 9Cd, and hold display position 9Ad, making the variable icon 9C, hold icon 9A, variable display position 9Cd, and hold display position 9Ad difficult for the player to see.

When the second movable device 15 stops in front of (in front of) the display screen 7a and near the bottom (downward advance position (downward performance position)) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., approximately 1.5 seconds), the variable icon 9C may change to another icon, suggesting an increased likelihood of a jackpot. By positioning the second movable device 15 in front of the variable icon 9C, hold icon 9A, variable display position 9Cd, and hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, hold icon 9A, variable display position 9Cd, and hold display position 9Ad are difficult for the player to see, allowing the player to anticipate an increased likelihood of a jackpot. In this case, the variable icon 9C may remain unchanged, but the variable display position 9Cd and hold display position 9Ad may change color or shape. Even in this case, the player can be encouraged to anticipate an increased likelihood of a jackpot.

After that, as shown in Figure 85 (H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as temporarily stopped with the same pattern (number) (here, temporarily stopped at the number "7"), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a variable (variable display), forming a reach. At this time, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed as temporarily stopped, and the variable (variable display) display continues for the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and small right decorative pattern 8Rz.

The various effects may then continue, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R stop and display the same pattern (here, the number "7"), a jackpot is reached and the jackpot game (jackpot effect) begins. However, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R do not stop and display the same pattern (here, the number "7"), a loss occurs. When a jackpot or loss is confirmed, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Example of effect]
Below is an example of the effect of the variable icon jump performance.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the variable icon jump performance A of Figure 83, the variable icon jump performance B of Figure 84, and the variable icon jump performance C of Figure 85, an image display device 7 (display means) is provided that can display multiple types of images, and after the variable icon 9C moves from the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) to the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display mode of the variable icon 9C is changed from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon (another display mode), and the first performance (Figures 83 (B) to (G) for the variable icon jump performance A, Figures 84 (B) to (F) for the variable icon jump performance B, and Figures 85 (B) to (E) for the variable icon jump performance C) in which the variable icon 9C moves back to the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) can be executed. According to this configuration, the variable icon 9C moves from the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) to the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then the display mode changes to another display mode and returns to the variable display position 9Cd (first display position). Therefore, by giving the variable icon 9C a dynamic movement, the presentation variation of the variable icon 9C can be increased, and further, the change in the variable icon 9C due to the dynamic movement of the variable icon 9C can suggest to the player the possibility of an increased expectation of a win for the variable. Therefore, interest can be increased.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect of the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83 and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. 85, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are not displayed. Specifically, no image indicating the center position (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Also, for example, in the first effect of the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83 (B) to (G), the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) may not be displayed, and in the first effect of the variable icon jump effect B of FIG. 84 (B) to (F), the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) may not be displayed. Therefore, in the first effect, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 may not be displayed. According to this configuration, when the variable icon 9C is present in the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to draw attention to the change in the variable icon 9C.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect of the variable icon jump effect A of Fig. 83, the variable icon jump effect B of Fig. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C of Fig. 85, when the variable icon 9C that has changed from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon (another display mode) in the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 moves again to the variable display position 9Cd (first display position), the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed, and the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is not displayed. Specifically, no image indicating the center position is displayed on the display screen 7a at the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Also, for example, in the first performance of the variable icon jump performance A in Figures 83(B) to (G), the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed in Figure 83(G), in the first performance of the variable icon jump performance B in Figures 84(B) to (F), the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed in Figure 84(F), and in the first performance of the variable icon jump performance C in Figures 85(B) to (E), the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed in Figure 85(E). According to this configuration, when the change icon 9C returns to the change display position 9Cd, the completion of the change of the change icon 9C is displayed at the change display position 9Cd (first display position), and further, by not displaying any image indicating the center position at the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 on the display screen 7a, it is possible to notify using the existing image, i.e., the change display position 9Cd (first display position), without displaying a dedicated image.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the variable icon jump effect A of Fig. 83 and the variable icon jump effect C of Fig. 85, there is a reserve display position 9Ad (third display position) that represents the display position of the reserve icon 9A, and in the first effect, when the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed, the reserve display position 9Ad (third display position) is displayed, and when the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is not displayed, the reserve display position 9Ad (third display position) is not displayed. Specifically, in the first effect of the variable icon jump effect A in Fig. 83(B) to (G), the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the reserve display position 9Ad (third display position) are displayed in Fig. 83(B), whereas the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the reserve display position 9Ad (third display position) are not displayed in Fig. 83(E). In addition, in the first effect of the variable icon jump effect C in Figures 85(B) to (E), the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the reserved display position 9Ad (third display position) are displayed in Figure 85(B), whereas the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the reserved display position 9Ad (third display position) are not displayed in Figure 85(D). Therefore, in the first effect, when the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed, the reserved display position 9Ad (third display position) is displayed, and when the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is not displayed, the reserved display position 9Ad (third display position) is not displayed. According to this configuration, by also performing an effect in which the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the reserved display position 9Ad (third display position) are sometimes displayed and sometimes not displayed, this can contribute to improving the presentation effect in combination with the movement and change of the variable icon 9C.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the variable icon jump performance A of Figure 83, the variable icon jump performance B of Figure 84, and the variable icon jump performance C of Figure 85, there is a second movable device 15 (movable body) that can appear in front of the image display device 7 (display means), and after the first performance, when the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the reserved display position 9Ad (third display position) are displayed, the second movable device 15 (movable body) can be operated to execute a second performance (Figure 83 (I) for the variable icon jump performance A, Figure 84 (I) for the variable icon jump performance B, and Figure 85 (F) for the variable icon jump performance C) in which the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the reserved display position 9Ad (third display position) are covered to make them difficult to see. According to this configuration, the operation of the second movable device 15 (movable body) can suggest an increased likelihood of winning a jackpot by changing the color or shape of the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the reserved display position 9Ad (third display position), thereby making the player look forward to an increased likelihood of winning a jackpot.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second performance in the variable icon jump performance A of Fig. 83, the variable icon jump performance B of Fig. 84, and the variable icon jump performance C of Fig. 85, the second movable device 15 (movable body) is operated to cover the variable icon 9C and make it difficult to see. Specifically, in Fig. 83 (I) in the variable icon jump performance A, Fig. 84 (I) in the variable icon jump performance B, and Fig. 85 (F) in the variable icon jump performance C, the second movable device 15 (movable body) covers the variable icon 9C and makes it difficult to see. According to this configuration, the operation of the second movable device 15 (movable body) can suggest an increase in the likelihood of winning by changing the variable icon 9C to another icon, and the player can be made to expect an increase in the likelihood of winning.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect of the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B of FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. 85, when the variable icon 9C is moved from the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 back to the variable display position 9Cd (first display position), it can be rotated in a predetermined direction at the variable display position 9Cd (first display position). Specifically, in FIG. 83 (G) in the variable icon jump effect A, FIG. 84 (F) in the variable icon jump effect B, and FIG. 85 (E) in the variable icon jump effect C, the variable icon 9C is displayed in a manner in which it repeatedly rotates around (rotates in a predetermined direction) with its left side passing the front side and heading toward its right side. This configuration allows attention to be drawn to the variable icon 9C after the change.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the variable icon jump effect are shown.
[Modification 1]
The variable icon jump effect A in Fig. 83, the variable icon jump effect B in Fig. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C in Fig. 85 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, they are performed in a game state known as left-handed hitting. However, they may also be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21. In other words, they may also be performed in a game state known as right-handed hitting.

[Modification 2]
In the second effects in the variable icon jump effect A of Fig. 83, the variable icon jump effect B of Fig. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C of Fig. 85 (Fig. 83(I) for the variable icon jump effect A, Fig. 84(I) for the variable icon jump effect B, and Fig. 85(F) for the variable icon jump effect C), when the reserved icon 9A is present, the second movable device 15 (movable body) may be operated to cover the reserved icon 9A at the reserved display position 9Ad (third display position) and make it difficult to see. In this way, it is possible to suggest that the reserved icon 9A changes to another icon, thereby increasing the likelihood of a jackpot. Therefore, by arranging the second movable device 15 in front of the variable icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad are difficult for the player to see, and the player can expect an increase in the likelihood of a jackpot.

[Modification 3]
In the second performance of the variable icon jump performance A in Fig. 83, the variable icon jump performance B in Fig. 84, and the variable icon jump performance C in Fig. 85, the second movable device 15 (movable body) moves from the retracted position (home position) to the front (front) of the display screen 7a and stops at a position (lower advance position (lower performance position)) near the bottom edge for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds), making the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad difficult for the player to see. Of course, when the reserved icon 9A is present, the second movable device 15 (movable body) is positioned in front of the variable icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad, making the variable icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad difficult for the player to see. However, the second movable device 15 (movable body) may be configured to return to the retracted position (home position) without reaching a position (lower advance position (lower performance position)) in front of (forward of) the display screen 7a and near the bottom edge (for example, by moving from the retracted position (home position) to an advance position (lower performance position) in the center of the front of (forward of) the display screen 7a). In this case, even when the second movable device 15 (movable body) operates, it does not cover the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, or the hold display position 9Ad, and even if the hold icon 9A exists, it does not cover the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, or the hold display position 9Ad.Therefore, although there is no indication of an increased likelihood of a jackpot, such as the variable icon 9C or the hold icon 9A changing to another icon, or the color or shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad changing, even when the second movable device 15 (movable body) simply operates, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that there may be an indication of an increased likelihood of a jackpot.

[Modification 4]
In the first performance of the variable icon jump performance A in Figure 83, the variable icon jump performance B in Figure 84, and the variable icon jump performance C in Figure 85 (Figures 83 (B) to (G) for the variable icon jump performance A, Figures 84 (B) to (F) for the variable icon jump performance B, and Figures 85 (B) to (E) for the variable icon jump performance C), the white spherical variable icon 9C at the variable display position 9Cd jumps up toward the center of the display screen 7a, and then changes to another icon, a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C, successfully changing the icon of the variable icon 9C. However, if the reserved icon 9A has already changed from a white spherical icon to a blue smiling spherical icon, and this blue smiling spherical reserved icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable icon jump effect may be performed, causing the variable icon 9C to jump toward the center of the display screen 7a, and then change to another icon, such as a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C, indicating whether the variable icon 9C has succeeded or failed to change. In this way, the dynamic movement of the variable icon 9C can suggest to the player the possibility of an increased chance of winning with the variable icon 9C, thereby enhancing the game's enjoyment.

[Modification 5]
In the variable icon jump effect C of Figure 85, when the variable icon 9C arrives at the center of the display screen 7a, the variable icon 9C either expands (i.e., the white spherical icon becomes larger) and explodes, or it does not explode but cracks and shatters. However, when the white spherical variable icon 9C expands and explodes, the explosion may peel off the shell of the white spherical variable icon 9C, revealing another icon, such as a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C. Alternatively, the white spherical variable icon 9C may expand, be torn apart, and explode, revealing another icon, such as a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C. This increases the variety of changes in the variable icon 9C, contributing to an improved effect of the change in the variable icon 9C.

[Modification 6]
In the variable icon jump effect A of Fig. 83, the variable icon jump effect B of Fig. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C of Fig. 85, the reserved icon 9A is not present, but for example, when a reserved icon 9A is present at each of the first to third reserved display positions 9Ad to 9Ad, i.e., when three reserved icons 9A are present, or when a reserved icon 9A is present at each of the first to fourth reserved display positions 9Ad to 9Ad, i.e., when four reserved icons 9A are present, the size of the reserved icon 9A may be increased as the reserved icon 9A is consumed and shifted as the game progresses, as a hint (advance notice) of the variable icon jump effect. In this way, the start time of the variable icon jump effect can be indicated to the player, which can contribute to increasing anticipation for the change in the variable icon 9C due to the variable icon jump effect.

[Modification 7]
In the variable icon jump performance A in Figure 83, the variable icon jump performance B in Figure 84, and the variable icon jump performance C in Figure 85, the white spherical variable icon 9C at the variable display position 9Cd jumps up toward the center of the display screen 7a, and then changes to another icon, a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C, successfully changing the variable icon 9C. The size of the variable icon 9C may increase or decrease before and after this change. This increases the variety of changes in the variable icon 9C, contributing to an improved presentation effect of the change in the variable icon 9C.

[Modification 8]
In the variable icon jump performance A of Fig. 83, the variable icon jump performance B of Fig. 84, and the variable icon jump performance C of Fig. 85, after the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, the variable icon 9C may jump up (start moving) from the variable display position 9Cd toward the center of the display screen 7a just before the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped. In this case, at the same time (or almost at the same time) as the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped, the variable display position 9Cd may change to another icon (for example, from a white spherical variable icon 9C to a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C) in the center of the display screen 7a and return to the variable display position 9Cd again. In this way, after the variable icon 9C moves from the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) to the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display mode changes to another display mode and returns to the variable display position 9Cd (first display position), so by giving the variable icon 9C a dynamic movement, the presentation variation of the variable icon 9C can be increased, and further, the change in the variable icon 9C due to the dynamic movement of the variable icon 9C can suggest to the player the possibility of an increased expectation of a win for the variable icon 9C, thereby increasing the interest.

[Modification 9]
In the variable icon jump performance A in Figure 83 (I), the variable icon jump performance B in Figure 84 (I), and the variable icon jump performance C in Figure 85 (F), the second movable device 15 advances (moves) from a stationary state in a retreat position (home position) above the image display device 7 to a position (lower advance position (lower performance position)) in front of (in front of) the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and near the bottom, where it stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds), and then returns to the retreat position (home position). However, the second movable device 15 may be replaced by another movable device provided on the game board 2. For example, a lower movable device may be provided below the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and this lower movable device may move from a stationary state in a retreat position (home position) to the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to cover all of the variable display position 9Cd, reserved display position 9Ad, variable icon 9C, and reserved icon 9A (there may be up to four reserved balls), stop for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds), and then return to the retreat position (home position). In this way, the operation of the lower movable device can suggest an increase in the likelihood of winning a jackpot by changing the color or shape of the variable display position 9Cd and reserved display position 9Ad, which can make the player expect an increase in the likelihood of winning a jackpot. Furthermore, the variable icon 9C and reserved icon 9A can be changed to other icons, which can suggest an increase in the likelihood of winning a jackpot, which can make the player expect an increase in the likelihood of winning a jackpot.

[Modification 10]
The variable icon jump performance A in Figure 83, the variable icon jump performance B in Figure 84, and the variable icon jump performance C in Figure 85 may not include some of the described performances, or other performances may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A12-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
After the variable icon moves from the first display position to the second display position, when the display mode of the variable icon is changed to another display mode, a first effect of moving the variable icon to the first display position again can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect A12-2
The gaming machine according to aspect A12-1,
In the first effect, the first display position and the second display position may not be displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect A12-3
A gaming machine according to aspect A12-1 or A12-2,
In the first performance, when the variable icon that has changed to the other display mode at the second display position moves back to the first display position, the first display position is displayed and the second display position is not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect A12-4
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A12-1 to A12-3,
There is a third display position that represents the display position of the hold icon,
In the first effect, when the first display position is displayed, the third display position may be displayed, and when the first display position is not displayed, the third display position may not be displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect A12-5
The gaming machine according to aspect A12-4,
a movable body that can appear in front of the display means,
After the first performance, when the first display position and the third display position are displayed, the movable body is operated to execute a second performance in which the first display position and the third display position are covered to make them difficult to see.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect A12-6
The gaming machine according to aspect A12-5,
In the second performance, the movable body may be operated to cover the variable icon, making it difficult to see.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect A12-7
The gaming machine according to Aspect A12-5 or A12-6,
In the second performance, the movable body may be operated to cover the hold icon at the third display position, making it difficult to see.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A12-8]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A12-1 to A12-7,
In the first performance, when the variable icon is moved from the second display position to the first display position again, the variable icon is rotated in a predetermined direction at the first display position.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Operating means appearance effects A to C are explained below using Figures 86 to 88. These operating means appearance effects can be executed during decorative symbol variation effects, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute an operating means appearance effect, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L.

[Operation means appearance production A]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the operation means appearance effect A. The operation means appearance effect is an effect when an operation means image BTN appears, which is an image imitating an operation means such as the effect button 63, the sword component 65, or the select button 98. First, as shown in FIG. 86(A), with nothing displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a ready state on the display screen 7a (here, a "2↓2" ready state). The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 86(B), an operation prompting image SG is displayed to prompt the player to operate the operation means. Here, the operation prompting image SG is a text image that reads "PRESS!!" and is enlarged and displayed across three screens: the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. The operation prompting image SG also extends beyond the three screens. At this time, the operation means image BTN has not yet been displayed. That is, in this effect, the operation prompting image SG is displayed before the operation means image BTN. Therefore, when a player sees the operation prompting image SG, they are momentarily confused about what to operate. This increases the player's interest in the operation target and enhances the excitement. The operation prompting image SG is displayed with a portion overlapping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed in front of the operation prompting image SG.

After that, as shown in Figure 86 (C), the operation prompting image SG is displayed in a reduced size, and the entire operation prompting image SG fits within the three screens: the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. At this time, it is still enlarged and displayed across the three screens. The operation means image BTN is not yet displayed. A portion of the operation prompting image SG is displayed overlapping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R, and the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed in front of the operation prompting image SG.

Then, as shown in Figure 86 (D), the operation prompting image SG is further reduced in size until the entire operation prompting image SG fits within the display screen 7a. At this time, the operation means image BTN is not yet displayed. A portion of the operation prompting image SG is displayed overlapping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R, and the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed in front of the operation prompting image SG.

After that, as shown in Figure 86 (E), on the display screen 7a, the operation prompt image SG is further reduced in size and moved to a position where it does not overlap with the decorative symbols 8L and 8R. In addition, a new operation means image BTN is displayed below the operation prompt image SG. Here, the operation means image BTN is an image that resembles the effect button 63. The display of the operation means image BTN makes the player aware that he or she is being prompted to operate the effect button 63, and his or her attention is focused on the effect button 63. After that, as shown in Figure 86 (F), both the operation means image BTN and the operation prompt image SG are reduced in size. Normally, the operation means image BTN and the operation prompt image SG are not reduced in size after being displayed together, so the player's attention can be attracted again.

Next, as shown in Figure 86 (G), a specific image TG is displayed behind the operation means image BTN and the operation prompt image SG. The specific image TG is a rectangular meter composed of multiple scale panels. As shown in Figures 86 (G) and (H), the specific image TG displays these scale panels in order from the left, gradually completing the effect. When all the scale panels (six in this case) are in place and the specific image TG is complete, as shown in Figure 86 (I), the specific image TG changes appearance in conjunction with the player's operation of the operation means (in this case, effect button 63). Here, when the player presses effect button 63, the color of the scale panels of the specific image TG changes in order from the left, indicating that the remaining time required to operate effect button 63 is getting shorter. If the player does not press effect button 63, the color of the scale panels of the specific image TG will not change in order from the left.

After that, when the period requiring operation of the effect button 63 expires, the display of the operation means image BTN, operation prompt image SG, and specific image TG disappears. Then, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. In this case, they are fixed and stopped in a losing mode.

[Operation means appearance production B]
87 is a diagram for explaining the operation means appearance effect B. The operation means appearance effect is an effect when an operation means image BTN appears, which is an image imitating an operation means such as the effect button 63, the sword component 65, or the select button 98. First, as shown in FIG. 87(A), with nothing displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a ready state on the display screen 7a (here, a "2↓2" ready state). The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 87(B), an operation prompting image SG is displayed to prompt the player to operate the operation means. Here, the operation prompting image SG is a text image of "Repeat Press!!," "Press!!," and "Hold Press!", and these texts are displayed alternately at a predetermined timing. Here, the order is "Repeat Press!!" → "Press!!" → "Hold Press!" → "Repeat Press!!." The operation prompting image SG is enlarged and displayed across three screens: the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. Furthermore, the operation prompting image SG extends beyond the three screens. At this time, the operation means image BTN has not yet been displayed. That is, in this effect, the operation prompting image SG is displayed before the operation means image BTN. Therefore, when the player sees the operation prompting image SG, they are momentarily confused about what operation to perform. Furthermore, because the content of the operation prompting image SG periodically changes, they are also confused about how to operate the device. This increases interest in the operation target and operation method, and enhances the game's appeal. The operation prompt image SG is displayed partially overlapping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed in front of the operation prompt image SG.

After that, as shown in Figure 87 (C), the operation prompting image SG is displayed in a reduced size, and the entire operation prompting image SG fits within the three screens: the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. The text content of the operation prompting image SG continues to change. At this time, it is still enlarged and displayed across the three screens. The operation means image BTN is not yet displayed. A portion of the operation prompting image SG is displayed overlapping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R, and the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed in front of the operation prompting image SG.

After that, as shown in Figure 87 (D), the operation prompting image SG is further reduced in size until the entire operation prompting image SG fits within the display screen 7a. The text content of the operation prompting image SG continues to change. At this time, the operation means image BTN is not yet displayed. A portion of the operation prompting image SG is displayed overlapping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R, and the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed in front of the operation prompting image SG.

After that, as shown in Figure 87(E), on the display screen 7a, the operation prompt image SG is further reduced in size and moved to a position where it does not overlap with the decorative symbols 8L and 8R. Additionally, a new operation prompt image BTN is displayed below the operation prompt image SG. Here, the operation prompt image BTN is an image that resembles the effect button 63. The display of the operation prompt image BTN makes the player aware that he or she is being prompted to operate the effect button 63, and his or her attention is focused on the effect button 63. Then, as shown in Figure 87(F), both the operation prompt image BTN and the operation prompt image SG are reduced in size. Normally, the operation prompt image BTN and the operation prompt image SG are not reduced in size after they are both displayed, so the player's attention can be attracted again. Even at this time, the text content of the operation prompt image SG continues to change.

Next, as shown in Figure 87(G), a specific image TG is displayed behind the operation tool image BTN and the operation prompt image SG. The specific image TG is a rectangular meter composed of multiple scale panels. As the player operates the effect button 63 in accordance with the content of the sequentially changing operation prompt image SG, the scale panels are displayed in order from the left, as shown in Figures 87(G) and (H), and a gradually completed effect is executed. That is, when the operation prompt image SG displays "Repeat!!," the player presses the effect button 63 repeatedly; when it displays "Press!!," the player presses the effect button 63; when it displays "Long press!", the player presses and holds the effect button 63; and if the player does not perform the operation in accordance with the display content of the operation prompt image SG, the scale panels will not increase. If all the scale panels (here, six) are collected within the specified period, the specific image TG is completed. If all scale panels are not collected within the specified period, the operation tool image BTN, operation prompt image SG, and specific image TG will disappear at that point.

As shown in Figure 87 (I), the specific image TG changes appearance in conjunction with the player's operation of the operating means (here, the effect button 63). Here, the specific image TG stops changing with the message "Press repeatedly!!" displayed. In this state, when the player repeatedly presses the effect button 63, the color of the scale panels of the specific image TG changes in order from the left, and when all the scale panels have changed color, the operation means image BTN, operation prompt image SG, and specific image TG disappear. Then, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, they are fixed and stopped in a losing mode.

[Operation means appearance production C]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the operation means appearance effect C. The operation means appearance effect is an effect when an operation means image ASI, which is an image imitating an operation means such as the effect button 63, the sword component 65, or the select button 98, appears. First, as shown in FIG. 88(A), with nothing displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a ready state (here, a "2↓2" ready state) on the display screen 7a. The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 88(B), an operation prompting image SG is displayed to prompt the player to operate the operation means. Here, the operation prompting image SG is a text image that reads "Push!" and is enlarged and displayed across three screens: the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. The operation prompting image SG also extends beyond the three screens. At this time, the operation means image ASI has not yet been displayed. That is, in this effect, the operation prompting image SG is displayed before the operation means image ASI. Therefore, when a player sees the operation prompting image SG, they are momentarily confused about what to operate. This increases the player's interest in the operation target and enhances the excitement. The operation prompting image SG is displayed with a portion overlapping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed in front of the operation prompting image SG.

After that, as shown in Figure 88 (C), the operation prompting image SG is displayed in a reduced size, and the entire operation prompting image SG fits within the three screens: the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. At this time, it is still enlarged and displayed across the three screens. The operation means image ASI is not yet displayed. A portion of the operation prompting image SG is displayed overlapping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R, and the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed in front of the operation prompting image SG.

Then, as shown in Figure 88 (D), the operation prompting image SG is further reduced in size until the entire image fits within the display screen 7a. At this time, the operation means image ASI is not yet displayed. The reduced size of the operation prompting image SG causes it to be displayed in a position that does not overlap with the decorative patterns 8L and 8R.

After that, as shown in Figure 88(E), the operation means image ASI is newly displayed below the operation prompt image SG. The operation means image ASI is displayed overlapping the operation prompt image SG. At this time, the operation means image ASI is displayed in the foreground. This allows the operation means image ASI to have a strong impact. In this case, the operation means image ASI is an image that resembles the sword 65. The display of the operation means image ASI makes the player realize that he or she is being prompted to operate the sword 65, and his or her attention is focused on the sword 65. After that, as shown in Figure 88(F), both the operation means image ASI and the operation prompt image SG are reduced in size and displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Normally, the operation means image ASI and the operation prompt image SG are not reduced in size after being displayed together, so the player's attention can be attracted again.

Next, as shown in Figure 88 (G), a specific image TG is displayed behind the operation means image ASI and the operation prompt image SG. The specific image TG is a rectangular meter made up of multiple scale panels. As shown in Figures 88 (G) and (H), the specific image TG displays these scale panels in order from the left, creating an effect in which they are gradually completed. When all the scale panels (six in this case) are complete and the specific image TG is completed, as shown in Figure 88 (I), the specific image TG changes appearance in conjunction with the player's operation of the operation means (here, the sword 65). Here, when the player presses the sword 65 downward, the color of the scale panels of the specific image TG changes in order from the left, indicating that the remaining time required to operate the sword 65 is getting shorter.

After that, when the period during which the sword 65 must be operated expires, the operation means image ASI, operation prompt image SG, and specific image TG disappear. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are then fixed and stopped. In this case, they are fixed and stopped in a losing mode.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the control means appearance.
[Effect 1]
86(B)-(D), 87(B)-(D), and 88(B)-(D), the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment can execute a first effect in which an operation prompt image SG is displayed when the operation means images BTN and ASI are not displayed on the display screen 7a, and a second effect in which the operation means images BTN and ASI are displayed after the first effect. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained by an unprecedented and innovative effect, thereby increasing the player's interest.
[Effect 2]
86(B) to (D), 87(B) to (D), and 88(B) to (D) in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the first effect, the operation prompting image SG is displayed across at least one of the sub-display screens 64R, 64L and the display screen 7a, and then reduced and displayed on the display screen 7a. With this configuration, an unprecedented and novel effect can be provided that visually entertains the player and can increase the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
86(B) to (D), 87(B) to (D), and 88(B) to (D), in the first effect, the operation prompting image SG is displayed across the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a, and is then displayed across the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and is then reduced in size and displayed on the display screen 7a. This configuration makes it possible to provide a player with visual enjoyment through an unprecedented and innovative effect, thereby increasing the player's interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 86(B) to (E), 87(B) to (E), and 88(B) to (D), in the first effect, an operation prompt image SG is displayed overlapping the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped in the reach state, and then it is reduced in size and displayed in a position where it does not overlap the decorative symbols. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and innovative effect, and it is possible to increase the interest of the player.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the second effect, the operation means images BTN and ASI and the operation prompt image SG are all displayed in reduced size, as shown in Figures 86(E)-(F), 87(E)-(F), and 88(E)-(F). This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained by an unprecedented and novel effect, thereby increasing the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 86(F)-(I), 87(F)-(I), and 88(F)-(I), after the second effect, a specific image TG whose appearance changes in conjunction with the player's operation of the operation means is displayed behind the operation means images BTN and ASI. With this configuration, a novel effect not seen in the past can visually entertain the player and increase their interest.

[Modification]
The following shows modified examples of the operation means appearance effect.
[Modification 1]
In the operation means appearance effects A to C, the operation prompting image SG is displayed across the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a, and then across the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and then reduced and displayed on the display screen 7a. However, the operation prompting image SG may be displayed across either the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and not on the other sub-display screen.

[Modification 2]
In the operation means appearance effect A, as shown in Figure 86 (I), the specific image TG changes its appearance in conjunction with the player's operation of the operation means (effect button 63). That is, when the player presses the effect button 63, the color of the scale panels of the specific image TG changes in sequence from the left, shortening the remaining period in which the effect button 63 must be operated. However, the color of the scale panels of the specific image TG may also change in sequence from the left over time, even if the player does not press the effect button 63.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B1-1]
an operating means operable by a player;
A gaming machine comprising a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is an operation means image that imitates the operation means,
one of the plurality of types of images is an operation prompting image that prompts the player to operate the operation means;
a first effect in which the operation prompt image is displayed on the display means in a state in which the operation means image is not displayed on the display means;
After the first effect, a second effect is displayed in which the operation means image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 further comprises:
a sub-display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
In the first effect, the operation prompting image is displayed across the sub-display means and the display means, and then reduced in size and displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-2,
the sub-display means are provided on both sides of the display means,
In the first effect, the operation prompting image is displayed across both the sub-display means and the display means, and then is reduced in size and displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B1-1 to B1-3,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative design;
In the first performance, the operation prompt image is displayed overlapping the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped in a reach state, and then the image is reduced in size and displayed in a position where it does not overlap the decorative pattern.
◇[Aspect B1-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B1-1 to B1-4,
After the second effect, both the operation means image and the operation prompt image are displayed in a reduced size.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B1-1 to B1-5,
After the second effect, a specific image whose appearance changes in conjunction with the operation of the operation means by the player is displayed on the back side of the image of the operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The following explains part assembly performances A to C using Figures 89 to 91. In Figures 89 to 91, for example, the first movable prop 14, second movable prop 15, and other movable props arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted for clarity of the drawings.

This part assembly effect is performed while the decorative pattern is changing (during changing display). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a command to start changing) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a specific area changing effect is included, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

Here, we will first explain part assembly performance A, then part assembly performance B, and then part assembly performance C.

[Parts assembly performance A]
The part assembly performance A will be described with reference to Fig. 89. Fig. 89 is a diagram for explaining the part assembly performance A. The part assembly performance A is performed during the variable performance (variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in Figure 89 (A), a variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") begins on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, with the left stereoscopic decorative symbol 8L, the center stereoscopic decorative symbol 8C, and the right stereoscopic decorative symbol 8R rotating from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. At this time, no decorative symbols are displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L.

When the decorative pattern change effect (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state as it gradually increases its speed from a slow speed, changing at high speed. This allows the background image located behind the decorative pattern to be seen through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changing from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, and appears temporarily stopped, or stopped (temporarily stopped, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R currently changing as the first special symbol is consumed are displayed in the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area is provided for the first special symbol hold in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed in four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), allowing a maximum of four hold icons to be stored. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icons are displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one hold icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. For the sake of convenience, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol change presentation (change display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the top center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, at the top center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, and are therefore difficult to distinguish from the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, these numbers are positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with the other images displayed behind them, so visibility is not obstructed by the other images.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icons are further set with increasing expectations of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the decorative pattern change effect (change display) begins in Figure 89 (A), five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG, which resembles a sword component 65, are displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, respectively, in a display mode in which they converge from the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in Figure 89 (B). The five component images PT1 to PT5 are based on a silver color. At this time, the change display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A all disappear from the display screen 7a.

As described above, the sword member 65 is an operating part shaped like a sword, which the player can press downward during effects that are executed as the game progresses. For this reason, the sword member 65 is a movable part that the player can press downward in its entirety. A sword button (not shown) is provided at the top end of the sword member 65, i.e., the end of the sword handle. This sword button is an operating part that is operated (pressed) by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses.

Of the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG, component image PT1 enters the left sub-display screen 64L from the left and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7; component image PT2 enters the right sub-display screen 64R from the right and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7; component image PT3 enters the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the lower right and moves toward the center; component image PT4 enters the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the upper left and moves toward the center; and component image PT5 enters the left sub-display screen 64L from the left and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Then, as shown in FIG. 89(C), the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are arranged such that component image PT1 is positioned toward the lower center of each of the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R. Component image PT2 is positioned toward the upper center of each of the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R. Component image PT3 is positioned toward the center of the bottom edge of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is ultimately displayed directly on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 without passing through the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R. Component image PT4 is positioned toward the center of the top edge of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is ultimately displayed directly on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, without passing through the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R. Component image PT5 is positioned in the center of the left sub-display screen 64L, and is ultimately displayed directly on the left sub-display screen 64L without extending beyond the left sub-display screen 64L onto the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the right sub-display screen 64R. Component image PT1 rotates three-dimensionally and is positioned toward the lower center of each display screen, spanning the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R. Component image PT2 also rotates three-dimensionally and is positioned toward the upper center of each display screen, spanning the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R. Component images PT1 to PT5 are moved so as not to interfere with each other.

Then, when the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are moved to the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the sword image KG is assembled in a lying state as shown in Figure 89(D). The assembled sword image KG is silver in color because the five component images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver, and the handle has a smooth surface. When the sword image KG is assembled, the component images PT1 to PT5 shown in Figures 89(B) and (C) become smaller in size, and the assembled sword image KG is smaller than the component images PT1 to PT5 shown in Figures 89(B) and (C).

Next, as shown in Figures 89(E) and (F), the end of the hilt of the sword image KG lying on its side is rotated clockwise so that it faces upward, and the sword image KG is moved downward so that the end of the hilt of the sword image KG is positioned in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, resulting in a display mode in which the end of the hilt of the sword image KG (the portion including the sword button KBG) is illuminated.

Next, as shown in Figure 89 (G), the sword image KG is enlarged, and the end of the sword hilt of the sword image KG is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, a message MG saying "Press Here" is displayed near the top edge of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, encouraging the user to operate (press) the upper end portion of the sword component 65, i.e., the sword button provided at the end of the sword hilt (the sword button KBG provided at the end of the sword hilt of the sword image KG). The message MG is split into three characters, "Here" and two characters, "Press." The three characters "Here" are positioned to the left of the sword button KBG of the sword image KG without covering the sword image KG, and the two characters "Press" are positioned to the right of the sword button KBG of the sword image KG without covering the sword image KG. By arranging it in this manner, the message "Press here" urging the player to operate (press) the sword button on the sword component 65 can be clearly emphasized to the player without being obstructed by the sword image KG, and furthermore, the position of the sword button KBG on the sword image KG, which imitates the sword button on the sword component 65 that is the object of operation, can be clearly emphasized to the player without being obstructed by the message MG.

An indicator image IG indicating the period during which operation (pressing) of the sword button on the sword component 65 is accepted (hereinafter referred to as the "operation acceptance period") is displayed near the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, covering part of the sword image KG (specifically, part of the sword handle). By arranging it in this manner, the indicator image IG is not obstructed by the sword image KG, and the operation acceptance period can be clearly and emphatically communicated to the player.

When the player operates (presses) the sword button on the sword member 65, or when the operation acceptance period has elapsed without the player operating (pressing) the sword button on the sword member 65, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a stopped number "5," the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a stopped number "6," and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a stopped number "7," resulting in a miss. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, reserved display position 9Ad, and reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is no longer displayed due to the end of the variable. Next, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and a variable performance (variable display) begins with the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

[Parts assembly performance B]
Next, the part assembly performance B will be described with reference to Fig. 90. Fig. 90 is a diagram for explaining the part assembly performance B. The part assembly performance B is performed during the variable performance (variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in Figure 90 (A), a variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") begins on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, with the left stereoscopic decorative symbol 8L, the center stereoscopic decorative symbol 8C, and the right stereoscopic decorative symbol 8R rotating from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. At this time, no decorative symbols are displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L.

When the decorative pattern change effect (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state as it gradually increases its speed from a slow speed, changing at high speed. This allows the background image located behind the decorative pattern to be seen through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changing from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, and appears temporarily stopped, or stopped (temporarily stopped, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R currently changing as the first special symbol is consumed are displayed in the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area is provided for the first special symbol hold in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed in four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), allowing a maximum of four hold icons to be stored. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icons are displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one hold icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. For the sake of convenience, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol change presentation (change display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the top center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, at the top center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, and are therefore difficult to distinguish from the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, these numbers are positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with the other images displayed behind them, so visibility is not obstructed by the other images.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icons are further set with increasing expectations of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the decorative pattern change effect (change display) begins in Figure 90(A), five component images PT1-PT5 of a sword image KG, modeled after a sword component 65, are displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, respectively, as shown in Figure 90(B). The five component images PT1-PT5 are silver-based. At this time, the change icon 9C changes from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, while the change display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a. By displaying only the change icon 9C that has become a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, the change icon 9C can be clearly highlighted. In this case, the variable icon 9C is placed at the frontmost position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so that its visibility is not obstructed by other images.

As described above, the sword member 65 is an operating part shaped like a sword, which the player can press downward during effects that are executed as the game progresses. For this reason, the sword member 65 is a movable part that the player can press downward in its entirety. A sword button (not shown) is provided at the top end of the sword member 65, i.e., the end of the sword handle. This sword button is an operating part that is operated (pressed) by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses.

Of the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG, component image PT1 enters the left sub-display screen 64L from the left and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7; component image PT2 enters the right sub-display screen 64R from the right and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7; component image PT3 enters the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the lower right and moves toward the center; component image PT4 enters the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the upper left and moves toward the center; and component image PT5 enters the left sub-display screen 64L from the left and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Then, as shown in FIG. 90(C), the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are arranged such that component image PT1 is positioned toward the lower center of each of the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R. Component image PT2 is positioned toward the upper center of each of the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R. Component image PT3 is positioned toward the center of the bottom edge of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is ultimately displayed directly on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 without passing through the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R. Component image PT4 is positioned toward the center of the top edge of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is ultimately displayed directly on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, without passing through the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R. The part image PT5 is positioned in the center of the left sub-display screen 64L, and is ultimately displayed directly on the left sub-display screen 64L without extending beyond the left sub-display screen 64L onto the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 or the right sub-display screen 64R. At this time, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C remains displayed.

Component image PT1 rotates three-dimensionally and is positioned toward the lower center of each display screen, spanning the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R. Component image PT2 also rotates three-dimensionally and is positioned toward the upper center of each display screen, spanning the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R. Component images PT1 to PT5 are moved so as not to interfere with each other.

Then, when the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are moved to the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the sword image KG is assembled in a lying state as shown in Figure 90(D). The assembled sword image KG is silver in color because the five component images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver, and the handle has a smooth surface. When the sword image KG is assembled, the component images PT1 to PT5 shown in Figures 90(B) and (C) become smaller in size, and the assembled sword image KG is smaller than the component images PT1 to PT5 shown in Figures 90(B) and (C). At this time, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C remains displayed.

Next, as shown in Figures 90(E) and (F), the end of the handle of the sword image KG lying on its side is rotated clockwise so that it faces upward, and then the entire sword image KG is further reduced in size and placed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C remains displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(G), the sword image KG is enlarged and the entire sword image KG is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, a message MG urging the player to push the entire sword 65 downward (push in) is displayed near the top of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The message MG is split into two characters, "push" and "fill in," with the two characters "push" being placed to the left of the sword image KG without covering it, and the two characters "fill in" being placed to the right of the sword image KG without covering it. This arrangement allows the message "push in," which urges the player to push the entire sword 65 downward (push in), to be clearly emphasized to the player without being obstructed by the sword image KG. Furthermore, the sword image KG, which resembles the sword 65 being operated, can be clearly emphasized to the player without being obstructed by the message MG.

An indicator image IG indicating the period during which an operation to push the entire sword component 65 downward (a push) is accepted (hereinafter referred to as the "operation acceptance period") is displayed near the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, covering a portion of the sword image KG (specifically, a portion of the sword handle). By arranging it in this manner, the indicator image IG is not obstructed by the sword image KG, and the operation acceptance period can be clearly and emphatically communicated to the player. Note that the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C remains displayed in Figure 90 (G).

When the player performs an operation to push the entire sword member 65 downward (push), or when the operation acceptance period has elapsed without the player performing an operation to push the entire sword member 65 downward (push), as shown in Figure 90 (H), the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 while emitting a flash of light FH. At this time, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 90 (I), a battle presentation begins. In this presentation, two characters (ally character CRA and enemy character CRB) fight, creating a high expectation of a big win. During the battle presentation, the variable display position 9Cd, reserved display position 9Ad, variable icon 9C, and reserved icon 9A remain hidden from the display screen 7a.

When ally character CRA wins and enemy character CRB loses, the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as the same pattern, resulting in a jackpot and subsequent jackpot game (jackpot effect). On the other hand, when ally character CRA loses and enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed as the same pattern, resulting in a miss. Once the battle effect ends and a jackpot or miss is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, reserved display position 9Ad, and reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is no longer displayed due to the end of the variable display. Next, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and a variable display (variable display) using the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R begins.

[Parts assembly performance C]
Next, the part assembly performance C will be described with reference to Fig. 91. Fig. 91 is a diagram for explaining the part assembly performance C. The part assembly performance C is performed during the variable performance (variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in Figure 91 (A), a variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") begins on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, with the left stereoscopic decorative symbol 8L, the center stereoscopic decorative symbol 8C, and the right stereoscopic decorative symbol 8R rotating from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. At this time, no decorative symbols are displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L.

When the decorative pattern change effect (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state as it gradually increases its speed from a slow speed, changing at high speed. This allows the background image located behind the decorative pattern to be seen through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changing from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, and appears temporarily stopped, or stopped (temporarily stopped, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R currently changing as the first special symbol is consumed are displayed in the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area is provided for the first special symbol hold in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed in four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), allowing a maximum of four hold icons to be stored. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icons are displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one hold icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. For the sake of convenience, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol change presentation (change display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the top center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, at the top center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, and are therefore difficult to distinguish from the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, these numbers are positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with the other images displayed behind them, so visibility is not obstructed by the other images.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icons are further set with increasing expectations of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the decorative pattern change effect (change display) begins in Figure 91(A), five component images PT1-PT5 of a sword image KG, modeled after a sword component 65, are displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, respectively, as shown in Figure 91(B). The five component images PT1-PT5 are silver-based. At this time, the change icon 9C changes from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, while the change display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a. By displaying only the change icon 9C that has become a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, the change icon 9C can be clearly highlighted. In this case, the variable icon 9C is placed at the frontmost position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so that its visibility is not obstructed by other images.

As described above, the sword member 65 is an operating part shaped like a sword, which the player can press downward during effects that are executed as the game progresses. For this reason, the sword member 65 is a movable part that the player can press downward in its entirety. A sword button (not shown) is provided at the top end of the sword member 65, i.e., the end of the sword handle. This sword button is an operating part that is operated (pressed) by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses.

Of the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG, component image PT1 enters the left sub-display screen 64L from the left and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7; component image PT2 enters the right sub-display screen 64R from the right and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7; component image PT3 enters the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the lower right and moves toward the center; component image PT4 enters the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the upper left and moves toward the center; and component image PT5 enters the left sub-display screen 64L from the left and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Then, as shown in FIG. 91(C), the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are arranged such that component image PT1 is positioned toward the lower center of each of the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R. Component image PT2 is positioned toward the upper center of each of the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R. Component image PT3 is positioned toward the center of the bottom edge of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is ultimately displayed directly on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 without passing through the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R. Component image PT4 is positioned toward the center of the top edge of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is ultimately displayed directly on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, without passing through the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R. The part image PT5 is positioned in the center of the left sub-display screen 64L, and is ultimately displayed directly on the left sub-display screen 64L without extending beyond the left sub-display screen 64L onto the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 or the right sub-display screen 64R. At this time, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C remains displayed.

Component image PT1 rotates three-dimensionally and is positioned toward the lower center of each display screen, spanning the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R. Component image PT2 also rotates three-dimensionally and is positioned toward the upper center of each display screen, spanning the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R. Component images PT1 to PT5 are moved so as not to interfere with each other.

Then, when the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are moved to the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the sword image KG is assembled in a lying state as shown in Figure 91 (D). The assembled sword image KG is silver in color because the five component images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver, and the handle has a smooth surface. When the sword image KG is assembled, the component images PT1 to PT5 shown in Figures 91 (B) and (C) become smaller in size, and the assembled sword image KG is smaller than the component images PT1 to PT5 shown in Figures 91 (B) and (C). At this time, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C remains displayed.

Next, as shown in Figures 91(E) and (F), the end of the handle of the sword image KG lying on its side is rotated clockwise so that it faces upward, and then the entire sword image KG is further reduced in size and placed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C remains displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 91(G), the sword image KG is enlarged and the entire sword image KG is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, in order to disassemble the assembled sword image KG, the previous steps are retraceable one by one, as shown in Figure 91(F) → Figure 91(E) → Figure 91(D) → Figure 91(C) (Figure 91(H)) (Figure 91(H) is the same as Figure 91(C)), and component images PT1 to PT5 appear. Even when the steps are retraceable one by one in this manner, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C remains displayed.

Then, to assemble the sword image KG from the component images PT1 to PT5 again, the previous steps are repeated one by one, proceeding from FIG. 91(C) (FIG. 91(H)) → FIG. 91(D) → FIG. 91(E) → FIG. 91(F). Next, as shown in FIG. 91(I), the sword image KG is again enlarged and the entire sword image KG is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Even as the steps proceed one by one in this manner, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C remains displayed. The color and handle shape of the sword image KG displayed in FIG. 91(G) are silver because the five component images PT1 to PT5 are primarily silver, and the handle shape has a smooth surface. In contrast, the color and handle shape of the sword image KG displayed in Figure 91(I) change from silver to gold, and the handle shape changes from a smooth surface to an uneven shape wrapped in rope. In other words, the color and handle shape of the sword image KG displayed in Figure 91(G) are different from the color and handle shape of the sword image KG displayed in Figure 91(I). This clearly emphasizes and suggests that expectations for a jackpot have increased.

In Figure 91 (I), a message MG urging the player to push the entire sword 65 downward (push in) is displayed near the top of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The message MG is split into two characters, "push" and "fill in," with the two characters "push" placed to the left of the sword image KG without covering it, and the two characters "fill in" placed to the right of the sword image KG without covering it. By arranging the message in this manner, the message urging the player to "push in," urging the player to push the entire sword 65 downward (push in), can be clearly emphasized to the player without being obstructed by the sword image KG's visibility, and further, the sword image KG, which resembles the sword 65 being operated, can be clearly emphasized to the player without being obstructed by the message MG.

An indicator image IG indicating the period during which an operation to push the entire sword member 65 downward (a push) is accepted (hereinafter referred to as the "operation acceptance period") is displayed near the bottom edge of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, covering a portion of the sword image KG (specifically, a portion of the sword handle). By arranging it in this manner, the indicator image IG is not obstructed by the sword image KG, and the operation acceptance period can be clearly and emphatically communicated to the player.

When the player performs an operation to push the entire sword member 65 downward (push), or when the operation acceptance period has elapsed without the player performing an operation to push the entire sword member 65 downward (push), as shown in Figure 91 (J), the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 while emitting a flash of light FH. At this time, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 91 (K), a battle presentation begins. In this presentation, two characters (ally character CRA and enemy character CRB) fight, creating a high expectation of a big win. During the battle presentation, the variable display position 9Cd, reserved display position 9Ad, variable icon 9C, and reserved icon 9A remain hidden from the display screen 7a.

When ally character CRA wins and enemy character CRB loses, the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as the same pattern, resulting in a jackpot and subsequent jackpot game (jackpot effect). On the other hand, when ally character CRA loses and enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed as the same pattern, resulting in a miss. Once the battle effect ends and a jackpot or miss is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, reserved display position 9Ad, and reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is no longer displayed due to the end of the variable display. Next, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and a variable display (variable display) using the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R begins.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of assembling parts.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the part assembly presentation A of FIG. 89, the part assembly presentation B of FIG. 90, and the part assembly presentation C of FIG. 91, the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L (including a plurality of display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L (a plurality of display means) include the image display device 7 (main display means) and one or more right sub-display screens 64R and left sub-display screens 64L (sub-display means) excluding the image display device 7 (main display means), and a first presentation (in the part assembly presentation A shown in FIG. 8 9(B), (C), for part assembly presentation B, Fig. 90(B), (C), for part assembly presentation C, Fig. 91(B), (C)), and after the first presentation, a second presentation can be executed in which part images PT1 to PT5 (parts) are assembled on the image display device 7 (main display means) to complete a sword image KG (operation means image) (Fig. 89(D) for part assembly presentation A, Fig. 90(D) for part assembly presentation B, Fig. 91(D) for part assembly presentation C. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with an unprecedented and innovative presentation in which part images PT1 to PT5 (parts) of the sword image KG (operation means image) that imitates the sword component 65 (operation means) are assembled to form the sword image KG (operation means image) using the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L (multiple display means). This can increase the player's interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effects of the part assembly effect A of Fig. 89, the part assembly effect B of Fig. 90, and the part assembly effect C of Fig. 91, part of the part images PT1 to PT5 (parts) displayed on the image display device 7 (main display means) are displayed so as to extend beyond the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L (sub-display means). With this configuration, the part images PT1 to PT5 (parts) can be displayed large using the image display device 7 (main display means) and the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L (sub-display means), which contributes to clearly and emphatically conveying to the player what parts the sword member 65 is actually made up of.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effects of the part assembly effect A of Fig. 89, the part assembly effect B of Fig. 90, and the part assembly effect C of Fig. 91, there are part images PT4 and PT5 (parts) that are displayed directly on the image display device 7 (main display means) without going through the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L (sub-display means). According to this configuration, among the part images PT1 to PT5 (parts), some are displayed on the image display device 7 (main display means) via the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L (sub-display means), and others are displayed directly on the image display device 7 (main display means) without going through the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L (sub-display means), so that the direction in which the part images PT1 to PT5 (parts) enter the image display device 7 (main display means) can be varied. In other words, the various effects produced by the component images PT1 to PT5 (components) can be emphasized to the player by using the image display device 7 (main display means), the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L (sub-display means).

[Effect 4]
89, part assembly presentation B of Fig. 90, and part assembly presentation C of Fig. 91, when the sword image KG (operation means image) that resembles the sword 65 (operation means) is completed, the sword image KG (operation means image) is displayed in a larger size, and a message MG (operation prompt image) that prompts the player to operate the sword 65 (operation means) is displayed. According to this configuration, the sword image KG (operation means image) is displayed in a larger size, in other words, the sword image KG (operation means image) is displayed in an enlarged size, and a message MG (operation prompt image) that prompts the player to operate the sword 65 (operation means) is displayed. This makes it possible to clearly inform the player of the start time for operating the sword 65 (operation means) and to emphasize to the player what action the player will be about to perform.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second presentation of the part assembly presentation A in Fig. 89, the part assembly presentation B in Fig. 90, and the part assembly presentation C in Fig. 91, when the sword member 65 (operation means) is operated, the sword image KG (operation means image) disappears. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the operation of the sword member 65 (operation means) has been accepted.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second presentation of the part assembly presentation A in Fig. 89, the part assembly presentation B in Fig. 90, and the part assembly presentation C in Fig. 91, an indicator image IG (acceptance period image) indicating the period during which operation of the sword member 65 (operation means) is accepted is displayed. With this configuration, the player can grasp the remaining time during which operation of the sword member 65 (operation means) is accepted, and can therefore calmly operate the sword member 65 (operation means) at his or her own timing.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second presentation of the part assembly presentation A in Fig. 89, the display mode can be such that the end (part including the sword button KBG) of the sword handle of the sword image KG (operation means image) is illuminated. This configuration can contribute to making it easier for the player to recognize which part of the sword component 65 (operation means) that the player wants to operate, which is modeled after the sword image KG (operation means image).

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of specific area variable effects are shown.
[Modification 1]
The part assembly presentation A in Fig. 89, the part assembly presentation B in Fig. 90, and the part assembly presentation C in Fig. 91 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, they are performed in a game state known as a left-handed hit. However, they may also be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21. In other words, they may also be performed in a game state known as a right-handed hit.

[Modification 2]
In the part assembly presentation A of FIG. 89 , part assembly presentation B of FIG. 90 , and part assembly presentation C of FIG. 91 , a sword image KG resembling a sword component 65 is assembled using part images PT1 to PT5. However, instead of the sword component 65, a decorative pattern may be assembled from multiple images. For example, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed as the same symbol (e.g., the number "7") and the middle decorative pattern 8C is in a variable display (variable display), forming a reach, multiple fragment images may be gathered from all directions toward the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 using the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L (multiple display means) to assemble the middle decorative pattern 8C. Finally, the assembled middle decorative pattern 8C may confirm and display a jackpot or a loss. In this case, the color of the intermediate decorative pattern 8C may be changed (for example, to red or rainbow) while the intermediate decorative pattern 8C is being assembled to indicate to the player the likelihood of a big win.

[Modification 3]
In the part assembly presentation A of FIG. 89, part assembly presentation B of FIG. 90, and part assembly presentation C of FIG. 91, a sword image KG resembling a sword 65 is assembled using part images PT1 to PT5. However, other parts placed on the game board 2 or front frame 53 may be used instead of the sword 65. For example, images resembling the first movable role element 14, the second movable role element 15, and other movable role elements placed on the game board 2 may be assembled from part images, or an image resembling the handle 60 placed on the front frame 53 may be assembled from part images. This increases the variety of presentations. Furthermore, multiple parts to be assembled, such as the sword 65, the handle 60, the first movable role element 14, the second movable role element 15, and other movable role elements, may be prepared, and the expected probability of a jackpot may be preset for each. This helps players discover the relationship between the parts to be assembled and the expected probability of a jackpot.

[Modification 4]
In the part assembly presentation A of Fig. 89, the part assembly presentation B of Fig. 90, and the part assembly presentation C of Fig. 91, a sword image KG simulating a sword component 65 is assembled using part images PT1 to PT5, and then the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are statically displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the result of the winning/losing determination (big win or loss) is communicated to the player. However, when a part assembly presentation is performed in which the sword image KG simulating a sword component 65 is assembled using part images PT1 to PT5, a suggestion image (for example, a winged-man-shaped ally character is displayed to suggest a big win, and an enemy character is displayed to suggest a loss) that indicates the result of the winning/losing determination (big win or loss) to the player during or immediately after assembly may be displayed on one of the display screens of the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L. When a part assembly presentation is performed, the subsequent development of the presentation is of major interest to the player, so the appearance of suggestive images allows the player to predict how the presentation will unfold, and furthermore, can help the player to discover for himself the relationship and patterns between the part assembly presentation and the subsequent presentation.

[Modification 5]
In the part assembly presentation A of Figure 89, the part assembly presentation B of Figure 90, and the part assembly presentation C of Figure 91, a sword image KG resembling a sword component 65 is assembled using part images PT1 to PT5. However, instead of the sword component 65, a presentation button image resembling the presentation button 63 can be assembled using part images, or a lever image resembling a lever provided on the front frame 53 can be assembled using part images. This increases the variety of presentations. The lever provided on the front frame 53 may be a joystick or a rotary lever, which can be operated by the player during presentations that are executed as the game progresses.

[Modification 6]
In the part assembly presentation A of FIG. 89, the part assembly presentation B of FIG. 90, and the part assembly presentation C of FIG. 91, a sword image KG resembling a sword 65 is assembled using part images PT1 to PT5. However, an operation unit separate from the sword 65 may be displayed on the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R, or the left sub-display screen 64L. For example, a select button image resembling a select button 68 may be displayed on the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R, or the left sub-display screen 64L as an operation unit separate from the sword 65. Unlike the sword image KG resembling the sword 65, the select button image is not assembled using part images in the part assembly presentation. Rather, it informs the player that, for example, a change in presentation mode (e.g., to one of spring mode, summer mode, autumn mode, or winter mode) can be made (accepted) at the player's discretion. In other words, when the select button image is displayed, the presentation mode can be changed (accepted) at the player's discretion. The sword image KG imitating the sword 65 and the select button image imitating the select button 68 may be simultaneously displayed separately on one of the display screens of the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L, or may be displayed on the same display screen. As described above, among the swords 65 and select buttons 68 that the player can operate, there are swords 65 that are assembled using part images in the part assembly presentation and select buttons 68 that are not assembled using part images in the part assembly presentation. However, the operation of the swords 65 is not accepted unless the indicator image IG of Fig. 89(G) is displayed in part assembly presentation A, Fig. 90(G) in part assembly presentation B, or Fig. 91(I) in part assembly presentation C, even if the sword image KG is displayed, whereas the operation of the select button 68 is accepted when the select button image is displayed. Therefore, even if the swords 65 and the select buttons 68 as operation units happen to be displayed at the same time, the swords 65 and the select buttons 68 as operation units can be used differently in the presentations.

[Modification 7]
In the part assembly presentation B of Figures 90(B) to (G) and the part assembly presentation C of Figures 91(B) to (I), the variable icon 9C changes from a white spherical shape to a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C, which is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, for example, the star-shaped variable icon 9C may be displayed in an animated manner, shrinking and expanding up and down as if bouncing up and down, or may be displayed in an animated manner, spinning around. This can contribute to improving the presentation effect of the display mode of the variable icon 9C.

[Modification 8]
In the part assembly presentation B of Figures 90(B) to (G) and the part assembly presentation C of Figures 91(B) to (I), the variable icon 9C changes from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C, and is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the size of the variable icon 9C may be made a predetermined number of times (for example, about 5 to 8 times) larger than the size of the white spherical icon. In this way, the change in the variable icon 9C can be emphasized so that it is easy for the player to understand.

[Modification 9]
In the part assembly presentation A of FIG. 89, the part assembly presentation B of FIG. 90, and the part assembly presentation C of FIG. 91, the first special symbol reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, making them difficult to distinguish among the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a and intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, because the numbers are displayed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with other images positioned behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, visibility is not obstructed by other images. In this embodiment, once the part assembly presentation begins, the five part images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are moved to the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the sword image KG is assembled. As a result, there is a risk that the player will mistake the number (number of reserved balls) displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a for the total number of component images that make up the sword image KG. Therefore, instead of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a number representing the number of reserved balls may be displayed on one of the sub-display screens 64 (the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U, for example, the right sub-display screen 64R). This eliminates the risk that the player will mistake the number representing the number of reserved balls for the total number of component images that make up the sword image KG. Furthermore, the number representing the number of reserved balls can be easily distinguished from the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making it easier to understand intuitively.

[Modification 10]
Part assembly presentation A in Figure 89, part assembly presentation B in Figure 90, and part assembly presentation C in Figure 91 may not include some of the presentations described above, or other presentations may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
Mode B2-1
A gaming machine having a plurality of display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
The display means includes a main display means and one or more sub-display means other than the main display means,
a first effect in which a component of an image of an operation means that resembles an operation means that can be operated by a player moves from the sub-display means to the main display means;
After the first performance, a second performance can be executed in which the parts are assembled on the main display means to complete the operation means image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Mode B2-2
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
In the second effect, a part of the part displayed on the main display means is displayed so as to overflow onto the sub-display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Mode B2-3
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1 or B2-2,
In the first effect, the part is displayed directly on the main display means without going through the sub-display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Mode B2-4
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B2-1 to B2-3,
In the second effect, when the operation means image is completed, the size of the operation means image is displayed larger, and further, an operation prompting image for prompting the player to operate the operation means is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Mode B2-5
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-4,
In the second effect, when the operation means is operated, the operation means image disappears.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect B2-6
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-4 or B2-5,
In the second effect, an acceptance period image indicating a period during which operation of the operation means is accepted is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by

Aspect B2-7
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B2-4 to B2-6,
In the second effect, a part of the operation means image is displayed in a light-emitting manner.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The reach-time decorative pattern effects A to C are explained below using Figures 92 to 94. These reach-time decorative pattern effects can be executed during decorative pattern variation effects, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a reach-time decorative pattern effect, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L.

[Reach decorative pattern effect A]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the reach-time decorative symbol effect A. The reach-time decorative symbol effect is an effect in which, in a reach effect executed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a reach state, a symbol different from the reach symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L, and then the reach symbol of the decorative symbol changes to that symbol. First, as shown in FIG. 92(A), while nothing is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a reach state (here, a "2↓2" reach) on the display screen 7a. The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in Figure 92 (B), symbol 8M frames in from the top of the display screen 7a and moves downward. Symbol 8M is a number (here, "6") that is different from the reach symbols (here, "2") of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. As shown in Figures 92 (C) and (D), after framing in, symbol 8M is enlarged and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in Figure 92 (E), the symbol 8M moves leftward and stops while straddling the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a. At this time, the left side of the symbol 8M is displayed outside the left sub-display screen 64L. After that, the symbol 8M moves rightward, returns inside the display screen 7a, and then moves further rightward, and as shown in Figure 92 (F), stops while straddling the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. At this time, the right side of the symbol 8M is displayed outside the right sub-display screen 64R. After that, as shown in Figure 92 (G), the symbol 8M disappears (is not displayed) from the three screens: the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a. The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R continue to be displayed in the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in Figure 92 (H), the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R of the reach pattern move toward the center of the display screen 7a. Then, as shown in Figure 92 (I), the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R switch (are changed) to the same number as pattern 8M (here, "6"). Then, as shown in Figure 92 (J), the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R, which have entered the reach state with the switched number, move toward the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a and stop there. After that, a predetermined reach effect is executed, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped symbols indicating either a win or a loss.

[Reach decorative pattern effect B]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the reach-time decorative symbol effect B. The reach-time decorative symbol effect is an effect in which, in a reach effect executed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a reach state, a symbol different from the reach symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L, and then the reach symbol of the decorative symbol changes to that symbol. First, as shown in FIG. 93(A), while nothing is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a reach state (here, a "2↓2" reach) on the display screen 7a. The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in Figure 93 (B), multiple symbols 8M appear in the frame from the right side of the right sub-display screen 64R and move leftward. The symbols 8M are numbers (here, "6") different from the reach symbols (here, "2") of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The multiple symbols 8M include symbols 8M that move not only leftward but also upward and downward, and move radially from the right sub-display screen 64R toward the display screen 7a. When the symbols 8M move from the right sub-display screen 64R to the display screen 7a, they are temporarily displayed straddling both the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. The symbols 8M also move while diffusing leftward, upward and downward on the display screen 7a.

Then, as shown in Figure 93 (C), the pattern 8M moves further from the display screen 7a toward the left sub-display screen 64L while diffusing. When the pattern 8M moves from the display screen 7a to the left sub-display screen 64L, it is temporarily displayed straddling both the display screen 7a and the left sub-display screen 64L. Furthermore, some of the patterns 8M temporarily overlap the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R while moving. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the foreground. The pattern 8M gradually increases in size as it moves (it is displayed enlarged as it moves).

After that, as shown in Figure 93 (D), all of the multiple symbols 8M move out of the frame of the three screens - the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a - and disappear (are not displayed) from all three screens. The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R continue to be displayed in the upper left and upper right corners of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in Figure 93 (E), multiple symbols 8M frame in from below the display screen 7a and move upward. The symbols 8M are numbers (here, "6") that are different from the reach symbols (here, "2") of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The multiple symbols 8M include symbols 8M that move not only upward, but also to the upper right and upper left, and move not only upward on the display screen 7a, but also radially toward the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L.

As shown in Figure 93 (F), when the pattern 8M moves from the display screen 7a to the right sub-display screen 64R, it is temporarily displayed straddling both the display screen 7a and the right sub-display screen 64R. When the pattern 8M moves from the display screen 7a to the left sub-display screen 64L, it is temporarily displayed straddling both the display screen 7a and the left sub-display screen 64L. In addition, some of the patterns 8M temporarily overlap the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R while moving. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the foreground. The pattern 8M gradually increases in size as it moves (it is enlarged as it moves).

After that, as shown in Figure 93 (G), all of the multiple symbols 8M move and frame out of the three screens: the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a. They then disappear (are no longer displayed) from the three screens. The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R continue to be displayed in the upper left and upper right corners of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in Figure 93(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the reach pattern move toward the center of the display screen 7a while rotating horizontally in three dimensions. Then, as shown in Figure 93(I), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R stop in the center of the display screen 7a in a state where their left and right sides are reversed. Then, as shown in Figure 93(J), they switch (are changed) to a pattern with the same number as the pattern 8M (here, "6"). Then, as shown in Figure 92(J) of the reach-time decorative pattern effect A, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which have entered the reach state with the switched number, move toward the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a and stop there. Then, a predetermined reach effect is executed, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped symbols indicating either a win or a loss.

[Reach decorative pattern effect C]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the ready-to-win decorative pattern effect C. The ready-to-win decorative pattern effect is an effect in which, in a ready-to-win effect executed when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a ready-to-win state, a pattern different from the ready-to-win pattern is displayed on the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L, and then the ready-to-win decorative pattern changes to that pattern. First, as shown in FIG. 93(A) of the ready-to-win decorative pattern effect A, while nothing is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a ready-to-win state (here, a "2↓2" ready-to-win) on the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in Figure 94 (A), symbol 8M frames in from the top of the display screen 7a and moves downward. Symbol 8M is a number (here, "6") different from the reach symbols (here, "2") of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

As shown in Figures 94(B)-(C), after the symbol 8M is framed in, it is enlarged and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result of this enlargement, the left side of the symbol 8M straddles the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right side of the symbol 8M straddles the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 94(C). Furthermore, the symbol 8M is enlarged and overlaps the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the foreground.

After that, as shown in Figure 94 (D), the symbol 8M is enlarged to a certain extent and then disappears (is not displayed) from the three screens: the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a. The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R continue to be displayed in the upper left and upper right corners of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in Figure 94 (E), multiple symbols 8M frame in from above the display screen 7a and move downward. The symbols 8M are numbers (here, "6") that are different from the reach symbols (here, "2") of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The multiple symbols 8M include symbols 8M that move not only downward, but also to the lower right and lower left, and move not only downward on the display screen 7a, but also radially toward the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L.

As shown in Figure 94 (F), when the pattern 8M moves from the display screen 7a to the right sub-display screen 64R, it is temporarily displayed straddling both the display screen 7a and the right sub-display screen 64R. Also, when the pattern 8M moves from the display screen 7a to the left sub-display screen 64L, it is temporarily displayed straddling both the display screen 7a and the left sub-display screen 64L. The pattern 8M gradually increases in size as it moves (it is enlarged as it moves).

After that, as shown in Figure 94 (G), all of the multiple symbols 8M move out of the frame of the three screens: the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a. They then disappear (are no longer displayed) from the three screens. The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R continue to be displayed in the upper left and upper right corners of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in Figure 94(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the reach pattern move toward the center of the display screen 7a. Then, as shown in Figure 94(I), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R switch (are changed) to the same number as pattern 8M (here, "6"). Then, as shown in Figure 94(J), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which have entered the reach state with the switched number, move toward the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a and stop there. After that, a predetermined reach effect is executed, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped symbols indicating either a win or a loss.

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the decorative pattern effects that occur when a win is reached.
[Effect 1]
92 to 94, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment can execute the following effects on the display screen 7a: when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a first symbol (e.g., a "2") in a ready-to-win state, a second symbol (e.g., a symbol 8M representing a "6") different from the first symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a; after the first effect, a second symbol is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R; and after the second effect, the decorative symbol in the ready-to-win state is changed from the first symbol to the second symbol. This configuration allows for unprecedented and innovative effects that can visually entertain players and enhance their interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the second effect, the second symbol (symbol 8M) is also displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in Figures 92 to 94. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained by an unprecedented and novel effect, thereby increasing the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 92 to 94, in the first effect, the second symbol (symbol 8M) gradually becomes larger after being displayed on the display screen 7a. This configuration allows for a novel effect that has never been seen before to visually entertain the player and increase their interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the first effect, a plurality of second symbols (symbol 8M) are displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in Figures 93 and 94. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained by an unprecedented and novel effect, thereby increasing the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, some of the second symbols (symbol 8M) are displayed overlapping the decorative symbols in the ready state, as shown in Figures 93 and 94. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained by an unprecedented and innovative presentation, thereby increasing the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the second effect, the second symbol (symbol 8M) is also displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L, as shown in Figures 92 to 94. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained by an unprecedented and novel effect, thereby increasing the player's interest.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of decorative pattern presentations when a win occurs are shown.
[Modification 1]
The reach-time decorative pattern effects A to C may be combined as appropriate. For example, in the reach-time decorative pattern effect C, the effects of Figures 92(B) to (G) of the reach-time decorative pattern effect A may be executed instead of the effects of Figures 94(A) to (D). Also, in the reach-time decorative pattern effect A, the effects of Figures 93(H) to (J) of the reach-time decorative pattern effect B may be executed instead of the effects of Figures 92(H) to (J).

[Modification 2]
The aspect of the pattern 8M may be the same as or different from the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, where the aspect refers to the shape, font, color, size, and the like.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
◇[Aspect C1-1]
a first display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
a second display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative design;
a first effect in which, when the decorative symbol is a first symbol and in a ready state, a second symbol different from the first symbol is displayed on the first display means;
a second effect in which the second symbol is displayed on the second display means after the first effect;
and a third effect in which the decorative symbol in a ready-to-win state is changed from the first symbol to the second symbol after the second effect.
◇[Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1,
In the second effect, the second symbol is also displayed on the first display means.
◇[Aspect C1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1 or C1-2,
In the first effect, the second symbol gradually becomes larger after being displayed on the first display means.
◇[Aspect C1-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-3,
In the first effect, a plurality of the second symbols are displayed on the first display means.
◇[Aspect C1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-4,
A gaming machine characterized in that some of the plurality of second symbols are displayed overlapping the decorative symbols in a ready state.
◇[Aspect C1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspects C1-1 to C1-5 further comprises:
a third display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
In the second effect, the second symbol is also displayed on the third display means.

The following explains group promotion effects A to C using Figures 95 to 97. These group promotion effects can be executed during the effect symbol variation effect. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a group promotion effect, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Group Promotion A]
Figure 95 is a diagram for explaining group promotion effect A.
First, as shown in Figure 95 (A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols start to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reserved and the corresponding changing image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 95 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both temporarily stop at "4". In addition, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reservation and the corresponding variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 95 (C), the group effect (first half) is executed. In the group effect (first half), button images BGS that resemble effect buttons 63 appear from the right side of the display screen 7a. The button images BGS form a group and move to the left as indicated by arrow YG. At this time, the effect patterns 8L and 8R that form the reach are displayed at the top left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 95 (D), the group effect (middle stage) is executed. In the group effect (middle stage), the button image BGS moves across the center of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the button image BGS moves to the left as indicated by the arrow YG. At this time, the effect patterns 8L and 8R that have formed a reach are also displayed at the top left and right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 95 (E), the group effect (later stage) is executed. In the group effect (later stage), the button image BGS moves along the left side of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the button image BGS moves to the left as indicated by the arrow YG and disappears off the screen. At this time, the effect patterns 8L and 8R that have formed a reach are still displayed at the top left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 95 (F), a symbol effect is executed. In symbol effect, the symbol may be upgraded. Here, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are upgraded from "4" to "7." These effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed at the top left and right sides of the display screen 7a. If a "7" symbol is hit, a jackpot game will be played, and a transition to a high probability, high base state will be confirmed.

Next, as shown in Figure 95 (G), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. In the battle effect, a win is achieved when the ally character CRA wins.
Next, as shown in FIG. 95(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (win), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a winning manner. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all shown fixed and stopped at "7". In the case of a miss, for example, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are fixed and stopped at "7", and the center effect symbol 8C is fixed and stopped at "8".

[Group Promotion Performance B]
Figure 96 is a diagram for explaining group promotion effect B.
First, as shown in Figure 96 (A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved and the corresponding changing image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 96 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both shown temporarily stopping at "4". In addition, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reservation and the corresponding variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 96 (C), the group effect (first half) is executed. In the group effect (first half), button images BGS that resemble effect buttons 63 appear from the right side of the display screen 7a. The button images BGS form a group and move to the left as indicated by arrow YG. At this time, the effect patterns 8L and 8R that form a reach are displayed at the top left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 96 (D), the group effect (middle stage) is executed. In the group effect (middle stage), the button image BGS moves across the center of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the button image BGS moves to the left as indicated by the arrow YG. At this time, the effect patterns 8L and 8R that have formed a reach are also displayed at the top left and right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 96 (E), the group effect (later stage) is executed. In the group effect (later stage), the button image BGS moves along the left side of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the button image BGS moves to the left as indicated by the arrow YG and disappears off the screen. At this time, the effect patterns 8L and 8R that have formed a reach are still displayed at the top left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 96 (F), a symbol effect is executed. In symbol effect, the symbol may be upgraded. In this case, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R remain at "4" and have not been upgraded. These effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed at the top left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 96 (G), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. In the battle effect, a win is achieved when the ally character CRA wins.
Next, as shown in Figure 96 (H), a fixed stop effect (miss) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (miss), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a miss mode. Here, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are fixed and stopped at "4", and the center effect symbol 8C is fixed and stopped at "3". In addition, in the case of a win, for example, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all fixed and stopped at "4".

[Group Promotion Performance C]
Figure 97 is a diagram for explaining group promotion effect C.
First, as shown in Figure 97 (A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols start to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reserved and the corresponding changing image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 97 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both temporarily stop at "4". In addition, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reservation and the corresponding variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 97 (C), the group effect (first half) is executed. In the group effect (first half), a 7 symbol image ZGS resembling a "7" symbol appears from the right side of the display screen 7a. The 7 symbol images ZGS form a group and move to the left as indicated by the arrow YG. At this time, the effect symbols 8L and 8R that form the reach are displayed at the top left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 97 (D), a group effect (middle stage) is executed. In the group effect (middle stage), the 7 symbol image ZGS moves across the center of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the 7 symbol image ZGS moves to the left as indicated by the arrow YG. At this time, the effect symbols 8L and 8R that have formed a reach are displayed at the top left and right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 97 (E), the group effect (later stage) is executed. In the group effect (later stage), the 7 symbol image ZGS moves along the left side of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the 7 symbol image ZGS moves to the left as indicated by the arrow YG and disappears off the screen. At this time, the effect symbols 8L and 8R that have formed a reach are still displayed at the top left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 97 (F), a symbol effect is executed. In symbol effect, the symbol may be upgraded. Here, the left and right symbols 8L and 8R are upgraded from "4" to "7." These symbols 8L and 8R are displayed at the top left and right of the display screen 7a. If a "7" symbol is selected, a jackpot game will be triggered, and a transition to a high-probability, high-base state will be confirmed.

Next, as shown in Figure 97 (G), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. In the battle effect, a win is achieved when the ally character CRA wins.
Next, as shown in FIG. 97(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (win), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a winning manner. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all shown fixed and stopped at "7". In the case of a miss, for example, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are fixed and stopped at "7", and the center effect symbol 8C is fixed and stopped at "8".

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of group promotion.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to execute group effects (early stage), group effects (middle stage), and group effects (late stage) (FIGS. 95(C)(D)(E), 96(C)(D)(E), 97(C)(D)(E)). This triggers the execution of a symbol effect that can upgrade the symbol (FIGS. 95(F), 96(F), 97(F)). With this configuration, it is possible to expect the symbol to be upgraded in response to the group effect, which can increase the interest in the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the symbol effects promote the effect symbols 8L and 8R that are temporarily stopped in a reach state by the reach formation effect (FIG. 95(B), FIG. 97(B)) (FIG. 95(F), FIG. 97(F)). According to this configuration, since there is hope for the promotion of the effect symbols after the reach, the interest in the game can be increased.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a group effect in which a 7 symbol image ZGS imitating a "7" symbol moves across the display screen 7a from right to left (FIG. 97(C)(D)(E)), causes the effect symbols 8L and 8R to be promoted from "4" to "7" (FIG. 97(F)). This configuration creates a relationship between the group effect and the promotion of the symbols, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are upgraded from "4" to "7" (Fig. 95(F), Fig. 97(F)). If a "7" symbol is hit, a jackpot game is triggered, and a transition to a high probability, high base state is confirmed. This configuration increases expectations for the upgrade of the effect symbols, making the game more enjoyable.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the group presentation (FIGS. 95(C)(D)(E), 96(C)(D)(E), 97(C)(D)(E)), the presentation symbols 8L and 8R may be promoted from "4" to "7" in the symbol presentation (FIGS. 95(F), 97(F)), or the presentation symbols 8L and 8R may remain at "4" without being promoted (FIG. 96(F)). This configuration can keep the player on the edge of their seats, increasing the excitement of the game.

[Modification]
Below are some variations of the group promotion effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the effect symbols 8L and 8R that have become reach states due to reach formation effects (FIGS. 95(B), 96(B), and 97(B)) are promoted. In contrast, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have temporarily stopped in a winning state may be promoted in response to a group effect.

[Modification 2]
In the above, in the group effects (Fig. 95(C)(D)(E), Fig. 96(C)(D)(E), Fig. 97(C)(D)(E)), the effect symbols 8L and 8R were displayed at the top of the left and right sides of the display screen 7a. In contrast, in the group effects, the effect symbols 8L and 8R may be temporarily hidden. Also, in the group effects, the button image BGS or the 7-symbol image ZGS may be made to cover the effect symbols 8L and 8R.

[Modification 3]
The above example shows the effect of the first special chart reserved, but it may also be the effect of the second special chart reserved.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect C2-1]
A gaming machine,
It is possible to execute a group movement effect in which specific images move in a group, and it is possible to execute a promotion effect in which the pattern is promoted to a more advantageous pattern, using the group movement effect as an opportunity.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1,
The promotion effect is an effect of promoting the effect pattern that has been temporarily stopped in a reach form in the reach formation effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1 or C2-2,
The promotion effect is an effect of promoting a temporary stopped effect pattern in a winning state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-3,
The specific image is an image related to the advantageous symbol after promotion in the promotion effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-4,
The advantageous symbol after being promoted in the promotion effect is a symbol that suggests a transition to a specific game state through a special game in which a game ball can be acquired.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-5,
When the group performance is executed, the promotion performance may be executed, or the promotion performance may not be executed even if the group performance is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The following explains the stop decorative pattern appearance effects A to C using Figures 98 to 100. These stop decorative pattern appearance effects can be executed during decorative pattern variation effects, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the stop decorative pattern appearance effect, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L.

[Stop decoration pattern appearance effect A]
FIG. 98 is a diagram illustrating the stop decorative pattern appearance effect A. The stop decorative pattern appearance effect is an effect in which, after the special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stopped state in a winning mode without displaying the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. First, after the special symbol begins to change (after the special symbol lottery begins), as shown in FIG. 98(A), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L continue to display no display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. That is, even after the special symbol display 41 (FIG. 2) begins to display (change) the special symbol (identification information), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L continue to display no display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

After a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the variation, as shown in Figures 98(B)-(D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed as stopped in the winning state (here, "777") fade in on the display screen 7a. In other words, the images of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually become darker and gradually become visible. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R remain stationary. In this way, in this variation, after the special symbol begins to vary, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed as stopped in the winning state are displayed without any display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

After the fade-in effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is completed and the image is displayed at normal density, an enlarged display effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is executed, as shown in Figure 98 (E). At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed across the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed across the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. After that, the special symbol variation ends, and the special jackpot symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol.

Figures 98 (F) to (J) show another example of stop decorative pattern appearance effect A. After the special pattern different from those shown in Figures 98 (A) to (E) begins to change (after the special pattern lottery begins), as shown in Figure 98 (F), the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R remains unchanged on the display screen 7a, right sub-display screen 64R, and left sub-display screen 64L.

After a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the variation, as shown in Figures 98 (G) to (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in a stopped state in the winning state (here, "777") fade in in order on the display screen 7a. Here, the images of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R gradually become darker in order, and an effect is executed in which they become gradually more visible in order from left to right. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R remain stationary. In this way, in this effect, after the special symbol begins to vary, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in a stopped state in the winning state are displayed without any display of the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

After the fade-in effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is completed and the image is displayed at normal density, an enlarged display effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is executed, as shown in Figure 98 (E) above. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed across the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed across the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. After that, the special symbol variation ends, and the special jackpot symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol.

[Stop decoration pattern appearance effect B]
FIG. 99 is a diagram illustrating the stop decorative pattern appearance effect B. The stop decorative pattern appearance effect is an effect in which, after the special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stopped state in a winning mode without displaying the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. First, after the special symbol begins to change (after the special symbol lottery begins), as shown in FIG. 99(A), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L continue to display no display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. That is, even after the special symbol display 41 (FIG. 2) begins to display (change) the special symbol (identification information), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L continue to display no display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

After a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the variation, as shown in Figures 99(B)-(D), portions of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed as stopped in the winning state (here, "777") are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the display range gradually expands until the entire pattern is finally displayed. Here, portions of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed inside a rectangular frame image WG, and as the inside of the frame image WG gradually expands vertically, an effect is executed in which the visible area of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R expands. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stationary. In this way, in this effect, after the special symbol begins to vary, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed as stopped in the winning state are displayed without any display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R changing.

After the above effect of gradually expanding the range of the visible portions of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is completed and the entire decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed, an enlarged display effect of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is executed, as shown in Figure 99 (E). At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed across the left sub-display screen 64L and display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed across the right sub-display screen 64R and display screen 7a. After that, the special pattern variation ends and the special jackpot pattern is displayed.

Figures 99(F) to (J) show another example of stop decorative pattern appearance effect B. After the special pattern different from those shown in Figures 99(A) to (E) begins to change (after the special pattern lottery begins), as shown in Figure 99(F), the changing display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R continues to be hidden on the display screen 7a, right sub-display screen 64R, and left sub-display screen 64L.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, as shown in Figures 99(G)-(J), a portion of the center decorative pattern 8C, one of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed on the display screen 7a in the winning pattern (here, "777"), is displayed. The display area gradually expands until the entire decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are finally displayed. Here, a portion of the center decorative pattern 8C is displayed inside a rectangular frame image WG, and the inside of the frame image WG gradually expands left and right, thereby creating an effect in which the visible area of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R expands. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stationary. In Figure 99(H), the visible portion of the left decorative pattern 8L and the visible portion of the right decorative pattern 8R are different from each other. That is, in Figure 99(H), different portions of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed. In this effect, after the special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed as they change, but are displayed as stopped decorative symbols in a winning state.

After the above effect in which the visible range of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually expands is completed and the entire decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed, an enlarged display effect is executed in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R extend beyond the frame image WG, as shown in Figure 99 (J). At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed across the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed across the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. After that, the special symbol variation ends, and the special jackpot symbol is displayed as it stops.

[Stop decoration pattern appearance effect C]
FIG. 100 is a diagram illustrating the stop decorative pattern appearance effect C. The stop decorative pattern appearance effect is an effect in which, after the special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stopped state in a winning mode without displaying the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. First, after the special symbol begins to change (after the special symbol lottery begins), as shown in FIG. 100(A), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L continue to display no display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. That is, even after the special symbol display 41 (FIG. 2) begins to display (change) the special symbol (identification information), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L continue to display no display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

After a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the variation, as shown in Figures 100(B)-(D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a in the winning state (here, "777") fade in, first partially displayed, then gradually expanding until the entire display area is finally displayed. Here, portions of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed inside a rectangular frame image WG, and as the inside of the frame image WG gradually expands vertically, the visible area of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R expands. This is combined with the effect of the images of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually becoming darker and gradually becoming more visible. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stationary. In this way, in this effect, after the special symbol begins to vary, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as they were in the winning state without any display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R changing.

After the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fade in and gradually expand the visible area, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in their entirety at normal density, an enlarged display effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is executed, as shown in Figure 100(E). At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed across the left sub-display screen 64L and display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed across the right sub-display screen 64R and display screen 7a. The special symbol variation then ends, and the jackpot special symbol is displayed as it stops.

Figures 100 (F) to (J) show another example of stop decorative pattern appearance effect C. After the special pattern different from those shown in Figures 100 (A) to (E) begins to change (after the special pattern lottery begins), as shown in Figure 100 (F), the changing display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R continues to be hidden on the display screen 7a, right sub-display screen 64R, and left sub-display screen 64L.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, as shown in Figures 100(G)-(J), a portion of the middle decorative pattern 8C, one of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed on the display screen 7a in the winning pattern (here, "777"), fades in and gradually expands until the entire decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. Here, a portion of the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed inside a rectangular frame image WG, and the inside of the frame image WG gradually expands left and right, expanding the visible area of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. This is combined with an effect in which the images of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually become darker and gradually become visible. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stationary. In Figure 100(H), the visible portion of the left decorative pattern 8L and the visible portion of the right decorative pattern 8R are in different states. That is, in Figure 100 (H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R display different parts of the decorative pattern. In this effect, after the special pattern begins to change, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed as they change, and instead the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped in a winning state.

After the above effect in which the visible range of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually expands is completed and the entire decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed, an enlarged display effect is executed in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R extend beyond the frame image WG, as shown in Figure 100 (J). At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed across the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed across the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. The special symbol variation then ends, and the special jackpot symbol is displayed as it stops.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the stop decorative pattern appearance.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 98 to 100, after the start of the variation, the first effect can be executed in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped symbols in a winning state without being displayed as a varying symbol of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained by an unprecedented and innovative effect, thereby increasing the player's interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 98 and 100, in the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed in a winning state are displayed by fading in. According to this configuration, a novel effect not seen in the past can visually entertain the player and increase the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 99 and 100, in the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed in a winning state are partially displayed and then the entirety is displayed. With this configuration, a novel effect that has never been seen before can be visually entertaining to the player, and the interest can be enhanced.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 99(H) and 100(H), in the first effect, when a part of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in a winning state is displayed, the part displayed in one of the multiple symbols included in the decorative symbols is different from the part displayed in another symbol. With this configuration, a novel effect not seen in the past can visually entertain the player and increase the interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 98 to 100, in the first effect, after the start of the variation, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed until the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed in a winning state are displayed. With this configuration, a novel effect that has not been seen in the past can visually entertain the player and increase the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
98 to 100, in the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in a stopped state in a winning mode are enlarged and displayed across the display screen 7a and the right sub-display screen 64R, and across the display screen 7a and the left sub-display screen 64L. This configuration allows for a novel effect that has never been seen before to visually entertain the player and increase their interest.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the stop decorative pattern appearance performance are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the stopped decorative pattern appearance effects A to C, after the special pattern starts to change (after the special pattern lottery starts), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed until the stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. However, in the stopped decorative pattern appearance effects A to C, after the special pattern starts to change (after the special pattern lottery starts), until the stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in a form other than the changing display may be displayed. For example, after the special pattern starts to change (after the special pattern lottery starts), until the stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed, only the stopped decorative pattern 8L may be displayed.

[Modification 2]
In the stop decorative pattern appearance effects A to C, there is a period of time after the special chart starts to change (after the special chart lottery starts) until the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed are displayed. However, in the stop decorative pattern appearance effects A to C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed may be displayed immediately after the special chart starts to change.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
◇[Aspect C3-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative design;
The gaming machine is characterized in that after the start of variation, a first performance can be executed in which the decorative pattern displayed stopped in a winning state is displayed without displaying the variation display of the decorative pattern.
◇[Aspect C3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1,
In the first effect, the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in a winning mode is displayed in a fade-in manner.
◇[Aspect C3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1 or C3-2,
In the first performance, the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in a winning mode is displayed in its entirety after a part of it is displayed.
◇[Aspect C3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-3,
In the first presentation, when a part of the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in a winning state is displayed, the part displayed in one of the multiple patterns included in the decorative pattern and the part displayed in another pattern are different from each other.
◇[Aspect C3-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-4,
In the first performance, the decorative symbols are not displayed until the decorative symbols displayed in a stopped state in a winning mode are displayed after the start of the variation.
◇[Aspect C3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspects C3-1 to C3-5 further comprises:
a sub-display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
In the first performance, the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in a winning state are enlarged and displayed across the display means and the sub-display means.

The following explains symbol color change effects A to C using Figures 101 to 103. These symbol color change effects can be executed during a symbol variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute a symbol color change effect, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Pattern color change effect A]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the pattern color change effect A.
First, as shown in Figure 101 (A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols start to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reserved and the corresponding changing image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 101 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both temporarily stop at "4". In addition, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reservation and the corresponding variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 101 (C), a reach development effect is executed. The reach development effect is an effect that notifies the development from a normal reach to a super reach. Here, a message image MSG saying "Final battle begins" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, effect patterns 8L and 8R are displayed at the top left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 101 (D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect that changes the display color of the effect symbols that have reached a reach state. Here, the display color of the effect symbols 8L and 8R displayed on the left and upper right sides of the display screen 7a is changed. Specifically, the display color of the effect symbols 8L and 8R is changed from "blue" to "red."

Next, as shown in Figure 101 (E), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. In the battle effect, a win occurs when the ally character CRA wins. Note that here too, effect patterns 8L and 8R, which are displayed in red, are displayed at the top left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 101 (F), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies the player of the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, a win is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA has won. At this time, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a message image MSG saying "Victory" is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 101 (G), the winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect that notifies the winning/losing result using effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed at the top of the left and right sides of the display screen, and the middle effect symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "4" and are displayed in the color "red."

Next, as shown in Figure 101 (H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. In a confirmed stop effect (win), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a winning state. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, right, and center are all shown stopping at "4." Note that, even here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all displayed in "red." This confirms the transition to a high-probability, high-base state after a jackpot game.

[Pattern color change effect B]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the pattern color change effect B.
First, as shown in Figure 102 (A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols start to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reserved and the corresponding changing image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 102 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both temporarily stop at "4". In addition, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reservation and the corresponding variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 102 (C), a reach development effect is executed. The reach development effect is an effect that notifies the player that a normal reach has progressed to a super reach. Here, a message image MSG saying "Final battle begins" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed at the top left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 102 (D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect that changes the display color of the effect symbols that have reached a reach state. Here, the display color of the effect symbols 8L and 8R displayed at the top of the left and right sides of the display screen 7a is changed. Specifically, the display color of the effect symbols 8L and 8R is changed from "blue" to "red."

Next, as shown in Figure 102 (E), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. In the battle effect, a win occurs when the ally character CRA wins. Note that here too, effect patterns 8L and 8R, which are displayed in red, are displayed at the top left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 102 (F), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies the player of the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, a win is confirmed. In this example, it is assumed that the ally character CRA has been defeated. At this time, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a message image MSG saying "Defeat" is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 102 (G), the winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect that uses effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to notify the winning/losing result. Here, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed at the top left and right sides of the display screen, and the center effect symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are "5", and the center effect symbol 8C is "5". Furthermore, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed in "red", and the center effect symbol 8C is displayed in "blue".

Next, as shown in Figure 102 (H), a confirmed stop effect (miss) is executed. In a confirmed stop effect (miss), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a miss mode. Here, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R stop at a confirmed "4", and the center effect symbol 8C stops at a confirmed "5". In this case, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R change back to a "blue" display color from "red" just before they stop.

[Pattern color change effect C]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the pattern color change effect C.
First, as shown in Figure 103 (A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols start to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reserved and the corresponding changing image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 103 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both shown temporarily stopping at "4". In addition, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reservation and the corresponding variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 103 (C), a reach development effect is executed. The reach development effect is an effect that notifies the player that a normal reach has progressed to a super reach. Here, a message image MSG saying "Final battle begins" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed at the top left and right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 103 (D), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. In the battle effect, a win occurs when the ally character CRA wins. Note that here too, effect patterns 8L and 8R are displayed at the top left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 103 (E), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies the player of the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, a win is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA has won. At this time, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a message image MSG saying "Victory" is displayed. Note that here too, the effect patterns 8L and 8R are displayed at the top left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 103 (F), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect that changes the display color of the effect symbols following the win/loss notification effect. Here, the display color of the effect symbols 8L and 8R displayed at the top left and right of the display screen 7a is changed. Specifically, the display color of the effect symbols 8L and 8R is changed from "blue" to "red."

Next, as shown in Figure 103 (G), the winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect that notifies the winning/losing result using effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed at the top of the left and right sides of the display screen, and the middle effect symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "4" and are displayed in the color "red."

Next, as shown in Figure 103 (H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. In a confirmed stop effect (win), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a winning state. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, right, and center are all shown stopping at "4." Note that, even here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all displayed in "red." This confirms the transition to a high-probability, high-base state after a jackpot game.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effect of the pattern color change effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the effect symbols 8L and 8R that are temporarily stopped in a reach state is changed when a specific effect is triggered (FIGS. 101(C)(D), 102(C)(D), 103(E)(F)). This configuration increases expectations for a win and can improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the effect symbols 8L and 8R that are temporarily stopped in the reach state is changed in response to the reach development effect (Fig. 101(C)(D), Fig. 102(C)(D)). According to this configuration, the display color of the effect symbols is changed as the game develops to a super reach, which further increases expectations for a win and improves the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the number images constituting the effect symbols is changed (Fig. 101(C)(D), Fig. 102(C)(D), Fig. 103(E)(F)). With this configuration, the change in the display color of the effect symbols becomes easy to understand, and the interest in the game can be increased.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, if a win occurs after the color change effect (Fig. 101(D), Fig. 102(D), Fig. 103(F)), a transition to a high probability, high base state is confirmed through a jackpot game (Fig. 101(H), Fig. 103(H)). This configuration makes the change in the display color of the effect symbols even more anticipated, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the winning/losing notification effect (FIG. 102(G)) is a losing combination, the display color of the effect symbols 8L and 8R, which had been changed to "red," is returned to "blue" in the final stop effect (FIG. 102(H)). This configuration makes the final stop display of the effect symbols easy to understand, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the effect symbols 8L and 8R, which has been changed to "red" in the fixed stop effect, is returned to "blue" just before the fixed stop (FIG. 102(H)). With this configuration, the fixed stop display of the effect symbols is easy to understand, which can increase the interest in the game.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the pattern color change effect are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the display color of the effect pattern was changed (FIGS. 101(D), 102(D), 103(F)) in response to the reach development effect (FIG. 101(C), 102(C)) or the win/lose notification effect (FIG. 103(E)). However, the timing of changing the display color of the effect pattern is not limited to this. For example, the display color of the effect pattern may be changed in response to the reach formation effect.

[Modification 2]
In the above example, the display color of the number image was changed, but if the effect pattern has elements other than the number image, the display color of the parts other than the number image may also be changed. Also, the display color of both the number image and the parts other than the number image may also be changed.

[Modification 3]
The above example shows the effect of the first special chart reserved, but it may also be the effect of the second special chart reserved.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect C4-1]
A gaming machine,
After executing a reach formation effect in which the effect pattern is temporarily stopped in the reach state, a display color change effect can be executed in which the display color of the effect pattern temporarily stopped in the reach state is changed in response to a predetermined effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-1,
The predetermined effect is a development effect from a normal reach effect to a super reach effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-1 or C4-2,
The display color of the performance pattern is the display color of the number image that constitutes the performance pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C4-1 to C4-3,
If a winning notification effect is executed after the display color change effect is executed, indicating that the lottery result is a win, a transition to a specific game state is confirmed through a special game in which game balls can be acquired.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C4-1 to C4-4,
When a losing notification effect indicating that the winning result is a loss is executed after the display color change effect is executed, a color restoration effect is executed to return the display color of the effect pattern to the original display color.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-5,
The color restoration effect is executed prior to the determination stop effect of the effect pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Color change reach effects A to C are explained below using Figures 104 to 106. These color change reach effects can be executed during the variation of the effect symbols. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a color change reach effect, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Color change reach effect A]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the color change reach effect A.
First, as shown in Figure 104 (A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols start to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reserved and the corresponding changing image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 104 (B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the left symbol 8L temporarily stops. Here, the left symbol 8L is shown temporarily stopping at "4". The right symbol 8R also slows down and moves as indicated by arrow Y.

Next, as shown in Figure 104 (C), a right symbol reversal effect is executed. In the right symbol reversal effect, the right symbol 8R, which had been moving toward the bottom of the display screen 7a, reverses its direction of movement and moves toward the top of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y.
Next, as shown in Figure 104 (D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect in which the right effect symbol 8R, which has been moving toward the top of the display screen 7a, changes the display color of its number image. For example, the right effect symbol 8R, which is normally "blue," changes to "red."

Next, as shown in Figure 104 (E), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both shown temporarily stopping at "4". Here, the "4" symbol, whose display color has been changed, moves (for example, moves in a vibrating manner) as if to tease whether or not it will become a reach, and when it temporarily stops, its display color changes. For example, the display color of the "4" symbol, which has been changed to "red", changes to the normal "blue".

Next, as shown in Fig. 104 (F), a middle symbol stirring effect is executed. The middle symbol stirring effect is an effect in which, in a normal reach, the "4" symbol moving in the direction of arrow Y moves in a stirring manner (for example, moves in a vibrating manner) to indicate whether or not it will stop.
Next, as shown in Figure 104 (G), the winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect that notifies the winning/losing result using the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, compared to the effect symbols 8L and 8R on the left and right, the center effect symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "4".

Next, as shown in Figure 104 (H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In a fixed stop effect (win), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a fixed winning state. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R all stop in a fixed "4" state.

[Color change reach effect B]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the color change reach effect B.
First, as shown in Figure 105 (A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols start to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reserved and the corresponding changing image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 105 (B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the left symbol 8L temporarily stops. Here, the left symbol 8L is shown temporarily stopping at "4". The right symbol 8R also slows down and moves as indicated by arrow Y.

Next, as shown in Figure 105 (C), a right symbol reversal effect is executed. In the right symbol reversal effect, the right symbol 8R, which had been moving toward the bottom of the display screen 7a, reverses its direction of movement and moves toward the top of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y.
Next, as shown in Figure 105 (D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect in which the right effect symbol 8R, which has been moving toward the top of the display screen 7a, changes the display color of the number image. For example, the right effect symbol 8R of the "4" that is normally "blue" turns "red."

Next, as shown in Figure 105 (E), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both shown temporarily stopping at "4". Here, the "4" symbol, whose display color has been changed, moves (for example, moves in a vibrating manner) as if to tease whether or not it will become a reach, and when it temporarily stops, its display color changes. For example, the display color of the "4" symbol, which has been changed to "red", changes to the normal "blue".

Next, as shown in Fig. 105(F), a middle symbol swaying effect is executed. The middle symbol swaying effect is an effect in which, in a normal reach, the "4" symbol moving in the direction of arrow Y moves in a swaying manner (for example, moves in a vibrating manner) to see whether it will stop or not. At this time, the display color of the "4" symbol is changed. For example, the "4" symbol, which is normally "blue", becomes "red".
Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (G), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect that notifies the winning/losing result using the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, compared to the effect symbols 8L and 8R on the left and right, the center effect symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "4". At this time, the display color of the center effect symbol 8C is the original display color. For example, the display color of the "4" symbol that has been changed to "red" is changed to the normal "blue".

Next, as shown in Figure 105 (H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. In a confirmed stop effect (win), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a confirmed winning state. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, right, and center all stop at "4."

[Color change reach effect C]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the color change reach effect C.
First, as shown in Figure 106 (A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols start to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reserved and the corresponding changing image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 106 (B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the left symbol 8L temporarily stops. Here, the left symbol 8L is shown temporarily stopping at "4". The right symbol 8R also slows down and moves as indicated by arrow Y.

Next, as shown in Figure 106 (C), a right symbol reversal effect is executed. The right symbol reversal effect is an effect in which the right symbol 8R, which had been moving toward the bottom of the display screen 7a, reverses its direction of movement and moves toward the top of the display screen 7a as shown by arrow Y. At this time, the left symbol 8L is expanded. The expansion timing may be before, during, or after the right symbol 8R is reversed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 106(D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect in which the right effect pattern 8R, which has been moving toward the top of the display screen 7a, changes the display color of its number image. For example, the "4" pattern, which is normally "blue," turns "red." At this time, the right effect pattern 8R is enlarged in the same way as the left effect pattern 8L. The size of the enlarged right effect pattern 8R may be larger, smaller, or the same as the enlarged left effect pattern 8L.

Next, as shown in Figure 106 (E), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both shown temporarily stopping at "4". Here, the display color changes, and the enlarged "4" symbol moves (for example, moves in a vibrating manner) as if to suggest whether or not it will become a reach, and when it temporarily stops, the display color changes. For example, the display color of the "4" symbol that has been changed to "red" changes back to the normal "blue".

Next, as shown in Fig. 106(F), a middle symbol stirring effect is executed. The middle symbol stirring effect is an effect in which, in a normal reach, the "4" symbol moving in the direction of arrow Y moves in a stirring manner (for example, moves in a vibrating manner) to indicate whether or not it will stop.
Next, as shown in Figure 106 (G), the winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect that notifies the winning/losing result using the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, compared to the effect symbols 8L and 8R on the left and right, the center effect symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "4".

Next, as shown in Figure 106 (H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. In a confirmed stop effect (win), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a confirmed winning state. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, right, and center all stop at "4."

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of color change reach effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when stopping the right effect symbol 8R, the display color of the right effect symbol 8R is changed and then the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped (Fig. 104 (D) (E), Fig. 105 (D) (E), Fig. 106 (D) (E)). Also, when stopping the middle effect symbol 8C, the display color of the middle effect symbol 8C is changed and then the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped (Fig. 105 (F) (G)). According to this configuration, the temporary stopping of the effect symbol stands out, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the effect symbols is changed, and when the effect symbols are temporarily stopped, the display color is returned to the original color (FIG. 104(E), FIG. 105(E)(G), FIG. 106(E)). With this configuration, the temporarily stopped effect symbols are more conspicuous, and the interest in the game can be increased.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the right effect symbol 8R is moved in the direction opposite to the direction of movement, and the display color of the right effect symbol 8R is changed, and the right effect symbol 8R is moved in the same direction as the direction of movement and temporarily stopped (Figs. 104(C)(D)(E), 105(C)(D)(E), 106(C)(D)(E)). According to this configuration, since the effect symbol moves in the direction opposite to the direction of movement, the temporary stop of the effect symbol is more conspicuous, and the interest in the game can be increased.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the reach formation effect, the "4" symbol whose display color has been changed moves (for example, moves in a vibrating manner) to indicate whether or not it will reach, and then temporarily stops and changes its display color (Figs. 104(D)(E), 105(D)(E), 106(D)(E)). This configuration makes the reach formation effect stand out, and can increase the interest in the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the right effect symbol 8R is enlarged and then temporarily stopped (FIG. 106 (D) (E)). With this configuration, the temporary stop of the effect symbol is more prominent, which can increase the interest in the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the reach formation effect, the expanded right effect symbol 8R of "4" moves (for example, moves in a vibrating manner) to indicate whether or not it will be a reach, and then temporarily stops (Fig. 106(E)). With this configuration, the temporary stop of the effect symbol is more prominent, which can increase the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the color change reach presentation are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the reach formation effect is performed following the color change effect (Fig. 104(D)(E), Fig. 105(D)(E), Fig. 106(D)(E)), but the reach formation effect does not necessarily take place. For example, if the reach formation is not performed, it is possible that the right effect pattern 8R stops on something other than "4", and then the middle effect pattern 8C stops, resulting in a miss. In this case too, the color change effect constitutes part of the "reach effect" in that it is used to encourage the reach formation.

[Modification 2]
The above example shows changing the display color of the right performance pattern 8R and the middle performance pattern 8C, but the display color of the left performance pattern 8L can also be changed.

[Modification 3]
In the above, in the right pattern reversal effect, the left effect pattern 8L is enlarged (Fig. 106(C)). Also, in the color change effect, the right effect pattern 8R is enlarged in the same way as the left effect pattern 8L (Fig. 106(D)). Furthermore, in the reach formation effect, the enlarged "4" pattern moves (for example, moves in a vibrating manner) to indicate whether or not it will become a reach, and then temporarily stops. In this way, the "size change stop effect" has been explained as an example of the enlargement of the effect pattern, but of course, the effect pattern may also be reduced in size.
[Modification 4]
Although the above does not mention the reliability of the winning result, for example, when a color change effect is executed, the reliability of the jackpot (expectation of transition to special games) may be higher compared to when the color change effect is not executed. Similarly, when the size of the effect symbol is changed, the reliability of the jackpot (expectation of transition to special games) may be higher compared to when the size of the effect symbol is not changed.
[Modification 5]
The above example shows the effect of the first special chart reserved, but it may also be the effect of the second special chart reserved.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect C5-1]
A gaming machine,
When stopping the performance pattern of a predetermined row among the performance patterns that change in multiple rows, it is possible to change the display color of the performance pattern and then execute a color change stop performance that temporarily stops the performance pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C5-1,
In the color change stop effect, the display color of the effect pattern of the predetermined row is temporarily changed, and when the effect pattern is temporarily stopped, the display color of the effect pattern is returned to the original display color.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C5-2,
In the color change stop effect, the effect patterns of the predetermined row are moved in the direction opposite to the direction of change, and the display color of the effect patterns is temporarily changed, and the effect patterns are moved in the same direction as the direction of change and temporarily stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C5-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C5-1 to C5-3,
The color change stop effect constitutes a part of the reach effect in which the effect patterns of a predetermined row among the effect patterns fluctuating in a plurality of rows temporarily stop to form a specific pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C5-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C5-1 to C5-4,
When stopping the performance pattern of a predetermined row among the performance patterns that change in multiple rows, it is possible to change the size of the performance pattern and then execute a size change stop performance that temporarily stops the performance pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C5-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect C5-5,
The size change stop effect constitutes a part of the reach effect in which the effect patterns of a predetermined row among the effect patterns fluctuating in a plurality of rows temporarily stop to form a specific pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C5-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect C5-5 or C5-6,
The size change stop effect is capable of changing the size of the already temporarily stopped effect patterns other than the predetermined column when stopping the effect patterns of a predetermined column among the effect patterns fluctuating in multiple columns.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C5-8]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C5-1 to C5-7,
When the color change stop effect is executed, the expectation of transition to a special game in which game balls can be acquired is higher than when the color change stop effect is not executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C5-9]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C5-5 to C5-8,
When the size change stop effect is executed, the probability of transition to a special game in which game balls can be acquired increases compared to when the size change stop effect is not executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Character attack effects A to C are explained below using Figures 107 to 109. These character attack effects can be executed during the effect symbol variation effect. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a character attack effect, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Character attack effect A]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining character attack presentation A.
First, as shown in Figure 107 (A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols start to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reserved and the corresponding changing image 9C are displayed.

Next, a temporary stop effect is executed as shown in Figure 107(B) or Figure 107(D). A temporary stop effect is an effect in which the effect symbol temporarily stops in a predetermined manner. There are two types of temporary stop effects. As shown in Figure 107(B), a mode in which a special symbol temporarily stops in place of the middle effect symbol 8C, and as shown in Figure 107(D), a mode in which the middle effect symbol 8C temporarily stops.

In temporary stop effect A shown in Figure 107 (B), the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops at "1", the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops at "2", and a special symbol temporarily stops in place of the center effect symbol 8C. The special symbol is an enemy character symbol CRBG that resembles an enemy character. For example, the changing effect symbols temporarily stop in the order of left effect symbol 8L → right effect symbol 8R → special symbol.

When a special symbol temporarily stops in place of the medium symbol 8C as shown in Figure 107 (B), an attack effect (before reach) is executed as shown in Figure 107 (C). In other words, the attack effect (before reach) is an effect that is executed when a special symbol temporarily stops in the temporary stop effect. In the attack effect (before reach), an attack line AL indicating an attack is displayed superimposed on the enemy character symbol CRBG. In addition, a message image MSG reading "ATTACK" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a.

In temporary stop effect B shown in Figure 107 (D), the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops at "4", the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops at "9", and the middle effect symbol 8C temporarily stops at "3". For example, the changing effect symbols temporarily stop in the order of left effect symbol 8L → right effect symbol 8R → middle effect symbol 8C.

After the attack effect (before the reach) shown in Figure 107(C) or after the temporary stop effect B shown in Figure 107(D), the variable start effect shown in Figure 107(A) is executed, resulting in a pseudo consecutive effect. In this embodiment, a repeated pseudo consecutive effect is executed in which this pseudo consecutive effect is repeated seven times. Then, during the repeated pseudo consecutive effect, the enemy character image CRBG stops instead of the medium effect pattern 8C (Figure 107(B)), thereby executing the attack effect (before the reach) (Figure 107(C)).

After the repeat pseudo-consecutive effect ends, a reach formation effect is executed, as shown in Figure 107 (E). A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both temporarily stop at "5".

Next, as shown in Figure 107 (F), an attack effect (after reach) is executed. The attack effect (after reach) is an effect in which a further attack is launched on the enemy character. Here, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Then, an attack image AG indicating an attack on the enemy character CRB is displayed. Multiple attack images AG are displayed in sequence, and when the enemy character CRB and an attack image AG overlap, damage is inflicted on the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in Figure 107 (G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies the player of the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, a win is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA has won. At this time, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a message image MSG saying "Victory" is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 107 (H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. In a confirmed stop effect (win), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a confirmed winning state. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, right, and center all stop at "5."

[Character attack effect B]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining character attack presentation B.
First, as shown in Figure 108 (A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols start to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reserved and the corresponding changing image 9C are displayed.

Next, a temporary stop effect is executed as shown in Figure 108 (B) or Figure 108 (D). A temporary stop effect is an effect in which the effect symbol temporarily stops in a predetermined manner. There are two types of temporary stop effects. As shown in Figure 108 (B), a mode in which a special symbol temporarily stops in place of the middle effect symbol 8C, and as shown in Figure 108 (D), a mode in which the middle effect symbol 8C temporarily stops.

In temporary stop effect A shown in Figure 108 (B), the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops at "1", the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops at "2", and a special symbol temporarily stops in place of the center effect symbol 8C. The special symbol is an enemy character symbol CRBG that resembles an enemy character. For example, the changing effect symbols temporarily stop in the order of left effect symbol 8L → right effect symbol 8R → special symbol.

When a special symbol temporarily stops in place of the medium symbol 8C as shown in Figure 108 (B), an attack effect (before reach) is executed as shown in Figure 108 (C). In other words, the attack effect (before reach) is an effect that is executed when a special symbol temporarily stops in the temporary stop effect. In the attack effect (before reach), an attack line AL indicating an attack is displayed superimposed on the enemy character symbol CRBG. In addition, a message image MSG reading "ATTACK" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a.

In temporary stop effect B shown in Figure 108 (D), the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops at "4", the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops at "9", and the middle effect symbol 8C temporarily stops at "3". For example, the changing effect symbols temporarily stop in the order of left effect symbol 8L → right effect symbol 8R → middle effect symbol 8C.

After the attack effect (before the reach) shown in Figure 108(C) or after the temporary stop effect B shown in Figure 108(D), the variable start effect shown in Figure 108(A) is executed, resulting in a pseudo consecutive effect. In this embodiment, a repeated pseudo consecutive effect is executed in which this pseudo consecutive effect is repeated seven times. Then, in the repeated pseudo consecutive effect, the enemy character image CRBG stops instead of the medium effect pattern 8C (Figure 108(B)), and an attack effect (before the reach) is executed (Figure 108(C)).

After the repeat pseudo-consecutive effect ends, a reach formation effect is executed, as shown in Figure 108 (E). A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both temporarily stop at "5".

Next, as shown in Figure 108 (F), an attack effect (after reach) is executed. The attack effect (after reach) is an effect in which a further attack is launched on the enemy character. Here, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the lower right-hand corner of the display screen 7a. In addition, a message image MSG saying "Continuous Hit" is displayed above the button image BG. Then, each time the player presses the effect button 63, an attack image AG indicating an attack on the enemy character CRB is displayed. Multiple attack images AG are displayed in sequence, and when the enemy character CRB and the attack image AG overlap, damage is inflicted on the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in Figure 108 (G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies the player of the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, a win is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA has won. At this time, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a message image MSG saying "Victory" is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 108 (H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. In a confirmed stop effect (win), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a confirmed winning state. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, right, and center all stop at "5."

[Character attack effect C]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining character attack presentation C.
First, as shown in Figure 109 (A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols start to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reserved and the corresponding changing image 9C are displayed.

Next, a temporary stop effect is executed as shown in Figure 109 (B) or Figure 109 (D). A temporary stop effect is an effect in which the effect symbol temporarily stops in a predetermined manner. There are two types of temporary stop effects. As shown in Figure 109 (B), a mode in which a special symbol temporarily stops in place of the middle effect symbol 8C, and as shown in Figure 109 (D), a mode in which the middle effect symbol 8C temporarily stops.

In temporary stop effect A shown in Figure 109 (B), the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops at "1", the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops at "2", and a special symbol temporarily stops in place of the center effect symbol 8C. The special symbol is an enemy character symbol CRBG that resembles an enemy character. For example, the changing effect symbols temporarily stop in the order of left effect symbol 8L → right effect symbol 8R → special symbol.

When a special symbol temporarily stops in place of the middle symbol 8C as shown in Figure 109 (B), an attack effect (before reach) is executed as shown in Figure 109 (C). In other words, the attack effect (before reach) is an effect that is executed when a special symbol temporarily stops in the temporary stop effect. In the attack effect (before reach), a message image MSG1 saying "ATTACK" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. In addition, a message image MSG2 saying "Press" is displayed above the button image BG. When the player presses the effect button 63, an attack line AL indicating an attack is displayed superimposed on the enemy character symbol CRBG.

In temporary stop effect B shown in Figure 109 (D), the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops at "4", the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops at "9", and the middle effect symbol 8C temporarily stops at "3". For example, the changing effect symbols temporarily stop in the order of left effect symbol 8L → right effect symbol 8R → middle effect symbol 8C.

After the attack effect (before the reach) shown in Figure 109(C) or after the temporary stop effect B shown in Figure 109(D), the variable start effect shown in Figure 109(A) is executed, resulting in a pseudo consecutive effect. In this embodiment, a repeated pseudo consecutive effect is executed in which this pseudo consecutive effect is repeated seven times. Then, in the repeated pseudo consecutive effect, the enemy character image CRBG stops instead of the middle effect pattern 8C (Figure 109(B)), and an attack effect (before the reach) is executed (Figure 109(C)).

After the repeat pseudo-consecutive effect ends, a reach formation effect is executed, as shown in Figure 109 (E). A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both temporarily stop at "5".

Next, as shown in Figure 109 (F), an attack effect (after reach) is executed. The attack effect (after reach) is an effect in which a further attack is launched on the enemy character. Here, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the lower right-hand corner of the display screen 7a. In addition, a message image saying "Continuous Hit" is displayed above the button image BG. Then, each time the player presses the effect button 63, an attack image AG indicating an attack on the enemy character CRB is displayed. Multiple attack images AG are displayed in sequence, and when the enemy character CRB and the attack image AG overlap, damage is inflicted on the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in Figure 109 (G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies the player of the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, a win is confirmed. In this example, it is assumed that the ally character CRA has been defeated. At this time, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a message image MSG saying "Defeat" is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 109 (H), a confirmed stop effect (miss) is executed. In a confirmed stop effect (miss), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a confirmed miss mode. Here, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R stop in a confirmed "5", and the center effect symbol 8C stops in a confirmed "6".

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of character attack effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a series of effects can be executed (FIGS. 107(C)(F), 108(C)(F), 109(C)(F)) before and after the reach formation effects (FIGS. 107(E), 108(E), 109(E)). This configuration allows for consistent effects to be executed within a single change, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, an effect in which the same enemy character CRB appears is executed (FIGS. 107(C)(F), 108(C)(F), 109(C)(F)) before and after the reach formation effect (FIGS. 107(E), 108(E), 109(E)). According to this configuration, a more unified effect can be produced within a single change, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, before and after the reach formation effect (FIGS. 107(E), 108(E), 109(E)), an effect of attacking the same enemy character CRB is executed (FIGS. 107(C)(F), 108(C)(F), 109(C)(F)). According to this configuration, a more unified effect can be produced within a single change, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, pseudo consecutive effects (FIGS. 107(A)(B)(C)(D), 108(A)(B)(C)(D), 108(A)(B)(C)(D)) are included before the reach formation effects (FIGS. 107(E), 108(E), 109(E)). With this configuration, effects including pseudo consecutive effects can increase the interest in the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to execute an effect in which an enemy character symbol CRBG imitating an enemy character is temporarily stopped instead of the middle effect symbol 8C (FIGS. 107(B), 108(B), and 109(B)). With this configuration, it is highly likely that the pseudo consecutive effects will be interesting, and it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the attack effect (before the reach) is an effect using the effect button 63 (FIG. 109(C)). Also, the attack effect (after the reach) is an effect using the effect button 63 (FIG. 108(F), FIG. 109(F)). This configuration can increase the interest in the game.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of operation stock effects are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above example, in the attack effect (after a reach), a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed, and a message image MSG saying "Continuous hit" is displayed to encourage the player to repeatedly hit the button. Alternatively, a message image saying "Long press" may be displayed to encourage the player to long press the button.

[Modification 2]
Although not specifically mentioned above, when attacking the enemy character CRB (attack performance (before the attack), attack performance (after the attack)), a display showing the strength of the enemy character CRB may be displayed. For example, the strength may be displayed by a horizontal bar.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the operation of the effect button 63 is given as an example, but any operation unit that can be operated by the player is sufficient, and the operation is not limited to the operation of the effect button 63.

[Modification 4]
The above example shows the effect of the first special chart reserved, but it may also be the effect of the second special chart reserved.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect C6-1]
A gaming machine,
In a variation period including a first period from the start of variation of the performance symbols to the formation of a reach where the performance symbols stop in a predetermined manner, and a second period from the formation of the reach to the notification of a win or loss, a series of performances spanning the first period and the second period can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C6-1,
The series of effects is an effect in which a specific character appears.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C6-1 or C6-2,
The series of effects is an attack effect that attacks a specific character.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C6-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C6-1 to C6-3,
The series of effects includes a pseudo-repeated effect in which the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and re-varied during the first period.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C6-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C6-4,
In the pseudo consecutive performance, when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped, a character pattern stop performance can be executed in which a pattern imitating a specific character is temporarily stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C6-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C6-1 to C6-5,
The series of effects includes an operation unit effect using an operation unit that can be operated by a player during at least one of the first period and the second period.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative pattern color change effects A to C are explained below using Figures 110 to 112. In Figures 110 to 112, the first movable part 14, second movable part 15, and other movable parts arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted for clarity.

This decorative pattern color change effect is first predicted by a pre-reading effect, and then the color of the decorative pattern can be changed to another color. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (e.g., a variable effect start command, a pre-determination command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a decorative pattern color change effect is included, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The background image used in the decorative pattern color change performance (referred to as a "specific background image") is a specific image not included in the normal background image, such as an image of the moon's surface, an image of entering dark space, an image of escaping dark space, or an image of the inside of a spaceship. The normal background image is a normal image such as an image of a city, a forest, an ocean, an image of the seabed, or an underground image. The specific background image and the normal background image may be a still image or a video.

Here, we will first explain decorative pattern color change effect A, then decorative pattern color change effect B, and then decorative pattern color change effect C.

[Decorative pattern color change effect A]
The decorative pattern color change effect A will be described with reference to Figure 110. Figure 110 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern color change effect A. The occurrence of the decorative pattern color change effect A is first predicted by a pre-reading effect, and then the color of the decorative pattern can be changed to another color.

First, as shown in Figure 110 (A), a city image THG1 is displayed as the normal background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and a variable effect (variable display) of decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") begins in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, with a 3D left decorative pattern 8L, a 3D center decorative pattern 8C, and a 3D right decorative pattern 8R.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except for the number "7" all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the decorative pattern change effect (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state as it gradually increases its speed from a slow speed, changing at high speed. This allows the background image located behind the decorative pattern to be seen through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changing from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, and appears temporarily stopped, or stopped (temporarily stopped, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the currently changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R for the first special symbol reservation are displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reservation display area is provided for the first special symbol reservation in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. In this reservation display area, reservation icons can be displayed at four reservation display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), allowing a maximum of four reservation icons to be stored. The four reservation display positions 9Ad are aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of first reservation display position 9Ad, second reservation display position 9Ad, third reservation display position 9Ad, and fourth reservation display position 9Ad. Furthermore, the variable display position 9Cd and reserved display position 9Ad remain visible and do not disappear from the display screen 7a when decorative pattern color change performance A is being performed.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a blue spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icons are displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one hold icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. For the sake of convenience, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21.

In addition, in the decorative pattern change performance (change display), in addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the first special symbol hold based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are each displayed as numbers (not shown) located at the top center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of reserved first special symbols based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers (which may be light blue, dark blue, or a color somewhere between light and dark) on the left side, and the number of reserved second special symbols based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers (which may be light red, dark red, or a color somewhere between light and dark red) on the right side, spaced apart from each other and always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a. Because these numbers represent the number of reserved balls as numerical values, they are less likely to be difficult to distinguish among the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, these numbers are displayed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with other images displayed behind them, so their visibility is not obstructed by other images.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the corresponding lottery. For example, of the six icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, a red spherical icon, a blue spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, the red spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of winning, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icons are further set with increasing expectations of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → rainbow (high probability of winning).

The blue spherical icon is always flashing, and when it's off it appears dark blue, and when it's on it appears bright blue, gradually changing from off to on to bright blue, and then from on to off to dark blue.

The red spherical icon is always flashing, and when it's off it appears dark red, and when it's on it appears bright red, gradually changing from off to on to bright red, and then from on to off to dark red.

In Figure 110 (A), a blue spherical reserve icon 9A is displayed at the first reserve display position 9Ad. This indicates that a game ball will enter the first starting hole 20, and a decorative pattern color change effect A will begin as a result of a pre-reading effect. Once the decorative pattern change effect (change display) begins, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a stopped bright green number "5," the center decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a stopped bright blue number "6," and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a stopped bright red number "7," resulting in a miss, and the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(B), the blue spherical reserve icon 9A displayed at the first reserve display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the blue spherical variable icon 9C, initiating the decorative symbol color change effect A. The left decorative symbol 8L, center decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the normal background image, city image THG1, displayed on the display screen 7a is switched to a dark space entry image THG2 as the first specific background image, and the character CRB flashes a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 to 15 times) in the center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, when the character CRB appears in the center of the display screen 7a, it first flashes rapidly (e.g., once or twice), then flashes slowly, and finally flashes rapidly again (e.g., two to three times). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the start of the decorative symbol color change effect A.

When the character CRB has flashed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 to 15 times), as shown in Figure 110(C), the first specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a, the dark space entry image THG2, is switched to the second specific background image, the dark space escape image THG3, and the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed again on the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the dark blue number "5," and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the dark blue number "4."

As mentioned above, the number "5" has a bright green color, but when decorative pattern color change performance A begins, it is forcibly changed from bright green to dark blue, and does not appear as bright green in decorative pattern color change performance A. Also, as mentioned above, the number "4" has a bright blue color, but when decorative pattern color change performance A begins, it is forcibly changed from bright blue to dark blue, and does not appear as bright blue in decorative pattern color change performance A. In other words, when decorative pattern color change performance A begins, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a with the same color, dark blue. Bright blue and dark blue are blue-based colors and are similar to each other.

When decorative pattern color change effect A begins, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes slightly larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the normal background image.

After that, as shown in Figure 110(D), the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" that had been temporarily stopped becomes semi-transparent and moves rapidly forward, escaping from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. As a result, an opaque number "5" with a dark blue color appears from behind as the right decorative pattern 8R and is temporarily stopped, and as shown in Figure 110(E), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, and are temporarily stopped as the opaque number "5" with a dark blue color.

After that, as shown in Figure 110(F), the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "5" that had been temporarily stopped becomes translucent and moves rapidly forward, escaping the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. As a result, an opaque number "6" with a dark blue color appears from behind as the left decorative pattern 8L and is temporarily stopped. As shown in Figure 110(G), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "6" with a dark blue color, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "5" with a dark blue color. As mentioned above, the number "6" has a light blue color, but when decorative pattern color change performance A begins, it is forcibly changed from light blue to dark blue, and does not appear as light blue in decorative pattern color change performance A.

After that, as shown in Figure 110 (H), the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" that had been temporarily stopped becomes semi-transparent and moves rapidly forward, escaping from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. As a result, an opaque number "6" with a dark blue color appears from behind as the right decorative pattern 8R and is temporarily stopped, and the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern and are temporarily stopped as the opaque number "6" with a dark blue color.

Then, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" that had been temporarily stopped becomes translucent and moves rapidly forward, escaping the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. As a result, an opaque bright red number "7" appears from behind as the left decorative pattern 8L and is temporarily stopped. The left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the bright red number "7," and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the dark blue number "6." As mentioned above, the number "7" is bright red, and when decorative pattern color change effect A begins, it does not change from bright red to dark blue; in other words, it is the only number that appears without changing color even when decorative pattern color change effect A begins.

Then, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "6" that had been displayed as a temporary stop becomes semi-transparent and moves rapidly forward, escaping the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, and as a result, an opaque bright red number "7" appears from behind as the right decorative pattern 8R. As shown in Figure 110(I), it appears to be displayed as a temporary stop, but then becomes semi-transparent and moves rapidly forward, escaping the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, and as shown in Figure 110(J), the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "7" is displayed as a temporary stop on the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R and center decorative pattern 8C are not displayed on the display screen 7a.

Then, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "7" begins to shrink in size. After a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 110(K), the second specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a switches back to the normal background image, the city image THG1, from the dark space escape image THG3 (at this time, the normal background image may be switched from the city image THG1 to another normal image, such as an underground image). A bright blue, opaque number "8" appears and temporarily stops on the display screen 7a as the right decorative pattern 8R. Then, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "7" returns to its original size (the size of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed in the normal background image), and a bright green, opaque number "3" appears and temporarily stops on the display screen 7a as the center decorative pattern 8C. This ends decorative pattern color change performance A.

After that, as shown in Figure 110 (L), the left decorative pattern 8L stops at the bright red number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C stops at the bright green number "3", and the right decorative pattern 8R stops at the bright blue number "6", resulting in a loss, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Decorative pattern color change effect B]
Next, the decorative symbol color change effect B will be described with reference to Fig. 111. Fig. 111 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol color change effect B. The occurrence of the decorative symbol color change effect B is first predicted by a pre-reading effect, and then the color of the decorative symbol can be changed to another color.

First, as shown in Figure 111 (A), a city image THG1 is displayed as the normal background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and a variable effect (variable display) of decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") begins in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, with a 3D left decorative pattern 8L, a 3D center decorative pattern 8C, and a 3D right decorative pattern 8R.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except for the number "7" all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the decorative pattern change effect (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state as it gradually increases its speed from a slow speed, changing at high speed. This allows the background image located behind the decorative pattern to be seen through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changing from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, and appears temporarily stopped, or stopped (temporarily stopped, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the currently changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R for the first special symbol reservation are displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reservation display area is provided for the first special symbol reservation in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. In this reservation display area, reservation icons can be displayed at four reservation display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), allowing a maximum of four reservation icons to be stored. The four reservation display positions 9Ad are aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of first reservation display position 9Ad, second reservation display position 9Ad, third reservation display position 9Ad, and fourth reservation display position 9Ad. Furthermore, the variable display position 9Cd and reserved display position 9Ad remain visible and do not disappear from the display screen 7a while the decorative pattern color change performance B is being performed.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a blue spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icons are displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one hold icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. For the sake of convenience, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21.

In addition, in the decorative pattern change performance (change display), in addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the first special symbol hold based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are each displayed as numbers (not shown) located at the top center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of reserved first special symbols based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers (which may be light blue, dark blue, or a color somewhere between light and dark) on the left side, and the number of reserved second special symbols based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers (which may be light red, dark red, or a color somewhere between light and dark red) on the right side, spaced apart from each other and always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a. Because these numbers represent the number of reserved balls as numerical values, they are less likely to be difficult to distinguish among the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, these numbers are displayed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with other images displayed behind them, so their visibility is not obstructed by other images.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the corresponding lottery. For example, of the six icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, a red spherical icon, a blue spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, the red spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of winning, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icons are further set with increasing expectations of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → rainbow (high probability of winning).

The blue spherical icon is always flashing, and when it's off it appears dark blue, and when it's on it appears bright blue, gradually changing from off to on to bright blue, and then from on to off to dark blue.

The red spherical icon is always flashing, and when it's off it appears dark red, and when it's on it appears bright red, gradually changing from off to on to bright red, and then from on to off to dark red.

In Figure 111 (A), a blue spherical reserve icon 9A is displayed at the first reserve display position 9Ad. This indicates that a game ball will enter the first starting hole 20, and a decorative pattern color change effect B will begin as a result of a pre-reading effect. Once the decorative pattern change effect (change display) begins, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a stopped bright green number "5," the center decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a stopped bright blue number "6," and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a stopped bright red number "7," resulting in a miss, and the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(B), the blue spherical reserve icon 9A displayed at the first reserve display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the blue spherical variable icon 9C, initiating the decorative symbol color change effect B. The left decorative symbol 8L, center decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the normal background image, city image THG1, displayed on the display screen 7a is switched to a dark space entry image THG2 as the first specific background image, and the character CRB flashes a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 to 15 times) in the center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, when the character CRB appears in the center of the display screen 7a, it first flashes rapidly (e.g., once or twice), then flashes slowly, and finally flashes rapidly again (e.g., two to three times). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the start of the decorative symbol color change effect B.

When the character CRB has flashed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 to 15 times), as shown in FIG. 111(C), the first specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a, the dark space entry image THG2, is switched to the second specific background image, the dark space escape image THG3, and the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed again on the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the dark blue number "5," and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the dark blue number "4."

As mentioned above, the number "5" has a bright green color, but when decorative pattern color change performance B begins, it is forcibly changed from bright green to dark blue, and does not appear as bright green in decorative pattern color change performance B. Also, as mentioned above, the number "4" has a bright blue color, but when decorative pattern color change performance B begins, it is forcibly changed from bright blue to dark blue, and does not appear as bright blue in decorative pattern color change performance B. In other words, when decorative pattern color change performance B begins, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a with the same color, dark blue. Bright blue and dark blue are blue-based colors and are similar to each other.

When decorative pattern color change effect B begins, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes slightly larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the normal background image.

After that, as shown in Figure 111(D), the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" that had been temporarily stopped becomes semi-transparent and moves rapidly forward, escaping from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. As a result, an opaque number "5" with a dark blue color appears from behind as the right decorative pattern 8R and is temporarily stopped, and as shown in Figure 111(E), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, and are temporarily stopped as the opaque number "5" with a dark blue color.

After that, as shown in Figure 111(F), the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "5" that had been temporarily stopped becomes translucent and moves rapidly forward, escaping the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. As a result, an opaque number "6" with a dark blue color appears from behind as the left decorative pattern 8L and is temporarily stopped. As shown in Figure 111(G), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "6" with a dark blue color, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "5" with a dark blue color. As mentioned above, the number "6" has a light blue color, but when decorative pattern color change effect B begins, it is forcibly changed from light blue to dark blue, and does not appear as light blue in decorative pattern color change effect B.

Then, as shown in Figure 111 (H), the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" that had been displayed as a temporary stop becomes semi-transparent and moves rapidly forward, escaping the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. As a result, an opaque dark blue number "6" appears from behind as the right decorative pattern 8R. As shown in Figures 111 (I) and (J), it appears to be displayed as a temporary stop, but then becomes semi-transparent and moves rapidly forward, escaping the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. As shown in Figure 111 (K), the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" is displayed as a temporary stop on the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R and the center decorative pattern 8C are not displayed on the display screen 7a.

Then, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" begins to shrink in size. After a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 111(L), the display screen 7a switches from the dark space escape image THG3, which is the second specific background image, to the normal background image, city image THG1 (at this time, the normal background image may be switched from the city image THG1 to another normal image, such as an underground image). An opaque bright red number "7" appears on the display screen 7a as the right decorative pattern 8R and temporarily stops. Then, the left decorative pattern 8L of the dark blue number "6" returns to its original size (the size of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed in the normal background image) and changes from dark blue to light blue. Finally, an opaque bright green number "3" appears on the display screen 7a as the center decorative pattern 8C and temporarily stops. This ends decorative pattern color change effect B.

After that, as shown in Figure 111 (M), the left decorative pattern 8L stops at the bright blue number "6," the middle decorative pattern 8C stops at the bright green number "3," and the right decorative pattern 8R stops at the bright red number "7," resulting in a loss, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Decorative pattern color change effect C]
Next, the decorative pattern color change effect C will be described with reference to Fig. 112. Fig. 112 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern color change effect C. The occurrence of the decorative pattern color change effect C is first predicted by a pre-reading effect, and then the color of the decorative pattern can be changed to another color.

First, as shown in Figure 112 (A), a city image THG1 is displayed as the normal background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and a variable effect (variable display) of decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") begins in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, displaying a left three-dimensional decorative pattern 8L, a center three-dimensional decorative pattern 8C, and a right three-dimensional decorative pattern 8R.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except for the number "7" all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the decorative pattern change effect (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state as it gradually increases its speed from a slow speed, changing at high speed. This allows the background image located behind the decorative pattern to be seen through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changing from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, and appears temporarily stopped, or stopped (temporarily stopped, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the currently changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R for the first special symbol reservation are displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reservation display area is provided for the first special symbol reservation in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. In this reservation display area, reservation icons can be displayed at four reservation display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), allowing a maximum of four reservation icons to be stored. The four reservation display positions 9Ad are aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of first reservation display position 9Ad, second reservation display position 9Ad, third reservation display position 9Ad, and fourth reservation display position 9Ad. Furthermore, the variable display position 9Cd and reserved display position 9Ad remain visible and do not disappear from the display screen 7a while the decorative pattern color change performance C is being performed.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a blue spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icons are displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one hold icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. For the sake of convenience, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21.

In addition, in the decorative pattern change performance (change display), in addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the first special symbol hold based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are each displayed as numbers (not shown) located at the top center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of reserved first special symbols based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers (which may be light blue, dark blue, or a color somewhere between light and dark) on the left side, and the number of reserved second special symbols based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers (which may be light red, dark red, or a color somewhere between light and dark red) on the right side, spaced apart from each other and always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a. Because these numbers represent the number of reserved balls as numerical values, they are less likely to be difficult to distinguish among the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, these numbers are displayed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with other images displayed behind them, so their visibility is not obstructed by other images.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the corresponding lottery. For example, of the six icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, a red spherical icon, a blue spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, the red spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of winning, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icons are further set with increasing expectations of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → rainbow (high probability of winning).

The blue spherical icon is always flashing, and when it's off it appears dark blue, and when it's on it appears bright blue, gradually changing from off to on to bright blue, and then from on to off to dark blue.

The red spherical icon is always flashing, and when it's off it appears dark red, and when it's on it appears bright red, gradually changing from off to on to bright red, and then from on to off to dark red.

In Figure 112 (A), a blue spherical reserve icon 9A is displayed at the first reserve display position 9Ad. This indicates that a game ball will enter the first starting hole 20, and a decorative pattern color change effect C will begin as a result of a pre-reading effect. Once the decorative pattern change effect (change display) begins, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a stopped bright green number "5," the center decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a stopped bright blue number "6," and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a stopped bright red number "7," resulting in a miss, and the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(B), the blue spherical reserve icon 9A displayed at the first reserve display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the blue spherical variable icon 9C, initiating the decorative symbol color change effect C. The left decorative symbol 8L, center decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the normal background image, city image THG1, displayed on the display screen 7a is switched to a dark space entry image THG2 as the first specific background image, and the character CRB flashes a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 to 15 times) in the center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, when the character CRB appears in the center of the display screen 7a, it first flashes rapidly (e.g., once or twice), then flashes slowly, and finally flashes rapidly again (e.g., two to three times). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the start of the decorative symbol color change effect C.

When the character CRB has flashed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 to 15 times), as shown in FIG. 112(C), the first specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a, the dark space entry image THG2, is switched to the second specific background image, the dark space escape image THG3, and the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed again on the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the dark blue number "5," and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the dark blue number "4."

As mentioned above, the number "5" has a bright green color, but when the decorative pattern color change performance C starts, it is forcibly changed from bright green to dark blue, and does not appear as bright green in the decorative pattern color change performance C. Also, as mentioned above, the number "4" has a bright blue color, but when the decorative pattern color change performance C starts, it is forcibly changed from bright blue to dark blue, and does not appear as bright blue in the decorative pattern color change performance C. In other words, when the decorative pattern color change performance C starts, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a with the same color, dark blue. Bright blue and dark blue are blue-based colors and are similar to each other.

When decorative pattern color change effect C begins, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes slightly larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the normal background image.

After that, as shown in Figure 112(D), the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" that had been temporarily stopped becomes semi-transparent and moves rapidly forward, escaping from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. As a result, an opaque number "5" with a dark blue color appears from behind as the right decorative pattern 8R and is temporarily stopped, and as shown in Figure 112(E), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, and are temporarily stopped as the opaque number "5" with a dark blue color.

After that, as shown in Figure 112(F), the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "5" that had been temporarily stopped becomes translucent and moves rapidly forward, escaping the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. As a result, an opaque dark blue number "6" appears from behind as the left decorative pattern 8L and is temporarily stopped. As shown in Figure 112(G), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "6" that has a dark blue color, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "5" that has a dark blue color. As mentioned above, the number "6" has a light blue color, but when the decorative pattern color change effect C begins, it is forcibly changed from light blue to dark blue, and does not appear as light blue in the decorative pattern color change effect C.

Then, as shown in Figure 112(H), the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" that had been temporarily stopped becomes translucent and moves rapidly forward, escaping the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. As a result, an opaque, dark blue number "6" appears from behind as the right decorative pattern 8R. As shown in Figure 112(I), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R approach each other, returning from the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R of the number "6" that are dark blue to the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R of the number "6" that are light blue. Then, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move away from each other and return to their original positions. Then, as shown in Figure 112(J), a fireball appears from the center of the display screen 7a and moves in an arc toward the blue, spherical variable icon 9C located below, colliding with the variable icon 9C.

As a result of this collision, the relevant variable icon 9C changes from a blue sphere to a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon, as shown in Figure 112 (K).

After that, as shown in Figure 112 (L), the dark space escape image THG3, which is the second specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched back to the city image THG1, which is the normal background image (at this time, the city image THG1 may be switched to another normal image (e.g., an underground image) as the normal background image). This ends the decorative pattern color change performance C.

After that, when the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R will begin again. At this time, the colors of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R will return to their original colors, and the odd numbers "1," "3," "5," and "9" (excluding the number "7") will all return to the same bright green, while the even numbers "2," "4," "6," and "8" will all return to the same bright blue. Note that the number "7" will always remain bright red regardless of whether or not the decorative pattern color change effect C is present.

If the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are then stopped and displayed as the same pattern, a jackpot is reached and the jackpot game (jackpot presentation) begins. On the other hand, if the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern, a loss occurs. Once a jackpot or loss is confirmed, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the decorative pattern color change effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative pattern color change presentation A of FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change presentation B of FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change presentation C of FIG. 112, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images is provided, and among the changing presentations (changing displays) using one or more of the even numbers "2,""4,""6," and "8" (first patterns) which have a bright blue (first color) and the odd numbers "1,""3,""5," and "9" (second patterns) excluding the odd number "7" which has a bright green (second color) different from the bright blue (first color), it is possible to execute specific presentations (decorative pattern color change presentation A: FIGS. 110(C) to (H), decorative pattern color change presentation B: FIGS. 111(C) to (K), decorative pattern color change presentation C: FIGS. 112(C) to (H)) in which the first and second patterns can be changed to a dark blue (third color) similar to the bright blue (first color). According to this configuration, in the specific performance, the first and second symbols can be changed from a bright blue (first color) to a dark blue (third color) similar to the bright blue, and the change in the color of the symbols can contribute to eliminating monotony in the performance of the changing symbols (changing display). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol color change effect A of FIG. 110 , the decorative symbol color change effect B of FIG. 111 , and the decorative symbol color change effect C of FIG. 112 , the bright blue (first color) is the same color as the color of the blue spherical variable icon 9C. The blue spherical icon is always flashing, and when it is off, it is dark blue, and when it is on, it is bright blue. It gradually changes from off to on, and then gradually changes from on to off, and then gradually changes from on to off, and finally changes from on to off, and finally changes from on to off. In other words, because the blue spherical variable icon 9C is flashing, it may flash the same color as the bright blue (first color) of the even numbers "2,""4,""6," and "8" (first symbols). According to this configuration, the blue spherical variable icon 9C can be displayed in a flashing manner, and the color of the blue spherical variable icon 9C can be partially linked to the colors of the even numbers "2,""4,""6," and "8" (first pattern).

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative pattern color change effect A in Fig. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B in Fig. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C in Fig. 112, the specific effect starts with a predetermined combination of the first and second symbols, in which the left decorative pattern 8L is an odd number "5" (second symbol) and the right decorative pattern is an even number "4" (first symbol). With this configuration, the start of the specific effect is a predetermined combination of the first and second symbols, so the start time of the specific effect can be clearly communicated to the player.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol color change presentation C of FIG. 112, when a reach is formed with an even number "6" (first symbol) having a dark blue color in the specific presentation, the even number "6" (first symbol) can be changed from dark blue (third color) to light blue (first color) again. With this configuration, when a reach is formed with the first symbol in the specific presentation, the color change can make the reach formation more noticeable, and the color change can contribute to giving the player a sense of increased expectation of a win.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative symbol color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative symbol color change effect C of FIG. 112, when a specific effect ends, the even numbers "2,""4,""6," and "8" (first symbols) that have been changed to dark blue (third color) are changed back to light blue (first color), and the odd numbers "1,""3,""5," and "9" (second symbols) except for the odd number "7" that has been changed to dark blue (third color) are changed back to light green (second color). This configuration contributes to a seamless transition from the end of a specific effect to another effect.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol color-changing effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative symbol color-changing effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative symbol color-changing effect C of FIG. 112, the odd numbers "1,""3,""5," and "9" (second symbols) further include the odd number "7" which is a bright red (fourth color) different from the bright blue (first color), bright green (second color), and dark blue (third color), respectively. In the special effect, the odd number "7" (second symbol) which is a bright red (fourth color) is not changed to dark blue (third color). This configuration allows the odd number "7" (second symbol) which does not change color to be the only symbol in the special effect, making the odd number "7" (second symbol) more noticeable, which contributes to increasing the player's anticipation of a win when the odd number "7" (second symbol) appears in the special effect.

[Modification]
Below are some modified examples of decorative pattern color change effects.
[Modification 1]
The decorative pattern color change effect A in Fig. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B in Fig. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C in Fig. 112 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, they are performed in a game state known as a left-handed hit. However, they may also be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21. In other words, they may also be performed in a game state known as a right-handed hit.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative pattern color change presentation A in FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change presentation B in FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change presentation C in FIG. 112, the various symbols are number symbols, and no character images are provided. However, character images are provided only for the odd numbers "1,""3,""5," and "9" (second symbols). In the special presentations (FIGS. 110(C)-(H) for decorative pattern color change presentation A, 111(C)-(K) for decorative pattern color change presentation B, and 112(C)-(H) for decorative pattern color change presentation C), the character images provided for the odd numbers "1,""3,""5," and "9" (second symbols) may be removed. In this way, since it is not the character images but the numerical portions (odd and even numbers) that undergo color changes in the special presentations, removing the character images makes it easier for players to understand and emphasize the color change of the numerical portions. In addition, when a character image is provided for the odd number "7" (second symbol), the character image provided for the odd number "7" (second symbol) is not deleted in the special effect. This allows the odd number "7" (second symbol) to be the only symbol provided with a character image in the special effect, making the odd number "7" (second symbol) more noticeable and contributing to giving the player an increased sense of expectation of winning when the odd number "7" (second symbol) appears in the special effect.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern color change performance A in Fig. 110, the decorative pattern color change performance B in Fig. 111, and the decorative pattern color change performance C in Fig. 112, a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 and a blue spherical reserve icon 9A is displayed at the reserve display position 9Ad due to a pre-reading performance, suggesting a notice that the decorative pattern color change performance will start. However, a notice that the decorative pattern color change performance will start may also be suggested when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 and a red spherical reserve icon 9A is displayed at the reserve display position 9Ad due to a pre-reading performance. In this case, in a specific presentation, except for the odd number "7", the odd numbers "1", "3", "5", and "9" and the even numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8" may be forcibly changed to dark blue, similar to the decorative pattern color change presentation A in Figure 110, the decorative pattern color change presentation B in Figure 111, and the decorative pattern color change presentation C in Figure 112, or, since the red spherical reserve icon 9A has a higher expectation of winning than the blue spherical reserve icon 9A, the odd numbers "1", "3", "5", and "9" and the even numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8" may be forcibly changed to bright red so that they are the same color as the bright red of the odd number "7".

[Modification 4]
In the decorative pattern color change performance A in Fig. 110, the decorative pattern color change performance B in Fig. 111, and the decorative pattern color change performance C in Fig. 112, when the specific performance ends, the even numbers "2,""4,""6," and "8" (first patterns) that have been changed to dark blue (third color) are changed back to light blue (first color), and the odd numbers "1,""3,""5," and "9" (second patterns) except for the odd number "7" that has been changed to dark blue (third color) are changed back to light green (second color). However, the even numbers "2,""4,""6," and "8" (first patterns) that have been changed to dark blue (third color) may be maintained as dark blue without being changed to light blue (first color), or the odd numbers "1,""3,""5," and "9" (second patterns) except for the odd number "7" that has been changed to dark blue (third color) may be maintained as dark blue without being changed to light green (second color). This makes it possible to increase the variety of effects that can be given after the specific effect has ended, and to provide the player with a variety of effects depending on the color of the symbols.

[Modification 5]
In the decorative pattern color change effect A in FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B in FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C in FIG. 112, in the specific effect, the even numbers "2,""4,""6," and "8" (first pattern) are forcibly changed from light blue to dark blue, and the odd numbers "1,""3,""5," and "9" (second pattern) except for the odd number "7" are forcibly changed from light green to dark blue. However, in the specific effect, the even numbers "2,""4,""6," and "8" (first pattern) may be forcibly changed from light blue to dark green, and the odd numbers "1,""3,""5," and "9" (second pattern) except for the odd number "7" may be forcibly changed from light green to dark green. Note that light green and dark green are similar colors in the green family.

[Modification 6]
In the decorative pattern color change effect A in Fig. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B in Fig. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C in Fig. 112, in the specific effect, the number pattern that was temporarily stopped (e.g., the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4") becomes semitransparent and moves rapidly forward to escape from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, and as a result, an opaque number pattern with a dark blue color (e.g., the number "5" as the right decorative pattern 8R) appears from behind and is temporarily stopped. However, the display may also be such that the size of the number pattern (e.g., the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4") gradually increases as the temporarily stopped number pattern (e.g., the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4") becomes semitransparent and moves rapidly forward. In this way, the provisionally stopped number patterns become semi-transparent and can rapidly move forward while becoming larger, so that it is possible to realize an expression in which the provisionally stopped number patterns approach the player, and a dynamic performance can be provided to the player by the high-speed movement of the number patterns.

[Modification 7]
In the specific effects of the decorative pattern color change effect A in Fig. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B in Fig. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C in Fig. 112, the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are slightly larger than the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the normal background image. However, the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R in the specific effect may be the same as the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the normal background image, or the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R in the specific effect may be slightly smaller than the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the normal background image.

[Modification 8]
In the decorative pattern color change presentation A in Fig. 110, the decorative pattern color change presentation B in Fig. 111, and the decorative pattern color change presentation C in Fig. 112, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a with the same color, dark blue. However, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may also be displayed on the display screen 7a with the same color, bright blue. This bright blue is the same color as the bright blue of the even numbers "2,""4,""6," and "8" in the normal background image.

[Modification 9]
The decorative pattern color change effect A in Figure 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B in Figure 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C in Figure 112 may not have some of the effects described, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
Aspect C7-1
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
Among the variable displays using one or more types of a first pattern having a first color and a second pattern having a second color different from the first color, a specific effect can be executed in which the first pattern and the second pattern can be changed to a third color similar to the first color.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect C7-2
The gaming machine according to aspect C7-1,
The first color may be the same color as the color of the variable icon.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect C7-3
A gaming machine according to aspect C7-1 or C7-2,
The specific performance starts from a predetermined combination of the first symbol and the second symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect C7-4
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C7-1 to C7-3,
In the specific performance, when a reach is formed by the first symbol, the first symbol may be changed from the third color to the first color again.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect C7-5
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C7-1 to C7-4,
Only the second pattern has a character image provided,
In the specific performance, the character image provided on the second symbol is deleted.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect C7-6
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C7-1 to C7-5,
When the specific performance ends, the first symbol that has been changed to the third color may be changed back to the first color, and the second symbol that has been changed to the third color may be changed back to the second color.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect C7-7
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C7-1 to C7-6,
The second pattern further includes a fourth color different from the first color, the second color, and the third color,
In the specific performance, the second symbol having the fourth color is not changed to the third color.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Special symbol effects A to C are explained below using Figures 113 to 115. These special symbol effects can be executed during the effect symbol variation effect. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a special symbol effect, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Special pattern effect A]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol effect A. The special symbol effect A is executed in a low probability low base state where the game progresses by hitting left. Also, the special symbol effect A is executed using a special effect symbol. Therefore, first, the special effect symbol will be explained.

The special effect symbols are made up of number images "0-9," with the odd number images "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" being smaller in size than the even number images "0, 2, 4, 6, 8." When the odd number images form a predetermined pattern (doublet) and a jackpot is announced, a transition to a high-probability, high-base game state is confirmed after the jackpot game is played.

First, as shown in Figure 113 (A), the change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols begin to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reservation and the corresponding changing image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 113 (B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the left symbol 8L temporarily stops. The left symbol 8L moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, the left symbol 8L is shown temporarily stopping at "4". At this time, the symbol "3" is displayed below the symbol "4", and the symbol "5" is displayed above the symbol "4". These symbols "3" and "5" become hidden or semi-transparent almost immediately after the temporary stop. In particular, of the number images "0 to 9" that make up the left symbol 8L, the number images indicating odd numbers are smaller than the number images indicating even numbers.

Next, as shown in Figure 113 (C), a right symbol movement effect is executed. The right symbol movement effect is an effect in which the right symbol 8R moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, as indicated by arrow Y. Here, the symbol "3" is moving near the center, with the symbol "2" displayed below the symbol "3" and the symbol "4" displayed above the symbol "3." In particular, of the number images "0 to 9" that make up the right symbol 8R, the number images that indicate odd numbers are smaller than the number images that indicate even numbers.

Next, as shown in Figure 113 (D), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, following the left effect symbol 8L, the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops at "4". At this time, the symbol "3" is displayed below the symbol "4", and the symbol "5" is displayed above the symbol "4". These symbols "3" and "5" become hidden or semi-transparent almost simultaneously with the temporary stop.

Next, as shown in Figure 113 (E), a middle symbol movement effect is executed. The middle symbol movement effect is an effect in which the middle symbol 8C moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, as indicated by arrow Y. Here, symbol "2" is moving near the center, with symbol "1" displayed below symbol "2" and symbol "3" displayed above symbol "2." In particular, of the number images "0 to 9" that make up middle symbol 8C, the number images that indicate odd numbers are smaller than the number images that indicate even numbers.

Next, as shown in Figure 113 (F), a middle symbol stirring effect is executed. The middle symbol stirring effect is an effect in which, in a normal reach, the middle symbol 8C moving in the direction of arrow Y moves in a stirring manner (for example, moves in a vibrating manner) to see whether it will stop at "4". Here, the symbol "4" is moving near the center, with the symbol "3" displayed below the symbol "4" and the symbol "5" displayed above the symbol "4".

Next, as shown in Figure 113 (G), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. If the ally character CRA wins this battle performance, it is a win.
Next, as shown in Figure 113 (H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (win), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a winning state. Here, the left and right center effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all shown to have fixedly stopped at "4".

[Special pattern effect B]
114 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol effect B. The special symbol effect B is another example of the special symbol effect A.
First, as shown in Figure 114 (A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols start to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reserved and the corresponding changing image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 114 (B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the left symbol 8L temporarily stops. The left symbol 8L moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, the left symbol 8L is shown temporarily stopping at "4". At this time, the symbol "3" is displayed below the symbol "4", and the symbol "5" is displayed above the symbol "4". These symbols "3" and "5" become hidden or semi-transparent almost immediately after the temporary stop. In particular, of the number images "0 to 9" that make up the left symbol 8L, the number images indicating odd numbers are smaller than the number images indicating even numbers.

Next, as shown in Figure 114 (C), a right symbol movement effect is executed. The right symbol movement effect is an effect in which the right symbol 8R moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, as indicated by arrow Y. Here, symbol "3" is moving near the center, with symbol "2" displayed below symbol "3" and symbol "4" displayed above symbol "3." In particular, of the number images "0 to 9" that make up right symbol 8R, the number images that indicate odd numbers are smaller than the number images that indicate even numbers.

Next, as shown in Figure 114 (D), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, following the left effect symbol 8L, the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops at "4". At this time, the symbol "3" is displayed below the symbol "4", and the symbol "5" is displayed above the symbol "4". These symbols "3" and "5" become hidden or semi-transparent almost simultaneously with the temporary stop.

Next, as shown in Figure 114 (E), a center symbol movement effect is executed. The center symbol movement effect is an effect in which the center symbol 8C moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, as indicated by arrow Y. Here, symbol "2" is moving near the center, with symbol "1" displayed below symbol "2" and symbol "3" displayed above symbol "2." In particular, of the number images "0-9" that make up center symbol 8C, the number images indicating odd numbers are smaller than the number images indicating even numbers. Furthermore, the number images "0-9" that make up center symbol 8C are each smaller than the number images "0-9" that make up symbol 8L and 8R on the left and right.

Next, as shown in Figure 114 (F), a middle symbol stirring effect is executed. The middle symbol stirring effect is an effect in which, in a normal reach, the middle symbol 8C moving in the direction of arrow Y moves in a stirring manner (for example, moves in a vibrating manner) to see whether it will stop at "4". Here, the symbol "4" is moving near the center, with the symbol "3" displayed below the symbol "4" and the symbol "5" displayed above the symbol "4".

Next, as shown in Figure 114 (G), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. If the ally character CRA wins this battle performance, it is a win.
Next, as shown in Figure 113 (H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (win), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a winning state. Here, the left and right center effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all shown to have fixedly stopped at "4".

[Special pattern effect C]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol effect C. The special symbol effect C is executed in a high probability high base state where the game progresses by hitting right. Also, the special symbol effect C is executed using a normal effect symbol. Therefore, first, the normal effect symbol will be explained.

Normal presentation symbols are made up of number images "0-9," all of which are the same size. When the number images representing odd numbers appear in a predetermined pattern (doublets) and a jackpot is announced, a transition (continuation) to a high-probability, high-base game state is confirmed after the jackpot game is played.

First, as shown in Figure 115 (A), the change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols begin to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, three reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation and the corresponding changing image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 115 (B), a confirmed stop effect (miss) is executed. In a confirmed stop effect (miss), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a miss mode. Here, the left effect symbol 8L stops at "4," the middle effect symbol 8C stops at "1," and the right effect symbol 8R stops at "5." At this time, the variable image 9C disappears, and three reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special reserved symbol are displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 115 (C), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols begin to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. At this time, the reserve is shifted, and two reserve images 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reserve and the corresponding change image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 115 (D), a confirmed stop effect (miss) is executed. In a confirmed stop effect (miss), the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a miss mode. Here, the left effect pattern 8L stops at "0", the middle effect pattern 8C stops at "3", and the right effect pattern 8R stops at "6". At this time, the variable image 9C disappears, and two reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special reserved pattern are displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 115 (E), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols begin to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. At this time, the reserve is shifted, and one reserve image 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reserve and the corresponding change image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 115 (F), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both temporarily stop at "4". At this time, one reserved image 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reserved and its variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 115 (G), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. If the ally character CRA wins this battle performance, it is a win.
Next, as shown in Figure 115 (H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (win), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a winning state. Here, the left and right center effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all shown as "4" and fixed and stopped.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of special effect patterns:
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when looking at the number images of the left effect symbol 8L, the right effect symbol 8R, and the center effect symbol 8C, certain number images are smaller than the remaining number images (Fig. 113(B)(C)(D)(E)(F), Fig. 114(B)(C)(D)(E)(F)). This configuration creates changes in the fluctuations of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which can increase the interest in the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when looking at the number images of the left effect symbol 8L, the right effect symbol 8R, and the center effect symbol 8C, the number images indicating odd numbers are smaller than the number images indicating even numbers (Fig. 113(B)(C)(D)(E)(F), Fig. 114(B)(C)(D)(E)(F)). This configuration creates variation in the fluctuations of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which can increase the interest in the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number image that determines the transition to a high probability, high base state in the event of a jackpot is smaller than the remaining number images (Fig. 113 (B) (C) (D) (E) (F), Fig. 114 (B) (C) (D) (E) (F)). This configuration creates changes in the fluctuations of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, making the game more interesting.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number images "0 to 9" that make up the center effect symbol 8C are smaller than the number images "0 to 9" that make up the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R (Fig. 114 (B) (C) (D) (E) (F)). With this configuration, the fluctuations in the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R create more variety, which can increase the excitement of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, there are cases where the special effect symbols are used to display the variable display (Fig. 113, Fig. 114) and cases where the normal effect symbols are used to display the variable display (Fig. 115). With this configuration, the variation of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R creates more variety, which can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in a low probability low base state, a variable display is made with a special effect symbol (Fig. 113, Fig. 114), and in a high probability high base state, a variable display is made with a normal effect symbol (Fig. 115). With this configuration, the variation of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R changes depending on the game state, which can increase the interest of the game.

[Modification]
The following are variations of the special symbol effects.
[Modification 1]
In the above example, the size of the number image representing an odd number is smaller than the size of the number image representing an even number in the special effect pattern. In contrast, the size of the number image representing an odd number may be larger than the size of the number image representing an even number.

[Modification 2]
In the above example, in the special effect pattern, the number image that determines the transition to a high probability high base state when a jackpot is hit is smaller than the remaining number images. In contrast, the number image that determines the transition to a high probability high base state when a jackpot is hit may be larger than the remaining number images.

[Modification 3]
In the above description, the special symbol effect C (FIG. 115) is executed in a high probability high base state, but this is not limited to this. That is, the special symbol effect C may be executed in any of the game states of a low probability low base state (normal game state), a high probability high base state (probability variable game state), and a low probability low base state (time-limited game state), and the special symbol effect A (special symbol effect B) may be executed in any of the game states.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect C8-1]
A gaming machine that notifies the winning or losing result by changing and stopping a plurality of rows of performance symbols,
The performance pattern is composed of number images,
In each of the plurality of columns, a specific number image among the number images is displayed in a variable manner using a special effect pattern in which the specific number image is smaller than the remaining number images.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C8-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C8-1,
the specific number image is a number image representing an odd number, and the remaining number images are number images representing even numbers;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C8-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C8-1,
When the winning result is notified as a win, the specific number image is a number image that determines a transition to a specific game state through a special game in which a game ball can be acquired.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C8-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C8-1 to C8-3,
a specific column among the plurality of columns has a smaller size of the specific number image and the remaining number images than the remaining columns;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C8-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C8-1 to C8-4,
In each of the plurality of columns, there are cases where the variable display is performed with the special effect pattern, and cases where the variable display is performed with a normal effect pattern in which a specific number image and the remaining number images among the number images are of the same size.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C8-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect C8-5,
In the first game state, a variable display is performed using the special effect symbols, and in the second game state, a variable display is performed using the normal effect symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative pattern visibility change effects A to C are explained below using Figures 116 to 118. In Figures 116 to 118, for example, the first movable part 14, the second movable part 15, and other movable parts arranged around the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted for clarity of the drawings.

This decorative symbol visibility change effect is performed while the decorative symbol is in a variable display state (during variable display). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (e.g., a variable display start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute a decorative symbol visibility change effect, it reads corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays an image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Furthermore, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (e.g., a variable display start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and changes the position and light emission mode of the left-side movable element 14L and right-side movable element 14R of the first movable element 14 provided on the gaming board 2.

Here, we will first explain decorative pattern visibility change effect A, then decorative pattern visibility change effect B, and then decorative pattern visibility change effect C.

[Decorative pattern visibility change effect A]
The decorative pattern visibility change effect A will be described with reference to Fig. 116. Fig. 116 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern visibility change effect A. The decorative pattern visibility change effect A is performed during the decorative pattern variation effect (during the variation display).

First, as shown in Figure 116 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a three-dimensional left decorative pattern 8L, a three-dimensional center decorative pattern 8C, and a three-dimensional right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in each of the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr extending from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a variable effect (variable display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") begins in a display mode in which the reels are rotated.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except for the number "7" all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the decorative pattern change effect (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state as it gradually increases its speed from a slow speed, changing at high speed. This allows the background image located behind the decorative pattern to be seen through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changing from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, and appears temporarily stopped, or stopped (temporarily stopped, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R currently fluctuating as the first special symbol reserve is consumed are displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The variable icons 9C and the variable display position 9Cd are referred to as the variable display area. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd, i.e., the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display area, a reserve display area is provided for the first special symbol reserve. In this reserve display area, reserve icons can be displayed in each of the four reserve display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), allowing a maximum of four reserve icons to be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving towards the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad. Here, the area made up of the variable display area and the hold display area is referred to as the variable and hold display area THA. The variable and hold display area THA is formed as a transparent area.

The variable display area and the hold display area are transparent areas, allowing the background image behind to be seen through the variable display area and the hold display area. When the variable display position 9Cd is displayed in the variable display area, the background image behind cannot be seen through the variable display position 9Cd, and when the variable icon 9C is displayed in the variable display area, the background image behind cannot be seen through the variable icon 9C. When the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the background image behind cannot be seen through the hold display position 9Ad, and when the hold icon 9A is displayed in the hold display area, the background image behind cannot be seen through the hold icon 9A.

The variable area 8Lr, which extends from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a and in which the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed (variable display), overlaps with the variable and hold display area THA at both the front and back, and is positioned behind the variable and hold display area THA. Because the hold display area is a transparent area, the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L can be seen through the hold display area. Note that when the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L cannot be seen through the hold display position 9Ad. When the hold icon 9A is not displayed in the hold display area (i.e., when there are no game balls (hold balls) that have not yet been used in play), the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L can be seen through the hold display area. However, when multiple hold icons 9A are displayed in the hold display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L cannot be seen through the hold icon 9A.

The variable area 8Cr, which extends from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a and in which the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed (variable display), has an area that overlaps with the variable and hold display area THA at the front and back, and is positioned behind the variable and hold display area THA. As a result, because the hold display area is a transparent area, the variable effect (variable display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C can be seen through the hold display area. Note that when the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C cannot be seen through the hold display position 9Ad, and when the hold icon 9A is displayed in the hold display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C cannot be seen through the hold icon 9A.

In addition, because the variable display area is a transparent area, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C can be seen through the variable display area. However, when the variable display position 9Cd is displayed in the variable display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C cannot be seen through the variable display position 9Cd, and when the variable icon 9C is displayed in the variable display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C cannot be seen through the variable icon 9C.

The variable area 8Rr, which extends from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a where the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed (variable display), does not overlap with the variable and pending display area THA at either the front or back. This allows the variable display (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R to be viewed without being obstructed by the variable and pending display area THA.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icons are displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one hold icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. For the sake of convenience, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol change presentation (change display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the top center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, at the top center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, and are therefore difficult to distinguish from the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, these numbers are positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with the other images displayed behind them, so visibility is not obstructed by the other images.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icons are further set with increasing expectations of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the decorative pattern change effect (changing display) begins in Figure 116 (A), then, as shown in Figure 116 (B), a mini-character effect area MHG appears on the display screen 7a, surrounded by a smooth, bow-shaped curve (an arc-shaped curve) connecting the center of the left side of the display screen 7a (a position equivalent to half the distance dimension of the left side of the display screen 7a) to the right center of the bottom side (a position from the left of the bottom side of the display screen 7a equivalent to two-thirds the distance dimension of the bottom side of the display screen 7a), the left side of the display screen 7a, and the bottom side of the display screen 7a. Various mini-characters appear in the mini-character effect area MHG, and effects using the mini-characters are performed.

This mini character presentation area MHG overlaps with variable area 8Lr where the left decorative pattern 8L is presented (displayed) in a variable manner, variable area 8Cr where the middle decorative pattern 8C is presented (displayed) in a variable manner, and variable area 8Rr where the right decorative pattern 8R is presented (displayed) in a variable manner, and is positioned in front of these variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr, and also overlaps with the variable and pending display area THA in a variable manner, and is positioned behind the variable and pending display area THA. In other words, mini character presentation area MHG is positioned between variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr and the variable and pending display area THA.

The miniature character presentation area MHG is provided with a colored, opaque background image. Therefore, when the miniature character presentation area MHG appears, in the area where the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R overlap with the miniature character presentation area MHG, the variable presentation (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R cannot be seen through the miniature character presentation area MHG. In contrast, because the variable and pending display area THA is positioned in front of the miniature character presentation area MHG, visibility is not obstructed by the miniature character presentation area MHG, even when the miniature character presentation area MHG appears. In this way, the change and hold display area THA is positioned so that it overlaps with the change areas 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and the mini character performance area MHG, but the change display position 9Cd, hold display position 9Ad, change icon 9C, and hold icon 9A in the change and hold display area THA are not difficult to see due to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, and the mini character performance area MHG.

Note that although mini-characters appearing in the mini-character presentation area MHG are positioned in front of the mini-character presentation area MHG, they are positioned behind the change and hold display area THA, so even if a mini-character appears in the mini-character presentation area MHG, the visibility of the change and hold display area THA is not obstructed by the mini-character.

Next, as shown in Figure 116 (C), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the bright green number "1," and the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R continues. At the position of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L, the lower portion of the left decorative pattern 8L (part of the left decorative pattern 8L) is covered by the mini-character effect area MHG located in front of the left decorative pattern 8L, and therefore the lower portion of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L (part of the left decorative pattern 8L) is covered by the mini-character effect area MHG located in front of the left decorative pattern 8L and cannot be seen.

After that, as shown in Figure 116 (D), a colored, opaque ally character CRA appears as a mini character in the mini character performance area MHG and moves around. When the ally character CRA appears in the mini character performance area MHG, at a predetermined timing, the variable icon 9C can be changed to another icon by the ally character CRA's sword. Here, the white spherical variable icon 9C is changed to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon by the ally character CRA's sword, and the change of the variable icon 9C is successful. However, there are also cases where the white spherical variable icon 9C does not change to another icon by the ally character CRA's sword, and the change of the variable icon 9C fails.

When an ally character CRA appears in the miniature character presentation area MHG, the upper body of the ally character CRA may be displayed on the display screen 7a beyond the miniature character presentation area MHG, straddling the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr of the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. For example, in FIG. 116(D), when the ally character CRA appears in the miniature character presentation area MHG, the upper body of the ally character CRA covers the portion of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L that is not covered by the miniature character presentation area MHG. In other words, when the ally character CRA is displayed straddling the variable area 8Lr of the left decorative pattern 8L and the miniature character presentation area MHG, the exposed portion of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L that is not covered by the miniature character presentation area MHG overlaps with the ally character CRA and becomes invisible. Furthermore, as the ally character CRA moves around, the exposed part of the left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped and not covered by the mini character performance area MHG does not overlap with the ally character CRA, and the exposed part of the left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped and not covered by the mini character performance area MHG can be seen without being obstructed by the ally character CRA.

After that, as shown in Figure 116 (E), the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at the bright green number "1," the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative symbol 8C continues, and a reach is formed. The position of the temporarily stopped right decorative symbol 8R is not covered by the mini-character effect area MHG located in front of the right decorative symbol 8R, so the entire temporarily stopped right decorative symbol 8R can be seen. Even at this point, the ally character CRA may move around in the mini-character effect area MHG, and the upper half of the ally character CRA may be displayed on the display screen 7a beyond the mini-character effect area MHG, spanning the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr of the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

In addition, if the right decorative pattern 8R does not temporarily stop at the bright green number "1" but temporarily stops at, for example, the bright green number "9", and the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues and no reach is formed, the mini character effect area MHG will disappear from the display screen 7a, and then when the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R will not stop at the same pattern, which may result in a miss.

Also, if the right decorative pattern 8R is not temporarily stopped at the bright green number "1" but is temporarily stopped at, for example, the bright green number "9," the variable performance (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues, and a reach is not formed, an ally character CRA moving around in the mini character performance area MHG may jump over the mini character performance area MHG and use the sword of the ally character CRA to send the number "9" to the bottom of the variable area 8Rr in the variable area 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R (or straddling the variable area 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R and the variable area 8Cr of the middle decorative pattern 8C), and then pull in the number "1" from above the variable area 8Rr and temporarily stop it, forming a reach, and then the ally character CRA may return to the mini character performance area MHG again.

Next, as shown in Figure 116 (F), when the mini character performance area MHG disappears from the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA also disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variable performance (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues. This ends decorative pattern visibility change performance A. Note that if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the mini character performance area MHG displayed while the decorative pattern visibility change performance A is being performed, the lower portions of the left decorative pattern 8L and middle decorative pattern 8C (part of the left decorative pattern 8L and part of the middle decorative pattern 8C) of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are covered by the mini character performance area MHG and cannot be seen.

After that, as shown in Figure 116 (G), when the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a for a predetermined period of time (for example, approximately 1.5 seconds) (it may be displayed flashing), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the reserved icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

When the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, with the temporary display of the bright red number "1" stopped, as shown in Figure 116 (H), and the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues.

Before the appearance of ally character CRA in FIG. 116(G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R were both temporarily displayed as the bright green number "1" in FIG. 116(F). In contrast, after the appearance of ally character CRA in FIG. 116(G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are both temporarily displayed as the bright red number "1" (the same color as the number "7") in FIG. 116(H). This increases the likelihood of a jackpot by changing the color of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R from their normal color (bright green) to the bright red color of the number "7" (i.e., by changing the color of the decorative pattern). Note that when a reach is formed with the bright red number "7," the likelihood of a jackpot is preset to be higher than when a reach is formed with other numbers.

In Figure 116 (H), by changing the color of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R from their normal color (bright green) to bright red, the same color as the number "7" (i.e., changing the color of the decorative pattern), an image suggesting one of five levels of likelihood of a jackpot (for example, five facial images of ally character CRA may be lined up, with three facial images in yellow, half in yellow and half in black, and the remaining one in black, suggesting an likelihood of a jackpot of 3.5 out of five levels) may be displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, various effects may continue, and if the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R stop and display in the same pattern, a jackpot is awarded and the jackpot game (jackpot effect) begins. However, if the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R do not stop and display in the same pattern, a miss occurs.

[Decorative pattern visibility change effect B]
Next, the decorative pattern visibility change effect B will be described with reference to Fig. 117. Fig. 117 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern visibility change effect B. The decorative pattern visibility change effect B is performed during the decorative pattern variation effect (during the variation display).

First, as shown in Figure 117(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a three-dimensional left decorative pattern 8L, a three-dimensional center decorative pattern 8C, and a three-dimensional right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in each of the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr extending from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") begins in a display mode in which the reels are rotated.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except for the number "7" all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the decorative pattern change effect (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state as it gradually increases its speed from a slow speed, changing at high speed. This allows the background image located behind the decorative pattern to be seen through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changing from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, and appears temporarily stopped, or stopped (temporarily stopped, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R currently fluctuating as the first special symbol reserve is consumed are displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The variable icons 9C and the variable display position 9Cd are referred to as the variable display area. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd, i.e., the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display area, a reserve display area is provided for the first special symbol reserve. In this reserve display area, reserve icons can be displayed in each of the four reserve display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), allowing a maximum of four reserve icons to be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving towards the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad. Here, the area made up of the variable display area and the hold display area is referred to as the variable and hold display area THA. The variable and hold display area THA is formed as a transparent area.

The variable display area and the hold display area are transparent areas, allowing the background image behind to be seen through the variable display area and the hold display area. When the variable display position 9Cd is displayed in the variable display area, the background image behind cannot be seen through the variable display position 9Cd, and when the variable icon 9C is displayed in the variable display area, the background image behind cannot be seen through the variable icon 9C. When the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the background image behind cannot be seen through the hold display position 9Ad, and when the hold icon 9A is displayed in the hold display area, the background image behind cannot be seen through the hold icon 9A.

The variable area 8Lr, which extends from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a and in which the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed (variable display), overlaps with the variable and hold display area THA at both the front and back, and is positioned behind the variable and hold display area THA. Because the hold display area is a transparent area, the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L can be seen through the hold display area. Note that when the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L cannot be seen through the hold display position 9Ad. When the hold icon 9A is not displayed in the hold display area (i.e., when there are no game balls (hold balls) that have not yet been used in play), the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L can be seen through the hold display area. However, when multiple hold icons 9A are displayed in the hold display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L cannot be seen through the hold icon 9A.

The variable area 8Cr, which extends from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a and in which the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed (variable display), has an area that overlaps with the variable and hold display area THA at the front and back, and is positioned behind the variable and hold display area THA. As a result, because the hold display area is a transparent area, the variable effect (variable display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C can be seen through the hold display area. Note that when the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C cannot be seen through the hold display position 9Ad, and when the hold icon 9A is displayed in the hold display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C cannot be seen through the hold icon 9A.

In addition, because the variable display area is a transparent area, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C can be seen through the variable display area. However, when the variable display position 9Cd is displayed in the variable display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C cannot be seen through the variable display position 9Cd, and when the variable icon 9C is displayed in the variable display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C cannot be seen through the variable icon 9C.

The variable area 8Rr, which extends from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a where the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed (variable display), does not overlap with the variable and pending display area THA at either the front or back. This allows the variable display (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R to be viewed without being obstructed by the variable and pending display area THA.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icons are displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one hold icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. For the sake of convenience, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol change presentation (change display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the top center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, at the top center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, and are therefore difficult to distinguish from the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, these numbers are positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with the other images displayed behind them, so visibility is not obstructed by the other images.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icons are further set with increasing expectations of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the decorative pattern change effect (changing display) begins in Figure 117(A), a mini-character effect area MHG appears on the display screen 7a, surrounded by a smooth curve with a gentle concave shape connecting the center of the left side of the display screen 7a (a position corresponding to half the distance dimension of the left side of the display screen 7a) to the center of the right side of the display screen (a position corresponding to half the distance dimension of the left side of the display screen 7a), as well as the left side of the display screen 7a, the bottom side of the display screen 7a, and the right side of the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 117(B). Various mini-characters appear in the mini-character effect area MHG, and effects using the mini-characters are performed.

This mini character presentation area MHG overlaps at the front and rear with variable area 8Lr where the left decorative pattern 8L is presented (displayed) as a variable effect, variable area 8Cr where the middle decorative pattern 8C is presented (displayed) as a variable effect, and variable area 8Rr where the right decorative pattern 8R is presented (displayed) as a variable effect, and is positioned in front of these variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr, and also overlaps at the front and rear with the variable and pending display area THA, and is positioned behind the variable and pending display area THA. In other words, mini character presentation area MHG is positioned between variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr and the variable and pending display area THA.

The miniature character presentation area MHG is provided with a colored, opaque background image. Therefore, when the miniature character presentation area MHG appears, in the area where the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R overlap with the miniature character presentation area MHG, the variable presentation (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R cannot be seen through the miniature character presentation area MHG. In contrast, because the variable and pending display area THA is positioned in front of the miniature character presentation area MHG, visibility is not obstructed by the miniature character presentation area MHG, even when the miniature character presentation area MHG appears. In this way, the change and hold display area THA is positioned so that it overlaps with the change areas 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and the mini character performance area MHG, but the change display position 9Cd, hold display position 9Ad, change icon 9C, and hold icon 9A in the change and hold display area THA are not difficult to see due to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, and the mini character performance area MHG.

Note that although mini-characters appearing in the mini-character presentation area MHG are positioned in front of the mini-character presentation area MHG, they are positioned behind the change and hold display area THA, so even if a mini-character appears in the mini-character presentation area MHG, the visibility of the change and hold display area THA is not obstructed by the mini-character.

Next, as shown in Figure 117 (C), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the bright green number "1," and the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R continues. At the position of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L, the lower portion of the left decorative pattern 8L (part of the left decorative pattern 8L) is covered by the mini-character effect area MHG located in front of the left decorative pattern 8L, and therefore the lower portion of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L (part of the left decorative pattern 8L) is covered by the mini-character effect area MHG located in front of the left decorative pattern 8L and cannot be seen.

After that, as shown in Figure 117 (D), a colored, opaque ally character CRA appears as a mini character in the mini character performance area MHG and moves around. When the ally character CRA appears in the mini character performance area MHG, at a predetermined timing, the variable icon 9C can be changed to another icon by the ally character CRA's sword. Here, the white spherical variable icon 9C is changed to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon by the ally character CRA's sword, and the change of the variable icon 9C is successful. However, there are also cases where the white spherical variable icon 9C does not change to another icon by the ally character CRA's sword, and the change of the variable icon 9C fails.

When an ally character CRA appears in the miniature character presentation area MHG, the upper body of the ally character CRA may be displayed on the display screen 7a beyond the miniature character presentation area MHG, straddling the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr of the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. For example, in FIG. 117(D), when the ally character CRA appears in the miniature character presentation area MHG, the upper body of the ally character CRA covers the portion of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L that is not covered by the miniature character presentation area MHG. In other words, when the ally character CRA is displayed straddling the variable area 8Lr of the left decorative pattern 8L and the miniature character presentation area MHG, the exposed portion of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L that is not covered by the miniature character presentation area MHG overlaps with the ally character CRA and becomes invisible. Furthermore, as the ally character CRA moves around, the exposed part of the left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped and not covered by the mini character performance area MHG does not overlap with the ally character CRA, and the exposed part of the left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped and not covered by the mini character performance area MHG can be seen without being obstructed by the ally character CRA.

After that, as shown in Figure 117(E), the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at the bright green number "1," the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative symbol 8C continues, and a reach is formed. At the position of the temporarily stopped right decorative symbol 8R, the lower portion of the right decorative symbol 8R (part of the right decorative symbol 8R) is covered by the miniature character effect area MHG located in front of the right decorative symbol 8R. Therefore, the lower portion of the temporarily stopped right decorative symbol 8R (part of the right decorative symbol 8R) is obscured by the miniature character effect area MHG located in front of the right decorative symbol 8R and cannot be seen. Even at this point, the ally character CRA may move around within the miniature character effect area MHG, and the upper half of the ally character CRA may be displayed on the display screen 7a beyond the miniature character effect area MHG, spanning the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr of the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R.

In addition, if the right decorative pattern 8R does not temporarily stop at the bright green number "1" but temporarily stops at, for example, the bright green number "9", and the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues and no reach is formed, the mini character effect area MHG will disappear from the display screen 7a, and then when the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R will not stop at the same pattern, which may result in a miss.

Also, if the right decorative pattern 8R is not temporarily stopped at the bright green number "1" but is temporarily stopped at, for example, the bright green number "9," the variable performance (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues, and a reach is not formed, an ally character CRA moving around in the mini character performance area MHG may jump over the mini character performance area MHG and use the sword of the ally character CRA to send the number "9" to the bottom of the variable area 8Rr in the variable area 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R (or straddling the variable area 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R and the variable area 8Cr of the middle decorative pattern 8C), and then pull in the number "1" from above the variable area 8Rr and temporarily stop it, forming a reach, and then the ally character CRA may return to the mini character performance area MHG again.

Next, as shown in Figure 117 (F), when the mini character performance area MHG disappears from the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA also disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variable performance (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues. This ends decorative pattern visibility change performance B. Note that if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed while the mini character performance area MHG is displayed while decorative pattern visibility change performance B is being performed, the lower portions of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (part of the left decorative pattern 8L, part of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and part of the right decorative pattern 8R) are covered by the mini character performance area MHG and cannot be seen.

After that, as shown in Figure 117 (G), when the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a for a predetermined period of time (for example, approximately 1.5 seconds) (it may be displayed flashing), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the reserved icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

When the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, with the temporary display of the bright red number "1" stopped, as shown in Figure 117 (H), and the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues.

Before the appearance of ally character CRA in FIG. 117(G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R were both temporarily displayed as the bright green number "1" in FIG. 117(F). In contrast, after the appearance of ally character CRA in FIG. 117(G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are both temporarily displayed as the bright red number "1" (the same color as the number "7") in FIG. 117(H). This increases the likelihood of a jackpot by changing the color of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R from their normal color (bright green) to the bright red color of the number "7" (i.e., by changing the color of the decorative pattern). Note that when a reach is formed with the bright red number "7," the likelihood of a jackpot is preset to be higher than when a reach is formed with other numbers.

In Figure 117 (H), by changing the color of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R from their normal color (bright green) to bright red, the same color as the number "7" (i.e., changing the color of the decorative pattern), an image suggesting one of five levels of likelihood of a jackpot (for example, five facial images of ally character CRA may be lined up, with three facial images in yellow, half in yellow and half in black, and the remaining one in black, suggesting an likelihood of a jackpot of 3.5 out of five levels) may be displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, various effects may continue, and if the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R stop and display in the same pattern, a jackpot is awarded and the jackpot game (jackpot effect) begins. However, if the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R do not stop and display in the same pattern, a miss occurs.

[Decorative pattern visibility change effect C]
Next, the decorative pattern visibility change effect C will be described with reference to Fig. 118. Fig. 118 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern visibility change effect C. The decorative pattern visibility change effect C is performed during the decorative pattern variation effect (during the variable display).

First, as shown in Figure 118 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a three-dimensional left decorative pattern 8L, a three-dimensional center decorative pattern 8C, and a three-dimensional right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in each of the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr extending from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") begins in a display mode in which the reels are rotated.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except for the number "7" all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the decorative pattern change effect (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state as it gradually increases its speed from a slow speed, changing at high speed. This allows the background image located behind the decorative pattern to be seen through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changing from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, and appears temporarily stopped, or stopped (temporarily stopped, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R currently fluctuating as the first special symbol reserve is consumed are displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The variable icons 9C and the variable display position 9Cd are referred to as the variable display area. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd, i.e., the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display area, a reserve display area is provided for the first special symbol reserve. In this reserve display area, reserve icons can be displayed in each of the four reserve display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), allowing a maximum of four reserve icons to be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving towards the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad. Here, the area made up of the variable display area and the hold display area is referred to as the variable and hold display area THA. The variable and hold display area THA is formed as a transparent area.

The variable display area and the hold display area are transparent areas, allowing the background image behind to be seen through the variable display area and the hold display area. When the variable display position 9Cd is displayed in the variable display area, the background image behind cannot be seen through the variable display position 9Cd, and when the variable icon 9C is displayed in the variable display area, the background image behind cannot be seen through the variable icon 9C. When the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the background image behind cannot be seen through the hold display position 9Ad, and when the hold icon 9A is displayed in the hold display area, the background image behind cannot be seen through the hold icon 9A.

The variable area 8Lr, which extends from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a and in which the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed (variable display), overlaps with the variable and hold display area THA at both the front and back, and is positioned behind the variable and hold display area THA. Because the hold display area is a transparent area, the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L can be seen through the hold display area. Note that when the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L cannot be seen through the hold display position 9Ad. When the hold icon 9A is not displayed in the hold display area (i.e., when there are no game balls (hold balls) that have not yet been used in play), the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L can be seen through the hold display area. However, when multiple hold icons 9A are displayed in the hold display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L cannot be seen through the hold icon 9A.

The variable area 8Cr, which extends from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a and in which the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed (variable display), has an area that overlaps with the variable and hold display area THA at the front and back, and is positioned behind the variable and hold display area THA. As a result, because the hold display area is a transparent area, the variable effect (variable display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C can be seen through the hold display area. Note that when the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C cannot be seen through the hold display position 9Ad, and when the hold icon 9A is displayed in the hold display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C cannot be seen through the hold icon 9A.

In addition, because the variable display area is a transparent area, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C can be seen through the variable display area. However, when the variable display position 9Cd is displayed in the variable display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C cannot be seen through the variable display position 9Cd, and when the variable icon 9C is displayed in the variable display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C cannot be seen through the variable icon 9C.

The variable area 8Rr, which extends from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a where the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed (variable display), does not overlap with the variable and pending display area THA at either the front or back. This allows the variable display (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R to be viewed without being obstructed by the variable and pending display area THA.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icons are displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one hold icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. For the sake of convenience, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol change presentation (change display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the top center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, at the top center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, and are therefore difficult to distinguish from the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, these numbers are positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with the other images displayed behind them, so visibility is not obstructed by the other images.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icons are further set with increasing expectations of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the decorative pattern change performance (change display) begins in Figure 118(A), as shown in Figure 118(B), a left-side movable role image KGL modeled after the left-side movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 appears from the center of the left side of the display screen 7a (a position corresponding to half the distance dimension of the left side of the display screen 7a) toward the right side of the front screen 7a, covering the change area 8Lr of the left decorative pattern 8L to correspond to the operating area of the left-side movable role 14L. Furthermore, a right-side movable role image KGR modeled after the right-side movable role 14R of the first movable role 14 appears from the center of the right side of the display screen 7a (a position corresponding to half the distance dimension of the right side of the display screen 7a) toward the left side of the front screen 7a, covering the change area 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R to correspond to the operating area of the right-side movable role 14R. When the left-side movable role image KGL and the right-side movable role image KGR appear separated from each other, an effect of lightning flashing across the left-side movable role image KGL and the right-side movable role image KGR is produced.

The left-side movable role image KGL has an area where it overlaps with the variable area 8Lr where the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed (variable display) at the front and back, and is positioned in front of the variable area 8Lr, and is positioned so that it does not overlap with the variable and pending display area THA at the front and back. The right-side movable role image KGR has an area where it overlaps with the variable area 8Rr where the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed (variable display) at the front and back, and is positioned so that it does not overlap with the variable and pending display area THA at the front and back.

The left-side movable role image KGL imitates the left-side movable role image 14L and is colored and opaque. Therefore, when the left-side movable role image KGL appears, in the area where the variable area 8Lr of the left decorative pattern 8L overlaps with the left-side movable role image KGL, the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L cannot be seen through the left-side movable role image KGL. Furthermore, the right-side movable role image KGR imitates the right-side movable role image 14R and is colored and opaque. Therefore, when the right-side movable role image KGR appears, in the area where the variable area 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R overlaps with the right-side movable role image KGR, the variable performance (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R cannot be seen through the right-side movable role image KGR.

Note that the left-side movable feature image KGL and the right-side movable feature image KGR appear spaced apart from each other, and a lightning bolt appears to flash across the left-side movable feature image KGL and the right-side movable feature image KGR; however, because the left-side movable feature image KGL and the right-side movable feature image KGR are positioned so that they do not overlap the change and hold display area THA at the front or back, the lightning bolt also does not overlap the change and hold display area THA at the front or back, and even though the left-side movable feature image KGL and the right-side movable feature image KGR appear spaced apart from each other and a lightning bolt appears to flash across the change and hold display area THA, the visibility of the change and hold display area THA is not impaired by the lightning bolt.

Next, as shown in Figure 118 (C), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the bright green number "1," and the variable performance (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R continues. At the position of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L, the left side of the left decorative pattern 8L (part of the left decorative pattern 8L) is covered by the left movable role image KGL located in front of the left decorative pattern 8L, and therefore the left side of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L (part of the left decorative pattern 8L) is covered by the left movable role image KGL located in front of the left decorative pattern 8L and cannot be seen.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118(D), when the left-side movable character image KGL and the right-side movable character image KGR appear spaced apart from each other, the lightning bolt SND can run appropriately in the areas of the left-side decorative portion, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion of the left-side movable character image KGL, and the right-side decorative portion, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion of the right-side movable character image KGR (i.e., the area extending from the top to the bottom of the left-side decorative portion and the area extending from the top to the bottom of the right-side decorative portion). When the lightning bolt SND runs, at a predetermined timing, the variable icon 9C can change to another icon under the influence of the lightning bolt SND. In this case, the variable icon 9C changes from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon under the influence of the lightning bolt SND, and the change of the variable icon 9C is successful. However, there are also cases where the variable icon 9C does not change from a white spherical icon to another icon despite the influence of the lightning bolt SND, and the change of the variable icon 9C fails.

When the left-side movable role image KGL and the right-side movable role image KGR appear spaced apart from each other and a lightning bolt SND strikes, the lightning bolt SND may be displayed on the display screen 7a, extending beyond the left-side movable role image KGL and the right-side movable role image KGR and spanning the variable regions 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr of the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. For example, in Figure 118(D), when the left-side movable role image KGL and the right-side movable role image KGR appear spaced apart from each other and a lightning bolt SND strikes, the left-side movable role image KGL covers the portion of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L that is not covered by the left-side movable role image KGL. In other words, when the lightning SND is displayed across the variable region 8Lr of the left decorative pattern 8L and the left movable role image KGL, the exposed portion of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L that is not covered by the left movable role image KGL overlaps with the lightning SND and becomes invisible. Furthermore, by having the lightning SND move appropriately across the range from the top to the bottom of the semicircular portions of the left movable role image KGL and right movable role image KGR, the exposed portion of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L that is not covered by the left movable role image KGL and the lightning SND do not overlap, and the exposed portion of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L that is not covered by the left movable role image KGL can be viewed without being obstructed by the lightning SND (see Figure 118 (E)).

After that, as shown in Figure 118(E), the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the bright green number "1," the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues, and a reach is formed. At the position of the temporarily stopped right decorative pattern 8R, the right side of the right decorative pattern 8R (part of the right decorative pattern 8R) is covered by the right-side movable role image KGR located in front of the right decorative pattern 8R, and therefore the right side of the temporarily stopped right decorative pattern 8R (part of the right decorative pattern 8R) is covered by the right-side movable role image KGR located in front of the right decorative pattern 8R and cannot be seen. Even at this point, the lightning SND may run appropriately in the range from the top to the bottom of the semicircular portion of the left movable part image KGL and the right movable part image KGR, causing the lightning SND to be displayed on the display screen 7a beyond the left movable part image KGL and the right movable part image KGR and spanning the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr of the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

In addition, if the right decorative pattern 8R is not temporarily stopped at the bright green number "1" but is temporarily stopped at, for example, the bright green number "9", the variable performance (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues, and no reach is formed, the left movable role image KGL and the right movable role image KGR will disappear from the display screen 7a, and then when the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R may not be stopped at the same pattern, resulting in a miss.

Furthermore, if the right decorative pattern 8R is not temporarily stopped at the bright green number "1" but is temporarily stopped at, for example, the bright green number "9," the variable performance (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues, and a reach is not formed, the lightning SND that runs appropriately across the range from the top to the bottom of the semicircular portion of the left movable role image KGL and the right movable role image KGR may send the number "9" in the variable area 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R below the variable area 8Rr, pull in the number "1" from above the variable area 8Rr, temporarily stop and display, forming a reach, and then the lightning SND may subside.

Next, as shown in Figure 118 (F), when the lightning bolt SND subsides, the left-side movable role image KGL and the right-side movable role image KGR disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable performance (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues. This ends the decorative pattern visibility change performance C. Note that if the left-side movable role image KGL and the right-side movable role image KGR are displayed while the left-side movable role image 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right-side decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed while the decorative pattern visibility change performance C is being performed, the left side of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L and the right side of the temporarily stopped right decorative pattern 8R (part of the left decorative pattern 8L and part of the right decorative pattern 8R) are obscured by the left-side movable role image KGL and the right-side movable role image KGR, respectively, and cannot be seen, whereas the middle decorative pattern 8C is not obscured by the left-side movable role image KGL and the right-side movable role image KGR, and can be seen.

Then, as shown in Figure 118 (G), at the centre of the display screen 7a, the left-hand movable part 14L and the right-hand movable part 14R each advance (move) from their home positions towards (approaching each other) an advanced position at the front (front) centre of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and at the front (front) centre position (advanced position (deployed position)) of the display screen 7a, the left-hand decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the left-hand movable part 14L, and the right-hand decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the right-hand movable part 14R, combine to form a single decorative element (combined part) with a ring shape, consisting of the left-hand decorative part of the left-hand movable part 14L and the right-hand decorative part of the right-hand movable part 14R.

When the left decorative part of the left-side movable device 14L and the right decorative part of the right-side movable device 14R combine to form a combined device having a ring shape, the area formed within the ring becomes a circular area (hereinafter referred to as the "circular area"). The ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the reserved icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

After a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the ally character CRA was displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left-side movable device 14L and the right-side movable device 14R move away from each other, with the left-side movable device 14L retreating (moving) from its advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a toward a retreated position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right-side movable device 14R retreating (moving) from its advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a toward a retreated position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in Figure 118 (H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, with the temporary display of the bright red number "1" stopped, and the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues.

Before the appearance of ally character CRA in FIG. 118(G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R were both temporarily displayed as the bright green number "1" in FIG. 118(F). In contrast, after the appearance of ally character CRA in FIG. 118(G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are both temporarily displayed as the bright red number "1" (the same color as the number "7") in FIG. 118(H). This increases the likelihood of a jackpot by changing the color of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R from their normal color (bright green) to the bright red color of the number "7" (i.e., by changing the color of the decorative pattern). Note that when a reach is formed with the bright red number "7," the likelihood of a jackpot is preset to be higher than when a reach is formed with other numbers.

In Figure 118 (H), by changing the color of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R from their normal color (bright green) to bright red, the same color as the number "7" (i.e., changing the color of the decorative pattern), an image suggesting one of five levels of likelihood of a jackpot (for example, five facial images of ally character CRA may be lined up, with three facial images in yellow, half in yellow and half in black, and the remaining one in black, suggesting an likelihood of a jackpot of 3.5 out of five levels) may be displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, various effects may continue, and if the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R stop and display in the same pattern, a jackpot is awarded and the jackpot game (jackpot effect) begins. However, if the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R do not stop and display in the same pattern, a miss occurs.

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of changing the visibility of decorative patterns.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol visibility change performance A of FIG. 116, the decorative symbol visibility change performance B of FIG. 117, and the decorative symbol visibility change performance C of FIG. 118, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images is provided, and a specific image (a mini-character ally character CRA in the decorative symbol visibility change performances A and B, and a lightning bolt SND in the decorative symbol visibility change performance C) is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the variable area 8Lr (first area) in which the variable display by the left decorative symbol 8L (pattern image) is performed. A possible second area (mini-character effect area MHG in decorative pattern visibility change performances A and B, and left-side movable role image KGL in decorative pattern visibility change performance C) is positioned in front of the variable area 8Lr (first area), and a first performance (Figure 116 (C) in decorative pattern visibility change performance A, Figure 117 (C) in decorative pattern visibility change performance B, Figure 118 (C) in decorative pattern visibility change performance C) can be executed in which part of the left decorative pattern 8L (pattern image) is made difficult to see due to the second area. According to this configuration, the second area is purposely positioned in front of the variable area 8Lr (first area) so as to overlap with a portion of the variable area 8Lr (first area) of the left decorative pattern 8L (pattern image). This makes a portion of the left decorative pattern 8L (pattern image) difficult to see due to the second area, allowing the player to imagine the overall image of the left decorative pattern 8L (pattern image). This allows the player to be provided with a variable presentation (variable display) using innovative pattern images that have never been seen before. This, in turn, increases the player's interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect of the decorative symbol visibility change effect A of FIG. 116, the decorative symbol visibility change effect B of FIG. 117, and the decorative symbol visibility change effect C of FIG. 118, a change and hold display area THA (third area) in which the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A can be displayed is disposed in front of the second area so as to overlap with a part of the change area 8Lr (first area) of the left decorative symbol 8L and a part of the second area, so that the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are not obscured by the left decorative symbol 8L (pattern image) and the specific image. The change icon 9C may be used as a notice (a "change effect" that changes the display mode) for the change effect (during the change display), and the hold icon 9A may be used as an effect that suggests a future effect through a pre-reading effect even when it has not yet been actually used in the game. This prevents the visibility of the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A from being obstructed by the pattern image and specific image when a variable display is being performed using the pattern image, thereby making it more difficult for players to overlook changes in the variable icon 9C or the pending icon.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance in the decorative pattern visibility change performance A of FIG. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change performance B of FIG. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change performance C of FIG. 118, a specific image (a mini character ally character CRA in the decorative pattern visibility change performances A and B, a lightning SND in the decorative pattern visibility change performance C) is displayed across the variable area 8Lr (first area) of the left decorative pattern 8L and the second area. ), the specific image makes it difficult to see other parts of the left decorative pattern 8L (pattern image) that are different from that part (the part where the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L overlaps with the ally character CRA in Fig. 116(D) of decorative pattern visibility change presentation A and Fig. 117(D) of decorative pattern visibility change presentation B, and the part where the left decorative pattern 8L overlaps with the lightning bolt SND in Fig. 118(D) of decorative pattern visibility change presentation C). With this configuration, a part of the pattern image is made difficult to see by the second area, and further, other parts different from that part can also be made difficult to see by the specific image, so that a more innovative variable presentation (variable display) using pattern images than has been seen before can be provided to the player.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effects of the decorative pattern visibility change effect A in Fig. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change effect B in Fig. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change effect C in Fig. 118, the second area disappears from the display screen 7a, making the entire left decorative pattern 8L (pattern image) easily visible. With this configuration, since part of the pattern image was made difficult to see by the second area, the player can imagine the entire pattern image, and further, since the second area disappears from the display screen 7a, the player can check what he or she imagined, which can contribute to reducing the monotony of the changing display of the pattern image.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effects in the decorative pattern visibility change effect A in Fig. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change effect B in Fig. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change effect C in Fig. 118 can be executed after the variable display of the pattern image has started and before the temporary stop display. According to this configuration, since a part of the pattern image can be made difficult to see by the second area before the pattern image is temporarily stopped, it is possible to add variety to the variable display of the pattern image and contribute to preventing the variable display of the pattern image from becoming monotonous.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the variable icon 9C in the decorative pattern visibility change effect A of FIG. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change effect B of FIG. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change effect C of FIG. 118 can change to a higher probability of winning when a specific image (a mini-character ally character CRA in the decorative pattern visibility change effects A and B, and a lightning bolt SND in the decorative pattern visibility change effect C) is displayed. With this configuration, the variable icon 9C can be used as a notice (a "change effect" that changes the display mode) regarding the variable effect (during the variable display). Furthermore, when a specific image is displayed on the display screen 7a, the variable icon 9C may change to a higher probability of winning, so even just the display of the specific image on the display screen 7a can create a sense of anticipation in the player.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, after the first effect in the decorative pattern visibility change effect A of FIG. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change effect B of FIG. 117, or the decorative pattern visibility change effect C of FIG. 118, a second effect (FIG. 116(H) for the decorative pattern visibility change effect A, FIG. 117(H) for the decorative pattern visibility change effect B, and FIG. 118(H) for the decorative pattern visibility change effect C) can be executed, in which the color of the symbol image is changed to another color (e.g., the color of the number "1" is changed from the normal color (bright green) to bright red) to increase the likelihood of a win. With this configuration, after the first effect ends, there is a possibility that the second effect in which the color of the symbol image is changed will be executed. Therefore, when the first effect starts, the player can enjoy the first effect while also looking forward to the second effect that has not yet been executed but may be executed in the future.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of decorative pattern visibility change effects are shown.
[Modification 1]
The decorative pattern visibility change effect A in Fig. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change effect B in Fig. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change effect C in Fig. 118 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, they are performed in a game state known as a left-handed hit. However, they may also be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21. In other words, they may also be performed in a game state known as a right-handed hit.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative symbol visibility change effect A of Figures 116(E) and (F) and the decorative symbol visibility change effect B of Figures 117(E) and (F), when a reach is formed, the miniature character effect area MHG disappears from the display screen 7a. However, the miniature character effect area MHG may disappear from the display screen 7a before the reach is formed. Also, in the decorative symbol visibility change effect C of Figures 118(E) and (F), when a reach is formed, the left movable role image KGL and the right movable role image KGR disappear from the display screen 7a. However, the left movable role image KGL and the right movable role image KGR may disappear from the display screen 7a before the reach is formed. In this way, the player can be informed of the timing of the provisional stop display of the right decorative symbol 8R.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern visibility change effect A in Fig. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change effect B in Fig. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change effect C in Fig. 118, the left decorative pattern 8L is first displayed as a tentatively stopped number "1" having a bright green color, and then the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a tentatively stopped number "1" having a bright green color, thereby forming a reach with odd decorative patterns (pattern images). However, for example, the left decorative pattern 8L may be displayed as a tentatively stopped number "2" having a bright blue color, and then the right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed as a tentatively stopped number "2" having a bright blue color, i.e., a reach may be formed with even decorative patterns (pattern images).

[Modification 4]
In the decorative pattern visibility change performance C of Figures 118 (B) to (E), a left-side movable role image KGL imitating the left-side movable role image 14L of the first movable role image 14 appears to cover the variable area 8Lr of the left decorative pattern 8L, and further, a right-side movable role image KGR imitating the right-side movable role image 14R of the first movable role image 14 appears to cover the variable area 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R. However, the left-side movable role image KGL may be replaced by the left-side movable role image 14L, and the right-side movable role image KGR may be replaced by the right-side movable role image 14R. By covering a portion of the left decorative pattern 8L with the left movable role element 14L, it is possible to make that portion difficult to see, and by covering a portion of the right decorative pattern 8R with the right movable role element 14R, it is possible to make that portion difficult to see, so that the player can imagine the entire image of the left decorative pattern 8L and the entire image of the right decorative pattern 8R. This allows the player to be provided with a variable effect (variable display) using innovative pattern images that have never been seen before, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Furthermore, the left-side movable role image KGL is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to correspond to the operating area of the left-side movable role image 14L, and the right-side movable role image KGR is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to correspond to the operating area of the right-side movable role image 14R. The left-side movable role image KGL and the right-side movable role image KGR do not overlap front to back with the change and hold display area THA. Therefore, even if the left-side movable role image KGL is replaced with the left-side movable role image 14L and the right-side movable role image KGR is replaced with the right-side movable role image 14R, the left-side movable role image 14L and the right-side movable role image 14R do not overlap front to back with the change and hold display area THA. In other words, the left-side movable role image 14L and the right-side movable role image 14R do not cover the change display position 9Cd, hold display position 9Ad, change icon 9C, or hold icon 9A in the change and hold display area THA.

[Modification 5]
The decorative pattern visibility change effect A in Figure 116, the decorative pattern visibility change effect B in Figure 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change effect C in Figure 118 may not include some of the effects described above, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect C9-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
A second area capable of displaying a specific image so as to overlap a part of a first area in which a variable display using a pattern image is performed is disposed in front of the first area, and a first effect can be executed in which a part of the pattern image is made difficult to see by the second area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect C9-2
The gaming machine according to aspect C9-1,
In the first effect, a third area capable of displaying the variable icon and the reserved icon is disposed in front of the second area so as to overlap a part of the first area and a part of the second area, and the variable icon and the reserved icon are not difficult to see due to the pattern image and the specific image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect C9-3
The gaming machine according to aspect C9-1 or C9-2,
In the first effect, when the specific image is displayed across the first area and the second area, the specific image may make it difficult to see other parts of the pattern image that are different from the part of the pattern image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect C9-4
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C9-1 to C9-3,
In the first effect, the second area may disappear and the entire pattern image may become easily visible.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect C9-5
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C9-1 to C9-4,
The first effect can be executed after the variable display of the symbol image starts and before the temporary stop display.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect C9-6
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C9-1 to C9-5,
The variable icon can be changed to one that has a high probability of winning when the specific image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect C9-7
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C9-1 to C9-6,
After the first effect, a second effect can be executed in which the color of the symbol image is changed to another color to increase the likelihood of winning.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative symbol rotation and stop display effects A to C are explained below using Figures 119 to 121. In Figures 119 to 121, the first movable part 14, second movable part 15, and other movable parts arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted for clarity.

This decorative symbol rotation and stop display effect is performed while the decorative symbol is in a variable display state (during variable display). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (e.g., a variable display start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the decorative symbol rotation and stop display effect is included, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, we will first explain decorative pattern spinning and stopping display effect A, then decorative pattern spinning and stopping display effect B, and then decorative pattern spinning and stopping display effect C.

[Decorative pattern rotation stop display effect A]
The decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A will be described with reference to Fig. 119. Fig. 119 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A. The decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A is performed during the decorative symbol variation effect (during the variation display).

First, as shown in Figure 119 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a three-dimensional left decorative pattern 8L, a three-dimensional center decorative pattern 8C, and a three-dimensional right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in each variable area from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a variable effect (variable display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") begins in a display mode in which the reels are rotated. Note that the center decorative pattern 8C includes special patterns in addition to number patterns. These special patterns are composed only of character patterns.

The number "7" is bright red. The odd numbers "1," "3," "5," and "9," excluding the number "7," all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2," "4," "6," and "8" all have the same bright blue color. The odd-numbered designs are composed of various character designs (all different character designs) in multiple colors (full color), while the even-numbered designs have no character designs at all. The character designs on the odd-numbered designs are displayed large and with the character designs as the main focus. Therefore, the odd-numbered designs are smaller than the character designs on the odd-numbered designs. In contrast, the even-numbered designs have no character designs, so the even-numbered designs themselves are displayed large and with the main focus. Therefore, the even-numbered designs are approximately the same size as the character designs on the odd-numbered designs. The special designs are winged-man-form characters in multiple colors (full color). The special designs are composed only of the winged character designs, and the size of the special designs is the same as or larger than the character designs on the odd-numbered designs.

When the decorative pattern change effect (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state as it gradually increases its speed from a slow speed, changing at high speed. This allows the background image located behind the decorative pattern to be seen through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changing from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, and appears temporarily stopped, or stopped (temporarily stopped, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R currently changing as the first special symbol is consumed are displayed in the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area is provided for the first special symbol hold in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed in four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), allowing a maximum of four hold icons to be stored. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icons are displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one hold icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. For the sake of convenience, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol change presentation (change display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the top center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, at the top center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, and are therefore difficult to distinguish from the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, these numbers are positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with the other images displayed behind them, so visibility is not obstructed by the other images.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icons are further set with increasing expectations of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

In Figure 119 (A), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a temporarily stopped bright blue number "2," the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a temporarily stopped bright green number "3" pattern 8Ca with a character pattern 8Cb attached, the right decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a temporarily stopped bright blue number "6," and then the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as temporarily stopped, resulting in a loss. When the loss is confirmed, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) starts again, as shown in Figure 119 (B), and the decorative pattern rotation stop display effect A starts.

Then, during the variable effect (variable display), the left decorative pattern 8L changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and as shown in Figure 119(C), the left decorative pattern 8L appears in a position slightly above the center line connecting the centers of the left and right sides of the display screen 7a in the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, with a bright green number "1" pattern 8La and a character pattern 8Lb attached. When the left decorative pattern 8L changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, the variable effect (variable display) is achieved with the bright green number "1" pattern 8La remaining facing forward, and further, the character pattern 8Lb attached to the bright green number "1" pattern 8La has glowing yellow eyes, but does not face forward, but is tilted forward and to the right as viewed from the character pattern 8Lb, creating a silhouette resembling a shadow puppet. At this time, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R continues.

Then, as shown in Figure 119(D), the left decorative pattern 8L slowly changes position so that the character pattern 8Lb faces forward from the front right while the bright green number "1" pattern 8La remains facing forward. Once the character pattern 8Lb faces forward, the silhouette-like pattern changes to full color, and the entire left decorative pattern 8L moves slowly and quickly up and down. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L appears temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright green number "1" pattern 8La and the character pattern 8Lb both facing forward.

Next, during the change effect (change display), the right decorative pattern 8R changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and as shown in Figure 119 (E), the right decorative pattern 8R appears in the change area of the right decorative pattern 8R, slightly above the center line connecting the centers of the left and right sides of the display screen 7a, with the bright blue number "2" 8Ra without any characters attached. When the right decorative pattern 8R changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state, the bright blue number "2" 8Ra does not face forward, but remains tilted to the left and forward when viewed from the number "2" 8Ra, resulting in a change effect (change display). At this time, the change effect (change display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues.

Then, as shown in Figure 119 (F), the right decorative pattern 8R slowly changes position so that the bright blue number "2" 8Ra faces forward from the front left, and when the bright blue number "2" 8Ra faces forward, the entire right decorative pattern 8R moves slowly and in small movements up and down. As a result, the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright blue number "2" 8Ra facing forward.

Next, during the change effect (change display), the central decorative pattern 8C changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and as shown in Figure 119 (G), the central decorative pattern 8C appears in a position slightly above the center line connecting the centers of the left and right sides of the display screen 7a in the change area of the central decorative pattern 8C, with a bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca and a character pattern 8Cb attached. When the central decorative pattern 8C changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state, the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca remains facing forward, resulting in a change effect (change display). Furthermore, the character pattern 8Cb attached to the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca has glowing yellow eyes, but does not face forward, but is tilted forward and to the right when viewed from the character pattern 8Cb, creating a silhouette like a shadow puppet, resulting in a change effect (change display).

Then, as shown in Figure 119 (H), the central decorative pattern 8C slowly changes position so that the character pattern 8Cb faces forward from the front right while the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca remains facing forward. Once the character pattern 8Cb faces forward, the display changes from a silhouette-like image to full color, and the entire central decorative pattern 8C moves slowly and slightly up and down. As a result, the central decorative pattern 8C appears temporarily stopped with the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca and the character pattern 8Cb both facing forward. This ends decorative pattern rotation and stop display performance A.

Then, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a static state, resulting in a loss. Once the loss is confirmed, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

In this way, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the character designs 8Lb attached to the odd-numbered designs 8La slowly change position so that they face forward from the right front as viewed from the character designs 8Lb; in the middle decorative pattern 8C, the character designs 8Cb attached to the odd-numbered designs 8Ca slowly change position so that they face forward from the right front as viewed from the character designs 8Cb; whereas, in the right decorative pattern 8R, the even-numbered designs 8Ra slowly change position so that they face forward from the left front as viewed from the even-numbered designs 8Ra. In other words, when a character design is present in the decorative pattern, the character design rotates, and when a character design is not present in the decorative pattern, the number design rotates, so that the objects that rotate are different. Furthermore, the direction in which the character design rotates when a character design is present in the decorative pattern is opposite to the direction in which the number design rotates when a character design is not present in the decorative pattern.

[Decorative pattern rotation stop display effect B]
Next, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B will be described with reference to Fig. 120. Fig. 120 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B. The decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B is performed during the decorative symbol variation effect (during the variation display).

First, as shown in Figure 120 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a three-dimensional left decorative pattern 8L, a three-dimensional center decorative pattern 8C, and a three-dimensional right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in each variable area from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a variable effect (variable display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") begins in a display mode in which the reels are rotated. Note that the center decorative pattern 8C includes special patterns in addition to number patterns. These special patterns are composed only of character patterns.

The number "7" is bright red. The odd numbers "1," "3," "5," and "9," excluding the number "7," all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2," "4," "6," and "8" all have the same bright blue color. The odd-numbered designs are composed of various character designs (all different character designs) in multiple colors (full color), while the even-numbered designs have no character designs at all. The character designs on the odd-numbered designs are displayed large and with the character designs as the main focus. Therefore, the odd-numbered designs are smaller than the character designs on the odd-numbered designs. In contrast, the even-numbered designs have no character designs, so the even-numbered designs themselves are displayed large and with the main focus. Therefore, the even-numbered designs are approximately the same size as the character designs on the odd-numbered designs. The special designs are designs of winged characters in multiple colors (full color). The special designs are composed only of the winged character designs, and the size of the special designs is the same as or larger than the character designs on the odd-numbered designs.

When the decorative pattern change effect (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state as it gradually increases its speed from a slow speed, changing at high speed. This allows the background image located behind the decorative pattern to be seen through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changing from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, and appears temporarily stopped, or stopped (temporarily stopped, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R currently changing as the first special symbol is consumed are displayed in the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area is provided for the first special symbol hold in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed in four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), allowing a maximum of four hold icons to be stored. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icons are displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one hold icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. For the sake of convenience, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol change presentation (change display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the top center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, at the top center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, and are therefore difficult to distinguish from the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, these numbers are positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with the other images displayed behind them, so visibility is not obstructed by the other images.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icons are further set with increasing expectations of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

In Figure 120 (A), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily displayed as a bright blue number "2," the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily displayed as a bright green number "3" pattern 8Ca with a character pattern 8Cb attached, and the right decorative pattern 8C is temporarily displayed as a bright blue number "6," after which the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as static, resulting in a loss. When the loss is confirmed, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) starts again, as shown in Figure 120 (B), and the decorative pattern rotation stop display effect B starts.

Then, during the variable effect (variable display), the left decorative pattern 8L changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and as shown in Figure 120(C), the left decorative pattern 8L appears in a position slightly above the center line connecting the centers of the left and right sides of the display screen 7a in the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, with a bright green number "1" pattern 8La and a character pattern 8Lb attached. When the left decorative pattern 8L changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, the variable effect (variable display) is achieved with the bright green number "1" pattern 8La remaining facing forward, and further, the character pattern 8Lb attached to the bright green number "1" pattern 8La has glowing yellow eyes, but does not face forward, but is tilted forward and to the right as viewed from the character pattern 8Lb, creating a silhouette resembling a shadow puppet. At this time, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R continues.

Then, as shown in Figure 120(D), the left decorative pattern 8L slowly changes position so that the character pattern 8Lb faces forward from the front right while the bright green number "1" pattern 8La remains facing forward. Once the character pattern 8Lb faces forward, the silhouette-like pattern changes to full color, and the entire left decorative pattern 8L moves slowly and quickly up and down. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L appears temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright green number "1" pattern 8La and the character pattern 8Lb both facing forward.

Next, during the variable effect (variable display), the right decorative pattern 8R changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and as shown in Figure 120 (E), the right decorative pattern 8R appears in the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, slightly above the center line connecting the centers of the left and right sides of the display screen 7a, with the bright blue number "2" 8Ra without any characters attached. When the right decorative pattern 8R changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state, the variable effect (variable display) is performed with the bright blue number "2" 8Ra not facing forward but tilted to the left and forward when viewed from the number "2" 8Ra. At this time, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues.

Then, as shown in Figure 120 (F), the right decorative pattern 8R slowly changes position so that the bright blue number "2" 8Ra faces forward from the front left, and when the bright blue number "2" 8Ra faces forward, the entire right decorative pattern 8R moves slowly and in small movements up and down. As a result, the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright blue number "2" 8Ra facing forward.

Next, during the change effect (change display), the middle decorative pattern 8C changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and as shown in Figure 120 (G), the winged character pattern 8Cb appears in a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the change area of the middle decorative pattern 8C. When the middle decorative pattern 8C changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state, the winged character pattern 8Cb becomes all silver in color, and a change effect (change display) is performed.

When the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped, as shown in Figure 120(H), the middle decorative symbol 8C grows larger while emitting a flash of light FH, the silver-colored winged character symbol 8Cb changes to another color (full color), and the eye color also changes from silver to yellow. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. Meanwhile, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C remain displayed on the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are displayed with the flash of light FH positioned behind the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C, so that they are not obscured by the flash of light FH and their visibility is not obstructed. Furthermore, when the hold icon 9A is present, the hold icon 9A will not disappear from the display screen 7a, and a flashing light FH will be displayed behind the hold icon 9A, so that the hold icon 9A is not covered by the flashing light FH and the visibility of the hold icon 9A is not impaired.

After that, as shown in Figure 120(I) (the flash FH is omitted in this figure), when the flash FH is emitted, the winged character design 8Cb in the enlarged middle decorative design 8C jumps out from the middle decorative design 8C and appears even larger, and a moving image effect of the winged character design 8Cb is produced. At this time, the middle decorative design 8C disappears from the display screen 7a. This ends the decorative design rotation and stop display effect B.

In Figure 120(I), when the winged character design 8Cb in the central decorative design 8C does not jump out from the central decorative design 8C, the central decorative design 8C moves downward within its own variable area and appears from above with the bright green number "1" design 8Ca with the character design 8Cb attached. When the central decorative design 8C changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, the bright green number "1" design 8Ca remains facing forward, creating a variable effect (variable display). Furthermore, the character design 8Cb attached to the bright green number "1" design 8Ca has glowing yellow eyes, but does not face forward, but instead appears as a silhouette tilted to the right and forward as viewed from the character design 8Cb, creating a variable effect (variable display). Then, while the bright green number "1" 8Ca of the central decorative pattern 8C remains facing forward, the character's design 8Cb slowly changes position from the front right to the front. When the character's design 8Cb faces forward, the display changes from a silhouette-like figure to full color, and the entire central decorative pattern 8C moves slowly up and down in small movements. As a result, the central decorative pattern 8C enters a state where the bright green number "1" 8Ca and the character's design 8Cb are both temporarily stopped and displayed facing forward. This ends decorative pattern rotation and stop display performance B. After that, the left decorative pattern 8L, central decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed as the same pattern, resulting in a loss. Once the loss is confirmed, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 120 (J), a battle presentation begins. In this presentation, two characters (ally character CRA and enemy character CRB) fight, creating a high expectation of a big win. During the battle presentation, the variable display position 9Cd, reserved display position 9Ad, and variable icon 9C disappear from the display screen 7a. Of course, if a reserved icon 9A exists, the reserved icon 9A also disappears from the display screen 7a.

When ally character CRA wins and enemy character CRB is defeated, the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as the same pattern, resulting in a jackpot and the jackpot game (jackpot effect) then starting. On the other hand, when ally character CRA is defeated and enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed as the same pattern, resulting in a loss. Once the battle effect ends and a jackpot or loss is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd and reserved display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a. Furthermore, if a reserved icon 9A is present, the reserved icon 9A is also displayed again on the display screen 7a.

In this way, in the middle decorative pattern 8C, the winged character pattern 8Cb, which is a special pattern, remains facing forward and does not change position; however, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the character pattern 8Lb attached to the odd-numbered pattern 8La slowly changes position as it faces forward from the front right, whereas in the right decorative pattern 8R, the even-numbered pattern 8Ra slowly changes position as it faces forward from the front left. In other words, when a character pattern is present in the decorative pattern excluding the special pattern, the character pattern rotates, and when a character pattern is not present in the decorative pattern, the number pattern rotates, so the objects that rotate are different. Furthermore, the direction in which the character pattern rotates when a character pattern is present in the decorative pattern excluding the special pattern is opposite to the direction in which the number pattern rotates when a character pattern is not present in the decorative pattern.

Even when a character design is included in the decorative design, there are designs in which the character design rotates, and special designs in which the character design remains facing forward and does not rotate. Furthermore, in cases where the decorative design is composed of only a number design, or only a winged character design, the only design rotates.

[Decorative pattern rotation stop display effect C]
Next, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C will be described with reference to Fig. 121. Fig. 121 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C. The decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C is performed during the decorative symbol variation effect (during the variation display).

First, as shown in Figure 121 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a three-dimensional left decorative pattern 8L, a three-dimensional center decorative pattern 8C, and a three-dimensional right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in each variable area from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a variable effect (variable display) of decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") is initiated in a display mode in which the reels are rotated. Note that here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are card-type decorative patterns, with various characters attached to number patterns on the cards. In addition, the center decorative pattern 8C is a special pattern. This special pattern is composed only of character patterns.

The number "7" is bright red. The odd numbers "1," "3," "5," and "9," excluding the number "7," all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2," "4," "6," and "8" all have the same bright blue color. The number designs (odd number designs and even number designs) are each made up of various character designs (all different character designs) in multiple colors (full color), with the character designs being the main focus and displayed large. For this reason, the number designs are smaller in size than the character designs attached to the number designs. The special designs are designs of winged character designs and have multiple colors (full color). The special designs are made up only of winged character designs, and the size of the special designs is the same as or larger than the character designs attached to the number designs.

When the decorative pattern change effect (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state as it gradually increases its speed from a slow speed, changing at high speed. This allows the background image located behind the decorative pattern to be seen through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changing from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, and appears temporarily stopped, or stopped (temporarily stopped, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R currently changing as the first special symbol is consumed are displayed in the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area is provided for the first special symbol hold in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed in four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), allowing a maximum of four hold icons to be stored. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icons are displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one hold icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. For the sake of convenience, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol change presentation (change display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the top center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, at the top center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, and are therefore difficult to distinguish from the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, these numbers are positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with the other images displayed behind them, so visibility is not obstructed by the other images.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icons are further set with increasing expectations of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

In Figure 121 (A), the left decorative pattern 8L is a temporarily stopped display of the bright blue number "2" with a character pattern 8Lb attached, the middle decorative pattern 8C is a temporarily stopped display of the bright green number "3" with a character pattern 8Ca attached, and the right decorative pattern 8C is a temporarily stopped display of the bright blue number "6" with a character pattern 8Rb attached, after which the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as temporarily stopped displays, resulting in a loss. When the loss is confirmed, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) starts again, as shown in Figure 121 (B), and the decorative pattern rotation stop display effect C starts.

Then, during the variable effect (variable display), the left decorative pattern 8L changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and as shown in Figure 121(C), the left decorative pattern 8L appears in a position slightly above the center line connecting the centers of the left and right sides of the display screen 7a in the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, with a bright green number "1" pattern 8La and a character pattern 8Lb attached. When the left decorative pattern 8L changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, the variable effect (variable display) is achieved with the bright green number "1" pattern 8La remaining facing forward, and further, the character pattern 8Lb attached to the bright green number "1" pattern 8La has glowing yellow eyes, but does not face forward, but is tilted forward and to the right as viewed from the character pattern 8Lb, creating a silhouette resembling a shadow puppet. At this time, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R continues.

Then, as shown in Figure 121 (D), the left decorative design 8L slowly changes position so that the character design 8Lb faces forward from the front right while the bright green number "1" design 8La remains facing forward. When the character design 8Lb faces forward, the silhouette changes from a shadow puppet-like form to full color, and the entire card-type left decorative design 8L moves slowly and quickly up and down. As a result, the card-type left decorative design 8L appears temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright green number "1" design 8La and the character design 8Lb both facing forward.

Next, during the change effect (change display), the right decorative pattern 8R changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and as shown in Figure 121(E), the right decorative pattern 8R appears in a position slightly above the center line connecting the centers of the left and right sides of the display screen 7a in the change area of the right decorative pattern 8R, with a character pattern 8Rb attached to a bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra. When the right decorative pattern 8R changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, the change effect (change display) is such that the bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra does not face forward but remains tilted to the left and forward as viewed from the number "2" pattern 8Ra, and the character pattern 8Rb attached to the bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra has glowing yellow eyes in full color and remains facing forward, resulting in a change effect (change display). At this time, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R continues.

Then, as shown in Figure 121 (F), the right decorative pattern 8R slowly changes position so that the bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra faces forward from the front left, and when the bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra faces forward, the entire card-type right decorative pattern 8R moves slowly and in small movements up and down. As a result, the card-type right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily displayed with the bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra and the character pattern 8Rb both facing forward.

Next, during the change effect (change display), the central decorative pattern 8C changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and as shown in Figure 121 (G), the central decorative pattern 8C appears in a position slightly above the center line connecting the centers of the left and right sides of the display screen 7a in the change area of the central decorative pattern 8C, with a bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca and a character pattern 8Cb attached. When the central decorative pattern 8C changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state, the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca remains facing forward, resulting in a change effect (change display). Furthermore, the character pattern 8Cb attached to the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca has glowing yellow eyes, but does not face forward, but is tilted forward and to the right when viewed from the character pattern 8Cb, creating a silhouette like a shadow puppet, resulting in a change effect (change display).

Then, as shown in Figure 121 (H), the central decorative pattern 8C slowly changes position so that the character pattern 8Cb faces forward from the front right while the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca remains facing forward. Once the character pattern 8Cb faces forward, the display changes from a silhouette-like image to full color, and the entire card-type central decorative pattern 8C moves slowly and slightly up and down. As a result, the card-type central decorative pattern 8C appears temporarily stopped with the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca and the character pattern 8Cb both facing forward. This ends the decorative pattern rotation and stop display performance C.

Then, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a static state, resulting in a loss. Once the loss is confirmed, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

In this way, in the card-type left decorative pattern 8L, the character patterns 8Lb attached to the odd-numbered patterns 8La slowly change position so that they face forward from the right front as viewed from the character patterns 8Lb; in the card-type middle decorative pattern 8C, the character patterns 8Cb attached to the odd-numbered patterns 8Ca slowly change position so that they face forward from the right front as viewed from the character patterns 8Cb; whereas, in the card-type right decorative pattern 8R, the even-numbered patterns 8Ra slowly change position so that they face forward from the left front as viewed from the even-numbered patterns 8Ra. In other words, even though various characters are attached to the odd-numbered and even-numbered patterns, the character patterns rotate in the odd-numbered patterns and the number patterns rotate in the even-numbered patterns, so the objects that rotate are different. Furthermore, the direction in which the character patterns rotate in the odd-numbered patterns is opposite to the direction in which the number patterns rotate in the even-numbered patterns.

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of the decorative pattern rotation and stop display performance.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance A of Figure 119, the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance B of Figure 120, and the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance C of Figure 121, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying multiple types of images is provided, and it is possible to execute a variable performance (Figures 119 (B) to (H) in the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance A, Figures 120 (B) to (G) in the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance B, and Figures 121 (B) to (I) in the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance C) in which, among the decorative patterns (multiple pattern images) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8L, decorative patterns (first pattern images) in which character patterns are added to odd-numbered patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed in a first stopping mode, and further decorative patterns (second pattern images) in which even-numbered patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed in a second stopping mode (the second stopping mode is different from the first stopping mode). According to this configuration, among the decorative patterns (plurality of pattern images) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8L, a decorative pattern (first pattern image) in which characters are attached to odd-numbered symbols that are temporarily stopped in the first stopping mode, and a decorative pattern (second pattern image) in which even-numbered symbols are temporarily stopped in the second stopping mode, can provide the player with a novel variable presentation (variable display) of the decorative patterns, thereby increasing the player's interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A of FIG. 119, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B of FIG. 120, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C of FIG. 121, the first and second symbol images are number symbols (number images), and the first symbol image further includes a character symbol (decorative image). According to this configuration, the first symbol image is a number symbol (number image) including a character symbol (decorative image), and the second symbol image is a number symbol (number image). Therefore, there is already a difference between the decorative symbol that becomes the first symbol image and the decorative symbol that becomes the second symbol image. When the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) begins and the temporary stop display is initiated, different impressions can be given to the player depending on the combination of the decorative symbols that are temporarily displayed, which can contribute to eliminating the monotony of the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display).

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the variable effects in the decorative pattern rotation stop display effect A of FIG. 119, the decorative pattern rotation stop display effect B of FIG. 120, and the decorative pattern rotation stop display effect C of FIG. 121, the first stop mode is to rotate the character pattern (decorative image) without rotating the number pattern (number image) in the first pattern image, and then temporarily stop the first pattern image, and the second stop mode is to rotate the number pattern (number image) in the second pattern image, and then temporarily stop the second pattern image. According to this configuration, the first pattern image, which includes the character pattern (decorative image) in the number pattern (number image), is temporarily stopped after the character pattern (decorative image) rotates without rotating the number pattern (number image), and the second pattern image, which is the number pattern (number image), is temporarily stopped after the number pattern (number image) rotates, so that the rotating objects are different. As a result, although variations in the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern include when it is only the first pattern image, when it is only the second pattern image, or when it is both the first and second pattern images, in any variation, there is always a rotating part in the decorative pattern, so a unified effect of "rotation" is performed for the decorative pattern change effect (change display), and even if the rotating object is different between the first pattern image and the second pattern image, it is possible to make it less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable with the decorative pattern change effect (change display).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A of Fig. 119, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B of Fig. 120, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C of Fig. 121, the number symbols (number images) in the first symbol image are either bright green (first color) or bright red (second color), and the number symbols (number images) in the second symbol image are either bright blue (third color). With this configuration, the first symbol image and the second symbol image differ in the way they are temporarily stopped, and also in the colors of the number symbols (number images). Furthermore, the number symbols (number images) in the first symbol image also come in two colors. Therefore, depending on the combination of the temporarily stopped symbols, more different impressions can be given to the player.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance B of Figures 120 (G) to (I), the decorative patterns (plurality of pattern images) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8L further include a special pattern (third pattern image) of the middle decorative pattern 8C which has a character pattern (decorative image) but does not have a number pattern (number image), and in the variable performance, the special pattern (third pattern image) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed in a third stop mode, and in the third stop mode, when the special pattern (third pattern image) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed, the pattern (decorative image) of the winged character in the special pattern (third pattern image) of the middle decorative pattern 8C can jump out outside the special pattern (third pattern image) of the middle decorative pattern 8C and move. According to this configuration, when the special pattern (third pattern image) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed, the pattern (decorative image) of the winged character in the special pattern (third pattern image) of the middle decorative pattern 8C suddenly jumps outward from the special pattern (third pattern image) of the middle decorative pattern 8C and moves, creating a moving image that even the player would never imagine, thereby providing the player with an impactful presentation.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the changing effects in the decorative pattern rotation stop display effect A of Fig. 119, the decorative pattern rotation stop display effect B of Fig. 120, and the decorative pattern rotation stop display effect C of Fig. 121, when the first pattern image starts to change, part of the character pattern (decorative image) in the first pattern image is changed to one that resembles a silhouette (silhouette image) like a shadow puppet, and in the first stop mode, it is possible to return to the original (full-color) character pattern (decorative image). With this configuration, by returning from the silhouette (silhouette image) like a shadow puppet to the original (full-color) character pattern (decorative image), it is easy to determine which character's pattern it is, and by using a silhouette (silhouette image) like a shadow puppet, the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A of FIG. 119, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B of FIG. 120, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C of FIG. 121, the size of the number symbols (number images) in the first symbol image is smaller than the size of the number symbols (number images) in the second symbol image. Because the first symbol image includes a character symbol (decorative image) in addition to the number symbol (number image), the character symbol (decorative image) is primarily larger in the first symbol image, and the number symbol is smaller in size than the character symbol (decorative image). Furthermore, the second symbol image is a number symbol (number image), and the number symbol itself is primarily larger. In other words, the player's attention is drawn to the character symbol (decorative symbol) displayed large in the first symbol image, while the player's attention is drawn to the number symbol (number image) displayed large in the second symbol image, resulting in different focus targets. This can contribute to preventing the changing presentation (changing display) of the decorative pattern that becomes the first pattern image and the decorative pattern that becomes the second pattern image from becoming monotonous.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of decorative pattern rotation and stop display effects are shown.
[Modification 1]
The decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A in Fig. 119, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B in Fig. 120, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C in Fig. 121 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, they are performed in a game state known as a left-handed hit. However, they may also be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21. In other words, they may also be performed in a game state known as a right-handed hit.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative symbol rotating/stop display effect A in FIG. 119, the decorative symbol rotating/stop display effect B in FIG. 120, and the decorative symbol rotating/stop display effect C in FIG. 121, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the center decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and aligned in a line slightly above the center line connecting the centers of the left and right sides of the display screen 7a in the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L. However, for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R may be positioned slightly above this center line, and the center decorative symbol 8C may be positioned further back, forming a triangle with the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R as the base. In this case, the size of the center decorative symbol 8C is made smaller than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. This allows the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R to be positioned in the foreground and the center decorative symbol 8C to be positioned in the background, thereby achieving a three-dimensional arrangement.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B in FIG. 120, the special symbol is a winged character symbol, which jumps forward from the central decorative symbol 8C and is displayed large on the display screen 7a, creating a moving image effect of the winged character symbol. However, in addition to the winged character symbol, a letter symbol may also be used as the special symbol. For example, a letter symbol that performs a pseudo-continuous combination (the letter symbol "pseudo-continuous combination") may be used, or a letter symbol that changes the variable icon 9C or the reserved icon 9A (the letter symbol "change") may be used. In this way, a letter symbol can be used that jumps forward from the central decorative symbol 8C to activate the content of the letter symbol, and the increased variety of special symbols can further enhance the effect of the special symbol symbol.

[Modification 4]
The decorative pattern rotation and stop display effect A in Figure 119, the decorative pattern rotation and stop display effect B in Figure 120, and the decorative pattern rotation and stop display effect C in Figure 121 may not have some of the effects described, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect C10-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
Among the plurality of symbol images, a first symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed in a first stopping mode, and further, a variable effect is executable in which a second symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed in a second stopping mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C10-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C10-1,
the first and second design images are number images,
The first design image further includes a decorative image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect C10-3
The gaming machine according to aspect C10-2,
In the variable performance, as the first stop mode, the decorative image is rotated without rotating the number image in the first pattern image, and then the first pattern image is temporarily stopped and displayed, and as the second stop mode, the number image in the second pattern image is rotated, and then the second pattern image is temporarily stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect C10-4
The gaming machine according to aspect C10-2 or C10-3,
The number image in the first design image may have a first color or a second color,
The number image in the second design image may have a third color.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C10-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C10-2 to C10-4,
The plurality of pattern images further includes a third pattern image having the decorative image but not having the number image,
In the variation performance, the third symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed in a third stopping mode,
In the third stop mode, when the third pattern image is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative image in the third pattern image can jump out to the outside of the third pattern image and move.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect C10-6
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C10-2 to C10-5,
In the variation performance, when the first pattern image starts to vary, a part of the decorative image in the first pattern image is changed to one that resembles a silhouette image, and in the first stop mode, the decorative image is returned to the original.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C10-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C10-2 to C10-6,
The size of the number image in the first design image is smaller than the size of the number image in the second design image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Expectation level number display effects A to C are explained below using Figures 122 to 124. These expectation level number display effects can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the expectation level number display effect, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Expectation level numerical display performance A]
FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining the expectation level number display effect A. The expectation level number display effect is an effect in which an image showing the expectation level at the time of reach development is displayed as a number during the reach effect. First, as shown in FIG. 122(A), on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a reach state (here, a reach of "2↓2"). The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a. After this reach effect, when a predetermined period has elapsed, a black doll character CRA1 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a text image of "Chance to Enter Probable Big Win" is displayed together with the character CRA1.

This "Chance to Enter a Probable Jackpot" text image is a hit type suggestion image that indicates the type of jackpot that will occur when a jackpot occurs. In other words, it suggests that if a jackpot occurs during this variation, it will be a probable jackpot. Here, it suggests that if a jackpot occurs after this variation, it will be a 16R (round) V-passing jackpot (effectively 15R or 13R). This text image is displayed during the variation when a jackpot during this variation is determined by lottery at the time of winning, and further, if the jackpot type is a 16RV-passing jackpot and display of this text image is selected by lottery when selecting a variation pattern. Furthermore, this text image can be selected by lottery to be displayed even when a loss during this variation has been determined by lottery at the time of winning. Note that this text image may be set to be displayed only when the jackpot type is a 16RV-passing jackpot during a jackpot, or it may be set to be displayed when a different jackpot occurs during a jackpot (for example, a jackpot not scheduled to pass 16RV).

The text image "Chance to enter a special jackpot" is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then disappears from the display screen 7a. After the text image "Chance to enter a special jackpot" disappears, character CRA1 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a during the same fluctuation, as shown in Figure 122(B). Character CRA1 is an image representing the same object (a black person) as in Figure 122(A), but its display position is different (changed) from that in Figure 122(A). In addition, a text image "Expectation level 40% with smile reach development" is displayed together with character CRA1. The text image "Expectation level 40% with smile reach development" is displayed as a speech bubble for character CRA. The reach state of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R continues.

This text image "40% chance of winning with Smile Reach development" is a winning probability suggestion image that numerically indicates the chance of a jackpot if the Reach development effect is executed when the relevant variation is in Reach. In other words, if the Smile Reach development effect is executed after this display, it suggests that the chance of a jackpot will be 40%. Here, this text image is displayed both when a jackpot is confirmed for the variation in question by lottery at the time of winning, and when a loss is confirmed. If displaying this text image during variation pattern selection is selected by lottery, it is displayed during the variation. The ratio of selections for displaying this text image for variation patterns during jackpots and variation patterns during losses is set to 4:6.

The text image "Expectation level 40% with Smile Reach development" is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then disappears from the display screen 7a. After the text image "Expectation level 40% with Smile Reach development" disappears, the text image "Smile Reach Development" is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a during the same fluctuation, as shown in Figure 122 (C). This is an image that notifies players that a Reach has developed in the Reach performance. Then, as shown in Figure 122 (D), the Reach development performance is executed. Here, multiple smiling face images are displayed. Then, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped. Here, they are confirmed and stopped in the form of a missing "282".

Figure 122 (F) shows a variation different from Figures 122 (A) to (E), in which a varying display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a. Then, as shown in Figure 122 (G), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R enter a reach state (here, a "6↓6" reach). The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R move to the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a, respectively, to execute a special reach effect. Here, first, a battle image of ally character CRA and enemy character CRB fighting is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. While this battle image is displayed, a text image reading "Expectation rate 30% with Smile Reach development" is displayed. The text image "Expectation rate 30% with Smile Reach development" is displayed within a rectangular frame below ally character CRA and enemy character CRB.

This text image "30% chance of winning with Smile Reach development" is a winning probability suggestion image that numerically indicates the chance of a jackpot if the Reach development effect is executed when the relevant variation is in Reach. In other words, if the Smile Reach development effect is executed after this display, it suggests that the chance of a jackpot will be 30%. Here, this text image is displayed both when a jackpot is confirmed for the variation in question by lottery at the time of winning, and when a loss is confirmed. If displaying this text image during variation pattern selection is selected by lottery, it is displayed during the variation. The ratio of selections to display this text image for variation patterns during jackpots and variation patterns during losses is set to 3:7.

Comparing this text image of "Expectation level 30% with Smile Reach Development" with the text image of "Expectation level 40% with Smile Reach Development" in Figure 122(B), while they are images representing the expectation level when the same Reach development effect (Smile Reach Development) is executed, different numerical values are displayed as the expectation level. In this way, different expectation level numerical values may be displayed for the same Reach development effect (Smile Reach Development), drawing the player's attention to the numerical values. Furthermore, this text image of "Expectation level 30% with Smile Reach Development" is displayed with the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, while the text image of "Expectation level 40% with Smile Reach Development" in Figure 122(B) is displayed with the black doll character CRA1. In this way, the text image of "Expectation level 30% with Smile Reach Development" and the text image of "Expectation level 40% with Smile Reach Development" in Figure 122(B) display images representing different objects. This makes it difficult to tell what image the text image "Expectation rate of Smile Reach development is XX%" will be displayed with, increasing the player's expectation for the display.

The text image "Smile Reach Development Probability 30%" is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then disappears from the display screen 7a. After the text image "Smile Reach Development Probability 30%" disappears, the text image "Smile Reach Development" is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a during the same fluctuation, as shown in Figure 122 (H). This is an image that notifies players that a Reach has developed in the Reach performance. Then, as shown in Figure 122 (I), the Reach development performance is executed. Here, ally character CRA throws multiple smiling face images at enemy character CRB. Then, as shown in Figure 122 (J), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, the image of ally character CRA being defeated is fixed and stopped in the form of a "686" miss.

[Expectation level numerical display performance B]
FIG. 123 is a diagram illustrating the expectation level number display effect B. The expectation level number display effect is an effect in which an image showing the expectation level at the time of reach development is displayed in numbers during the reach effect. First, as shown in FIG. 123(A), on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a reach state (here, a reach of "2↓2"). The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a. After this reach effect, when a predetermined period has elapsed, a battle image showing a battle between an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. During the display of this battle image, a smile character CRA1 is displayed. In addition, a text image of "Win the battle for a chance to enter RUSH" is displayed together with the smile character CRA1.

This text image "Win the battle for a chance to enter RUSH" is a hit type suggestion image that suggests the type of jackpot that will occur if the ally character CRA wins the battle performance. In other words, it suggests that if a hit occurs during this variation, it will result in a jackpot with RUSH. Here, it suggests that if a jackpot occurs after this variation, it will be a 16R (round) V-passing jackpot (effectively 15R or 13R). This text image is displayed during the variation when a jackpot for this variation is determined by lottery at the time of winning, and further, if the jackpot type is a 16RV-passing jackpot and displaying this text image is selected by lottery when selecting a variation pattern. Furthermore, this text image is selected by lottery to be displayed even when a loss for this variation has been determined by lottery at the time of winning. In this case, an image of the ally character CRA being defeated is displayed. This text image may be set to be displayed only when the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass 16RV, or may be set to be displayed when the jackpot type is a different jackpot (for example, a jackpot not scheduled to pass 16RV).

After the text image "Win the battle for a chance to enter RUSH," is displayed, and a predetermined period of time has passed, as shown in Figure 123 (B), smile character CRA2 is displayed while the text image "Win the battle for a chance to enter RUSH" continues to be displayed. Smile character CRA2 is an image depicting the same object (a smiling face) as smile character CRA1, but is displayed in a different position (lined up and down). In addition, a text image "Expectation rate 60% if Smile Man participation reaches development" is displayed together with smile character CRA2. The text image "Expectation rate 60% if Smile Man participation reaches development" is displayed as a speech bubble around smile character CRA2. The reach state of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R continues.

This text image "60% chance of winning with Smile Man participation reach development" is a winning probability suggestion image that numerically indicates the chance of a jackpot if a reach development effect is executed when the relevant variation reaches a limit. In other words, if a Smile Man participation reach development effect is executed after this display, it suggests that the chance of a jackpot will be 60%. Here, this text image is displayed both when a jackpot is confirmed for the variation in question by lottery at the time of winning, and when a loss is confirmed. If displaying this text image is selected by lottery when selecting a variation pattern, it is displayed during the variation. The ratio of selecting to display this text image for a jackpot variation pattern and a loss variation pattern is set to 6:4.

The text image "Smile Man participation reach development with 60% chance of success" is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then disappears from the display screen 7a. At this time, the text image "Chance to enter RUSH with victory in battle" also disappears. After the text images "Smile Man participation reach development with 60% chance of success" and "Chance to enter RUSH with victory in battle" disappear, as shown in Figure 123 (C), during the same fluctuation, the text image "Smile Man joins!" is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. This is an image that notifies players that a reach has developed in the reach performance. Along with this notification image, Smile Man CRC joins the battle video in which ally character CRA and enemy character CRB fight. Then, as shown in Figure 123 (D), a reach development performance is executed. Here, an image is displayed in which ally character CRA and Smile Man CRC are defeated by enemy character CRB. After that, as shown in Figure 123(E), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. In this case, they are fixed and stopped in the losing pattern of "282".

Figure 123 (F) shows a variation different from those shown in Figures 123 (A) to (E), in which the display screen 7a displays a variation of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Then, as shown in Figure 123 (G), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R enter a reach state (here, a "6↓6" reach). The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R move to the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a, respectively, and a special reach effect is executed. First, a battle image of ally character CRA and enemy character CRB fighting is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. While this battle image is displayed, a rectangular striped image is displayed. Then, as shown in Figures 123 (H) to (I), when the stripes within the rectangular striped image slide to the left, a text image reading "60% chance of winning with Smile Man participation in reach development" is displayed from within. The text image reading "60% chance of winning with Smile Man participation in reach development" is displayed within a rectangular frame.

This text image "60% chance of winning with Smile Man participation reach development" is a winning probability suggestion image that numerically indicates the chance of a jackpot if a reach development effect is executed when the relevant variation reaches a limit. In other words, if a Smile Man participation reach development effect is executed after this display, it suggests that the chance of a jackpot will be 60%. Here, this text image is displayed both when a jackpot is confirmed for the variation in question by lottery at the time of winning, and when a loss is confirmed. If displaying this text image is selected by lottery when selecting a variation pattern, it is displayed during the variation. The ratio of selecting to display this text image for a jackpot variation pattern and a loss variation pattern is set to 6:4.

Comparing the text image of "Smile Man Participation Reach Development with 60% Expectation" in Figures 123(G)-(I) with the text image of "Smile Man Participation Reach Development with 60% Expectation" in Figure 123(B), they are images that represent the expectation level when the same reach development effect (Smile Man Participation Reach Development) is executed, and the same numerical value is displayed as the expectation level. On the other hand, the text image of "Smile Man Participation Reach Development with 60% Expectation" in Figures 123(G)-(I) is displayed from within when the striped pattern in the rectangular striped image slides to the left, whereas the text image of "Smile Man Participation Reach Development with 60% Expectation" in Figure 123(B) is displayed as a speech bubble for smile character CRA2. Thus, even though the content is the same, the display format is different. Furthermore, the text image "Expectation level 60% with Smile Man participation reach development" in Figures 123(G)-(I) is displayed along with the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB, while the text image "Expectation level 60% with Smile Man participation reach development" in Figure 123(B) is displayed along with smile character CRA2. In this way, the text image "Expectation level 60% with Smile Man participation reach development" in Figures 123(G)-(I) and the text image "Expectation level 60% with Smile Man participation reach development" in Figure 123(B) display images representing different objects. This makes it difficult to tell in what form the text image "Expectation level 60% with Smile Man participation reach development" will be displayed and with what image, thereby increasing the player's expectation of the display.

The text image "Expectation 60% with Smile Man participation in reach development" is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then disappears from the display screen 7a. If the reach development effect is not executed (if Smile Man CRC in Figure 123 does not appear) after the text image "Expectation 60% with Smile Man participation in reach development" disappears, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, as shown in Figure 123 (J). Here, the image of the ally character CRA being defeated is fixed and stopped in the form of a "686" miss.

[Expectation level numerical display performance C]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining the likelihood of winning number display effect C. FIGS. 124(A) to (C) are similar to FIGS. 123(A) to (C) of the likelihood of winning number display effect B. After FIG. 124(C), a reach development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 124(D). Here, an image is displayed in which the ally character CRA and the smile man CRC defeat the enemy character CRB and win. After this victory, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, because the ally character CRA has won, the winning pattern of "222" is fixed and stopped.

Figures 124 (F) to (G) are similar to Figures 123 (F) to (H) of the expectation level number display effect B. After the text image "Smile Man Participates in Reach Development with 60% Expectation Level" shown in Figure 124 (G) disappears, the text image "Smile Man Joins!" is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a as shown in Figure 124 (H). This is an image announcing that a reach development has occurred in the reach development effect. Along with this notification image, Smile Man CRC joins the battle video in which ally character CRA and enemy character CRB fight. Then, as shown in Figure 124 (I), the reach development effect is executed. Here, an image is displayed in which ally character CRA and Smile Man CRC defeat enemy character CRB and win. Then, as shown in Figure 124 (J), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. In this case, the ally character CRA has won, so the game has stopped at the winning number "666".

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the expected number display.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 122(B), 123(B), and 124(B), when a reach is reached, a first effect can be executed in which the degree of expectation for the reach development is expressed numerically. With this configuration, an unprecedented and novel effect can be provided to the player, providing visual enjoyment and increasing the player's interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 122(A), 123(A), and 124(A), a second effect suggesting the type of win at the time of a win can be executed during the same fluctuation as that in which the first effect is executed but before the first effect. With this configuration, a novel effect that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player and increase the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 122(A)(B), 123(A)(B), and 124(A)(B), an image representing the same object is displayed in the first effect and the second effect, and the image representing the same object is displayed in different positions in the first effect and the second effect. With this configuration, an unprecedented and novel effect can visually entertain the player and increase their interest.
[Effect 4]
122(B)(G), in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first effect represents the degree of expectation when a specific reach development effect is executed in a numerical value, and when a reach is reached, a third effect can be executed in which the degree of expectation when the specific reach development effect is executed is represented by a numerical value different from that in the first effect. With this configuration, a novel effect not seen in the past can visually entertain the player and increase the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 122(B) and 122(G), images depicting different objects are displayed in the first and third effects. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained by an unprecedented and innovative effect, thereby increasing the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
123(B)(G)-(I) and 124(B)(G), in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first effect represents the degree of expectation when a specific reach development effect is executed in a numerical value, and when a reach occurs, a fourth effect can be executed in which the degree of expectation when a specific reach development effect is executed is represented by the same numerical value as in the first effect, but is displayed in a manner different from the first effect. With this configuration, a novel effect that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the player's interest.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the expectation level number display presentation are shown.
[Modification 1]

In FIG. 122(G) of the expectation level number display effect A, the expectation level represented by the text image "Expectation level 30% with Smile Reach development" may be the same numerical value as the expectation level represented by the text image "Expectation level 40% with Smile Reach development" in FIG. 122(B). In this case, effects that represent the same numerical value for the expectation level when a specific Reach development effect is executed during a Reach are executed in different ways, thereby enhancing interest. Also, in FIGS. 123(G) to (I) of the expectation level number display effect B, the expectation level represented by the text image "Expectation level 60% with Smile Man participation Reach development" may be a different numerical value from the expectation level represented by the text image "Expectation level 60% with Smile Man participation Reach development" in FIG. 123(B). In this case, effects that represent the expectation level when a specific Reach development effect is executed during a Reach are executed in different numerical values, thereby enhancing interest.
[Modification 2]
In the expectation level number display effect A, the effect in which the text image "Expectation level XX% with Smile Reach development" is displayed may be executed multiple times during one variation. In other words, the expectation level may change during one variation. In this case, the expectation level displayed later may be higher or lower than the expectation level displayed earlier.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
◇[Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
This gaming machine is characterized in that, when a reach is reached, a first effect can be executed which numerically indicates the degree of expectation when the reach is reached.
◇[Aspect D1-2]
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A gaming machine characterized in that a second effect suggesting a type of win at the time of a win can be executed during the same fluctuation as that during which the first effect is executed and before the first effect.
◇[Aspect D1-3]
3. The gaming machine according to claim 2,
In the first effect and the second effect, an image representing the same object is displayed,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the image representing the same object is displayed at different positions in the first effect and the second effect.
◇[Aspect D1-4]
4. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
In the first effect, the expectation level when a specific reach development effect is executed is expressed in numbers,
A gaming machine capable of executing a third effect in which, when a reach is reached, the expectation level when the specific reach development effect is executed is expressed by a number different from the number in the first effect.
◇[Aspect D1-5]
5. The gaming machine according to claim 4,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first effect and the third effect display images representing different objects.
◇[Aspect D1-6]
6. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
In the first effect, the expectation level when a specific reach development effect is executed is expressed in numbers,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a reach occurs, the expectation level in the case where the specific reach development effect is executed is expressed by the same number as in the first effect, while being capable of executing a fourth effect that is displayed in a manner different from the first effect.

The following explains specific effect execution suggestion effects A to C using Figures 125 to 127. These specific effect execution suggestion effects can be executed during decorative pattern variation effects, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a specific effect execution suggestion effect, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L.

[Specific performance suggestion performance A]
FIG. 125 is a diagram illustrating the specific effect execution suggestion effect A. The specific effect execution suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that a specific effect will be executed in the current variation. First, as shown in FIG. 125(A), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L continue to display no variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. That is, even after the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol (identification information) begins on the special symbol display 41 (FIG. 2), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L continue to display no variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the pending display area (variable icon display area, pending consumption image display area) at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Below the pending display area, a horizontally long rectangular image is displayed to indicate the position of the pending display area.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variation, a special effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed, indicating that a special effect will be executed during that variation. Here, the special effect execution suggestion image ESG is a text image that reads "All Smiles Gather!" and indicates that a special reach effect (SP reach effect) will be executed. When the text image "All Smiles Gather!" appears, it is enlarged and displayed across three screens: the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. Furthermore, the effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed beyond the three screens. At this time, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R has not yet been displayed. In other words, in this effect, after the variation begins, the special effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed before the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. Therefore, a player who sees the special effect execution suggestion image ESG is suddenly notified that a special effect, such as a special reach effect, will be executed without any knowledge of the state of the decorative symbols, such as whether or not the decorative symbols will be reach. This can greatly surprise the player and increase their interest. The specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed with a portion overlapping the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C. At this time, the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in front of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG.

After that, as shown in Figure 125 (C), the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed in a reduced size, and the entire specific effect execution suggestion image ESG fits within the three screens of the right sub-display screen 64R, display screen 7a, and left sub-display screen 64L. At this time, it is still enlarged and displayed across the three screens. The variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has not yet been displayed. A portion of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG continues to be displayed overlapping the hold icon (variable icon) 9C. At this time, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in front of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG.

After that, as shown in Figure 125 (D), the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is further reduced in size, and the entire specific effect execution suggestion image ESG fits inside the display screen 7a. At this time, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has not yet been displayed. A portion of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG continues to be displayed overlapping the hold icon (variable icon) 9C, and the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in front of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG.

After that, as shown in Figure 125 (E), while the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed on the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a and temporarily stops where it overlaps with the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. The left decorative pattern 8L is a "7" in this case and is displayed in front of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. After that, as shown in Figure 125 (F), while the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG and the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L are displayed on the display screen 7a, the right decorative pattern 8R moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a and temporarily stops where it overlaps with the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. The right decorative pattern 8R is the same "7" as the left decorative pattern 8L and is displayed in front of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. As a result, a "7↓7" reach is formed in front of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG.

Next, as shown in Figure 125 (G), the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG breaks, and a special reach effect as a specific effect begins. The right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L are stopped in a reach mode. Here, the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG breaks, and multiple smiling face images (Smile-kun) that will execute the specific effect (special reach effect) appear from the back side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. Then, as shown in Figures 125 (H) and (I), a specific effect (special reach effect) using multiple smiling face images is executed. That is, a character corresponding to the content shown in the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG breaks the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG, and this character appears in the special reach effect. Here, an effect with a high probability of a jackpot is executed in the specific effect. Then, as shown in Figure 125 (J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, they are fixed and stopped in a jackpot mode of "777".

[Specific performance suggestion performance B]
FIG. 126 is a diagram illustrating the specific effect execution suggestion effect B. The specific effect execution suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that a specific effect will be executed in the change. First, as shown in FIG. 126(A), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L continue to display no variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. That is, even after the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol (identification information) begins on the special symbol display 41 (FIG. 2), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L continue to display no variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the hold display area (variable icon display area, hold consumption image display area) at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. A horizontally long rectangular image is displayed below the hold display area to indicate the position of the hold display area.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variation, a special effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed, indicating that a special effect will be executed during the variation, as shown in Figures 126(B) and 126(C). Here, the special effect execution suggestion image ESG is a text image reading "All Smiles Gather!", announcing that a special reach effect (SP reach effect) will be executed. The text image "All Smiles Gather!" appears, moving from top to bottom on the display screen 7a. At this time, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R has not yet been displayed. In other words, in this effect, after the variation begins, the special effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed before the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. Therefore, a player who sees the special effect execution suggestion image ESG is suddenly informed that a special effect, such as a special reach effect, will be executed without any knowledge of the state of the decorative symbols, such as whether or not the decorative symbols will be reach. This can greatly surprise the player and increase their interest. When the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG stops at the position shown in Figure 126 (C), a portion of it is displayed overlapping the hold icon (variable icon) 9C. At this time, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in front of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG.

After that, as shown in Figure 126 (D), the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is enlarged and displayed across three screens: the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. The variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has not yet been displayed. A portion of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG continues to be displayed overlapping the pending icon (variable icon) 9C. At this time, the pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in front of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG.

After that, as shown in Figure 126 (E), the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed in a reduced size, and the entire specific effect execution suggestion image ESG once again fits within the display screen 7a. At this time, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has not yet been displayed. A portion of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG continues to be displayed overlapping the hold icon (variable icon) 9C, and the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in front of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG.

After that, as shown in Figure 126 (F), while the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed on the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a and temporarily stops at a position where it overlaps with the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. The left decorative pattern 8L is a "7" in this case and is displayed in front of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. After that, as shown in Figure 126 (G), while the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG and the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L are displayed on the display screen 7a, the right decorative pattern 8R moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a and temporarily stops at a position where it overlaps with the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. The right decorative pattern 8R is the same "7" as the left decorative pattern 8L and is displayed in front of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. As a result, a "7↓7" reach is formed in front of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG.

Next, as shown in Figure 126 (H), the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG breaks, and a special reach effect as a specific effect begins. The right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L are stopped in a reach mode. Here, the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG breaks, and multiple smiling face images (Smile-kun) that will execute the specific effect (special reach effect) appear from the back side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. Then, as shown in Figure 126 (I), a specific effect (special reach effect) using multiple smiling face images is executed. That is, a character corresponding to the content shown in the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG breaks the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG, and this character appears in the special reach effect. Here, an effect with a high probability of a jackpot is executed in the specific effect. Then, as shown in Figure 126 (J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, they are fixed and stopped in a jackpot mode of "777".

[Specific performance execution suggestion performance C]
FIG. 127 is a diagram illustrating the specific effect execution suggestion effect C. In the specific effect execution suggestion effect C, the specific effect execution suggestion effect and the pseudo consecutive effect are combined and executed. First, as shown in FIG. 127(A), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L continue to display no variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. That is, even after the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol (identification information) begins on the special symbol display 41 (FIG. 2), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L continue to display no variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the pending display area (variable icon display area, pending consumption image display area) at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Below the pending display area, a horizontally long rectangular image is displayed to indicate the position of the pending display area.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the effects shown in Figures 127(B) to (D) are executed. The effects shown in Figures 127(B) to (D) are the same as Figures 126(B) to (H) of the specific effect execution suggestion effect B. As shown in Figure 127(D), the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG breaks, and a special reach effect (SP reach effect) begins as a specific effect. The right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L are stopped in a reach state. Here, the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG breaks, and multiple smiling face images (Smile-kun) that execute the specific effect (special reach effect) appear from the back side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. Then, the specific effect (special reach effect) is executed using the multiple smiling face images. In other words, a character corresponding to the content shown in the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG breaks the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG, and this character appears in the special reach effect. After that, as shown in Figure 127(E), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stop. Here, they temporarily stop in the losing mode of "767". After that, as shown in Figure 127(F), a text image of "One More Time!" is displayed, and a pseudo consecutive effect begins, causing the decorative symbols to start changing again. Figures 127(G)-(I) are the same as Figures 127(B)-(D). After that, as shown in Figure 127(J), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R finally stop. Here, they finally stop in the jackpot mode of "777".

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of the specific effect execution suggestion effect.
[Effect 1]
125 to 127, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment can execute a first effect in which a special effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed, suggesting that a special effect will be executed during the change, while the decorative symbol change display has not been continuously displayed since the start of the change, and a second effect in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R temporarily stop, overlapping with the special effect execution suggestion image ESG, after the first effect. This configuration allows for unprecedented and innovative effects to be visually entertaining to players and enhance their interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the second effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed overlapping the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG in the reach state, as shown in Figures 125 to 127. With this configuration, a novel effect not seen in the past can be visually entertaining to the player, and the player's interest can be enhanced.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 125 to 127, after the second effect, the special effect execution suggestion image ESG breaks while the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are overlapping, and an SP reach effect is executed, which is a third effect. With this configuration, a novel effect not seen in the past can be visually entertaining to the player, and the player's interest can be enhanced.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 125 to 127, in the third effect, a character (a smiling face image) corresponding to the content shown in the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG destroys the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG, and in the SP reach effect, a character (a smiling face image) appears. With this configuration, a novel effect not seen in the past can visually entertain the player and increase the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 125 to 127, in the first effect, a hold icon (the hold icon (variable icon) 9C) is displayed superimposed on the front of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. With this configuration, a novel effect that has never been seen before can be visually entertaining to the player, and can increase the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
125 to 127, in the first effect, the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed across the sub-display means of the display screen 7a and the right sub-display screen 64R, and the display screen 7a and the left sub-display screen 64L. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained by an unprecedented and innovative effect, thereby increasing the player's interest.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the specific effect execution suggestion effect are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the specific effect execution suggestion effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stop in a reach state on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG, but they may stop in a manner other than reach. For example, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may temporarily stop at "567" on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. Also, for example, after temporarily stopping at "567," they may change again by a pseudo consecutive effect, and the specific effect may be executed at that time.

[Modification 2]
The content of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG may suggest that an effect other than the special reach effect will be executed. For example, it may suggest that a big win confirmation effect or a loss confirmation effect will be executed.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
◇[Aspect D2-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative design;
A first effect in which a specific effect execution suggestion image is displayed, suggesting that a specific effect will be executed in the change, in a state in which the change display of the decorative pattern has not been displayed continuously since the start of the change;
and a second effect in which the decorative pattern temporarily stops overlapping the specific effect execution suggestion image after the first effect.
◇[Aspect D2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1,
In the second effect, the decorative pattern is displayed superimposed on the specific effect execution suggestion image in a reach state.
◇[Aspect D2-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D2-1 or D2-2,
After the second effect, the specific effect execution suggestion image is broken with the decorative patterns overlapping, and a third effect can be executed in which an SP reach effect is executed.
◇[Aspect D2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-3,
In the third performance, a character corresponding to the content shown in the specific performance execution suggestion image destroys the specific performance execution suggestion image, and in the SP reach performance, the character appears.
◇[Aspect D2-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-4,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first effect, the hold icon is displayed superimposed on the front of the specific effect execution suggestion image.
◇[Aspect D2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-5 further comprises:
a sub-display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
In the first effect, the specific effect execution suggestion image is displayed across the display means and the sub-display means.

The special direction suggestion effect will be explained below using Figures 128 to 130. This special direction suggestion effect can be executed during the special symbol variation effect or during a jackpot game. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command or jackpot game start command received from the sub-control board 90, reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103, and displays the image on the display screen 7a.

[Special direction suggestion effect A]
FIG. 128 is a diagram illustrating the special direction suggestion effect A. In this special direction suggestion effect A, a time-saving effect is first executed, as shown in FIG. 128(A). This time-saving effect is performed when the player is in a relatively advantageous time-saving game state, and displays an ally character XF1, a direction suggestion display XF2, and a time-saving count display XF3. The ally character XF1 includes a predetermined item, a belt item XF11. The direction suggestion display XF2 includes a direction display XF21. The direction display XF21 consists of an arrow suggesting the player to hit right, with the words "hit right" inside the arrow. The time-saving count display XF3 indicates the remaining number of time-saving plays; in the example of FIG. 128(A), it displays "50 plays left." Furthermore, during this time-saving effect, a hold icon 9A and a corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed, but these are omitted from the figure. In addition, a decorative pattern change performance (change display) is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in Figure 128 (B), direction suggestion display effect 1 is executed. This direction suggestion display effect 1 is a continuation of the time-saving effect and is performed during time-saving play. In this direction suggestion display effect 1, the belt item XF11 of ally character XF1 flies towards the direction suggestion display XF2 and eventually becomes part of the direction suggestion display XF2. In other words, the direction suggestion display XF2 includes the belt item XF11 and the direction display XF21. The belt item XF11 and the direction display XF21 are positioned adjacent to each other, and the belt item XF11 is positioned in the shaft (arrow stem) portion of the arrow of the direction display XF21.

128(C), direction suggestion display effect 2 is executed. This direction suggestion display effect 2 is a continuation of direction display effect 1, and is executed during time-saving play. In this direction suggestion display effect 2, the ally character XF1, direction suggestion display XF2, and time-saving number display XF3 are continuously displayed, and in the direction suggestion display XF2, a movement effect is executed in which the belt item XF11 moves along the arrow shaft portion of the direction display XF21.
This direction suggestion display effect 2 is executed until the time-saving game ends or until a jackpot is hit.

[Special direction suggestion effect B]
FIG. 129 is a diagram illustrating the special direction suggestion effect B. In this special direction suggestion effect B, a normal game effect is first executed, as shown in FIG. 129(A). This normal game effect is executed during a normal game state that is relatively unfavorable to the player, and displays an ally character XF1 and a direction suggestion display XF2. The ally character XF1 includes a predetermined item, a belt item XF11. The direction suggestion display XF2 includes a direction display XF21. The direction display XF21 consists of an arrow suggesting the player to hit right, with the words "hit right" embedded within the arrow. In addition, during this normal game effect, the hold icon 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed, but are omitted from the illustration. Furthermore, a decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) is executed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The following explanation assumes that a jackpot is then hit and the game enters a time-saving game state.

Next, as shown in Figure 129 (B), direction suggestion display effect 1 is executed. This direction suggestion display effect 1 is performed during time-saving play, which is relatively advantageous to the player. In this direction suggestion display effect 1, the belt item XF11 of ally character XF1 flies toward the direction suggestion display XF2 and eventually becomes part of the direction suggestion display XF2. In other words, the direction suggestion display XF2 includes the belt item XF11 and the direction display XF21. The belt item XF11 and the direction display XF21 are positioned adjacent to each other, and the belt item XF11 is positioned in the shaft (arrow shaft) of the arrow on the direction display XF21. Also, in this direction suggestion display effect 1, the time-saving count display XF3 is displayed. The time-saving count display XF3 indicates the remaining number of time-saving plays, and in the example of Figure 129 (B), it is displayed as "50 more plays."

129(C), direction suggestion display effect 2 is executed. This direction suggestion display effect 2 is a continuation of direction suggestion display effect 1, and is executed during the time-saving game mode. In this direction suggestion display effect 2, the ally character XF1, direction suggestion display XF2, and time-saving number display XF3 are continuously displayed, and in the direction suggestion display XF2, a movement effect is executed in which the belt item XF11 moves along the arrow shaft portion of the direction display XF21.
This direction suggestion display effect 2 is executed until the time-saving game ends or until a jackpot is hit.

[Special Directional Suggestion C]
FIG. 130 is a diagram illustrating the special direction suggestion effect C. In this special direction suggestion effect C, a normal effect is first executed, as shown in FIG. 130(A). This normal effect is executed during a normal game state that is relatively unfavorable to the player, and displays an ally character XF1 and a direction suggestion display XF2. The ally character XF1 includes a predetermined item, a belt item XF11. The direction suggestion display XF2 includes a direction display XF21. The direction display XF21 consists of an arrow suggesting the player to hit right, with the words "hit right" embedded within the arrow. In addition, during this normal effect, a hold icon 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed, but are omitted from the illustration. Furthermore, a decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) is executed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The following explanation assumes that a jackpot is then hit and the jackpot game state is entered.

Next, as shown in Figure 130 (B), direction suggestion display effect 1 is executed. This direction suggestion display effect 1 is performed during a jackpot game. In this direction suggestion display effect 1, the belt item XF11 of ally character XF1 flies toward the direction suggestion display XF2 and eventually becomes part of the direction suggestion display XF2. In other words, the direction suggestion display XF2 includes the belt item XF11 and the direction display XF21. The belt item XF11 and the direction display XF21 are positioned adjacent to each other, and the belt item XF11 is positioned in the shaft (arrow trunk) of the arrow on the direction display XF21. Also, in this direction suggestion display effect 1, the acquired ball output display XF4 is displayed. The acquired ball output display XF4 shows the number of balls acquired during a jackpot, and in the example of Figure 130 (B), it shows "acquired balls: 1860."

130(C), direction suggestion display effect 2 is executed. This direction suggestion display effect 2 is a continuation of direction suggestion display effect 1, and is executed during a jackpot game state. In this direction suggestion display effect 2, the ally character XF1, direction suggestion display XF2, and acquired ball display XF4 are continuously displayed, and in the direction suggestion display XF2, a movement effect is executed in which the belt item XF11 moves along the arrow shaft portion of the direction display XF21.
This direction suggestion display effect 2 is executed until the big win game ends.

[Modification]
In the above special direction suggestion effects A to C, the display position of the direction suggestion display XF2 is fixed, but this is not limited to this, and the direction suggestion display XF2 may also move while the belt item XF11 moves.
Furthermore, in the direction suggestion display XF2, the direction display XF21 may also move. Furthermore, in the direction suggestion display XF2, the direction display XF21 may blink. Furthermore, in the direction suggestion display XF2, the belt item XF11 may move to a position where it overlaps with the direction display XF21. In this case, the belt item XF11 may be in front of the direction display XF21. Furthermore, the belt item XF11 may be behind the direction display XF21. When another image (such as a character (which may be an ally character XF1)) moves to a position where it overlaps with the direction suggestion display XF2, the direction suggestion display XF2 is displayed in front of this other image. In other words, the other image moves behind the direction suggestion display XF2. The direction suggestion display XF2 includes a belt item XF11 that is part of the ally character XF1, but it may also include other parts of the ally character XF1 (for example, a sword), the entire ally character XF1, or parts of other characters or other images.

[Example of effect]
In the special direction suggestion effect B, a normal play effect is performed in which the ally character XF1 is displayed during normal play, which is relatively unfavorable for the player. Then, during the time-saving play mode, which is relatively favorable for the player, a direction suggestion display XF2 is displayed, including a direction display XF21 suggesting a right hit and XF11 representing a portion of the ally character XF1. With this configuration, since the direction suggestion display XF2 includes a portion of the ally character XF1 displayed during normal play, which is relatively unfavorable for the player, when a player hits right, the player who sees the direction suggestion display XF2 recognizes the ally character XF1 that appeared during normal play, even during time-saving play, and can feel a mysterious atmosphere, thereby further enjoying the time-saving play. As a result, the excitement of the game can be enhanced.
In the special direction suggestion effect C, a time-saving effect is performed in which an ally character XF1 is displayed during normal gameplay, which is relatively unfavorable for the player. Then, during a jackpot game, a direction suggestion display XF2 is displayed, including a direction display XF21 suggesting the ball's launch direction and XF11 representing a portion of the ally character XF1. With this configuration, since the direction suggestion display XF2 includes a portion of the ally character XF1 displayed during normal gameplay, which is relatively unfavorable for the player, when a player hits the right button, the player who sees the direction suggestion display XF2 recognizes the ally character XF1 that appeared during normal gameplay, even during a jackpot game, and can sense a mysterious atmosphere, thereby further enhancing the player's enjoyment of the jackpot game. This increases the player's interest in the game.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect XF-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one effect of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
the first display effect is an effect of displaying a first image,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a direction suggestion,
the direction suggestion display includes a direction display suggesting a launch direction of the gaming ball and a second image representing a part of the first image;
After the first display effect, the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-1,
the second display effect is performed in a second gaming state of a first gaming state that is relatively unfavorable to the player and a second gaming state that is relatively advantageous to the player;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-2,
The first display effect is performed in the first gaming state.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-1,
The second display effect is performed during a jackpot game.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects XF-2 to XF-4,
the first image is a character;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Sound effect performances A to C are explained below using Figures 131 to 133. In Figures 131 to 133, for example, the first movable prop 14, second movable prop 15, and other movable props arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted for clarity.

This sound effect can be executed across multiple variable effects (variable displays) using decorative patterns. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (e.g., variable effect start command, pre-determination command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a sound effect is included, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Note that the background images used in the sound effect presentation (referred to as "specific background images") are specific images not included in normal background images, such as images of the moon's surface, space, or the interior of a spaceship. Normal background images are normal images, such as city images, forest images, ocean images, ocean floor images, and underground images. Specific background images and normal background images may be still images or videos.

Here, we will first explain sound effect A, then sound effect B, and finally sound effect C.

[Sound Effects A]
The sound effect performance A will be described with reference to Fig. 131. Fig. 131 is a diagram for explaining the sound effect performance A. The sound effect performance A is performed over a plurality of variable performances (variable displays) using decorative patterns.

First, as shown in FIG. 131(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a left three-dimensional decorative symbol 8L, a center three-dimensional decorative symbol 8C, and a right three-dimensional decorative symbol 8R, spinning the reels from top to bottom of the display screen 7a, and a decorative symbol (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") variation effect (variable display) begins. When the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) begins, the stopped decorative symbols gradually increase in speed from a low speed, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state and changing at high speed. This allows the background image behind the decorative symbols to be viewed through the rapidly changing translucent decorative symbols. The decorative symbols slow down just before stopping, changing from a translucent state back to an opaque state, and then temporarily stopping (temporarily stopping, then temporarily stopping). When temporarily stopping, the decorative symbols move slowly up and down.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R currently changing as the first special symbol is consumed are displayed in the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area is provided for the first special symbol hold in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed in four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), allowing a maximum of four hold icons to be stored. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icon is displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there are only two hold icons that have not been consumed and are stored.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol change presentation (change display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the top center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, at the top center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, and are therefore difficult to distinguish from the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, these numbers are positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with the other images displayed behind them, so visibility is not obstructed by the other images.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), differences in shape and color indicate different expectations for winning during the corresponding lottery. For example, of the four icons—yellow (gold) star icon, black spherical icon, smiling spherical icon, and white spherical icon—the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icon is further color-coded to have increasing expectations of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)). There are also specific icons featuring various characters. These specific icons are white spherical icons in which various characters appear and are used in sound effects. During sound effects, the icons change into one of the yellow (gold) star icon, black spherical icon, smiling spherical icon, or white spherical icon.

In FIG. 131(A), a city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a as the normal background image, and the decorative pattern change effect (change display) begins. Then, during the change effect (change display), as shown in FIG. 131(B), a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, and a white spherical reserve icon 9A is displayed at the third reserve display position 9Ad (although a pre-reading effect was performed in connection with this ball entry, the white spherical reserve icon 9A did not change to another icon, resulting in the white spherical reserve icon 9A). At this time, a first winning sound, "ping-pong," is played from the speaker 67 in connection with the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, the first winning sound is played from the speaker 67 in correspondence with the reserve icon 9A displayed at the third reserve display position 9Ad.

After that, when a game ball enters the first start hole 20 during the change effect (during change display) and sound effect effect A is initiated by the pre-reading effect, a hold icon 9A (hereinafter referred to as the "specific hold icon 9A") having the ally character CRA as a specific icon is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad, as shown in FIG. 131 (C). At this time, a second winning sound, "squeak squeak," different from the first winning sound, is played from the speaker 67 in connection with the game ball entering the first start hole 20, and then, following the second winning sound, the first winning sound, "OARO," which is the name of the ally character CRA, is played from the speaker 67. In other words, after the second winning sound is played from the speaker 67 in correspondence with the specific hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the first sound effect is played from the speaker 67.

For the sake of convenience, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

After that, as the reserve is consumed, the change effect (change display) continues, and when the reserve icon 9A displayed at the second reserve display position 9Ad in Figures 131(A) to (C) moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the change effect (change display) begins, and then, as shown in Figure 131(D), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a stopped number "1," the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a stopped number "2," and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a stopped number "3," resulting in a miss, and the change effect (change display) ends and the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (E), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the specific hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. When the specific hold icon 9A moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the second sound effect, which is the theme song of the ally character CRA, begins to play from the speaker 67.

Then, as the change effect (change display) begins and the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state and begin to change rapidly, the display screen 7a switches from the normal background image, city image THG1, to the specific background image, space image THG2, as shown in FIG. 131(F), and the ally character CRA's name, "OARO," is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a as a name image TIL accompanied by a flash of light FH for a first display period (e.g., 1 second). When the normal background image, city image THG1, switches to the specific background image, space image THG2, the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. During the first display period (for example, 1 second), even if the normal background image, city image THG1, is switched to the specific background image, space image THG2, the period during which space image THG2 is displayed is short, and space image THG2 may become semi-transparent, allowing the city image THG1 to be seen behind space image THG2.

The name image TIL and flashing light FH are displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, hold display position 9Ad, variable icon 9C, and specific hold icon 9A. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, hold display position 9Ad, variable icon 9C, and specific hold icon 9A are not covered by the name image TIL and flashing light FH, and visibility is not impaired.

After the first display period (e.g., 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in Figure 131 (G), the name image TIL and flashing light FH gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and at the same time, the specific background image, space image THG2, displayed on the display screen 7a gradually switches back to the normal background image, city image THG1, and the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R gradually reappear on the display screen 7a, continuing the changing performance (changing display).

After that, as shown in Figure 131 (H), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed as the number "3," the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as the number "2," and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as the number "1," resulting in a miss, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variable effect (variable display) ends. At this time, the second sound effect, which is the theme song of the ally character CRA, stops being played from the speaker 67. In other words, the output of the second sound effect is stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (I), when the specific hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the second sound effect, which is the theme song of the ally character CRA, begins to play from the speaker 67. The output of this second sound effect was stopped immediately before, but rather than restarting from the point where it was stopped, it returns to the beginning and starts again.

Then, as the change effect (change display) begins and the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state and begin to change rapidly, as shown in FIG. 131(J), the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, city image THG1, is switched back to the specific background image, space image THG2, and the ally character CRA's name, "OARO," is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a as a name image TIL accompanied by a flash of light FH for a second display period (e.g., 4 seconds) that is longer than the first display period. The second display period (e.g., 4 seconds) is longer than the first display period (e.g., 1 second). Even when the normal background image, city image THG1, is switched to the specific background image, space image THG2, the period during which space image THG2 is displayed is longer. Therefore, space image THG2 does not become translucent but remains opaque, preventing the city image THG1 from being visible behind the space image THG2. Here too, the name image TIL and flashing light FH are displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, pending display position 9Ad, and variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, pending display position 9Ad, and variable icon 9C are not covered by the name image TIL and flashing light FH, and visibility is not impaired.

While the name image TIL and flashing light FH are displayed on the display screen 7a, that is, before the second display period (e.g., 4 seconds) has elapsed, a third sound effect, "OARO," the name of the ally character CRA, is played from the speaker 67. The third sound effect ends before the second display period (e.g., 4 seconds) has elapsed. This third sound effect is identical to the content conveyed by the first sound effect (the name of the ally character CRA, "OARO"), but has a different intonation. The first sound effect is stable and calm without excessive intonation, while the third sound effect is impressive with excessive intonation. Furthermore, the volume of the third sound effect is louder than the volume of the first sound effect, so that even though the content conveyed by the first sound effect and the third sound effect (the name of the ally character CRA, "OARO") are the same, the first sound effect and the third sound effect are conveyed to the player as different impressions.

When the second display period (e.g., 4 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 131 (K), the name image TIL and flashing light FH disappear from the display screen 7a, and the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched from the space image THG2 to the lunar surface image THG3, which is also the specific background image, and the ally character CRA is displayed large on the display screen 7a. The ally character CRA is displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, pending display position 9Ad, and variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, pending display position 9Ad, and variable icon 9C are not covered by the ally character CRA, and visibility is not impaired.

Then, in Figure 131 (I), a lyric image TG of the second sound effect (i.e., the lyrics of the theme song of the ally character CRA) is displayed on the display screen 7a as a specific image related to the second sound effect, which is the theme song of the ally character CRA that has begun to play from the speaker 67. The lyric image TG is displayed on the display screen 7a in time with the rhythm of the second sound effect, and is composed of a single character image or multiple character images. Specifically, for example, for the part of the lyrics of the theme song of ally character CRA that reads "One day, starting from here..." (13 hiragana characters), the lyrics image TG is displayed in time with the rhythm of the second sound effect, firstly, a lyrics image TG1 for "One day" is displayed at a first position (to the left of ally character CRA) on the display screen 7a, then a lyrics image TG2 for "to" is displayed at a second position (upper left of ally character CRA) on the display screen 7a, then a lyrics image TG3 for "From here" is displayed at a third position (right of ally character CRA) on the display screen 7a, and then a lyrics image TG4 for "Start" is displayed at a fourth position (upper right of ally character CRA) on the display screen 7a.

After that, when the output of the second sound effect ends, as shown in FIG. 131 (L), the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched back to the normal background image, city image THG1, from the lunar surface image THG3, and the variable effect (variable display) continues, causing a fireball to appear from the center of the display screen 7a. When the fireball is shot in an arc toward the variable icon 9C, it collides with the variable icon 9C and changes from the variable icon 9C with the ally character CRA to a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C. This ends sound effect A.

The size of the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon is the same as the size of the white spherical variable icon 9C in Figures 131 (A) to (G). After sound effect performance A, various effects may continue, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in the same pattern, a jackpot is awarded and the jackpot game (jackpot performance) begins. However, when the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed in the same pattern, a miss occurs.

[Sound Effects Production B]
Next, the sound effect performance B will be described with reference to Fig. 132. Fig. 132 is a diagram for explaining the sound effect performance B. The sound effect performance B is performed over a plurality of variable performances (variable displays) using decorative patterns.

First, as shown in FIG. 132(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a left three-dimensional decorative symbol 8L, a center three-dimensional decorative symbol 8C, and a right three-dimensional decorative symbol 8R, spinning from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a decorative symbol (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") variation effect (variable display) begins. When the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) begins, the stopped decorative symbol gradually increases in speed from a low speed, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state, and changing at high speed. This allows the background image behind the decorative symbol to be viewed through the rapidly changing translucent decorative symbol. The decorative symbol slows down just before stopping, changing from a translucent state back to an opaque state, and then temporarily stops and then stops (temporarily stops and then stops and displays). When temporarily stops, the decorative symbol moves slowly up and down.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R currently changing as the first special symbol is consumed are displayed in the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area is provided for the first special symbol hold in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed in four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), allowing a maximum of four hold icons to be stored. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icons are displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one hold icon that has not been consumed and is stored.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol change presentation (change display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the top center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, at the top center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, and are therefore difficult to distinguish from the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, these numbers are positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with the other images displayed behind them, so visibility is not obstructed by the other images.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), differences in shape and color indicate different expectations for winning during the corresponding lottery. For example, of the four icons—yellow (gold) star icon, black spherical icon, smiling spherical icon, and white spherical icon—the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icon is further color-coded to have increasing expectations of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)). There are also specific icons featuring various characters. These specific icons are white spherical icons in which various characters appear and are used in sound effects. During sound effects, the icons change into one of the yellow (gold) star icon, black spherical icon, smiling spherical icon, or white spherical icon.

In FIG. 132(A), a city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a as the normal background image, and the decorative pattern change effect (change display) begins. Then, during the change effect (change display), as shown in FIG. 132(B), a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, and a white spherical reserve icon 9A is displayed at the second reserve display position 9Ad (although a pre-reading effect was performed in connection with this ball entry, the white spherical reserve icon 9A did not change to another icon, resulting in the white spherical reserve icon 9A). At this time, a first winning sound, "ping-pong," is played from the speaker 67 in connection with the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, the first winning sound is played from the speaker 67 in correspondence with the reserve icon 9A displayed at the second reserve display position 9Ad.

After that, when a game ball enters the first start hole 20 during the variable effect (variable display) and sound effect B is initiated by the pre-reading effect, a reserve icon 9A (hereinafter referred to as the "specific reserve icon 9A") having the ally character CRB as the specific icon is displayed at the third reserve display position 9Ad, as shown in FIG. 132(C). At this time, a second winning sound, "squeak squeak," different from the first winning sound, is played from the speaker 67 in connection with the game ball entering the first start hole 20, and then, following the second winning sound, the first sound effect, "OARO-B," which is the name of the ally character CRB, is played from the speaker 67. In other words, after the second winning sound is played from the speaker 67 in correspondence with the specific reserve icon 9A displayed at the third reserve display position 9Ad, the first sound effect is played from the speaker 67.

For the sake of convenience, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

After that, as the reserve is consumed, the change effect (change display) continues, and when the reserve icon 9A displayed at the first reserve display position 9Ad in Figures 132 (A) to (C) moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the change effect (change display) begins, and then, as shown in Figure 132 (D), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a stopped number "1," the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a stopped number "2," and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a stopped number "3," resulting in a miss, and the change effect (change display) ends and the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (E), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the specific hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. When the specific hold icon 9A moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the second sound effect, which is the theme song of the ally character CRB, begins to play from the speaker 67.

Then, as the change effect (change display) begins and the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state and begin to change rapidly, as shown in FIG. 132(F), the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, city image THG1, is switched to a specific background image, space image THG2, and the name of ally character CRB, "OARO-B," is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a as a name image TIL accompanied by a flash of light FH for a first display period (e.g., 1 second). When the normal background image, city image THG1, is switched to the specific background image, space image THG2, the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. During the first display period (for example, 1 second), even if the normal background image, city image THG1, is switched to the specific background image, space image THG2, the period during which space image THG2 is displayed is short, and space image THG2 may become semi-transparent, allowing the city image THG1 to be seen behind space image THG2.

The name image TIL and flashing light FH are displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, hold display position 9Ad, variable icon 9C, and specific hold icon 9A. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, hold display position 9Ad, variable icon 9C, and specific hold icon 9A are not covered by the name image TIL and flashing light FH, and visibility is not impaired.

After the first display period (e.g., 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in Figure 132 (G), the name image TIL and flashing light FH gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and at the same time, the specific background image, space image THG2, displayed on the display screen 7a gradually switches back to the normal background image, city image THG1, and the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R gradually reappear on the display screen 7a, continuing the changing performance (changing display).

After that, as shown in Figure 132 (H), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed as the number "3," the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as the number "2," and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as the number "1," resulting in a miss, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variable effect (variable display) ends. At this time, the second sound effect, which is the theme song of ally character CRB, stops being played from speaker 67. In other words, the output of the second sound effect is stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(I), when the specific hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the second sound effect, which is the theme song of the ally character CRB, begins to play from the speaker 67. Although the output of this second sound effect was stopped immediately before, it does not restart from the point where it was stopped, but rather returns to the beginning and starts again.

Then, the change performance (change display) begins, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state and begin to change at high speed. As shown in Figure 132 (J), the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, which is the city image THG1, is switched back to the specific background image, the space image THG2, and the name of the ally character CRB, "OARO-B," is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a as a name image TIL accompanied by a flash of light FH for a second display period (e.g., 4 seconds) that is longer than the first display period. The second display period (e.g., 4 seconds) is longer than the first display period (e.g., 1 second), and even when switching from the normal background image, city image THG1, to the specific background image, space image THG2, the period during which space image THG2 is displayed is longer, so space image THG2 does not become translucent but remains opaque, preventing the city image THG1 from being visible behind the space image THG2. Note that here too, the name image TIL and flashing light FH are displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, pending display position 9Ad, and variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, pending display position 9Ad, and variable icon 9C are not covered by the name image TIL and flashing light FH, and visibility is not impaired.

While the name image TIL and flashing light FH are displayed on the display screen 7a, that is, before the second display period (e.g., 4 seconds) has elapsed, a third sound effect, "OARO-B," the name of the ally character CRB, is played from the speaker 67. The third sound effect ends before the second display period (e.g., 4 seconds) has elapsed. This third sound effect conveys the same content as the first sound effect ("OARO-B," the name of the ally character CRB), but with a different intonation. The first sound effect is stable and calm without excessive intonation, while the third sound effect is impressive with excessive intonation, which is different. Additionally, the volume of the third sound effect is louder than the volume of the first sound effect, so that even if the content conveyed by the first and third sound effects is the same (the name of the ally character CRB, "OARO-B"), the first and third sound effects are perceived by the player as different sounds.

After the second display period (e.g., 4 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 132 (K), the name image TIL and flashing light FH disappear from the display screen 7a, and the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched from the space image THG2 to the lunar surface image THG3, which is also the specific background image, and the ally character CRB is displayed large on the display screen 7a. The ally character CRB is displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, pending display position 9Ad, and variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, pending display position 9Ad, and variable icon 9C are not covered by the ally character CRB, and visibility is not impaired.

Then, in Figure 132 (I), a lyric image TG of the second sound effect (i.e., the lyrics of the theme song of ally character CRB) is displayed on display screen 7a as a specific image related to the second sound effect, which is the theme song of ally character CRB that has begun to play from speaker 67. The lyric image TG is displayed on display screen 7a in time with the rhythm of the second sound effect and is composed of a single character image or multiple character images. Specifically, for example, for the part of the lyrics of the theme song for ally character CRB that goes "Hot passion, not yet..." (12 hiragana characters), the lyrics image TG is displayed in time with the rhythm of the second sound effect, firstly, a lyrics image TG1 that reads "Hot" is displayed at a first position (upper left of ally character CRB) on the display screen 7a, then a lyrics image TG2 that reads "Passion" is displayed at a second position (lower right of ally character CRB) on the display screen 7a, then a lyrics image TG3 that reads "Wo" is displayed at a third position (right of ally character CRB) on the display screen 7a, and then a lyrics image TG4 that reads "Not yet" is displayed at a fourth position (upper right of ally character CRB) on the display screen 7a.

After that, when the output of the second sound effect ends, as shown in FIG. 132 (L), the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched back to the normal background image, city image THG1, from the moon image THG3, and the variable effect (variable display) continues, causing a fireball to appear from the center of the display screen 7a. When the fireball is shot in an arc toward the variable icon 9C, it collides with the variable icon 9C and changes from the variable icon 9C containing the ally character CRB to the variable icon 9C that is a blue smiling sphere. This ends sound effect B.

The size of the blue smiling spherical icon is the same as the size of the white spherical variable icon 9C in Figures 132 (A) to (G). After sound effect performance B, various effects may continue, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in the same pattern, a jackpot is awarded and the jackpot game (jackpot performance) begins. However, when the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed in the same pattern, a miss occurs.

[Sound Effects Production C]
Next, the sound effect performance C will be described with reference to Fig. 133. Fig. 133 is a diagram for explaining the sound effect performance C. The sound effect performance C is performed over a plurality of variable performances (variable displays) using decorative patterns.

First, as shown in FIG. 133(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a left three-dimensional decorative symbol 8L, a center three-dimensional decorative symbol 8C, and a right three-dimensional decorative symbol 8R, spinning the reels from top to bottom of the display screen 7a, and a decorative symbol (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") variation effect (variable display) begins. When the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) begins, the stopped decorative symbol gradually increases in speed from a low speed, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state, and changing at high speed. This allows the background image behind the decorative symbol to be viewed through the rapidly changing translucent decorative symbol. The decorative symbol slows down just before stopping, changing from a translucent state back to an opaque state, and then temporarily stops and then stops (temporarily stops and then stops and displays). When temporarily stops, the decorative symbol moves slowly up and down.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R currently changing as the first special symbol is consumed are displayed in the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area is provided for the first special symbol hold in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed in four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), allowing a maximum of four hold icons to be stored. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icon is displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there are only two hold icons that have not been consumed and are stored.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol change presentation (change display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the top center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, at the top center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, and are therefore difficult to distinguish from the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, these numbers are positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with the other images displayed behind them, so visibility is not obstructed by the other images.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), differences in shape and color indicate different expectations for winning during the corresponding lottery. For example, of the four icons—yellow (gold) star icon, black spherical icon, smiling spherical icon, and white spherical icon—the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icon is further color-coded to have increasing expectations of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)). There are also specific icons featuring various characters. These specific icons are white spherical icons in which various characters appear and are used in sound effects. During sound effects, the icons change into one of the yellow (gold) star icon, black spherical icon, smiling spherical icon, or white spherical icon.

In Figure 133 (A), a city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a as the normal background image, and the decorative pattern change effect (change display) begins. Then, during the change effect (change display), as shown in Figure 133 (B), a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 and a white spherical reserve icon 9A is displayed at the third reserve display position 9Ad (although a pre-reading effect was performed in connection with this ball entry, the white spherical reserve icon 9A did not change to another icon, resulting in the white spherical reserve icon 9A). At this time, a first winning sound, "ping-pong," is played from the speaker 67 in connection with the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, the first winning sound is played from the speaker 67 in correspondence with the reserve icon 9A displayed at the third reserve display position 9Ad.

After that, when a game ball enters the first start hole 20 during the change effect (during change display) and sound effect C is initiated by the pre-reading effect, a hold icon 9A (hereinafter referred to as the "specific hold icon 9A") having the ally character CRA as a specific icon is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad, as shown in FIG. 133 (C). At this time, a second winning sound, "squeak squeak," different from the first winning sound, is played from the speaker 67 in connection with the game ball entering the first start hole 20, and then, following the second winning sound, the first winning sound, "OARO," which is the name of the ally character CRA, is played from the speaker 67. In other words, after the second winning sound is played from the speaker 67 in correspondence with the specific hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the first winning sound is played from the speaker 67.

For the sake of convenience, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

After that, as the reserve is consumed, the change effect (change display) continues, and when the reserve icon 9A displayed at the second reserve display position 9Ad in Figures 133(A) to (C) moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the change effect (change display) begins, and then, as shown in Figure 133(D), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed as the number "1," the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as the number "2," and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as the number "3," resulting in a miss, and the change effect (change display) ends and the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (E), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the specific hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. When the specific hold icon 9A moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the second sound effect, which is the theme song of the ally character CRA, begins to play from the speaker 67.

Then, as the change effect (change display) begins and the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state and begin to change rapidly, as shown in FIG. 133(F), the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, city image THG1, is switched to a specific background image, space image THG2, and the name of the ally character CRA, "OARO," is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a as a name image TIL accompanied by a flash of light FH for a first display period (e.g., 1 second). When the normal background image, city image THG1, is switched to the specific background image, space image THG2, the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. During the first display period (for example, 1 second), even if the normal background image, city image THG1, is switched to the specific background image, space image THG2, the period during which space image THG2 is displayed is short, and space image THG2 may become semi-transparent, allowing the city image THG1 to be seen behind space image THG2.

The name image TIL and flashing light FH are displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, hold display position 9Ad, variable icon 9C, and specific hold icon 9A. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, hold display position 9Ad, variable icon 9C, and specific hold icon 9A are not covered by the name image TIL and flashing light FH, and visibility is not impaired.

After the first display period (e.g., 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in Figure 133 (G), the name image TIL and flashing light FH gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and at the same time, the specific background image, space image THG2, displayed on the display screen 7a gradually switches back to the normal background image, city image THG1, and the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R gradually reappear on the display screen 7a, continuing the changing performance (changing display).

After that, as shown in Figure 133 (H), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed as the number "3," the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as the number "2," and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as the number "1," resulting in a miss, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variable effect (variable display) ends. At this time, the second sound effect, which is the theme song of the ally character CRA, stops being played from the speaker 67. In other words, the output of the second sound effect is stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(I), when the specific hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the second sound effect, which is the theme song of the ally character CRA, begins to play from the speaker 67. The output of this second sound effect was stopped immediately before, but rather than restarting from the point where it was stopped, it returns to the beginning and starts again.

Then, as the change effect (change display) begins and the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state and begin to change rapidly, as shown in FIG. 133(J), the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, city image THG1, is switched back to the specific background image, space image THG2, and the ally character CRA's name, "OARO," is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a as a name image TIL accompanied by a flash of light FH for a second display period (e.g., 4 seconds) that is longer than the first display period. The second display period (e.g., 4 seconds) is longer than the first display period (e.g., 1 second). Even when the normal background image, city image THG1, is switched to the specific background image, space image THG2, the period during which space image THG2 is displayed is longer. Therefore, space image THG2 does not become translucent but remains opaque, preventing the city image THG1 from being visible behind the space image THG2. Here too, the name image TIL and flashing light FH are displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, pending display position 9Ad, and variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, pending display position 9Ad, and variable icon 9C are not covered by the name image TIL and flashing light FH, and visibility is not impaired.

While the name image TIL and flashing light FH are displayed on the display screen 7a, that is, before the second display period (e.g., 4 seconds) has elapsed, a third sound effect, "OARO," the name of the ally character CRA, is played from the speaker 67. The third sound effect ends before the second display period (e.g., 4 seconds) has elapsed. This third sound effect is identical to the content conveyed by the first sound effect (the name of the ally character CRA, "OARO"), but has a different intonation. The first sound effect is stable and calm without excessive intonation, while the third sound effect is impressive with excessive intonation. Furthermore, the volume of the third sound effect is louder than the volume of the first sound effect, so that even though the content conveyed by the first sound effect and the third sound effect (the name of the ally character CRA, "OARO") are the same, the first sound effect and the third sound effect are conveyed to the player as different impressions.

When the second display period (e.g., 4 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 133 (K), the name image TIL and flashing light FH disappear from the display screen 7a, and the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched from the space image THG2 to the lunar surface image THG3, which is also the specific background image, and the ally character CRA is displayed large on the display screen 7a. The ally character CRA is displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, pending display position 9Ad, and variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, pending display position 9Ad, and variable icon 9C are not covered by the ally character CRA, and visibility is not impaired.

Then, in Figure 133 (I), a lyric image TG of the second sound effect (i.e., the lyrics of the theme song of the ally character CRA) is displayed on the display screen 7a as a specific image related to the second sound effect, which is the theme song of the ally character CRA that has begun to play from the speaker 67. The lyric image TG is displayed on the display screen 7a in time with the rhythm of the second sound effect, and is composed of a single character image or multiple character images. Specifically, for example, as part of the lyrics of the theme song for ally character CRA, the part "One day it starts from here..." (13 hiragana characters) is replaced with the part "Soon the winning combination will come..." (13 hiragana characters), and the lyrics image TG is displayed in time with the rhythm of the second sound effect, first displaying a lyrics image TG1 saying "Soon" at a first position on the display screen 7a (to the left of ally character CRA), then displaying a lyrics image TG2 saying "Win" at a second position on the display screen 7a (upper left of ally character CRA), then displaying a lyrics image TG3 saying "but" at a third position on the display screen 7a (to the right of ally character CRA), and then displaying a lyrics image TG4 saying "It will come" at a fourth position on the display screen 7a (upper right of ally character CRA). Even if some of the lyrics are replaced, they are written in hiragana and contain the same number of characters (13), so they can be displayed in rhythm and are unlikely to cause players any discomfort. Furthermore, this replaced content can suggest to players that a jackpot has occurred.

After that, when the output of the second sound effect ends, as shown in FIG. 133 (L), the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched back to the normal background image, city image THG1, from the moon image THG3, and the variable effect (variable display) continues, causing a fireball to appear from the center of the display screen 7a. When the fireball is shot in an arc toward the variable icon 9C, it collides with the variable icon 9C and changes from the variable icon 9C having the ally character CRA to the variable icon 9C that is a smiling sphere with seven colors (rainbow). This ends the sound effect C.

The size of the seven-colored (rainbow) smiling sphere icon is approximately twice the size of the white spherical variable icon 9C in Figures 133 (A) to (G). When the seven-colored (rainbow) smiling sphere variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a jackpot is likely, and various effects may continue after the sound effect C. When the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as the same pattern, a jackpot has been achieved, and then the jackpot game (jackpot effect) begins.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of sound effects:
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the sound effect performance A of FIG. 131, the sound effect performance B of FIG. 132, and the sound effect performance C of FIG. 133, a first starting hole 20 (ball entry hole) through which the game ball can enter, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, and a speaker 67 capable of outputting a plurality of types of sound effects, and a first sound effect (the name of the ally character CRA in the sound effect performances A and C, and the name of the ally character CRB in the sound effect performance B) corresponding to a specific reserved icon 9A among the reserved icons 9A displayed in relation to the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 (ball entry hole) can be output. It is possible to execute a first effect (Figure 131 (C) for sound effect effect A, Figure 132 (C) for sound effect effect B, Figure 133 (C) for sound effect effect C), and a second effect (Figures 131 (I) to (K) for sound effect effect A, Figures 132 (I) to (K) for sound effect effect B, Figures 133 (I) to (K) for sound effect effect C) in which, after the first effect, the specific hold icon 9A is displayed as the variable icon 9C and a second sound effect (the theme song of ally character CRA for sound effect effect effects A and C, and the theme song of ally character CRB for sound effect effect B) can be output. According to this configuration, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 20 (ball entrance hole) and the specific reserved icon increases as a reserved icon, the first sound effect is played from the speaker, and when the specific reserved icon becomes the variable icon, the second sound effect is played from the speaker, so that a novel effect by the first sound effect and the second sound effect can be provided to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, before the second effect in the sound effect effect A of Fig. 131, the sound effect effect B of Fig. 132, and the sound effect effect C of Fig. 133, a third effect (Fig. 131 (E) for sound effect effect A, Fig. 132 (E) for sound effect effect B, Fig. 133 (E) for sound effect effect C) can be executed in which the second sound effect is output and the output of the second sound effect is stopped before the specific hold icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C. According to this configuration, the second sound effect that is played when the specific hold icon becomes the variable icon is played as a notice before the specific hold icon becomes the variable icon, so the player's expectations for the upcoming effect are heightened.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effects in the sound effect effect A of Fig. 131, the sound effect effect B of Fig. 132, and the sound effect effect C of Fig. 133, a third sound effect (the name of the ally character CRA in the sound effect effects A and C, and the name of the ally character CRB in the sound effect effect B) can be output while the second sound effect is being output. According to this configuration, since the third sound effect is played while the second sound effect is being played, it is possible to provide the player with an impactful sound effect that combines the impressions of the respective sound effects, compared to when the second sound effect and the third sound effect are played separately, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effects in the sound effect effect A in Fig. 131, the sound effect effect B in Fig. 132, and the sound effect effect C in Fig. 133, a lyric image TG (specific image) related to the second sound effect can be further displayed. According to this configuration, when the second sound effect is played, a specific image related to the second sound effect is displayed, so that the player can imagine the progression of the second sound effect and imagine the specific image to be displayed, and can imagine the second sound effect played by imagining the progression of the specific image, and the second sound effect and the specific image mutually complement each other, making it possible to provide the player with an attractive effect.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effects in the sound effect effect A in Fig. 131, the sound effect effect B in Fig. 132, and the sound effect effect C in Fig. 133, a lyric image TG (specific image) can be displayed in time with the rhythm of the second sound effect. With this configuration, the relationship between the second sound effect and the lyric image TG (specific image) can be more clearly emphasized.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the lyric image TG (specific image) in the sound effect presentation A in Fig. 131, the sound effect presentation B in Fig. 132, and the sound effect presentation C in Fig. 133 is configured to be composed of a single or multiple character images. This configuration makes it possible to increase the variety in the way the lyric image TG (specific image) is expressed, and also makes it possible to individually emphasize the character images in the lyric image TG (specific image) that the player wants to focus on.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, after the second effect in the sound effect effect A of Fig. 131, the sound effect effect B of Fig. 132, or the sound effect effect C of Fig. 133, a fourth effect (Fig. 131(L) for sound effect effect A, Fig. 132(L) for sound effect effect B, and Fig. 133(L) for sound effect effect C) that changes the variable icon 9C can be executed. According to this configuration, a change in the variable icon may occur after the second sound effect has ended, so that anticipation for the change in the variable icon can be maintained while the second sound effect is being played.

[Modification]
The following describes modified examples of the sound effects.
[Modification 1]
The sound effect A in Fig. 131, the sound effect B in Fig. 132, and the sound effect C in Fig. 133 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, they are performed in a game state known as a left-handed hit. However, they may also be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21. In other words, they may also be performed in a game state known as a right-handed hit.

[Modification 2]
In the sound effect performance A of Fig. 131, the sound effect performance B of Fig. 132, and the sound effect performance C of Fig. 133, a lyric image TG is displayed on the display screen 7a. However, instead of the lyric image TG, an image related to the second sound effect (the theme song of ally character CRA in sound effect performances A and C, and the theme song of ally character CRB in sound effect performance B) may be used. For example, an image from a movie or television broadcast, or a scene from such a movie or television broadcast, in which the second sound effect is played, may be used.

[Modification 3]
In the sound effect effects A of Figures 131(I) to (K), the sound effect effects B of Figures 132(I) to (K), and the sound effect effects C of Figures 133(I) to (K), the second sound effect (the theme music of ally character CRA in sound effect effects A and C, and the theme music of ally character CRB in sound effect effect B) is played from speaker 67 until the end, after which the variable icon 9C changes. However, if the second sound effect ends midway, the variable icon 9C may not change. In this case, the variable icon 9C becomes a white sphere with the lowest expected probability of winning.

[Modification 3]
In the sound effect effect A of FIG. 131(C), the sound effect effect B of FIG. 132(C), and the sound effect effect C of FIG. 133(C), a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 during the variable effect (variable display), and a specific reserve icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a by the pre-reading effect. At this time, a first sound effect (the name of the ally character CRA in the sound effect effects A and C, and the name of the ally character CRB in the sound effect effect B) is played from the speaker 67. However, the specific reserve icon 9A may be displayed on the display screen 7a without the first sound effect being played from the speaker 67. In this case, a second winning sound, a "squeak squeak" sound different from the first winning sound, may or may not be played from the speaker 67.

[Modification 4]
The lyric image TG (specific image) in the sound effect A of FIG. 131(K), the sound effect B of FIG. 132(K), and the sound effect C of FIG. 133(K) is composed of a single or multiple character images and is displayed on the display screen 7a. In this case, the lyric image TG (specific image) may be rotated or enlarged or reduced in size. This increases the variety in the way the lyric image TG (specific image) is expressed, and also makes it possible to individually emphasize the character images in the lyric image TG (specific image) that the player wants to focus on.

[Modification 5]
In the sound effect display A of FIG. 131(K), the sound effect display B of FIG. 132(K), and the sound effect display C of FIG. 133(K), the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. However, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C may disappear from the display screen 7a. In this case, if the hold icon 9A is present, they may also disappear from the display screen 7a. This is because the variable icon 9C is used as a notice (a "change display" that changes the display mode) for the variable display (variable display) and therefore does not necessarily have to be continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. Furthermore, since the variable display position 9Cd indicates the position (display position) where the variable icon 9C is displayed, it does not necessarily have to be continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. Furthermore, since the hold display position 9Ad indicates the position (display position) where the hold icon 9A is displayed, it does not necessarily have to be continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. In contrast, the reserved icon 9A needs to be displayed on the display screen 7a to indicate the number of reserved balls that have not yet been used in a game, but as described above, the first special symbol reserved based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol reserved based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so the reserved icon 9A can also be erased from the display screen 7a. This can contribute to drawing attention to the lyric image TG displayed in time with the rhythm of the second sound effect in the sound effect performance A of FIG. 131(K), the sound effect performance B of FIG. 132(K), and the sound effect performance C of FIG. 133(K).

[Modification 6]
In the sound effect effect A of FIG. 131(L), the sound effect effect B of FIG. 132(L), and the sound effect effect C of FIG. 133(L), the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. However, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad may disappear from the display screen 7a. In this case, if the hold icon 9A is present, they may also disappear from the display screen 7a. In other words, of the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A, only the variable icon 9C may be displayed on the display screen 7a. This allows a fireball to appear from the center of the display screen 7a, colliding with the variable icon 9C, thereby drawing attention to the change in the variable icon 9C. Since the variable display position 9Cd indicates the position (display position) where the variable icon 9C is displayed, it does not necessarily have to be continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and since the reserved display position 9Ad indicates the position (display position) where the reserved icon 9A is displayed, it does not necessarily have to be continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, so the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad can be erased from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the reserved icon 9A indicates the number of reserved balls that have not yet been used in a game, so it needs to be displayed on the display screen 7a. However, as described above, the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so the reserved icon 9A can also be erased from the display screen 7a.

[Modification 7]
In sound effect performance A of Figures 131(I) to (K), sound effect performance B of Figures 132(I) to (K), and sound effect performance C of Figures 133(I) to (K), the second sound effect (the theme music of ally character CRA in sound effect performances A and C, and the theme music of ally character CRB in sound effect performance B) is played from speaker 67. However, the second sound effect may not be played from speaker 67.

[Modification 8]
131(I) to (K), sound effect performance A of FIG. 132(I) to (K), sound effect performance B of FIG. 132(I) to (K), and sound effect performance C of FIG. 133(I) to (K), while the second sound performance (the theme music of ally character CRA in sound effect performances A and C, and the theme music of ally character CRB in sound effect performance B) is being output, a third sound performance (the name of ally character CRA in sound effect performances A and C, and the name of ally character CRB in sound effect performance B) is also played from speaker 67. However, the third sound performance may not be played from speaker 67.

[Modification 9]
In the sound effect performance A of Fig. 131(L), the sound effect performance B of Fig. 132(L), and the sound effect performance C of Fig. 133(L), the variable icon 9C is changed. However, the variable icon 9C may not be changed. In this case, the variable icon 9C is a white sphere with the lowest expected probability of winning.

[Modification 10]
In the sound effect effects A of FIG. 131(L), B of FIG. 132(L), and C of FIG. 133(L), the first special symbol reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as unillustrated numbers in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, making them difficult to distinguish among the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a and intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, since the numbers are positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, visibility is not obstructed by other images. In this embodiment, when the sound effect effect starts, a specific reserved icon 9A with an ally character CRA as the specific icon is displayed at the reserved display position 9Ad. As a result, there is a risk that the player will misunderstand the number (number of reserved balls) displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a as a countdown until the specific reserved icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C. Therefore, instead of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a number displaying the number of reserved balls as a numerical value may be displayed on one of the sub-display screens 64 (the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U (for example, the right sub-display screen 64R). This eliminates the risk that the player will misunderstand the number of reserved balls as a countdown until the specific reserved icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C. Furthermore, the number displaying the number of reserved balls as a numerical value can be made difficult to distinguish by blending in with the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making it easier to understand intuitively.

[Modification 11]
The sound effect performance A in Figure 131, the sound effect performance B in Figure 132, and the sound effect performance C in Figure 133 may not include some of the effects described, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect D4-1]
A gaming machine comprising: an entrance for receiving a gaming ball; a display means for displaying a plurality of types of images; and a speaker for outputting a plurality of types of effect sounds;
A first effect capable of outputting a first effect sound corresponding to a specific reserved icon among reserved icons displayed in relation to the entry of a game ball into the ball entrance;
After the first effect, a second effect can be executed in which the specific hold icon is displayed as the variable icon and a second effect sound can be output.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D4-1,
Before the second effect, a third effect can be executed in which the second sound effect is output and the output of the second sound effect is stopped until the specific hold icon becomes the variable icon.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D4-1 or aspect D4-2,
In the second effect, a third effect sound can be further output during output of the second effect sound.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D4-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D4-1 to D4-3,
In the second effect, a specific image related to the second effect sound can be displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect D4-4,
In the second effect, the specific image can be displayed in time with the rhythm of the second effect sound.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D4-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect D4-5,
The specific image is composed of a single or multiple character images.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D4-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D4-1 to D4-6,
After the second performance, a fourth performance that changes the variable icon can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Lyric image effects A to C are explained below using Figures 134 to 136. These lyric image effects can be executed during the effect symbol variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a lyric image effect, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Lyrics image production A]
Figure 134 is a diagram for explaining lyric image effect A.
First, as shown in Figure 134 (A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols start to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reserved and the corresponding changing image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 134 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both shown temporarily stopping at "4". In addition, three reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation and the corresponding variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 134 (C), a battle presentation is executed. The battle presentation is a presentation in which a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. In the battle presentation, a win is achieved when the ally character CRA wins. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figures 134 (D), (E), and (F), a lyrics display effect is executed. The lyrics display effect is an effect in which lyrics images are displayed on the display screen 7a in time with the music played during the battle effect. Multiple lyrics images are displayed sequentially in time with the progression of the music. Here, an example is shown in which the lyrics "Let's live romantically" are displayed sequentially as multiple lyrics images.

First, as shown in Figure 134 (D), the lyrics display effect (first half) is executed. In the lyrics display effect (first half), a lyrics image KG1 reading "Romantically" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Note that, since the battle effect also continues, the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB are also displayed on the display screen 7a (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in Figure 134 (E), the lyrics display effect (middle stage) is executed. In the lyrics display effect (middle stage), the lyrics image KG2 "live" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. In particular, the lyrics image KG2 "live" is a single-character lyrics image, and is larger than the characters that make up the lyrics image KG1 in the lyrics display effect (early stage). Furthermore, the lyrics image KG2 "live" is displayed in a rotated state.

Next, as shown in Figure 134 (F), the lyrics display effect (late stage) is executed. In the lyrics display effect (late stage), a lyrics image KG3 saying "Let's try it" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In particular, the characters making up the lyrics image KG3 saying "Let's try it" are smaller than the characters making up the lyrics image KG2 in the lyrics display effect (middle stage).

Next, as shown in Figure 134 (G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies the player whether the ally character CRA has won or lost. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed, and a message image MSG saying "Victory" is displayed. If the ally character is defeated, for example, the enemy character CRB is displayed, and a message image saying "Defeat" is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 134 (H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. In a confirmed stop effect (win), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a winning manner. Here, the left, right, and center effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R all stop at a confirmed "4". In the case of a loss, for example, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R stop at a confirmed "4", and the center effect symbol 8C stops at a confirmed "5".

[Lyrics image production B]
135 is a diagram for explaining lyric image effect B. Lyric image effect B is another example of lyric image effect A.
First, as shown in Figure 135 (A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols start to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reserved and the corresponding changing image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 135 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both shown temporarily stopping at "4". In addition, three reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation and the corresponding variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 135 (C), a battle presentation is executed. The battle presentation is a presentation in which a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. In the battle presentation, a win is achieved when the ally character CRA wins. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figures 135(D), (E), and (F), a lyrics display effect is executed. The lyrics display effect is an effect in which lyrics images are displayed on the display screen 7a in time with the music played during the battle effect. Multiple lyrics images are displayed sequentially in time with the progression of the music. Here, an example is shown in which the lyrics "Let's live romantically" are displayed sequentially as multiple lyrics images.

First, as shown in Figure 135 (D), the lyrics display effect (first half) is executed. In the lyrics display effect (first half), a lyrics image KG1 reading "Roman" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In particular, the letters "ro" and "ma" that make up lyrics image KG1 are transparent except for their outlines, allowing the ally character CRA to be seen as a background image. Note that, since the battle effect continues, the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB are also displayed on the display screen 7a (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(E), the lyrics display performance (middle stage) is executed. In the lyrics display performance (middle stage), a lyrics image KG2 reading "Tickly" is displayed at the top of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, a lyrics image KG3 reading "Raw" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. In particular, the characters constituting the lyrics image KG2 reading "Tickly" are smaller than the characters constituting the lyrics image KG1 in the lyrics display performance (early stage), and after being displayed, the lyrics image KG2 moves to the left of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y1. Furthermore, the lyrics image KG3 reading "Raw" is a single-character lyrics image and is larger than the characters constituting the lyrics image KG1 in the lyrics display performance (early stage), and after being displayed, the lyrics image KG3 reading "Raw" rotates counterclockwise as indicated by the arrow Y2.

Next, as shown in Figure 135 (F), the lyrics display performance (late stage) is executed. In the lyrics display performance (late stage), a lyrics image KG4 saying "Let's try it" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In particular, the characters making up the lyrics image KG4 saying "Let's try it" are larger than the characters making up the lyrics image KG2 in the lyrics display performance (middle stage), and smaller than the characters making up the lyrics image KG3.

Next, as shown in Figure 135 (G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies the player whether the ally character CRA has won or lost. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed, and a message image MSG saying "Victory" is displayed. If the ally character is defeated, for example, the enemy character CRB is displayed, and a message image saying "Defeat" is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 135 (H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. In a confirmed stop effect (win), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a winning manner. Here, the left, right, and center effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R all stop at a confirmed "4". In the case of a loss, for example, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R stop at a confirmed "4", and the center effect symbol 8C stops at a confirmed "5".

[Lyrics image production C]
136 is a diagram for explaining lyric image effect C. Lyric image effect C is another example of lyric image effects A and B.
First, as shown in Figure 136 (A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols start to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reserved and the corresponding changing image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 136 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both temporarily stop at "4". In addition, three reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation and the corresponding variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 136 (C), a battle presentation is executed. The battle presentation is a presentation in which a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. In the battle presentation, a win is achieved when the ally character CRA wins. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figures 136(D), (E), and (F), a lyrics display effect is executed. The lyrics display effect is an effect in which lyrics images are displayed on the display screen 7a in time with the music played during the battle effect. Multiple lyrics images are displayed sequentially in time with the progression of the music. Here, an example is shown in which the lyrics "Let's live romantically" are displayed sequentially as multiple lyrics images.

First, as shown in Figure 136 (D), the lyrics display effect (first half) is executed. In the lyrics display effect (first half), a lyrics image KG1 saying "Romantically" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Note that, since the battle effect also continues, the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB are also displayed on the display screen 7a (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in Figure 136 (E), the lyrics display effect (middle stage) is executed. In the lyrics display effect (middle stage), a lyrics image KG2 saying "Let's try living" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 136 (F), the lyrics display effect (later stage) is executed. In the lyrics display effect (later stage), lyrics image KG3, "Let's try living," is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In particular, lyrics image KG2, "Let's try living," displayed in the lyrics display effect (middle stage), is gradually enlarged and displayed to become lyrics image KG3. In other words, lyrics image KG3 is enlarged after being displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 136 (G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies the player whether the ally character CRA has won or lost. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed, and a message image MSG saying "Victory" is displayed. If the ally character is defeated, for example, the enemy character CRB is displayed, and a message image saying "Defeat" is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 136 (H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. In a confirmed stop effect (win), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a winning manner. Here, the left, right, and center effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R all stop at a confirmed "4". In the case of a loss, for example, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R stop at a confirmed "4", and the center effect symbol 8C stops at a confirmed "5".

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of lyric image presentation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the lyrics "Let's live romantically" are displayed as multiple lyric images, the sequentially displayed lyric images can be displayed in various forms (FIGS. 134(D)(E)(F), 135(D)(E)(F), 136(D)(E)(F)). This configuration allows the output music to be more enjoyable, and increases the interest in the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to display the lyric image "生" in a rotated state (FIG. 134(E)). This configuration allows for variation in the display of the lyric image, which can increase the interest in the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to display lyric images in various sizes (FIGS. 134(D)(E)(F), 135(D)(E)(F)). This configuration allows for variation in the display of lyric images, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Effect 4]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is capable of displaying a lyric image consisting of one character (FIGS. 134(E) and 135(E)). This configuration allows the display of the lyric image to have an impact, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to display the lyric image transparently or semi-transparently so that the background image can be seen (FIG. 135(D)). With this configuration, the background image can be enjoyed along with the lyric image, which can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the lyrics image is displayed, the appearance of the lyrics image can be changed (FIG. 135(E), FIG. 136(E)(F)). With this configuration, the lyrics image changes after it is displayed, which can increase the interest in the game.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the lyric image is displayed, the lyric image can be moved (FIG. 135(E)). This configuration allows the display of the lyric image to have a strong impact, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the lyric image is displayed, the lyric image can be rotated (FIG. 135(E)). This configuration allows the lyric image to be displayed with more impact, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Effect 9]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the lyrics image is displayed, the size of the lyrics image can be changed (FIGS. 136(E) and 136(F)). This configuration allows the display of the lyrics image to have more impact, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Modification]
The following are modified examples of lyric image presentation.
[Modification 1]
Although not specifically mentioned above, the display color of the lyric image may be changed after it is displayed. For example, it is conceivable to change the display color of the lyric image in accordance with the output of the music.

[Modification 2]
The above example shows how the displayed lyrics image is rotated around the front-to-back axis (Figure 135 (E)), but it is also possible to prepare a three-dimensional lyrics image and rotate it around the up-down or left-to-right axis.

[Modification 3]
The above example shows the effect of the second special chart reserved, but it may also be the effect of the first special chart reserved.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect D5-1]
A gaming machine that displays lyrics of a song as a plurality of lyric images in accordance with the output of the song,
When the plurality of lyric images are sequentially displayed, a display mode effect can be executed in which the sequentially displayed lyric images are displayed in various modes.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D5-1,
The aspect display effect includes an effect of displaying the lyrics image in a rotated state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D5-1 or D5-2,
The display mode includes displaying the lyrics image in various sizes.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-1 to D5-3,
The aspect display effect includes an effect of displaying the lyrics image consisting of one character.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-1 to D5-4,
The aspect display effect includes an effect of displaying the lyric image transparently or semi-transparently so that the background image can be seen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-6]
A gaming machine that displays lyrics of a song as a plurality of lyric images in accordance with the output of the song,
When the plurality of lyric images are sequentially displayed, after the lyric images are displayed, a manner change effect can be executed to change the manner of the lyric images.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-1 to D5-5,
When the plurality of lyric images are sequentially displayed, after the lyric images are displayed, a manner change effect can be executed to change the manner of the lyric images.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-8]
A gaming machine according to aspect D5-6 or aspect D5-7,
The aspect change effect includes an effect of moving the lyric image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-9]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-6 to D5-8,
The aspect change effect includes an effect of rotating the lyric image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-10]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-6 to D5-9,
The aspect change effect includes an effect of changing the size of the lyric image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-11]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-6 to D5-10,
The aspect change effect includes an effect of changing the display color of the lyric image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Specific area variable effects A to C are explained below using Figures 137 to 139. In Figures 137 to 139, for example, the first movable device 14, the second movable device 15, and other movable devices arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted from the drawings for clarity.

This specific area variable effect is performed while the decorative pattern is performing a variable effect (during variable display). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (e.g., a variable effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a specific area variable effect is included, it reads corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays an image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (e.g., a variable effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and changes the position and light emission mode of the left movable device 14L and right movable device 14R of the first movable device 14 provided on the gaming board 2.

Here, we will first explain specific area variable effect A, then specific area variable effect B, and then specific area variable effect C.

[Specific Area Variable Effects A]
The specific area variable effect A will be described with reference to Fig. 137. Fig. 137 is a diagram for explaining the specific area variable effect A. The specific area variable effect A is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in Figure 137 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a three-dimensional left decorative pattern 8L, a three-dimensional center decorative pattern 8C, and a three-dimensional right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in each variable area from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a variable effect (variable display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") begins in a display mode in which the reels are rotated.

When the decorative pattern change effect (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state as it gradually increases its speed from a slow speed, changing at high speed. This allows the background image located behind the decorative pattern to be seen through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changing from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, and appears temporarily stopped, or stopped (temporarily stopped, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R currently changing as the first special symbol is consumed are displayed in the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area is provided for the first special symbol hold in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed in four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), allowing a maximum of four hold icons to be stored. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icons are displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one hold icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. For the sake of convenience, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol change presentation (change display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the top center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, at the top center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, and are therefore difficult to distinguish from the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, these numbers are positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with the other images displayed behind them, so visibility is not obstructed by the other images.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icons are further set with increasing expectations of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the decorative pattern change effect (change display) begins in Figure 137 (A), a flash of light FH is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 137 (B). At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8L during the change effect (change display) disappear from the display screen 7a, and the change display position 9Cd, hold display position 9Ad, and hold icon 9A also disappear from the display screen 7a. In other words, of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8L, the change display position 9Cd, hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A, only the change icon 9C is displayed on the display screen 7a. The flash of light FH is displayed behind the change icon 9C, so the change icon 9C is not covered by the flash of light FH and visibility is not impaired.

After that, as the flash FH gradually disappears from the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 137 (C), in the center of the display screen 7a, the left-hand movable part 14L and the right-hand movable part 14R each advance (move) from their home positions toward (closer to each other) an advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (advanced position (deployed position)), the left-hand decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the left-hand movable part 14L, and the right-hand decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the right-hand movable part 14R, combine to form a single decorative element (combined part) having a ring shape, consisting of the left-hand decorative part of the left-hand movable part 14L and the right-hand decorative part of the right-hand movable part 14R.

When the left decorative part of the left-side movable device 14L and the right decorative part of the right-side movable device 14R combine to form a combined device having a ring shape, the area formed within the ring becomes a circular area (hereinafter referred to as the "circular area"). The ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area. At this time, the variable icon 9C remains displayed on the display screen 7a.

After a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the ally character CRA was displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left-side movable device 14L and the right-side movable device 14R move away from each other, with the left-side movable device 14L retreating (moving) from its advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a toward a retreated position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right-side movable device 14R retreating (moving) from its advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a toward a retreated position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Then, suddenly, the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R, displaying the number "1," appear large and approaching the front from the rear of the display screen 7a. As shown in Figure 137 (D), they are displayed as provisionally stopped slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left and right sides of the display screen 7a in their respective variable areas, forming a reach. At this time, the variable icon 9C remains displayed on the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative pattern 8C remains disappeared from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 137 (E), when the left decorative pattern 8L of the temporarily stopped number "1" begins to move downward in its own variable area, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" appears from behind this left decorative pattern 8L, and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" begins to move upward in its own variable area. On the other hand, when the right decorative pattern 8R of the temporarily stopped number "1" begins to move upward in its own variable area, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" appears from behind this right decorative pattern 8R, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" begins to move downward in its own variable area.

137(F), when the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" has completed moving downward to its own variable range and is temporarily stopped and displayed in the lower left of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" has completed moving upward to its own variable range and is temporarily stopped and displayed in the upper left of the display screen 7a, they are smaller (e.g., about one size smaller) than their normal size when they appear alone (hereinafter referred to as "normal size"). On the other hand, when the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" has completed moving upward to its own variable range and is temporarily stopped and displayed in the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" has completed moving downward to its own variable range and is temporarily stopped and displayed in the lower right of the display screen 7a, they are smaller (e.g., about one size smaller) than their normal size, just like the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2." As a result, a first reach is formed on a line rising to the right by the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" temporarily displayed in the lower left and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" temporarily displayed in the upper right, and a second reach is formed on a line falling to the right by the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" temporarily displayed in the upper left and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" temporarily displayed in the lower right, resulting in a double reach.

In Figure 137 (F), a double reach is formed by two left decorative symbols 8L and two right decorative symbols 8R. If the two left decorative symbols 8L and two right decorative symbols 8R are each considered to be vertex images, a first specific area is formed in a rectangular shape by connecting the four vertex images. In other words, a first specific area surrounded by the four vertex images is formed. Once the first specific area is formed, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed again on the display screen 7a, and a variable effect (variable display) is performed within the first specific area. Because the middle decorative symbol 8C is fluctuating at high speed, it is viewed as an unclear image within the first specific area.

After that, as shown in Figure 137 (G), when the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" temporarily displayed in a stopped state in the upper left jumps out of its own variable area and begins to move in an arc toward the center of the left side of the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" appears from behind this left decorative pattern 8L, and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" remains in place and is displayed temporarily stopped. Meanwhile, when the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" temporarily displayed in a stopped state in the lower right jumps out of its own variable area and begins to move in an arc toward the center of the right side of the display screen 7a, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" appears from behind this right decorative pattern 8R, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" remains in place and is displayed temporarily stopped.

In Figure 137 (G), the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" temporarily displayed in the upper left changes to the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3," and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" temporarily displayed in the lower right changes to the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3." Therefore, if the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" temporarily displayed in the upper left, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" temporarily displayed in the lower left, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" temporarily displayed in the lower right, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" temporarily displayed in the upper right are considered to be vertex images, a quadrangular second specific area is formed by connecting the four vertex images. In other words, a first specific area surrounded by the four vertex images is formed. This second specific area is the same size as the first specific area.

The left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed in the upper left jumps out of its own variable area and begins to move in an arc toward the center of the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed in the lower right jumps out of its own variable area and begins to move in an arc toward the center of the right side of the display screen 7a. Therefore, if the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" that has started to move and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" that has started to move are included in the second specific area, the size of the second specific area will be larger than the size of the first specific area.

Because the changing effect (changing display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is being performed in the first specific area, the changing effect (changing display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C also continues in the second specific area. Because the middle decorative pattern 8C is changing at high speed, it appears as an unclear image even in the second specific area. Note that while the changing effect (changing display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues in the second specific area, the middle decorative pattern 8C may alternatively be removed from the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in Figure 137(H), when the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" jumps out of its own variable area and completes its movement to near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a and is temporarily stopped near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a, the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "3" temporarily stopped in the upper left, the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" temporarily stopped near the center of the left side, and the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" temporarily stopped in the lower left are smaller than usual (for example, about half the size). In other words, they are smaller than when a double reach occurs. On the other hand, when the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" jumps out of its own variable area and completes its movement to the vicinity of the center of the right side of the display screen 7a and is temporarily stopped and displayed near the center of the right side of the display screen 7a, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" temporarily stopped and displayed in the lower right, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed near the center of the right side, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" temporarily stopped and displayed in the upper right are smaller than their normal size (for example, about twice as small). In other words, they are smaller than when a double reach is achieved. As a result, a first reach is formed on a line rising to the right by the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" temporarily displayed in the lower left and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" temporarily displayed in the upper right; a second reach is formed on a line falling to the right by the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" temporarily displayed in the upper left and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" temporarily displayed in the lower right; and a third reach is formed on a horizontal line by the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" temporarily displayed near the center of the left side and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" temporarily displayed near the center of the right side, resulting in a triple reach.

In Figure 137 (H), a triple reach is formed by three left decorative symbols 8L and three right decorative symbols 8R, and if the three left decorative symbols 8L and three right decorative symbols 8R are each considered to be vertex images, a hexagonal third specific area is formed by connecting the six vertex images. In other words, a third specific area surrounded by the six vertex images is formed. Comparing the sizes of the first specific area (second specific area) and the third specific area, in Figure 137 (G), the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" that is temporarily stopped jumps out of its own variable area and starts moving in an arc toward the center of the left side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" appears from behind this left decorative pattern 8L, and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" remains in place and is displayed as temporarily stopped, while the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" that is temporarily stopped jumps out of its own variable area and starts moving in an arc toward the center of the right side of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" appears from behind this right decorative pattern 8R, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" remains in place and is displayed as temporarily stopped, so the size of the third specific area is larger than the size of the first specific area (second specific area). Note that although the third specific region has a hexagonal shape when the six vertex images are connected, in reality it has an approximately circular shape (a shape similar to a circle) that passes through the six vertex images.

Next, as shown in Figure 137 (I), the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" appears as a clear image and is temporarily stopped in a display mode that enlarges and approaches from the rear to the front in the center of the display screen 7a within the third specific area. The size of the clear image temporarily stopped is larger than the normal size (for example, about twice the normal size). Then, the temporarily stopped central decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" moves forward and disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 137 (J), the number "2" central decorative pattern 8C appears as a clear image and is temporarily stopped in a display mode that enlarges and approaches from the rear to the front in the center of the display screen 7a within the third specific area. The size of the clear image temporarily stopped is larger than the normal size (for example, about twice the normal size). Then, the temporarily stopped central decorative pattern 8C of the number "2" moves forward and disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 137 (K), the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" appears as a clear image in a temporary stop display in a display mode that enlarges and approaches from the rear to the front in the center of the display screen 7a within the third specific area. The size of the clear image temporarily displayed is larger than the normal size (for example, about twice the normal size).

When the center decorative pattern 8C of the temporarily stopped number "3" moves forward and disappears from the display screen 7a, it is a miss and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. This ends the specific area variable performance A. Then, the variable display position 9Cd, hold display position 9Ad, and hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable performance (variable display) is performed using the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

Following Figure 137 (K), as shown in Figure 137 (L), at the center of the display screen 7a, the left-hand movable part 14L and the right-hand movable part 14R each advance (move) again from their home positions toward (in the direction of approaching each other) an advanced position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (advanced position (deployed position)), the left-hand decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the left-hand movable part 14L, and the right-hand decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right-hand movable part 14R, combine to form a single decorative element (combined part) having a ring shape, consisting of the left-hand decorative part of the left-hand movable part 14L and the right-hand decorative part of the right-hand movable part 14R. At this time, the three left decorative patterns 8L, the three right decorative patterns 8R, and the center decorative pattern 8C disappear from the display screen 7a, while the variable icon 9C remains displayed on the display screen 7a.

When the left decorative part of the left-side movable device 14L and the right decorative part of the right-side movable device 14R combine to form a combined device with a ring shape, an ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area formed within the ring. The appearance of the ally character CRA displayed on the left-side movable device 14L, the right-side movable device 14R, and the circular area informs the player that a jackpot has been reached.

After a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the ally character CRA was displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left-side movable device 14L and the right-side movable device 14R move away from each other, with the left-side movable device 14L retreating (moving) from its advanced position in the center of the front (forward) of the display screen 7a toward a retreated position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right-side movable device 14R retreating (moving) from its advanced position in the center of the front (forward) of the display screen 7a toward a retreated position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a. This ends specific area variable performance A.

After that, as shown in FIG. 137(M), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are larger than their normal size (for example, about twice as large as their normal size) and placed in the center of each variable area, with the number "3" displayed temporarily stopped along a horizontal line. At this time, if the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as a number different from the number "3," it is a miss, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Then, the variable display position 9Cd, hold display position 9Ad, and hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and a variable effect (variable display) is performed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Following Figure 137 (M), if the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R stop and display the number "3," a jackpot will occur and the variable icon 9C will disappear from the display screen 7a. The jackpot game (jackpot effect) will begin, and when it ends, the variable display position 9Cd, reserve display position 9Ad, and reserve icon 9A will be displayed again on the display screen 7a, and when the reserve icon 9A displayed in the first reserve display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable effect (variable display) will be performed using the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

In Figure 137(H), after a triple reach is formed, a quadruple reach may be formed. In this case, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" temporarily stopped in the upper left corner jumps out of its own variable area and begins to move in an arc toward the upper center of the left side of the display screen 7a. Then, a left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" appears from behind the left decorative pattern 8L and remains temporarily stopped in place, and the number "2" temporarily stopped near the center of the left side begins to move toward the lower center of the left side. Meanwhile, when the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" that is temporarily stopped at the bottom right jumps out of its own variable area and begins to move in an arc toward the lower center of the right side of the display screen 7a, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" appears from behind this right decorative pattern 8R and remains in place as a temporarily stopped display, and the number "2" that is temporarily stopped near the center of the right side begins to move toward the upper center of the right side.

When the left decorative symbol 8L for the number "3" jumps out of its own variable area and completes its movement to the upper center of the left side of the display screen 7a, where it is temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L for the number "2" completes its movement to the lower center of the left side of the display screen 7a, where it is temporarily stopped and displayed. In this state, the left decorative symbol 8L for the number "4" temporarily displayed in the upper left, the left decorative symbol 8L for the number "3" temporarily displayed in the upper center of the left side, the left decorative symbol 8L for the number "2" temporarily displayed in the lower center of the left side, and the left decorative symbol 8L for the number "1" temporarily displayed in the lower left are smaller than their normal size (e.g., about two and a half times smaller). In other words, they are smaller than when a triple reach is achieved. On the other hand, when the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "3" jumps out of its own variable area and moves to the lower center of the right side of the display screen 7a and is temporarily stopped, the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" moves to the upper center of the right side of the display screen 7a and is temporarily stopped. In this state, the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" temporarily stopped at the lower right, the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "3" temporarily stopped at the lower center of the right side, the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" temporarily stopped at the upper center of the right side, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "1" temporarily stopped at the upper right are smaller than their normal size (for example, about two and a half times smaller). In other words, they are smaller than when a triple reach is achieved. As a result, a first reach is formed on a first upward-right line made up of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" temporarily displayed in the lower left and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" temporarily displayed in the upper right; a second reach is formed on a first downward-right line made up of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" temporarily displayed in the upper left and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" temporarily displayed in the lower right; a third reach is formed on a second upward-right line made up of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" temporarily displayed near the lower center of the left side and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" temporarily displayed near the upper center of the right side; and a fourth reach is formed on a second downward-right line made up of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" temporarily displayed near the upper center of the left side and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" temporarily displayed near the lower center of the right side, resulting in a quadruple reach.

In this way, a quadruple reach is formed by four left decorative symbols 8L and four right decorative symbols 8R. If the four left decorative symbols 8L and four right decorative symbols 8R are each considered to be vertex images, an octagonal fourth specific area is formed by connecting the eight vertex images. In other words, a fourth specific area surrounded by the eight vertex images is formed. When comparing the size of this fourth specific area with the third specific area formed by the triple reach described above, the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "3" displayed as a temporary stop jumps out of its own variable area and begins to move in an arc toward the upper center of the left side of the display screen 7a. The left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" appears from behind this left decorative symbol 8L. The number "2" displayed as a temporary stop near the center of the left side begins to move toward the lower center of the left side, and the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" remains in place and remains displayed as a temporary stop. Meanwhile, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" that has been temporarily stopped jumps out of its own variable area and begins to move in an arc toward the lower center of the right side of the display screen 7a, and a right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" appears from behind this right decorative pattern 8R, and the number "2" that has been temporarily stopped near the center of the right side begins to move toward the upper center of the right side, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" remains in place and is temporarily stopped, so the size of the fourth specific area is larger than the size of the third specific area. In other words, the sizes increase in the order of the first specific area (second specific area) formed by a double reach, the third specific area formed by a triple reach, and the fourth specific area formed by a quadruple reach.

The likelihood of winning increases in the order of double reach, triple reach, and quadruple reach. In other words, a double reach has four vertex images, a triple reach has six vertex images, and a quadruple reach has eight vertex images, so the more vertex images there are, the higher the likelihood of winning.

In addition, in the fourth specific area formed by the quadruple reach, a variable effect (variable display) is performed using the center decorative pattern 8C shown in Figures 137(I) to (K), and an effect is performed using the left-side movable role element 14L and the right-side movable role element 14R shown in Figure 137(L).

[Specific Area Variable Rendering B]
Next, the specific area variable effect B will be described with reference to Fig. 138. Fig. 138 is a diagram for explaining the specific area variable effect B. The specific area variable effect B is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in Figure 138 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a three-dimensional left decorative pattern 8L, a three-dimensional center decorative pattern 8C, and a three-dimensional right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in each variable area from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a variable effect (variable display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") begins in a display mode in which the reels are rotated.

When the decorative pattern change effect (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state as it gradually increases its speed from a slow speed, changing at high speed. This allows the background image located behind the decorative pattern to be seen through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changing from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, and appears temporarily stopped, or stopped (temporarily stopped, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R currently changing as the first special symbol is consumed are displayed in the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area is provided for the first special symbol hold in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed in four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), allowing a maximum of four hold icons to be stored. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icons are displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one hold icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. For the sake of convenience, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol change presentation (change display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the top center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, at the top center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, and are therefore difficult to distinguish from the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, these numbers are positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with the other images displayed behind them, so visibility is not obstructed by the other images.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icons are further set with increasing expectations of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the decorative pattern change effect (change display) begins in Figure 138 (A), three circular effect images EG (hereinafter referred to as "round effect images EG") appear in a display mode that invades the display screen 7a from the periphery into the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 138 (B), and are displayed temporarily stopped and arranged so as not to overlap each other on the right side of the display screen 7a.

The three round effect images EG then maintain their positions and begin to move counterclockwise toward the position of the adjacent round effect image EG a predetermined number of times (for example, two to three times). As shown in Figure 138(C), the three round effect images EG act as vertex images, forming a straight line RG connecting the three vertex images. Once the three round effect images EG have moved the predetermined number of times and are displayed as temporarily stopped, the three round effect images EG emit light simultaneously just once. This forms a first specific triangular area formed by the three straight lines RG connecting the vertex images of the three round effect images EG.

In the first specific area, just before the three circular effect images EG light up simultaneously, the ally character CRA appears as an unclear image (out-of-focus image). The straight line RG is blue, and when it is a clear image (in-focus image (not out-of-focus image)), the boundary between the inside and outside of the first specific area can be made clear. In contrast, when the straight line RG is blue, and it is an unclear image (out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)), a display mode can be realized in which the unclear image of the straight line RG is exerting some kind of influence on the first specific area.

After that, when the three circular effect images EG disappear from the display screen 7a, the unclear images of the ally character CRA and the three straight lines RG gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the first specific area disappears.

Next, as shown in Figure 138 (D), four triangular effect images EG (hereinafter referred to as "triangular effect images EG") appear in a display mode that intrudes into the display screen 7a from the periphery, and are displayed temporarily stopped on the right side of the display screen 7a, arranged so as not to overlap each other. The size of the triangular effect images EG is larger than the size of the round effect images EG, which can contribute to increasing the player's sense of anticipation for a win.

The four triangular effect images EG then maintain their positions and begin to move clockwise toward the position of the adjacent triangular effect image EG a predetermined number of times (e.g., two to three times). As shown in FIG. 138(E), the four triangular effect images EG form vertex images, forming a straight line RG connecting the four vertex images. When the four triangular effect images EG have moved the predetermined number of times and are displayed temporarily still, the four triangular effect images EG simultaneously emit light once. This forms a second specific area having a rectangular shape, formed by the four straight lines RG connecting the vertex images of the four triangular effect images EG. The size of the second specific area is larger than the size of the first specific area formed in FIG. 138(C). This, too, can contribute to heightening the player's anticipation of a win.

In the second specific area, just before the four triangular effect images EG light up simultaneously, the ally character CRA appears again as an unclear image (an out-of-focus image). The straight line RG is green, and when it is a clear image (an in-focus image), the boundary between the inside and outside of the second specific area can be made clear. In contrast, when the straight line RG is green and an unclear image (an out-of-focus image), a display mode can be achieved in which the unclear image of the straight line RG exerts some kind of influence on the second specific area. The fact that the color of the straight line RG is green, as opposed to blue in Figure 138 (C), also contributes to heightening the player's anticipation of a win.

After that, when the four triangular effect images EG disappear from the display screen 7a, the unclear images of the ally character CRA and the four straight lines RG gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second specific area disappears.

Next, as shown in Figure 138 (F), five rectangular effect images EG (hereinafter referred to as "square effect images EG") appear in a display mode that intrudes into the display screen 7a from the periphery, and are displayed temporarily stopped in the center of the display screen 7a, arranged so as not to overlap each other. The size of the square effect images EG is larger than the size of the triangular effect images EG, which can contribute to further heightening the player's sense of anticipation for a win.

The five square effect images EG then maintain their positions and begin to move counterclockwise toward the position of the adjacent square effect image EG a predetermined number of times (e.g., two to three times). As shown in Figure 138(G), the five square effect images EG form vertex images, forming a straight line RG connecting the five vertex images. When the five square effect images EG have moved the predetermined number of times and are displayed as a temporary stop, the five square effect images EG simultaneously emit light once. This forms a third specific area having a pentagonal shape, formed by the five straight lines RG connecting the vertex images of the five square effect images EG. The size of the third specific area is larger than the size of the second specific area formed in Figure 138(E). This, too, can contribute to further increasing the player's anticipation of a win.

In this embodiment, Figures 138(B) and (C) have three vertex images, Figures 138(D) and (E) have four vertex images, and Figures 138(F) and (G) have five vertex images. As the number of vertex images increases, the sizes of the first to third specific regions increase.

In the third specific area, just before the five square effect images EG light up simultaneously, the ally character CRA appears again as an unclear image (out-of-focus image). The straight line RG is red, and when it is a clear image (in-focus image), the boundary between the inside and outside of the third specific area can be made clear. In contrast, when the straight line RG is green, and it is an unclear image (out-of-focus image), a display mode can be realized in which the unclear image of the straight line RG has some kind of influence on the third specific area. The fact that the color of the straight line RG is red, as opposed to the green in Figure 138 (E), can also contribute to further heightening the player's anticipation of a win.

After that, when the five square effect images EG disappear from the display screen 7a, the unclear images of the ally character CRA and the five straight lines RG gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the third specific area disappears. This ends the specific area variable effect B.

After that, as shown in Figure 138 (H), the left decorative pattern 8L stops and displays the number "6", the middle decorative pattern 8C stops and displays the number "3", and the right decorative pattern 8R stops and displays the number "5", resulting in a loss, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Specific Area Variable Rendering C]
Next, the specific area variable effect C will be described with reference to Fig. 139. Fig. 139 is a diagram for explaining the specific area variable effect C. The specific area variable effect C is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in Figure 139 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a three-dimensional left decorative pattern 8L, a three-dimensional center decorative pattern 8C, and a three-dimensional right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in each variable area from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a variable effect (variable display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") begins in a display mode in which the reels are rotated.

When the decorative pattern change effect (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state as it gradually increases its speed from a slow speed, changing at high speed. This allows the background image located behind the decorative pattern to be seen through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changing from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, and appears temporarily stopped, or stopped (temporarily stopped, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R currently changing as the first special symbol is consumed are displayed in the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area is provided for the first special symbol hold in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed in four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), allowing a maximum of four hold icons to be stored. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icons are displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one hold icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. For the sake of convenience, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol change presentation (change display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the top center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, at the top center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, and are therefore difficult to distinguish from the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, these numbers are positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with the other images displayed behind them, so visibility is not obstructed by the other images.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icons are further set with increasing expectations of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the decorative pattern change effect (change display) begins in Figure 139 (A), three circular effect images EG (hereinafter referred to as "round effect images EG") appear in a display mode that invades the display screen 7a from the periphery into the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 139 (B), and are displayed temporarily stopped on the right side of the display screen 7a, arranged so as not to overlap each other.

The three round effect images EG then maintain their positions and begin to move counterclockwise toward the position of the adjacent round effect image EG a predetermined number of times (for example, two to three times). As shown in Figure 139(C), the three round effect images EG form vertex images, forming a straight line RG connecting the three vertex images. Once the three round effect images EG have moved the predetermined number of times and are displayed as temporarily stopped, the three round effect images EG emit light simultaneously just once. This forms a first specific triangular area formed by the three straight lines RG connecting the vertex images of the three round effect images EG.

In the first specific area, just before the three circular effect images EG light up simultaneously, the ally character CRA appears as an unclear image (out-of-focus image). The straight line RG is blue, and when it is a clear image (in-focus image (not out-of-focus image)), the boundary between the inside and outside of the first specific area can be made clear. In contrast, when the straight line RG is blue and an unclear image (out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)), a display mode can be realized in which the unclear image of the straight line RG is exerting some kind of influence on the first specific area.

After that, when the three circular effect images EG disappear from the display screen 7a, the unclear images of the ally character CRA and the three straight lines RG gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the first specific area disappears.

Next, as shown in Figure 139 (D), four triangular effect images EG (hereinafter referred to as "triangular effect images EG") appear in a display mode that intrudes into the display screen 7a from the periphery, and are displayed temporarily stopped on the right side of the display screen 7a, arranged so as not to overlap each other. The size of the triangular effect images EG is larger than the size of the round effect images EG, which can contribute to heightening the player's sense of anticipation for a win.

The four triangular effect images EG then maintain their positions and begin to move clockwise toward the position of the adjacent triangular effect image EG a predetermined number of times (e.g., two to three times). As shown in Figure 139(E), the four triangular effect images EG form vertex images, forming a straight line RG connecting the four vertex images. When the four triangular effect images EG have moved the predetermined number of times and are displayed as a temporary stop, the four triangular effect images EG simultaneously emit light once. This forms a second specific area having a rectangular shape, formed by the four straight lines RG connecting the vertex images of the four triangular effect images EG. The size of the second specific area is larger than the size of the first specific area formed in Figure 139(C). This also contributes to increasing the player's anticipation of a win.

In the second specific area, just before the four triangular effect images EG light up simultaneously, the ally character CRA appears again as an unclear image (an out-of-focus image). The straight line RG is green, and when it is a clear image (an in-focus image), the boundary between the inside and outside of the second specific area can be made clear. In contrast, when the straight line RG is green and an unclear image (an out-of-focus image), a display mode can be realized in which the unclear image of the straight line RG exerts some kind of influence on the second specific area. The fact that the color of the straight line RG is green, as opposed to blue in Figure 139 (C), also contributes to heightening the player's anticipation of a win.

After that, when the four triangular effect images EG disappear from the display screen 7a, the unclear images of the ally character CRA and the four straight lines RG gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second specific area disappears.

Next, as shown in Figure 139 (F), five rectangular effect images EG (hereinafter referred to as "square effect images EG") appear in a display mode that intrudes into the display screen 7a from the periphery, and are displayed temporarily stopped in the center of the display screen 7a, arranged so as not to overlap each other. The size of the square effect images EG is larger than the size of the triangular effect images EG, which can contribute to further heightening the player's sense of anticipation for a win.

The five square effect images EG then maintain their positions and begin to move counterclockwise toward the position of the adjacent square effect image EG a predetermined number of times (e.g., two to three times). As shown in Figure 139(G), the five square effect images EG form vertex images, forming a straight line RG connecting the five vertex images. When the five square effect images EG have moved the predetermined number of times and are displayed as a temporary stop, the five square effect images EG simultaneously emit light once. This forms a third specific area having a pentagonal shape, formed by the five straight lines RG connecting the vertex images of the five square effect images EG. The size of the third specific area is larger than the size of the second specific area formed in Figure 139(E). This, too, can contribute to further heightening the player's anticipation of a win.

In this embodiment, Figures 139(B) and (C) have three vertex images, Figures 139(D) and (E) have four vertex images, and Figures 139(F) and (G) have five vertex images; the larger the number of vertex images, the larger the sizes of the first to third specific regions.

In the third specific area, just before the five square effect images EG light up simultaneously, the ally character CRA appears again as an unclear image (out-of-focus image). The straight line RG is red, and when it is a clear image (in-focus image), the boundary between the inside and outside of the third specific area can be made clear. In contrast, when the straight line RG is green, and it is an unclear image (out-of-focus image), a display mode can be realized in which the unclear image of the straight line RG has some kind of influence on the third specific area. The fact that the color of the straight line RG is red, as opposed to the green in Figure 139 (E), can also contribute to further heightening the player's anticipation of a win.

After that, the five square effect images EG do not simply disappear from the display screen 7a, but rather fly away in all directions toward the outside of the display screen 7a, changing the length and direction of the straight lines RG and the shape of the third specific area. Once the five square effect images EG fly away, as shown in Figure 139(H), the five straight lines RG that formed the third specific area change into a single line RG that is approximately circular (or has a shape similar to a circle), and a fourth specific area having an approximately circular shape (or has a shape similar to a circle) is formed. The size of the fourth specific area is larger than the size of the third specific area formed in Figure 139(G), which can contribute to further heightening the player's anticipation of a win.

In the fourth specific area, the ally character CRA appears as a clear image (in focus, not out of focus). The color of the straight line RG remains red, but it may also have a yellow (gold) tint. This can help to further heighten the player's anticipation of winning.

Then, the clear image of the ally character CRA and the roughly circular (circular-like) line RG gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the fourth specific area disappears. As shown in FIG. 139(I), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "6." Before the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at the number "1," one of the five square effect images EG that flew off in all directions enlarges (approximately four times larger than when it was displayed in FIGS. 139(F) and (G)) and appears near the center of the top edge of the display screen 7a. Then, when the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "1," lightning is emitted from the square effect image EG toward the right decorative pattern 8R, and the right decorative pattern 8R is forcibly changed (changed) and temporarily stopped at the number "6," completing the reach. This ends the specific area change effect C.

Then, as shown in Figure 139 (K), a battle effect begins. In this battle effect, two characters (ally character CRA and enemy character CRB) fight, and the likelihood of a big win is high. During the battle effect, the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C remains displayed. While the battle effect is being performed, the sword of ally character CRA is swung down, and the variable icon 9C changes from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon 9C.

Then, as shown in Figure 139 (L), in the center of the display screen 7a, the left-hand movable part 14L and the right-hand movable part 14R each advance (move) again from their home positions toward (approaching each other) an advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this point, the left-hand decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the left-hand movable part 14L, and the right-hand decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the right-hand movable part 14R, combine to form a single decorative element (combined part) with the left-hand decorative part of the left-hand movable part 14L and the right-hand decorative part of the right-hand movable part 14R. At this time, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the left decorative part of the left-side movable device 14L and the right decorative part of the right-side movable device 14R combine to form a combined device with a ring shape, an ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area formed within the ring. The appearance of the ally character CRA displayed on the left-side movable device 14L, the right-side movable device 14R, and the circular area informs the player that a jackpot has been reached.

After a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the ally character CRA was displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left-side movable device 14L and the right-side movable device 14R move away from each other, with the left-side movable device 14L retreating (moving) from its advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a toward a retreated position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right-side movable device 14R retreating (moving) from its advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a toward a retreated position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in Figure 139 (M), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are positioned in the center of each variable area, and the number "6" is displayed in a temporary stop along a horizontal line. At this time, if the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily displayed as a number other than the number "6" and is displayed as a temporary stop, it will be a miss. Then, the variable display position 9Cd, hold display position 9Ad, and hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and when the hold icon 9A displayed in the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable effect (variable display) is performed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Following Figure 139 (M), if the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R stop and display the number "6," a jackpot will occur. A jackpot game (jackpot effect) will begin, and when it ends, the variable display position 9Cd, reserve display position 9Ad, and reserve icon 9A will be displayed again on the display screen 7a. When the reserve icon 9A displayed in the first reserve display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable effect (variable display) will be performed using the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of specific area variable effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific area variable performance A of Figure 137, the specific area variable performance B of Figure 138, and the specific area variable performance C of Figure 139, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying multiple types of images is provided, and it is possible to execute a first performance (Figures 137 (E) to (K) for specific area variable performance A, Figures 138 (C), (E), (G) for specific area variable performance B, Figures 139 (C), (E), (G), (H) for specific area variable performance C) in which a middle decorative pattern 8C or an ally character CRA (second performance image) can be displayed in the first to third specific areas (specific areas) surrounded by multiple vertex images (multiple first performance images). According to this configuration, the image display device 7 (display means) is made to take the trouble of forming the first to third specific areas (specific areas) surrounded by a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images), and the center decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) is displayed in the formed first to third specific areas (specific areas), thereby providing the player with a novel effect that has never been seen before. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 139, the size of the first to third specific areas (specific areas) increases as the number of vertex images (multiple first effect images) increases. Even if the number of vertex images (multiple first effect images) is the same, the size of the specific area may become smaller or larger if the positions of the multiple vertex images (multiple first effect images) are different. Therefore, even if the number of multiple vertex images (multiple first effect images) increases, the size of the specific area may become smaller, which may reduce the sense of anticipation for the effect. Therefore, by increasing the size of the specific area as the number of multiple vertex images (multiple first effect images) increases, it is possible to contribute to suppressing a decrease in the sense of anticipation for the effect.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific area variable effect A in Fig. 137, the specific area variable effect B in Fig. 138, and the specific area variable effect C in Fig. 139, the likelihood of a win increases as the number of multiple vertex images (multiple first effect images) increases. According to this configuration, the likelihood of a win can be clearly emphasized by drawing attention to the number of multiple vertex images (multiple first effect images).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the specific area variable effect A of Figure 137, the specific area variable effect B of Figure 138, and the specific area variable effect C of Figure 139 (Figures 137 (F) to (K) for specific area variable effect A, Figures 138 (C), (E), (G) for specific area variable effect B, and Figures 139 (C), (E), (G) for specific area variable effect C), the middle decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) can be displayed unclearly (out-of-focus image (blurred image)) in the first specific area to the third specific area (specific area). According to this configuration, the middle decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second performance image) can be displayed as an unclear image (an out-of-focus image (a blurred image)) in the first specific area to the third specific area (specific area) to draw the player's attention, so that the player can imagine what the unclear image is like, and when other performances are performed afterwards, the player can find for himself the relationship or pattern between the unclear image and the other performances.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the specific area variable effect A of Figure 137 and the specific area variable effect C of Figure 139 (Figures 137 (H) to (K) for the specific area variable effect A, and Figure 139 (H) for the specific area variable effect C), after being surrounded by multiple vertex images (multiple first effect images), when the specific area (the third specific area in the specific area variable effect A, the fourth specific area in the specific area variable effect C) is formed into a shape similar to a circle, the middle decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) can be displayed clearly (an in-focus image (an image that is not out of focus)) in the specific area. According to this configuration, when a specific area surrounded by multiple vertex images (multiple first performance images) is formed as a polygonal area, it is then formed into a shape similar to a circle, which allows the player to focus on the change from a straight line to a smooth curve due to the polygon, making it easier for the player to recognize the image change of the central decorative pattern 8C or ally character CRA (second performance image) displayed in the specific area (for example, the change from an unclear image (an unfocused image (a blurred image)) to a clear image (a focused image (a non-blurred image))).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effects in the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 139 (FIGS. 137(E) and (G) for the specific area variable effect A, FIG. 138(B), (D), and (F) for the specific area variable effect B, and FIG. 139(B), (D), and (F) for the specific area variable effect C), multiple vertex images (multiple first effect images) can be moved in a predetermined direction and then temporarily stopped and displayed. With this configuration, by moving multiple vertex images (multiple first effect images) in a predetermined direction after they appear, it is possible to suggest the first to third specific areas (specific areas) surrounded by the multiple vertex images (multiple first effect images).

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137 and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 139, a first movable device 14 (movable body) can appear in front of the image display device 7 (display means). After the first effect (FIGS. 137(E)-(K) for the specific area variable effect A, and FIG. 139(C), (E), (G), and (H) for the specific area variable effect C), a second effect (FIG. 137(L) for the specific area variable effect A, and FIG. 139(L) for the specific area variable effect C) can be executed, in which multiple vertex images (multiple first effect images) and center decorative pattern 8C or ally character CRA (second effect image) are erased and the movable body is operated. With this configuration, the operation of the first movable device 14 (movable body), i.e., the appearance of the left movable device 14L, the right movable device 14R, and the ally character CRA displayed in the circular area, can inform the player that a jackpot has been won.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of specific area variable effects are shown.
[Modification 1]
The specific area variable effect A in Fig. 137, the specific area variable effect B in Fig. 138, and the specific area variable effect C in Fig. 139 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, they are performed in a game state known as a left-handed hit. However, they may also be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21. In other words, they may also be performed in a game state known as a right-handed hit.

[Modification 2]
In the first effect in the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138 and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 139 (FIGS. 138(C), (E), and (G) for the specific area variable effect B, and FIG. 139(C), (E), and (G) for the specific area variable effect C), the ally character CRA (second effect image) is displayed unclearly (an out-of-focus image (a blurred image)) in the first specific area through the third specific area (specific area). However, other images may be used instead of the ally character CRA. For example, if there are multiple enemy characters, the enemy characters may be displayed in the first specific area through the third specific area in a step-up display mode based on the expected hit rate set for the enemy characters fighting the ally character CRA. Furthermore, instead of the ally character CRA, an image of an icon that can change the variable icon 9C, an image of an icon that can change the reserved icon 9A, an image of an icon that predicts the occurrence of a pseudo-consecutive win, or an image of an icon that predicts the occurrence of a preview effect may be used. This will allow for more variety in the presentation.

[Modification 3]
In the first effects in the specific area variable effect A of Figure 137, the specific area variable effect B of Figure 138, and the specific area variable effect C of Figure 139 (Figures 137(F) to (K) for specific area variable effect A, Figures 138(C), (E), and (G) for specific area variable effect B, and Figures 139(C), (E), and (G) for specific area variable effect C), the middle decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) is displayed unclearly (an out-of-focus image (a blurred image)) in the first to third specific areas (specific areas). However, it is also possible to make a specific portion of the middle decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) unclear (an out-of-focus image (a blurred image)) and other portions clear (an in-focus image (a non-blurred image)). Alternatively, the sub-control board 90 may independently perform a lottery, and if the lottery is won, the middle decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) may be made clear. This allows for a greater variety of effects.

[Modification 4]
In the first effect in the specific area variable effect A of Figure 137 and the specific area variable effect C of Figure 139 (Figures 137(H)-(K) for the specific area variable effect A, and Figure 139(H) for the specific area variable effect C), after being surrounded by multiple vertex images (multiple first effect images), when the specific area (the third specific area in the specific area variable effect A, the fourth specific area in the specific area variable effect C) is formed into a shape similar to a circle, the middle decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) is displayed clearly (an in-focus image (an unfocused image)) in the specific area. However, it is also possible to make certain parts of the middle decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) unclear (an unfocused image (an unfocused image)) and other parts clear (an in-focus image (an unfocused image)). Alternatively, the sub-control board 90 may independently perform a lottery and, if a winning lottery is selected, make the middle decorative symbol 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) unclear. This allows for a greater variety of effects.

[Modification 5]
In the first effects of the specific area variable effect A in Figure 137, the specific area variable effect B in Figure 138, and the specific area variable effect C in Figure 139 (Figures 137(E) and (G) for the specific area variable effect A, Figures 138(B), (D), and (F) for the specific area variable effect B, and Figures 139(B), (D), and (F) for the specific area variable effect C), multiple vertex images (multiple first effect images) are moved in a predetermined direction and then temporarily stopped and displayed. However, the multiple vertex images (multiple first effect images) may not be moved in a predetermined direction, but may instead be displayed temporarily stopped as they are after appearing on the display screen 7a. This can further increase the variety of effects. The predetermined direction may be one in which the indicator moves in one direction, one in which the indicator moves in one direction and then moves again in the opposite direction, one in which the indicator rotates in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction (one in which the indicator rotates in a clockwise direction and then rotates again in a counterclockwise direction, or one in which the indicator rotates in a counterclockwise direction and then rotates again in a clockwise direction), one in which the indicator moves in a zigzag direction, or a combination of these.The sub-control board 90 independently performs a lottery, and if the indicator is won, the indicator can move in a predetermined direction and then temporarily stop, or if the indicator is lost, the indicator can remain temporarily stopped.

[Modification 6]
In the specific area variable performance A of Figure 137, the specific area variable performance B of Figure 138, and the specific area variable performance C of Figure 139, there is a first movable role 14 (movable body) that can appear in front of the image display device 7 (display means), and after the first performance (Figures 137 (F) to (K) for the specific area variable performance A, and Figures 139 (C), (E), (G), (H) for the specific area variable performance C), a second performance (Figure 137 (L) for the specific area variable performance A, and Figure 139 (L) for the specific area variable performance C) is executed in which multiple vertex images (multiple first performance images) and middle decorative pattern 8C or ally character CRA (second performance image) are erased and the movable body is operated. However, since the first movable role element 14 (movable body) appears on the near side of the image display device 7 (display means), when the left movable role element 14L and the right movable role element 14R each advance (move) from their home positions toward (approach each other) an advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, they may not appear in front (front) of the display screen 7a, but may return to their home positions midway. In this case, the multiple vertex images (multiple first effect images) and the center decorative pattern 8C or ally character CRA (second effect image) will not disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable effect (variable display) will proceed. This can further increase the variety of effects.

[Modification 7]
In the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 139, the first special symbol reservation based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, making them difficult to distinguish among the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a and intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, because they are positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with other images positioned behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, their visibility is not obstructed by other images. In this embodiment, when the specific area variable effect is initiated, multiple vertex images (multiple first effect images) are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. This may lead to a player mistaking the number (number of reserved balls) displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a for the number of multiple vertex images (multiple first effect images). Therefore, instead of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the number representing the number of reserved balls may be displayed on one of the sub-display screens 64 (the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U (for example, the right sub-display screen 64R). This eliminates the risk of a player mistaking the number representing the number of reserved balls for the number of multiple vertex images (multiple first effect images). Furthermore, the number representing the number of reserved balls can be easily distinguished from the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making it easier to understand intuitively.

[Modification 8]
In the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 139, the effect image EG, which is a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images), may be a planar image or a three-dimensional image. The straight line RG may be a planar image or a three-dimensional image. The ally character CRA (second effect image) may be a planar image or a three-dimensional image. The sub-control board 90 may independently draw lots for these images to determine whether they are a planar image or a three-dimensional image. This allows for greater variety in the effects.

[Modification 9]
In the first effects in the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 139 (FIGS. 137(F) to (K) for the specific area variable effect A, FIG. 138(C), (E), and (G) for the specific area variable effect B, and FIG. 139(C), (E), and (G) for the specific area variable effect C), the middle decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) is displayed unclearly (an out-of-focus image (a blurred image)) in the first to third specific areas (specific areas). However, the middle decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) may not be displayed at all on the display screen 7a, or the middle decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) may not be displayed on the display screen 7a for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). In addition, the sub-control board 90 may independently perform a lottery to determine whether to display or hide the middle decorative symbol 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image). This can further increase the variety of effects.

[Modification 10]
In the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 139, an out-of-focus image is used as the unclear image. The out-of-focus image can be expressed as an undulating, swaying image like a wave, or as a hazy, shimmering image like a heat haze. In this case, it can be a still image or a moving image. This can further increase the variety of effects.

[Modification 11]
The specific area variable effect A in Figure 137, the specific area variable effect B in Figure 138, and the specific area variable effect C in Figure 139 may not have some of the effects described, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect D6-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
A first effect can be executed in which a second effect image can be displayed in a specific area surrounded by a plurality of first effect images.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D6-1,
As the number of the plurality of first effect images increases, the size of the specific area increases.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D6-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D6-1 or aspect D6-2,
As the number of the plurality of first effect images increases, the probability of winning increases.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D6-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D6-1 to D6-3,
In the first effect, the second effect image may be displayed unclearly in the specific area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D6-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D6-1 to D6-4,
In the first effect, when the specific area is formed into a shape similar to a circle after being surrounded by the plurality of first effect images, the second effect image may be clearly displayed in the specific area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D6-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D6-1 to D6-5,
In the first effect, the plurality of first effect images may be temporarily stopped and displayed after being moved in a predetermined direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D6-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D6-1 to D6-6,
a movable body that can appear in front of the display means,
After the first performance, a second performance can be executed in which the plurality of first performance images and the second performance image are erased and the movable body is operated.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Below, reliability change effects A and B are explained using Figures 140 to 142. In Figures 141 and 142, for ease of viewing, the first movable device 14, second movable device 15, and other movable devices arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted.

This reliability change effect is performed while the decorative pattern is changing (during the changing display). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (e.g., a command to start a changing effect) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a reliability change effect is included, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, we will first explain the reliability of each character that appears in the reliability change performance when they appear alone or in double appearances, and then explain reliability change performance A and reliability change performance B in that order.

[Reliability of each character's single and double appearances]
The reliability of each character's single appearance and double appearance will be described with reference to Figure 140. Figure 140 is a diagram for explaining the reliability of each character's single appearance and double appearance.

In the reliability change effect, multiple balloons covering the cards displaying the winning or losing results are defeated by characters that appear alone, or by characters that appear alone plus a specific character that appears to defeat them in double (joint) action, and the reliability, or the likelihood of winning a jackpot, varies for each effect.

First, "characters" include symbols such as crosses, circles, squares, hearts, and stars, as well as balloons and characters. In this example, characters that belong to the first group are crosses, circles, squares, hearts, and stars, while characters that do not belong to the first group are balloons.

The characters that appear alone as mentioned above are characters that belong to the first group, and are the cross mark, circle mark, triangle mark, square mark, and heart mark. Star marks do not appear alone, and as special characters, they work together with characters that appear alone to destroy multiple balloons (characters that do not belong to the first group).

The reliability of characters belonging to the first group, namely the cross, circle, triangle, square, and heart, when they appear alone (i.e., reliability during a solo attack), is as shown in Figure 140 (A): 8% for the cross, 16% for the circle, 12% for the triangle, 15% for the square, and 50% for the heart. When a heart appears alone, the reliability is already at 50%.

In addition to the individual appearance of the characters belonging to the first group, namely the cross, circle, triangle, square, and heart, the reliability of the double appearance of the specific character star (i.e., the reliability of a double attack) is as shown in Figure 140 (B): 18% for the cross (10% increase from individual appearance), 23% for the circle (7% increase from individual appearance), 42% for the triangle (30% increase from individual appearance), 55% for the square (40% increase from individual appearance), and 47% for the heart (3% decrease from individual appearance). The reliability of the specific character star appearing in double (joint) appearances is 7% to 40% higher than when it appears alone.

In contrast, the reliability of the heart mark alone and the specific character star mark double (combined) is 3% lower than when they appear alone. Furthermore, when a heart mark appears alone, it has the highest reliability, and when a square mark appears alone, it has the second highest reliability. However, when they appear double (combined) with a specific character, the reliability of the square mark and the specific character star mark becomes the highest, and the reliability of the heart mark and the specific character star mark becomes the second highest, meaning that the ranking of highest reliability is reversed between when a heart mark appears alone and when it appears double (combined) with a specific character.

In this way, in addition to the individual appearances of cross marks, circles, triangle marks, and square marks, when the specific character star mark appears in double (joint) appearances, the reliability is higher than when the cross marks, circles, triangle marks, and square marks appear alone. Exceptionally, the reliability is lower when the specific character star mark appears in double (joint) appearances only with the heart mark, compared to when it appears alone. As a result, since the reliability is generally higher when the specific character star mark appears, players can expect the reliability of the presentation to increase when the specific character star mark appears, and they can also discover for themselves the correlation and patterns of expectation between the individual appearances of cross marks, circles, triangle marks, square marks, and heart marks and the specific character star mark.

[Reliability Change Rendering A]
Next, the reliability change effect A will be described with reference to Fig. 141. Fig. 141 is a diagram for explaining the reliability change effect A. The reliability change effect A is performed during the change effect (during the change display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in Figure 141 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left three-dimensional decorative pattern 8L, a center three-dimensional decorative pattern 8C, and a right three-dimensional decorative pattern 8R are displayed in each variable area from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a variable effect (variable display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") begins in a display mode in which the reels are rotated.

When the decorative pattern change effect (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state as it gradually increases its speed from a slow speed, changing at high speed. This allows the background image located behind the decorative pattern to be seen through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changing from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, and appears temporarily stopped, or stopped (temporarily stopped, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R currently changing as the first special symbol is consumed are displayed in the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area is provided for the first special symbol hold in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed in four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), allowing a maximum of four hold icons to be stored. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icons are displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one hold icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. For the sake of convenience, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol change presentation (change display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the top center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, at the top center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, and are therefore difficult to distinguish from the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, these numbers are positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with the other images displayed behind them, so visibility is not obstructed by the other images.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icons are further set with increasing expectations of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) begins in Figure 141(A), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (e.g., the number "5"), forming a reach win, although this is not shown. Then, as shown in Figure 141(B), reliability change effect A begins, and a cross mark GZ1 belonging to the first group appears alone in the center of the display screen 7a, and a message MS reading "cross mark" is displayed to the right of the cross mark GZ1. The appearance of this cross mark GZ1 alone indicates that the reliability shown in Figure 140(A) is 8%. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, center decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R during the variation effect (variation display) disappear from the display screen 7a, and furthermore, the variation display position 9Cd, hold display position 9Ad, and hold icon 9A also disappear from the display screen 7a. In other words, of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the reserved icon 9A, only the variable icon 9C is displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that in this case, the variable icon 9C remains as a white spherical icon, and no other icons are changed.

After that, when the cross mark GZ1 and message MS disappear from the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 141 (C), a diamond-shaped double attack chance icon TG bearing the words "Double Attack Chance" appears in the center of the display screen 7a, emitting a flash of light FH and blinking as it approaches from behind to the front. At this time, the flash of light FH is displayed behind the variable icon 9C, so that the variable icon 9C is not covered by the flash of light FH and its visibility is not impaired. This double attack chance icon TG suggests the appearance of a specific character, a star mark, in addition to the cross mark GZ1.

When the double attack chance icon TG blinks and disappears from the display screen 7a as it approaches from behind to the front, the flashing FH also disappears from the display screen 7a. Then, as shown in FIG. 141(D), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a stopped number "5," the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a stopped number "6," and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a stopped number "5," resulting in a miss. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, reserved display position 9Ad, and reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and as the variable effect (variable display) ends, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. This ends the reliability change effect A. Next, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variable effect (variable display) begins with the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

On the other hand, following Figure 141 (C), when the double attack chance icon TG approaches from the rear to the very front while flashing, as shown in Figure 141 (E), the left-hand movable part 14L and the right-hand movable part 14R each advance (move) from their home positions toward (approaching each other) an advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (advance position (deployed position)), the left-hand decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the left-hand movable part 14L, and the right-hand decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the right-hand movable part 14R, combine, and the left-hand decorative part of the left-hand movable part 14L and the right-hand decorative part of the right-hand movable part 14R form a single decorative element (combined part) with a ring shape.

When the left decorative part of the left-side movable device 14L and the right decorative part of the right-side movable device 14R combine to form a combined device having a ring shape, the area formed within the ring becomes a circular area (hereinafter referred to as the "circular area"). A smiling image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area. At this time, the white spherical variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When a first predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the smiling image was displayed on the display screen 7a, the smiling image disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left-side movable device 14L and the right-side movable device 14R move away from each other, with the left-side movable device 14L retreating (moving) from its advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a toward a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right-side movable device 14R retreating (moving) from its advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a toward a retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Then, as shown in Figure 141(F), a star mark GZ2 belonging to the first group appears in the center of the display screen 7a emitting a flash of light FH, and the message "Star Mark" MS is displayed to the right of the star mark GZ2. The appearance of this star mark GZ2 forms a double (joint) with the cross mark GZ1 and star mark GZ2, and the reliability shown in Figure 140(B) becomes 18% (a 10% increase from when it was alone).

When a second predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds) longer than the first predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the star mark GZ2 was displayed on the display screen 7a, it appears as multiple balloons GZ4 arranged and displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 141 (G). At this time, the specific character, the star mark GZ2, is arranged and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and a reliability image KDG indicating reliability is arranged and displayed below the display screen 7a.

The reliability image KDG indicates the reliability that the balloon will be destroyed and the result displayed on the card will be a winning result, due to the double (joint) combination of the cross mark GZ1 and the specific character star mark GZ2. The reliability image KDG indicates this reliability by ranking it on a five-point scale, and indicates this reliability by the number of black circle images among the five white circle images, and by the number of half black and half white circles (hereinafter referred to as "half black circles"). Here, the reliability image KDG is shown as "Expectation Level" in the figure, which means "reliability," and the presence of three black circle images suggests that the expectation level (after reliability) is level 3 out of five.

Next, the specific character, star mark GZ2, begins firing lightning at the multiple balloons GZ4 to destroy them, and then, as shown in Figure 141 (H), cross mark GZ1 also begins firing lightning at the multiple balloons GZ4 to destroy them.

When multiple balloons GZ4 are destroyed, the smoke from the blast gradually clears, revealing a card. If the winning result displayed on the card is a win, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as the same pattern (number "5"), resulting in a jackpot. This ends the reliability change effect A. The jackpot game (jackpot effect) then begins. When the jackpot game (jackpot effect) ends, the variable display position 9Cd, reserve display position 9Ad, and reserve icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and as the variable display (variable display) ends, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Next, the reserve icon 9A displayed at the first reserve display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variable display (variable display) begins with the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

In contrast, if the winning result displayed on the card is a loss, the left decorative pattern 8L will stop at the number "5," the middle decorative pattern 8C will stop at the number "6," and the right decorative pattern 8R will stop at the number "5," indicating a loss. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, reserve display position 9Ad, and reserve icon 9A will be displayed again on the display screen 7a, and as the variable effect (variable display) ends, the variable icon 9C will disappear from the display screen 7a. This ends the reliability change effect A. Next, the reserve icon 9A displayed at the first reserve display position 9Ad will move to the variable display position 9Cd and become the variable icon 9C, and the variable effect (variable display) will begin with the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

In this way, in reliability change effect A, the cross mark GZ1 belonging to the first group appears alone in the center of the display screen 7a. At this point, the reliability is 8%. After that, the star mark GZ2 belonging to the first group appears in the center of the display screen 7a, emitting a flash of light FH. The appearance of this star mark GZ2 creates a double (joint) combination of the cross mark GZ1 and the star mark GZ2. This raises the reliability to 18% (a 10% increase from when it was alone).

[Reliability Change Rendering B]
Next, the reliability change effect B will be described with reference to Fig. 142. Fig. 142 is a diagram for explaining the reliability change effect B. The reliability change effect B is performed during the change effect (during the change display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in Figure 142 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a three-dimensional left decorative pattern 8L, a three-dimensional center decorative pattern 8C, and a three-dimensional right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in each variable area from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a variable effect (variable display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") begins in a display mode in which the reels are rotated.

When the decorative pattern change effect (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state as it gradually increases its speed from a slow speed, changing at high speed. This allows the background image located behind the decorative pattern to be seen through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changing from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, and appears temporarily stopped, or stopped (temporarily stopped, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R currently changing as the first special symbol is consumed are displayed in the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area is provided for the first special symbol hold in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed in four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), allowing a maximum of four hold icons to be stored. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icons are displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one hold icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. For the sake of convenience, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol change presentation (change display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the top center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, at the top center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, and are therefore difficult to distinguish from the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, these numbers are positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with the other images displayed behind them, so visibility is not obstructed by the other images.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icons are further set with increasing expectations of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) begins in Figure 142(A), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (e.g., the number "5"), forming a reach (not shown). Then, as shown in Figure 142(B), reliability change effect B begins, and a heart symbol GZ3 belonging to the first group appears alone in the center of the display screen 7a. The appearance of this heart symbol GZ3 alone indicates that the reliability shown in Figure 140(A) is 50%. A message MS reading "heart symbol" is displayed to the right of the heart symbol GZ3. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, center decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R during the variation effect (variation display) disappear from the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the variation display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A also disappear from the display screen 7a. In other words, of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the reserved icon 9A, only the variable icon 9C is displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that in this case, the variable icon 9C has changed from a white spherical icon to a red smiling spherical icon.

After that, when the heart mark GZ3 and message MS disappear from the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 142 (C), a diamond-shaped double attack chance icon TG bearing the words "Double Attack Chance" appears in the center of the display screen 7a, emitting a flash of light FH and blinking as it approaches from behind to the front. At this time, the flash of light FH is displayed behind the variable icon 9C, so that the variable icon 9C is not covered by the flash of light FH and its visibility is not impaired. In addition to the heart mark GZ3, this double attack chance icon TG also suggests the appearance of a specific character, a star mark.

When the double attack chance icon TG blinks and disappears from the display screen 7a as it approaches from behind to the front, the flashing FH also disappears from the display screen 7a. Then, as shown in FIG. 142(D), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a stopped number "5," the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a stopped number "6," and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a stopped number "5," resulting in a miss. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, reserved display position 9Ad, and reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and as the variable effect (variable display) ends, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. This ends the reliability change effect B. Next, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variable effect (variable display) begins with the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

On the other hand, following Figure 142 (C), when the double attack chance icon TG approaches from the rear to the very front while flashing, as shown in Figure 142 (E), the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R each advance (move) from their home positions toward (approaching each other) an advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (advance position (deployed position)), the left-side decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the left-side movable part 14L, and the right-side decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the right-side movable part 14R, combine, and the left-side decorative part of the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side decorative part of the right-side movable part 14R form a single decorative element (combined part) with a ring shape.

When the left decorative part of the left-side movable device 14L and the right decorative part of the right-side movable device 14R combine to form a combined device having a ring shape, the area formed within the ring becomes a circular area (hereinafter referred to as the "circular area"). A smiling image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area. At this time, the variable icon 9C, a red smiling sphere, disappears from the display screen 7a.

When a first predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the smiling image was displayed on the display screen 7a, the smiling image disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left-side movable device 14L and the right-side movable device 14R move away from each other, with the left-side movable device 14L retreating (moving) from its advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a toward a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right-side movable device 14R retreating (moving) from its advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a toward a retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Then, as shown in Figure 142 (F), a star mark GZ2 belonging to the first group appears in the center of the display screen 7a emitting a flash of light FH, and the message "Star Mark" MS is displayed to the right of the star mark GZ2. The appearance of this star mark GZ2 forms a double (joint) with the heart mark GZ3 and star mark GZ2, and the reliability shown in Figure 140 (B) drops to 47% (down 3% from when it was alone).

When a second predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds) longer than the first predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the star mark GZ2 was displayed on the display screen 7a, it appears as multiple balloons GZ4 arranged and displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 142 (G). At this time, the specific character, the star mark GZ2, is arranged and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and a reliability image KDG indicating reliability is arranged and displayed below the display screen 7a.

The reliability image KDG indicates the reliability that the balloon will be destroyed and the result displayed on the card will be a winning result, due to the double (joint) combination of the heart mark GZ3 and the specific character star mark GZ2. The reliability image KDG indicates this reliability by ranking it on a five-point scale, and indicates it by the number of black circle images and half black, half white circles (hereinafter referred to as "half black circles") among the five white circle images. Here, the reliability image KDG is shown as "expectation level" in the figure, which means "reliability," and there are three black circle images and one half black circle, suggesting that the expectation level (after reliability) is level 3.5 out of five, which is an intermediate level between level 3 and level 4.

Next, the specific character, star mark GZ2, begins firing lightning at multiple balloons GZ4 to destroy them, and then, as shown in Figure 142 (H), heart mark GZ3 also begins firing lightning at multiple balloons GZ4 to destroy them.

When multiple balloons GZ4 are destroyed, the smoke from the blast gradually clears, revealing a card. If the winning result displayed on the card is a win, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R will stop and display the same pattern (number "5"), indicating a jackpot. This ends the reliability change effect B. Then, the jackpot game (jackpot effect) begins. When the jackpot game (jackpot effect) ends, the variable display position 9Cd, reserve display position 9Ad, and reserve icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and as the variable display (variable display) ends, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Next, the reserve icon 9A displayed at the first reserve display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variable display (variable display) begins with the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

In contrast, if the winning result displayed on the card is a loss, the left decorative pattern 8L will stop at the number "5," the middle decorative pattern 8C will stop at the number "6," and the right decorative pattern 8R will stop at the number "5," indicating a loss. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, reserve display position 9Ad, and reserve icon 9A will be displayed again on the display screen 7a, and as the variable effect (variable display) ends, the variable icon 9C will disappear from the display screen 7a. This ends the reliability change effect B. Next, the reserve icon 9A displayed at the first reserve display position 9Ad will move to the variable display position 9Cd and become the variable icon 9C, and the variable effect (variable display) will begin with the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

In this way, in reliability change effect B, the heart mark GZ3 belonging to the first group appears alone in the center of the display screen 7a. At this point, the reliability is 50%. After that, the star mark GZ2 belonging to the first group appears in the center of the display screen 7a, emitting a flash of light FH. The appearance of this star mark GZ2 creates a double (joint) combination of the heart mark GZ3 and the star mark GZ2. This brings the reliability down to 47% (down 3% from when it was alone).

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the reliability change effects:
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the reliability change presentation A of Figure 141 and the reliability change presentation B of Figure 142, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying multiple types of images is provided, and the first presentation (Figures 141 (A) to (C) and (D) in the reliability change presentation A, and Figures 142 (A) to (C) and (D) in the reliability change presentation B) can be executed in which when a cross mark GZ1 (first image) is displayed followed by a star mark GZ2 (second image), the expected probability of a win increases (reliability is 18% (up 10% from when it is displayed alone)), and when a heart mark GZ3 (third image) is displayed followed by a star mark GZ2 (second image), the expected probability of a win decreases (reliability is 47% (down 3% from when it is displayed alone)). According to this configuration, even if the star mark GZ2 (second image) is displayed, the probability of winning may be changed to a higher or lower level, so that a novel effect can be provided to the player in which the probability of winning is changed depending on the combination with the star mark GZ2 (second image), thereby increasing the player's interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142, when a cross mark GZ1 (first image) or a heart mark GZ3 (third image) is displayed, the variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, and then the cross mark GZ1 (first image) or the heart mark GZ3 (third image) is hidden, and further, the variable display position 9Cd of the variable icon 9C and the variable display position 9Cd can be hidden. With this configuration, even when the cross mark GZ1 (first image) or the heart mark GZ3 (third image) changes from a displayed state to a hidden state, the variable icon 9C remains displayed, so that the player can pay attention to whether the variable icon 9C will change to another icon.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect of the reliability change effect A in Fig. 141 and the reliability change effect B in Fig. 142, a double attack chance icon TG (specific image) can be displayed as a hint for the display of the star mark GZ2 (second image). According to this configuration, the display of the double attack chance icon TG (specific image) can contribute to increasing the sense of anticipation for the display of the star mark GZ2 (second image).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the reliability change performance A of Fig. 141 and the reliability change performance B of Fig. 142, there is a first movable role 14 (movable body) that can appear on the front side of the image display device 7 (display means), and in the first performance, the first movable role 14 (movable body) can be operated as a suggestion of the display of the star mark GZ2 (second image). According to this configuration, the operation of the first movable role 14 (movable body), that is, the appearance of the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R, can contribute to increasing the expectation that the star mark GZ2 (second image) will be displayed.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, after the first effect in the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141 or the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142, a second effect (FIG. 141(E) for the reliability change effect A, and FIG. 142(E) for the reliability change effect B) can be executed, in which a star mark GZ2 (second image) and multiple balloons GZ4 (fourth image) are displayed, and a reliability image KDG (image of the expected winning probability) using the star mark GZ2 (second image) is displayed. This configuration clearly emphasizes to the player the indication that the effect using the star mark GZ2 (second image) and multiple balloons GZ4 (fourth image) is about to begin. Furthermore, the reliability image KDG (image of the expected winning probability) is displayed, making it easier for the player to recognize the reliability of this effect.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second presentation of the reliability change presentation A in Figure 141 and the reliability change presentation B in Figure 142, in addition to multiple balloons GZ4 (fourth image), a cross mark GZ1 (first image) and a star mark GZ2 (second image) may be displayed, or a heart mark GZ3 (third image) and a star mark GZ2 (second image) may be displayed. According to this configuration, the performance is developed in a double (joint) manner using the cross mark GZ1 (first image) and the star mark GZ2 (second image), so that in addition to the cross mark GZ1 (first image), the participation of the star mark GZ2 (second image) in the performance can contribute to mutually enhancing the cross mark GZ1 (first image) and the star mark GZ2 (second image).Furthermore, since the performance is developed in a double (joint) manner using the heart mark GZ3 (third image) and the star mark GZ2 (second image), in addition to the heart mark GZ3 (third image), the participation of the star mark GZ2 (second image) in the performance can contribute to mutually enhancing the heart mark GZ3 (third image) and the star mark GZ2 (second image).

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the reliability change presentation A of Figure 141 and the reliability change presentation B of Figure 142, the cross mark GZ1 (first image) is a cross mark, circle mark, triangle mark, square mark, heart mark, and star mark (multiple characters) belonging to the first group, excluding the star mark (first character) and heart mark (second character), among the cross mark, circle mark, triangle mark, square mark, heart mark, and star mark (multiple characters), the star mark GZ2 (second image) is a star mark (first character), the heart mark GZ3 (third image) is a heart mark (second character), and the multiple balloons GZ4 (fourth image) are characters not belonging to the first group. According to this configuration, if any of the characters among a cross mark, a circle mark, a triangle mark, and a square mark (other characters) is displayed as the first image before the second image, a star mark (first character), is displayed, the probability of winning is changed to a higher level. Conversely, if the third image, a heart mark (second character), is displayed before the second image, a star mark (first character), the probability of winning is changed to a lower level. Thus, although the first character, the second character, and the other characters belong to the same first group, the probability of winning can be changed depending on the character displayed before the second image, a star mark (first character), is displayed. Furthermore, although the multiple balloons GZ4 (fourth image) are characters that do not belong to the first group, they can help the player to discover for themselves their relationship with characters that belong to the first group.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the reliability change effect are shown.
[Modification 1]
The reliability change effect A in Fig. 141 and the reliability change effect B in Fig. 142 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, they are performed in a game state known as a left-handed hit. However, they may also be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21. In other words, they may also be performed in a game state known as a right-handed hit.

[Modification 2]
In the reliability change performance A of Fig. 141 and the reliability change performance B of Fig. 142, the characters belonging to the first group are represented by cross marks, circle marks, triangle marks, square marks, heart marks, and star marks, but instead of these, characters may be characters that appear in the first group. For example, the characters that appear in the first group may be ally character A instead of a cross mark, ally character B instead of a circle mark, ally character C instead of a triangle mark, ally character D instead of a square mark, ally character E instead of a heart mark, and ally character F instead of a star mark. 140(A) and (B), the expected probability of winning increases (reliability 18% (10% increase from when alone)) when ally character A (first image) is displayed instead of the cross mark GZ1 and then ally character F (second image) is displayed instead of the star mark GZ2, whereas the expected probability of winning decreases (reliability 47% (3% decrease from when alone)) when ally character E (third image) is displayed instead of the heart mark GZ3 and then ally character F (second image) is displayed instead of the star mark GZ2. This increases the variety of effects.

In addition, while balloons were used as characters that do not belong to the first group, different characters that do belong to the first group may be used instead. In this case, multiple characters may be used. For example, the characters that do not belong to the first group may be enemy character A, enemy character B, enemy character C, enemy character D, and enemy character E. Then, a performance is performed in which ally character A and enemy character A are associated, a performance is performed in which ally character B and enemy character B are associated, a performance is performed in which ally character C and enemy character C are associated, a performance is performed in which ally character D and enemy character D are associated, and a performance is performed in which ally character E and enemy character E are associated. In this case, if the reliability levels are the same as those in Figures 140(A) and (B), ally character F will appear as a double (joint) with ally characters A to E and will repel the enemy character. After ally character A (first image) replaces the cross mark GZ1 and is displayed, an effect is produced in which ally character A (first image) and enemy character A (fourth image) are associated. When ally character F (second image) replaces the star mark GZ2 and is displayed, the expected probability of a win increases (reliability is 18% (a 10% increase from when alone)). After ally character E (third image) replaces the heart mark GZ3 and is displayed, an effect is produced in which ally character E (third image) and enemy character E (fourth image) are associated. When ally character F (second image) replaces the star mark GZ2 and is displayed, the expected probability of a win decreases (reliability is 47% (a 3% decrease from when alone)). This increases the variety of effects.

[Modification 3]
In the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141(C) and the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142(C), the double attack chance icon TG (specific image) is displayed as a hint for the display of the star mark GZ2 (second image). However, without displaying the double attack chance icon TG (specific image), the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141(D) and the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142(D) may be configured so that the left decorative portion of the left movable element 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable element 14R form a single annular decorative element (combined element). Whether or not this is performed can be determined by a unique lottery using the sub-control board 90. This allows for increased variation in the effects.

[Modification 4]
In the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141(D) and the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142(D), the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R form a single annular decorative element (combined part). However, it is also possible not to form a decorative element (combined part). This can be determined by a unique lottery by the sub-control board 90. This can increase the variety of effects.

[Modification 5]
In the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142(B), the variable icon 9C changes from a white spherical icon to a red smiling spherical icon. At this time, the size of the variable icon 9C may be made a predetermined multiple (for example, about 5 to 8 times) larger than the size of the white spherical icon. In this way, the change in the variable icon 9C can be easily emphasized to the player.

[Modification 6]
In the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142, the first special symbol reservation based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, making them difficult to distinguish among the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a and intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, because they are displayed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with other images displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, visibility is not obstructed by other images. In this embodiment, once the reliability change effect is initiated, a reliability image KDG is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a, indicating the reliability on a five-point scale that the winning result displayed on the card will be a win when the balloon is destroyed. As a result, there is a risk that the player will misunderstand the number (number of reserved balls) displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a as a reliability level indicated on this five-level scale. Therefore, instead of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a number representing the number of reserved balls may be displayed on one of the sub-display screens 64 (the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U, for example, the right sub-display screen 64R). This eliminates the risk that the player will misunderstand the number representing the number of reserved balls as a reliability level indicated on a level scale. Furthermore, the number representing the number of reserved balls can be easily distinguished from the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making it easier to understand intuitively.

[Modification 7]
In the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141(H) and the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142(H), the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. However, the variable icon 9C may be displayed and reappear on the display screen 7a. In this case, the star mark GZ2, which is the character, emits lightning toward the balloons GZ4 to begin destroying them. Furthermore, in the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141(H), the cross mark GZ1 also emits lightning toward the balloons GZ4 to begin destroying them. In the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142(H), the heart mark GZ3 also emits lightning toward the balloons GZ4 to begin destroying them. Therefore, the display mode of the variable icon 9C may be, for example, a display mode of an animation in which a ball expands and contracts up and down like a bouncing ball, or a display mode of an animation in which the ball spins around. This can contribute to improving the presentation effect of the display mode of the variable icon 9C.

[Modification 8]
In the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141(H) and the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142(H), the variable icon 9C disappeared from the display screen 7a. However, the variable icon 9C may be displayed and reappear on the display screen 7a. In this case, the star mark GZ2, which is the character, emits lightning toward the multiple balloons GZ4 to begin destroying them. Furthermore, in the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141(H), the cross mark GZ1 also emits lightning toward the multiple balloons GZ4 to begin destroying them. In the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142(H), the heart mark GZ3 also emits lightning toward the multiple balloons GZ4 to begin destroying them. Therefore, the variable icon 9C may collide with the multiple balloons GZ4, explode, and contribute to destroying the multiple balloons GZ4. In this way, in addition to the two characters, the variable icon 9C can be used to destroy multiple balloons GZ4, making the performance of destroying multiple balloons GZ4 even more impressive for the player.Furthermore, the variable icon 9C's contribution to destroying multiple balloons GZ4 can give the player the impression that its reliability has increased, thereby contributing to improving the performance effect.

[Modification 9]
The reliability change effect A in Figure 141 and the reliability change effect B in Figure 142 may not include some of the effects described above, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect D7-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
A first effect can be executed in which the probability of winning increases when a second image is displayed after a first image is displayed, and the probability of winning decreases when a third image is displayed and then the second image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D7-1,
In the first performance, when the first image or the third image is displayed, the variable icon is displayed at the variable display position, and then the first image or the third image is hidden, and further, the variable display position of the variable icon and the variable display position is hidden.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D7-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D7-1 or aspect D7-2,
In the first effect, a specific image can be displayed as a suggestion for displaying the second image.
This is a gaming machine characterized by the above.

◇ [Aspect D7-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D7-1 to D7-3,
a movable body that can appear in front of the display means,
In the first effect, the movable body can be operated as a suggestion of displaying the second image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D7-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D7-1 to D7-4,
After the first effect, a fourth image is displayed in addition to the second image, and a second effect can be executed in which an image indicating the expected degree of winning based on the second image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D7-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect D7-5,
In the second effect, in addition to the fourth image, the first image and the second image may be displayed, or the third image and the second image may be displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D7-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D7-1 to D7-6,
the first image is a character other than the first character and the second character among a plurality of characters belonging to a first group;
the second image is the first character;
the third image is the second character;
the fourth image is a character that does not belong to the first group;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The item superimposition effect will be explained below using Figures 143 to 145. This item superimposition effect can be executed during the special symbol variation effect, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, moves the third movable role piece 13, reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103, and displays the image on the display screen 7a, thereby realizing this effect.

[Item Overlay Rendering A]
143 is a diagram for explaining the item superimposition effect A. In this item superimposition effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 143(A), a decorative pattern change effect is executed. In this decorative pattern effect, the reserved icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed, but their display is omitted. In addition, a decorative pattern change display is executed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in Figure 143 (B), an item image display effect is performed. In this item image display effect, a facial image XG1 is displayed. This facial image XG1 includes a glasses image XG11 representing glasses as a specified item. The portions of the glasses image XG11 that correspond to the lenses are displayed transparently.

Next, as shown in Figure 143 (C), an item role moving performance is performed. In this item role moving performance, the third movable role 13L and the third movable role 13R move from the retracted position to the deployed position and combine at the position of the glasses image XG11 (on the glasses image XG11) to form the third movable role 13 representing glasses. In this case, the third movable role 13 is the same size as the glasses image XG11, but may be slightly larger than the glasses image XG11. In this item role moving performance, the face image XG1 is continuously displayed. The part of the third movable role 13 that corresponds to the lenses is transparent.

Next, as shown in Figure 143 (D), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, the face image XG1 continues to be displayed, but the glasses image XG11 is erased from the face image XG1, and the image of the eyes that were previously hidden by the glasses image XG11 is displayed instead.

[Item Overlay Feature B]
144 is a diagram for explaining the item superimposition effect B. In this item superimposition effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 144(A), a decorative pattern change effect is executed. In this decorative pattern effect, the reserved icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed, but their display is omitted. In addition, a decorative pattern change display is executed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in Figure 144 (B), an item image display effect is performed. In this item image display effect, a facial image XG1 is displayed. This facial image XG1 includes a glasses image XG11 representing glasses as a specified item. The portions of the glasses image XG11 that correspond to the lenses are displayed transparently.

Next, as shown in Figure 144 (C), an item role moving performance is performed. In this item role moving performance, the third movable role 13L and the third movable role 13R move from the retracted position to the deployed position and combine at the position of the glasses image XG11 (on the glasses image XG11) to form the third movable role 13 representing glasses. In this case, the third movable role 13 is the same size as the glasses image XG11, but may be slightly larger than the glasses image XG11. In this item role moving performance, the face image XG1 is continuously displayed. The part of the third movable role 13 that corresponds to the lenses is transparent.

Next, as shown in Figure 144 (D), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, character XG2 is displayed in the position where face image XG1 was displayed.

[Item Overlay Rendering C]
FIG. 145 is a diagram for explaining the item superimposition effect C. In this item superimposition effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 145(A), a decorative pattern change effect is executed. In this decorative pattern effect, the reserved icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed, but their display is omitted. In addition, a decorative pattern change display is executed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in Figure 145 (B), an item image display effect is performed. In this item image display effect, a facial image XG1 is displayed. This facial image XG1 includes a glasses image XG11 representing glasses as a specified item. The portions of the glasses image XG11 that correspond to the lenses are displayed transparently.

Next, as shown in Figure 145 (C), an item role moving performance is performed. In this item role moving performance, the third movable role 13L and the third movable role 13R move from the retracted position to the deployed position and combine at the position of the glasses image XG11 (on the glasses image XG11) to form the third movable role 13 representing glasses. In this case, the third movable role 13 is the same size as the glasses image XG11, but may be slightly larger than the glasses image XG11. In this item role moving performance, the face image XG1 is continuously displayed. The part of the third movable role 13 that corresponds to the lenses is transparent.

Next, as shown in Figure 145 (D), item role transparency effect 1 is performed. In this item transparency effect 1, eyes are displayed on the main display screen 7a in the area corresponding to the lens of the third movable role element 13, and the lens portion of the third movable role element 13 is made transparent, allowing the player to see the eyes of facial image XG1 through the third movable role element 13.

Next, as shown in Figure 145 (E), item role transparency effect 2 is performed. In this item transparency effect 2, the characters "intense" and "hot" are displayed on the main display screen 7a in the area corresponding to the lens of the third movable role 13, and the lens part of the third movable role 13 is made transparent so that the player can see these characters through the third movable role 13.

Next, as shown in Figure 145 (D), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, character XG2 is displayed in the position where face image XG1 was displayed.

[Modification]
In the above-described item superimposition effect, glasses are used as the item, and the third movable prop 13 representing the glasses is moved to the position of the glasses image XG11, but this is not limiting, and other items may be used. For example, a mask may be used as the item, and the third movable prop 13 representing the mask may be moved to the position of the mask image to perform an effect similar to the above-described item superimposition effect.
In the above-mentioned item superimposition effect, the part corresponding to the lens of the glasses image XG11 may be displayed transparently in the item image display effect, and a predetermined image (for example, an image of an eye or words such as "intense" or "hot") may be displayed in that transparent part.

[Example of effect]
In the item superimposition effect, a glasses image XG11 representing a pair of glasses as an item is displayed, and then the third movable accessory 13 representing the glasses is moved to the deployed position and placed in front of the glasses image XG11, after which a predetermined effect (super reach effect) is performed. With this configuration, the glasses image XG11 and the third movable accessory 13 can present a three-dimensional image of the glasses to the player, making it possible to realize a dynamic display effect. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.
In the item superimposition effect, the glasses image XG11 is displayed, and then the third movable device 13 representing glasses is moved to the deployed position and placed in front of the glasses image XG11. The third movable device 13 is then returned to its retreated position (home position), and then a character XG2 performing a predetermined effect (super reach effect) is displayed in the position where the glasses image XG11 was displayed. This configuration allows the glasses image XG11 and the third movable device 13 to present a three-dimensional image of glasses to the player, enabling a dynamic display effect. Furthermore, after the third movable device 13 returns to its retreated position, the character XG2 performing the super reach effect is displayed instead of the glasses image XG11, providing a fast-paced effect and giving the player a sense of exhilaration. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.
In the item superimposition effect, the third movable device 13 includes a third movable device 13L and a third movable device 13R. In the item device movement effect, the third movable device 13L and the third movable device 13R move to the deployed position and combine on the glasses image XG11. With this configuration, the glasses image XG11 and the third movable device 13 can present a more three-dimensional glasses image to the player, realizing a dynamic display effect. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect XG-1]
A gaming machine capable of executing a plurality of effects,
A first effect may be performed as one of the plurality of effects,
A second effect may be performed as one of the effects,
A third effect may be performed as one of the effects,
the first effect is an effect of displaying a first image representing a predetermined item on a display means,
The second effect is an effect in which a movable character representing the predetermined item is moved to an expanded position on the first image,
the third effect is an effect in which a predetermined display effect is performed by the display means,
performing a combination effect including the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XG-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XG-1,
In the combination effect, the first effect is performed, then the second effect is performed, and then the third effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XG-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XG-2,
A fourth effect may be performed as one of the effects,
The fourth performance is a performance in which the movable role object is moved from the deployed position to the basic position,
The combination effect may include the fourth effect,
In the combination performance, the fourth performance is performed after the second performance, and the third performance is performed after the fourth performance, and in the third performance, the second image in the predetermined performance is displayed in place of the first image displayed on the display means at a position corresponding to the deployed position of the movable role object.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XG-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect XG-3,
The movable part has a first part and a second part,
The movable role object represents one role object by combining the first role object and the second role object,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XG-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XG-4,
In the combination performance, in the second display performance, the first and second movable roles are moved to the deployed positions on the first image, and the first and second roles are combined at the deployed positions.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative lighting effects of the movable props will be explained below using Figures 146 to 148. In Figures 146 to 148, other movable props, such as the second movable prop 15, which are arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, have been omitted for clarity.

This movable role decorative light-up effect can be executed while the decorative pattern is in a variable display state (during variable display). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (e.g., a variable display start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the movable role decorative light-up effect is included, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (e.g., a variable display start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and changes the position and light-up state of the first movable role 14 provided on the gaming board 2.

Here, we will explain the game board 2 with a transparent acrylic plate, and then explain the movable feature decorative lighting effect produced by the first movable feature 14.

[Game board 2 formed from a transparent acrylic plate]
First, the game board 2 formed from a transparent acrylic plate will be described with reference to Figures 146 and 147. Figure 146 is a diagram for explaining the game board 2 formed from a transparent acrylic plate. Figure 147 is a continuation of the diagram for explaining the game board 2 formed from the transparent acrylic plate of Figure 146.

As shown in Figure 146 (A), the game board 2 is made of a transparent acrylic plate 2z, with multiple game pegs and the like protruding (implanted) into the game area 3 on the front of the transparent acrylic plate 2z, and the first movable device 14, image display device 7, and the like are arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z. A through hole is formed in approximately the center of the transparent acrylic plate 2z, and the image display device 7 is arranged at a position corresponding to this through hole. The first movable device 14 is arranged in the space between the transparent acrylic plate 2z and the image display device 7, and when it is waiting in the home position, the front is covered by the transparent acrylic plate 2z, but when it has moved forward toward the center of the display screen 7a, it appears in front of the image display device 7 and is not covered by the transparent acrylic plate 2z due to the opening in the transparent acrylic plate 2z.

Although the first movable device 14 is positioned behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z, the transparent acrylic plate 2z makes it easy to see whether the first movable device 14 is waiting in the home position or has moved forward toward the center of the display screen 7a. The gaming board 2 with the transparent acrylic plate 2z has the same configuration as the gaming board 2 described above, except for the transparent acrylic plate 2z, and so a description of it will be omitted here.

The first movable accessory 14, not shown, is equipped with a decorative substrate on which multiple full-color LEDs are mounted. An inner lens is positioned to cover the front of the decorative substrate, and the inner lens and decorative substrate are housed in a decorative member. An opening is formed in the decorative member, exposing the inner lens through this opening. The inner lens diffracts the light from the multiple full-color LEDs, making it difficult to notice the presence of the decorative substrate located behind the inner lens. Therefore, even when all of the multiple full-color LEDs are turned off, the multiple full-color LEDs are difficult to see through the inner lens. The inner lens may be transparent or translucent. Light emitted by the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate passes through the inner lens and is radiated forward (hereinafter referred to as "the first movable accessory 14 emitting light").

A transparent acrylic plate 2z is placed in front of the first movable device 14, so when the first movable device 14 emits light, the light passes through the transparent acrylic plate 2z and is irradiated in front of the transparent acrylic plate 2z. As a result, when comparing game balls flowing down the area of the game area 3 that corresponds to the front of the first movable device 14 with game balls flowing down the area of the game area 3 that does not correspond to the front of the first movable device 14, the game balls flowing down the area of the game area 3 that corresponds to the front of the first movable device 14 are brightly illuminated and easily visible.

In addition, multiple game pegs and the like are protruded (implanted) from the front surface of the transparent acrylic plate 2z, and when the first movable device 14 emits light, the light brightly illuminates the game pegs, clearly highlighting the path along which the game balls flow.

Here, we will explain the state in which the first movable part 14 is waiting in the home position. As described above, the first movable part 14 includes a left-side movable part 14L and a right-side movable part 14R. The left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R are each configured to be movable in the left-right direction, and half of a ring-shaped decorative part (the left-side decorative part and the right-side decorative part) is attached to the tip end. In other words, the left-side decorative part and the right-side decorative part each have an arc-shaped half of a ring shape.

The first movable device 14 is stationary in a retracted position (home position) where the left movable device 14L is stored to the left of the display screen 7a and the right movable device 14R is stored to the right of the display screen 7a.

As shown in Figure 146 (B), the left-side movable part 14L, which waits in the home position, has a left-side decorative part with an arc shape that is half of a ring shape, and the center point of the vertical distance dimension of the arc is on the arc, which serves as the rotation center point LKP. At this rotation center point LKP on the arc, it is further divided into an upper arc-shaped left-side movable part 14LU and a lower arc-shaped left-side movable part 14LD, with the upper arc-shaped left-side movable part 14LU rotating counterclockwise and the lower arc-shaped left-side movable part 14LD rotating clockwise, so that the upper arc-shaped left-side movable part 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left-side movable part 14LD are open by approximately 180 degrees.

When the left-side movable part 14L begins to move forward toward the center of the display screen 7a, the upper arc-shaped left-side movable part 14LU first rotates clockwise at the arc-shaped rotation center point LKP, and the lower arc-shaped left-side movable part 14LD rotates counterclockwise, forming a left-side decorative part with an arc shape that is half a ring, and then moving forward toward the center of the display screen 7a.

As shown in the figure, the right-side movable part 14R, which waits in the home position, has a right-side decorative part with an arc shape that is half of a ring, with the center of the vertical distance dimension of the arc on the arc being the rotation center point RKP. At this rotation center point RKP on the arc, it is further divided into an upper arc-shaped right-side movable part 14RU and a lower arc-shaped right-side movable part 14RD, with the upper arc-shaped right-side movable part 14RU rotating clockwise and the lower arc-shaped right-side movable part 14RD rotating counterclockwise, resulting in an open state of approximately 180 degrees.

When the right-side movable part 14R begins to move forward toward the center of the display screen 7a, the upper arc-shaped right-side movable part 14RU first rotates counterclockwise at the arc-shaped rotation center point RKP, and the lower arc-shaped right-side movable part 14RD rotates clockwise, forming a right-side decorative part with an arc shape that is half a ring, and then moves forward toward the center of the display screen 7a.

When the left-side movable part 14L, which is waiting in the home position, emits light, the light brightly illuminates the area in front of the upper arc-shaped left-side movable part 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left-side movable part 14LD, while the upper arc-shaped left-side movable part 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left-side movable part 14LD remain open at approximately 180 degrees, as shown in Figure 146 (C).

When the right-side movable part 14R, which is waiting in the home position, emits light, the light brightly illuminates the area in front of the upper arc-shaped right-side movable part 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right-side movable part 14RD, while the upper arc-shaped right-side movable part 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right-side movable part 14RD remain open at approximately 180 degrees, as shown in the figure.

As mentioned above, the game area 3 is divided into a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction, and a right game area 3B on the right side. A hitting style in which the game ball is shot so that it flows down through the left game area 3A is called a "left hit," and a hitting style in which the game ball is shot so that it flows down through the right game area 3B is called a "right hit."

When the left-side movable device 14L is waiting in the home position, as shown in Figures 147 (D) and (E), when the left-side movable device 14L lights up, that is, when the upper-arc-shaped left-side movable device 14LU and the lower-arc-shaped left-side movable device 14LD light up, the light brightly illuminates the area in the left game area 3A in front of the upper-arc-shaped left-side movable device 14LU and the lower-arc-shaped left-side movable device 14LD (hereinafter referred to as the "left-side light-emitting area 3AF"). As a result, when comparing game balls flowing down the left-side light-emitting area 3AF in the left game area 3A with game balls flowing down the other areas of the left game area 3A excluding the left-side light-emitting area 3AF, game balls flowing down the left-side light-emitting area 3AF are brightly illuminated and easily visible.

Furthermore, multiple game pegs (represented by small "circles" in the figure) are protruding (implanted) into the left-hand light-emitting area 3AF. Therefore, when the left-hand movable device 14L lights up, that is, when the upper-arc-shaped left-hand movable device 14LU and the lower-arc-shaped left-hand movable device 14LD light up, the light brightly illuminates the game pegs in the left-hand light-emitting area 3AF, clearly highlighting the path along which the game ball flows. Furthermore, when the lower-arc-shaped left-hand movable device 14LD lights up within the left-hand light-emitting area 3AF, the area brightly illuminated by the light contains not only game pegs but also so-called windmills, clearly highlighting the rotation of the windmills. The windmills are just as important to players as the game pegs, as the direction and speed of their rotation affect the rolling of the game ball toward the first starting hole 20.

When the right-side movable device 14R is waiting in the home position, as shown in the diagram, when the right-side movable device 14R lights up, that is, when the upper-arc-shaped right-side movable device 14RU and the lower-arc-shaped right-side movable device 14RD light up, the light brightly illuminates the area in the right play area 3B in front of the upper-arc-shaped right-side movable device 14RU and the lower-arc-shaped right-side movable device 14RD (hereinafter referred to as the "right-side light-emitting area 3BF"). As a result, when comparing game balls flowing down the right-side light-emitting area 3BF in the right play area 3B with game balls flowing down other areas of the right play area 3B excluding the right-side light-emitting area 3BF, the game balls flowing down the right-side light-emitting area 3BF are brightly illuminated and easily visible.

In addition, multiple game pegs (represented by small "○"s in the figure) are protruding (planted) into the right-hand light-emitting area 3BF. Therefore, when the right-hand movable device 14R emits light, the light brightly illuminates the game pegs in the right-hand light-emitting area 3BF, clearly highlighting the path along which the game balls flow. Specifically, when the upper-arc-shaped right-hand movable device 14RU emits light within the left-hand light-emitting area 3AF, no game pegs are protruding (planted) in the area brightly illuminated by the light, clearly highlighting the path along which the game balls flow along the right-hand outer periphery of the center decorative body 10. When the lower-arc-shaped right-hand movable device 14RD emits light within the left-hand light-emitting area 3AF, the light brightly illuminates the multiple game pegs, clearly highlighting the path along which the game balls flow.

In Figure 147 (E), in the home position, the left-side movable accessory 14L lights up and the right-side movable accessory 14R can also light up, so whether you are hitting left or right, the left-side light-emitting area 3AF and the right-side light-emitting area 3BF are brightly illuminated, creating the effect of an electric decorative element being placed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, an electric decorative element being fixed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z) and creating an illumination effect using the electric decorative element. In other words, it is possible to create an illumination effect equivalent to that of an electric decorative element without placing an electric decorative element behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z.

Of course, the lighting patterns of the left-side movable role element 14L and the right-side movable role element 14R include lighting, gradation lighting, flashing, etc. In addition, there are effects where the left-side movable role element 14L lights up and the right-side movable role element 14R is turned off, brightly lighting only the left-side light-emitting area 3AF; there are effects where the left-side movable role element 14L is turned off and the right-side movable role element 14R is turned on, brightly lighting only the right-side light-emitting area 3BF; and there are effects where the left-side movable role element 14L and the right-side movable role element 14R are turned off, and the left-side light-emitting area 3AF and the right-side light-emitting area 3BF are turned off.

[Movable accessory decorative light-emitting effect by first movable accessory 14]
Next, the movable role decoration light emitting performance by the first movable role 14 will be described with reference to Fig. 148. Fig. 148 is a diagram for explaining the movable role decoration light emitting performance (hereinafter referred to as "movable role decoration light emitting performance") by the first movable role 14. The movable role decoration light emitting performance is performed during the variable performance by the decorative pattern (during variable display).

First, as shown in FIG. 148(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a left three-dimensional decorative symbol 8L, a center three-dimensional decorative symbol 8C, and a right three-dimensional decorative symbol 8R, spinning the reels from top to bottom of the display screen 7a, and a decorative symbol (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") variation effect (variable display) begins. When the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) begins, the stopped decorative symbols gradually increase in speed from a low speed, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state, and changing at high speed. This allows the background image behind the decorative symbols to be viewed through the rapidly changing translucent decorative symbols. The decorative symbols slow down just before stopping, changing from a translucent state back to an opaque state, and then temporarily stopping (temporarily stopping, then temporarily stopping). When temporarily stopping, the decorative symbols move slowly up and down.

In Figure 148 (A), when the decorative pattern change performance (change display) has started and the movable role decorative light-up performance has started, and the left-side movable role 14L and the right-side movable role 14R are each waiting in their home positions, when playing with the left hand or the right hand, for example, as shown in the same figure, when the left-side movable role 14L is lit and the right-side movable role 14R is off, when the left-side movable role 14L lights up, that is, the upper arc-shaped left-side movable role 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left-side movable role 14LD light up, and this light brightly illuminates the left-side light-up area 3AF, which is the area in front of the left playing area 3A corresponding to the upper arc-shaped left-side movable role 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left-side movable role 14LD, and the left playing area 3A excluding the left-side light-up area 3AF is not brightly illuminated and is darker than the left-side light-up area 3AF. On the other hand, because the right-side movable device 14R is turned off, the entire right-side playing area 3B is not brightly illuminated by the right-side movable device 14R and becomes dark.

In addition, when the left-side movable device 14L and the right-side movable device 14R are waiting in their home positions, and a game is being played by hitting the ball with the left hand or the right hand, for example, when the left-side movable device 14L and the right-side movable device 14R are illuminated, when the left-side movable device 14L illuminates, that is, the upper arc-shaped left-side movable device 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left-side movable device 14LD illuminate, the light from which illuminates brightly the left-side light-emitting area 3AF, which is the area in front of the left playing area 3A corresponding to the upper arc-shaped left-side movable device 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left-side movable device 14LD, and the left playing area 3A excluding the left-side light-emitting area 3AF is not illuminated brightly and is darker than the left-side light-emitting area 3AF. When the right-side movable device 14R lights up, that is, the upper arc-shaped right-side movable device 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right-side movable device 14RD light up, and that light brightly illuminates the right-side light-emitting region 3BF, which is the area in front of the right-side playing area 3B corresponding to the upper arc-shaped right-side movable device 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right-side movable device 14RD. The right-side playing area 3B excluding the right-side light-emitting region 3BF is not brightly illuminated, and is darker than the right-side light-emitting region 3BF.

Furthermore, when the left-side movable device 14L and the right-side movable device 14R are waiting in their home positions, and a game is being played by hitting the ball from the left or right, for example, if the left-side movable device 14L and the right-side movable device 14R are turned off, the entire left playing area 3A will be dark and not brightly illuminated by the left-side movable device 14L. The entire right playing area 3B will be dark and not brightly illuminated by the right-side movable device 14R.

In this way, when playing with the left or right hand, the left-side movable device 14L lights up and the right-side movable device 14R lights up at the home position, so the left-side light-emitting area 3AF and the right-side light-emitting area 3BF are brightly illuminated, creating the effect of an electric decorative element being placed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, an electric decorative element being fixed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z) and creating an illumination effect using the electric decorative element. In other words, an illumination effect equivalent to that of an electric decorative element can be created without placing an electric decorative element behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z.

Next, when the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R advance (move) from their home positions (waiting) toward (moving closer to) the advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in Figure 148 (B), when playing with the left or right hand, at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (advance position (deployed position)), the left-side decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the left-side movable part 14L, and the right-side decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the right-side movable part 14R, combine, and the left-side decorative part of the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side decorative part of the right-side movable part 14R form a single decorative element (combined part) with a ring shape.

When the left decorative part of the left-side movable device 14L and the right decorative part of the right-side movable device 14R combine to form a combined device having a ring shape, the area formed within the ring becomes a circular area (hereinafter referred to as the "circular area"). A smiling image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area.

At this time, the left-side movable device 14L and the right-side movable device 14R have already advanced (moved) from their home positions toward (closer to) each other, toward the advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a. Therefore, even if the left-side movable device 14L emits light, i.e., even if the upper-arc-shaped left-side movable device 14LU and the lower-arc-shaped left-side movable device 14LD emit light, the light does not brightly illuminate the left-side light-emitting area 3AF, which is the area in front of the left playing area 3A corresponding to the upper-arc-shaped left-side movable device 14LU and the lower-arc-shaped left-side movable device 14LD. Instead, the light is emitted forward at the advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a without passing through the transparent acrylic plate 2z. Furthermore, even if the right-side movable device 14R emits light, that is, even if the upper arc-shaped right-side movable device 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right-side movable device 14RD emit light, the light does not brightly illuminate the right-side light-emitting area 3BF, which is the area in front of the right-side playing area 3B corresponding to the upper arc-shaped right-side movable device 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right-side movable device 14RD, but is instead irradiated forward at the advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a without passing through the transparent acrylic plate 2z.

In this embodiment, the effect in which the left-side movable device 14L and the right-side movable device 14R advance (move) from their home positions toward (closer to) each other toward an advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a indicates the start of an effect with a high probability of a jackpot, so when a player sees the left-side movable device 14L and the right-side movable device 14R advance (move) from their home positions toward (closer to) each other toward an advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a, their anticipation for the ongoing effect increases.

In this way, when playing with the left or right hand, when the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R are waiting in their home positions and then advance (move) from their home positions toward (closer to) each other toward an advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, even if the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R emit light, they do not brightly illuminate the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF and the right-hand side light-emitting area 3BF.

In addition, if an electric decorative element is placed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, if an electric decorative element is fixed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z), the light-emitting effect produced by the electric decorative element can be produced even when the left-side movable element 14L and the right-side movable element 14R have advanced (moved) from their home positions toward (closer to) each other and toward a position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a. However, this may result in viewers being distracted by the light-emitting effect produced by the electric decorative element, and it may not be possible to emphasize attention to the left-side movable element 14L and the right-side movable element 14R.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, when the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R advance (move) from their home positions (waiting) toward the advance position (approaching each other) in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a, even if the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R emit light, they do not brightly illuminate the left-side light-emitting area 3AF and the right-side light-emitting area 3BF. This draws the player's attention to the state in which the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R advance (move) from their home positions (approaching each other) toward the advance position (approaching each other) in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a, thereby emphasizing the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R.

[Example of effect]
Below is an example of the effect of the decorative lighting effect of the movable role using the game board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate and the first movable role 14.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the gaming board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate of FIG. 146 and FIG. 147, and the movable accessory decorative light-emitting performance of FIG. 148, the gaming board 2 has a transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent part) in which the game area 3 is formed, and a plurality of game nails are protruded from the front of the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent part), and the gaming board 2 has a plurality of left movable accessory 14L (movable body) that can emit light behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent part) (in addition to the left movable accessory 14L, The left-side movable part 14R is positioned behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z, and the left-side movable part 14L (movable part) is visible through the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent portion). When the left-side movable part 14L (movable part) lights up while waiting in the home position, a first effect (FIGS. 147(E), 148(A)) can be executed, illuminating the left-side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) in the play area 3 corresponding to the left-side movable part 14L (movable part). With this configuration, the left-side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) is brightly illuminated, creating the illusion that an electric decorative element is positioned behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, that an electric decorative element is fixed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z) and an illumination effect is being produced by the electric decorative element. In other words, an illumination effect equivalent to that of an electric decorative element can be produced without providing an electric decorative element behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z. This increases the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the gaming board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate shown in Figures 146 and 147 and the movable accessory decorative illumination effect shown in Figure 148, when the left movable accessory 14L (movable body) is illuminated, the gaming ball flowing down the left-hand side illumination area 3AF (specific area) is easier to see than the gaming ball flowing down the left game area 3A (area) excluding the left-hand side illumination area 3AF, which is not illuminated by the illumination of the left movable accessory 14L (movable body). With this configuration, the left-hand side illumination area 3AF (specific area) is brightly illuminated by the illumination of the left movable accessory 14L (movable body), which contributes to emphasizing the rolling movement of the gaming ball flowing down the left-hand side illumination area 3AF (specific area). Furthermore, when adjusting the launch strength of the gaming ball, the player can easily see the rolling direction of the gaming ball depending on the strength of the launch strength when operating the handle 60, which contributes to making it easier to adjust the launch strength.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the gaming board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate as shown in Figures 146 and 147 and the movable accessory decorative light-emitting performance as shown in Figure 148, when the left movable accessory 14L (movable body) emits light, the gaming nails protruding (planted) in the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) are illuminated. With this configuration, the path along which the gaming ball flows can be clearly highlighted for the player.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the gaming board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate as shown in Figures 146 and 147 and the movable role decorative lighting performance as shown in Figure 148, the gaming area 3 has a left gaming area 3A (first flow-down area) where gaming balls flow down the left side of the gaming area 3, and a right gaming area 3B (second flow-down area) where gaming balls flow down the right side of the gaming area 3, and the left-side movable roles 14L and right-side movable roles 14R (movable bodies) arranged in plurality on the gaming board 2 include those that illuminate the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) in the left gaming area 3A (first flow-down area) and those that illuminate the right-hand side light-emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right gaming area 3B (second flow-down area). According to this configuration, in the left game area 3A, game balls flowing down the left-hand hitting side light-emitting area 3AF can be brightly illuminated to make them easy to see, and in the right game area 3B, game balls flowing down the right-hand hitting side light-emitting area 3BF can be brightly illuminated to make them easy to see.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance of the movable role decorative lighting performance in the gaming board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate of Figures 146 and 147 and Figure 148, when a left-handed hit (first game) is being performed in which the game ball flows down to the left game area 3A (first flow-down area), if movable bodies such as the left-side movable role 14L and the right-side movable role 14R light up, this may illuminate the left-handed side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) in the left game area 3A (first flow-down area) and the right-handed side light-emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second flow-down area). According to this configuration, when the left-hand movable role 14L and the right-hand movable role 14R emit light during a left-hand hit (first game), the left-hand hitting side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) in the left game area 3A (first flow-down area) and the right-hand hitting side light-emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second flow-down area) are illuminated and brightened. Also, when the left-hand movable role 14L emits light and the right-hand movable role 14R is turned off during a left-hand hit (first game), the left-hand hitting side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) in the left game area 3A (first flow-down area) is illuminated and brightened, and the right-hand hitting side light-emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second flow-down area) is not illuminated and is darkened. Also, when the left-hand hit (first game) is being performed, if the left-hand movable role 14L is turned off and the right-hand movable role 14R is illuminated, the left-hand hit side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) in the left game area 3A (first flow-down area) is not illuminated and becomes dark, and the right-hand hit side light-emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second flow-down area) is illuminated and becomes bright. In this way, when the left-hand hit (first game) is being performed, it is possible to provide variation in the light-emitting modes of the left-hand hit side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) and the right game area 3B (second flow-down area).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance of the movable role decorative lighting performance in the gaming board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate in Figures 146 and 147 and Figure 148, when a right-hand hit (second game) is being performed in which the game ball flows down to the right game area 3B (second flow-down area), if movable bodies such as the left-side movable role 14L and the right-side movable role 14R light up, this may illuminate the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) in the left game area 3A (first flow-down area) and the right-hand side light-emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second flow-down area). According to this configuration, when the left-side movable role 14L and the right-side movable role 14R emit light during right-hand play (second play), the left-hand play side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) in the left play area 3A (first flow-down area) and the right-hand play side light-emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right play area 3B (second flow-down area) are illuminated and brightened. Also, when the left-side movable role 14L emits light and the right-side movable role 14R is turned off during right-hand play (second play), the left-hand play side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) in the left play area 3A (first flow-down area) is illuminated and brightened, and the right-hand play side light-emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right play area 3B (second flow-down area) is not illuminated and is darkened. Also, when the left-hand movable device 14L is turned off and the right-hand movable device 14R is illuminated during right-hand play (second play), the left-hand play side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) in the left play area 3A (first flow-down area) is not illuminated and becomes dark, and the right-hand play side light-emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right play area 3B (second flow-down area) is illuminated and becomes bright. In this way, when right-hand play (second play) is being performed, variations can be added to the light-emitting modes of the left-hand play side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) and the right play area 3B (second flow-down area).

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable part decorative illumination performance of Figure 148, when movable parts such as the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R move from the home position to an advanced position (performance position) in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a, a second performance (Figure 148 (B)) can be executed in which they combine to become one decorative element (combined part) (combined movable part). With this configuration, what the player perceives as an illuminated decorative element behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z suddenly becomes the left-side movable element 14L or the right-side movable element 14R, and when it moves from the home position to the advance position (performance position) in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a, it combines to become a single decorative element (combined element) (combined movable body), which is an unexpected performance for the player as it changes from an illuminated decorative element to a movable body, providing an impactful performance, and furthermore, it is possible to produce light-emitting performances equivalent to those produced by illuminated decorative elements fixed in a predetermined position using movable bodies such as the left-side movable element 14L and the right-side movable element 14R.

[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second performance of the movable role decorative lighting performance of Figure 148, even if a single decorative element (combined role) (combined movable body) consisting of the left-side movable role 14L and the right-side movable role 14R lights up, it does not illuminate the left-side light-emitting area 3AF and the right-side light-emitting area 3BF. According to this configuration, when movable bodies such as the left-side movable device 14L and the right-side movable device 14R emit light when they advance (move) from their home positions (in the direction of approaching each other) toward the advance position (performance position) in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a, they do not brightly illuminate the left-side light-emitting area 3AF and the right-side light-emitting area 3BF.This draws the player's attention to the state in which the left-side movable device 14L and the right-side movable device 14R have advanced (moved) from their home positions (in the direction of approaching each other) toward the advance position (performance position) in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a, thereby emphasizing movable bodies such as the left-side movable device 14L and the right-side movable device 14R.

[Modification]
Below are shown modified examples of a game board with a transparent acrylic plate and movable role decorations and lighting effects.
[Modification 1]
In the game board 2 with a transparent acrylic plate shown in Figures 146 and 147 and the movable gimmick decoration illumination effect shown in Figure 148, this is performed during the decorative symbol variation effect (during the variable display). However, it may also be performed as part of a demo effect for waiting for customers. This allows players to experience the movable gimmick decoration illumination effect that they would experience during actual play before actually playing. The main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) waits a predetermined waiting time, sets a customer waiting standby command for displaying a waiting scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and outputs it to the sub-control board 90. The image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the customer waiting standby command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the movable gimmick decoration illumination effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the customer waiting standby command received from the sub-control board 90 and changes the position and light emission mode of the first movable device 14 provided on the game board 2.

[Modification 2]
In the game board 2 with a transparent acrylic plate shown in Figures 146 and 147 and the movable accessory decorative illumination effect shown in Figure 148, a transparent acrylic plate 2z is used as the transparent portion formed in the play area 2. However, instead of the transparent acrylic plate 2z, an opaque plywood (so-called plywood) may be used. Furthermore, through-holes may be provided in the portions corresponding to the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD, and in the portions corresponding to the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD. Transparent portions (which may be transparent or translucent) may be provided at the positions of the cels attached to the front of the plywood (so-called plywood) corresponding to these through-holes. Furthermore, these through-holes may be configured to be blocked with a transparent material (e.g., a transparent acrylic material). This transparent material may be shaped.

[Modification 3]
In the game board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate in Figures 146 and 147 and the movable accessory decorative light-emitting performance in Figure 148, at the home position, the left decorative part having an arc shape that is half the ring shape of the left movable accessory 14L is divided into an upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and a lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD, and the right decorative part having an arc shape that is half the ring shape of the right movable accessory 14R is divided into an upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU and a lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD. However, the left decorative part having an arc shape that is half the ring shape of the left movable accessory 14L may be in a standby state as it is at the home position without being divided into upper and lower parts, and the right decorative part having an arc shape that is half the ring shape of the right movable accessory 14R may be in a standby state as it is at the home position without being divided into upper and lower parts.

Even when the left decorative part, which has an arc shape that is half the ring shape of the left movable part 14L, is waiting in the home position, it may overlap with part of the left decorative part or the entire left decorative part in the front-to-back direction with the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent part). This overlapping area is formed as the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF, and when the left movable part 14L emits light, it can brightly illuminate the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF. Also, even when the right decorative part, which has an arc shape that is half the ring shape of the right movable part 14R, is waiting in the home position, it may overlap with part of the right decorative part or the entire right decorative part in the front-to-back direction with the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent part). This overlapping area is formed as the right-hand side light-emitting area 3BF, and when the right movable part 14R emits light, it can brightly illuminate the right-hand side light-emitting area 3BF.

[Modification 4]
In the game board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate shown in Figures 146 and 147, movable bodies such as the left movable role piece 14L and the right movable role piece 14R are positioned behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent portion), and no decorative members are placed in the space between the back surface of the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent portion) and the front surface of the movable bodies. However, decorative members having transparent portions may be placed in the space between the back surface of the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent portion) and the front surface of the movable bodies, and the decorative members may be fixed so that the positional relationship between the decorative members and the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent portion) does not change. The decorative members having transparent portions do not have any light-emitting elements such as full-color LEDs mounted on them, and are placed on the back surface of the transparent acrylic plate 2z via other members. Note that the decorative members having transparent portions may or may not be attached to the back surface of the transparent acrylic plate 2z.

A decorative element with a transparent portion is placed in front of the left-side movable element 14L at a position corresponding to the home position of the left-side movable element 14L, concealing the presence of the left-side movable element 14L. When the left-side movable element 14L emits light, the light is projected forward through the transparent portion of the decorative element. The transparent portion of the decorative element may be, for example, a transparent acrylic element, which may be shaped, or an inner lens. The inner lens diffracts light incident from behind. When the left-side movable element 14L is placed behind the inner lens, the presence of the left-side movable element 14L is made difficult to perceive. Therefore, the inner lens of the decorative element makes the left-side movable element 14L difficult to see. The inner lens may be transparent or translucent. This creates the appearance of an illuminated decorative element being placed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, an illuminated decorative element fixed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z), creating an illumination effect. In other words, it is possible to produce a light-emitting effect equivalent to that of an electric decorative element without providing an electric decorative element behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z. Also, when the left movable element 14L advances (moves) from the home position toward the advance position (effect position) at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (in the direction of approaching each other), even if the left movable element 14L emits light, the light does not pass through the transparent part of the decorative element, so the light emitted from the decorative element having a transparent part disappears, and the state in which the left movable element 14L advances (moves) from the home position toward the advance position (effect position) at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (in the direction of approaching each other) can be highlighted, drawing the player's attention to the state in which the left movable element 14L advances (moves) from the home position toward the advance position (effect position) at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (in the direction of approaching each other). In other words, when the left-side movable part 14L is waiting in the home position, its presence is hidden by the decorative member, so when the left-side movable part 14L lights up, the presence of the decorative member with a transparent part located in front of the left-side movable part 14L is emphasized, whereas when the left-side movable part 14L has advanced (moved) from the home position, when the left-side movable part 14L lights up, there is no need to hide its own presence by emphasizing the presence of the decorative member with a transparent part, and it can now emphasize its own presence.

Furthermore, by placing a decorative element with a transparent portion in front of the right-side movable element 14R at a position corresponding to the home position of the right-side movable element 14R, the presence of the right-side movable element 14R is concealed (in other words, the right-side movable element 14R is made difficult to see by the decorative element), and when the right-side movable element 14R emits light, the light is projected forward through the transparent portion of the decorative element. The transparent portion of the decorative element may be, for example, a transparent acrylic element, which may be shaped, or it may be an inner lens. The inner lens refracts light incident from behind in a diffuse manner, and when the right-side movable element 14R is placed behind the inner lens, it becomes difficult to recognize the presence of the right-side movable element 14R, so the inner lens of the decorative element makes the right-side movable element 14R difficult to see. The inner lens may be transparent or translucent. This makes it appear as if an electric decorative element is placed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, the electric decorative element is fixed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z) and a light-emitting effect is being produced by the electric decorative element. In other words, a light-emitting effect equivalent to that of an electric decorative element can be produced without providing an electric decorative element behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z. Furthermore, when the right-side movable element 14R advances (moves) from its home position toward the advance position (effect position) at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (in the direction of approaching each other), even if the right-side movable element 14R emits light, the light no longer passes through the transparent portion of the decorative element, and therefore the light emitted from the decorative element having a transparent portion disappears. This draws the player's attention to the state in which the right-side movable element 14R advances (moves) from its home position toward the advance position (effect position) at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (in the direction of approaching each other), thereby emphasizing the right-side movable element 14R. In other words, when the right-side movable part 14R is waiting in the home position, its presence is hidden by the decorative member, so when the right-side movable part 14R lights up, the presence of the decorative member with a transparent part located in front of the right-side movable part 14R is emphasized, whereas when the right-side movable part 14R has advanced (moved) from the home position, when the right-side movable part 14R lights up, there is no need to hide its own presence by emphasizing the presence of the decorative member with a transparent part, and it can now emphasize its own presence.

[Modification 5]
In the game board 2 with a transparent acrylic plate shown in Figures 146 and 147 and the movable role decorative illumination display shown in Figure 148, the first movable role 14 includes a decorative substrate mounted with multiple full-color LEDs. An inner lens covers the front of the decorative substrate, and the inner lens and decorative substrate are housed in a decorative member. An opening is formed in the decorative member, exposing the inner lens through the opening. The inner lens diffracts the light from the multiple full-color LEDs, making it difficult to notice the presence of the decorative substrate located behind the inner lens. Even when all of the multiple full-color LEDs are turned off, the multiple full-color LEDs are difficult to see through the inner lens. In other words, in the game board 2 with a transparent acrylic plate shown in Figures 146 and 147 and the movable role decorative illumination display shown in Figure 148, the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate housed in the first movable role 14 are difficult to see through the inner lens. However, an inner lens may be formed so that the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate housed in the first movable accessory 14 can be easily seen, or a transparent member with a design may be used instead of the inner lens. This transparent member may be transparent or translucent.

[Modification 6]
In the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate of Figures 146 and 147 and the movable accessory decorative light-emitting performance of Figure 148, when the left-side movable accessory 14L and the right-side movable accessory 14R are in a standby state at their home positions, the left-side movable accessory 14L and the right-side movable accessory 14R may be in a light-emitting state when playing with a left-hand hit or when playing with a right-hand hit. However, when switching from a game played with a left-hand hit to a game played with a right-hand hit, the left-side movable accessory 14L may be turned off and the right-side movable accessory 14R may be turned on, or when switching from a game played with a right-hand hit to a game played with a left-hand hit, the left-side movable accessory 14L may be turned on and the right-side movable accessory 14R may be turned off. In this way, when switching between playing by hitting with the left hand and playing by hitting with the right hand, the light emission modes of the left-side movable device 14L and the right-side movable device 14R can clearly inform the player which way to play.

[Modification 7]
In the game board 2 with a transparent acrylic plate shown in Figure 147(E) and the movable accessory decorative lighting effect shown in Figure 148, when the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU within the left-hand side lighting area 3AF lights up, the area brightly illuminated by the light does not have any game pins protruding (planted). However, game pins may be protruding (planted). In this way, the brightly illuminated game pins can clearly highlight the path along which the game ball flows.

[Modification 8]
The movable role decorative lighting effect of Figure 148 may not include some of the effects described, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect E2-1]
A gaming machine having a transparent portion in which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming board on which a plurality of gaming nails are protruding from the front surface of the transparent portion,
A plurality of light-emitting movable bodies are arranged behind the transparent portion on the game board,
The movable body is visible through the transparent portion,
When the movable body emits light while waiting at a home position, a first effect can be executed in which a specific area of the game area corresponding to the movable body is illuminated.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect E2-2
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1,
When the movable body emits light, the game balls flowing down the specific area are easier to see than the game balls flowing down the area that is not illuminated by the light emitted by the movable body.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect E2-3
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1 or E2-2,
When the movable body emits light, the game nails protruding from the specific area are illuminated.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect E2-4
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-3,
The game area has a first flow-down area where game balls flow down on the left side of the game area, and a second flow-down area where game balls flow down on the right side of the game area,
The movable bodies arranged on the game board include one that illuminates the specific area in the first flow-down area and one that illuminates the specific area in the second flow-down area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect E2-5
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-4,
In the first effect, when a first game in which a game ball flows down to the first flow-down area is being played, if the movable body emits light, the movable body may illuminate the specific area in the first flow-down area and the specific area in the second flow-down area.
A gaming machine characterized by:
Aspect E2-6
A gaming machine according to aspect E2-4 or E2-5,
In the first effect, when a second game in which a game ball flows down to the second flow-down area is being played, if the movable body emits light, the movable body may illuminate the specific area in the first flow-down area and the specific area in the second flow-down area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect E2-7
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-6,
When the movable body moves from the home position to a performance position, a second performance can be executed in which the movable body combines to form a combined movable body.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect E2-8
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-7,
In the second effect, even if the combined movable body emits light, it does not illuminate the specific area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The W-mode display effect will be explained below using Figures 149 to 151. This W-mode display effect can be executed during the special symbol variation effect, etc. In other words, it is an effect that is realized when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103, and displays the image on the display screen 7a. Note that in the W-mode display effect, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are actually displayed, but are not shown in the figures. Also, the left sub-display screen 64L has a smaller display screen area than the main display screen 7a.

[W mode display effect A]
FIG. 149 is a diagram illustrating the W-mode display effect A. In this W-mode display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 149(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the left decorative symbol 8L, the center decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are used to display the varying decorative symbols, and a first mode image XH1, a second mode image XH2, and a button image XH3 are displayed. The first mode image XH1 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the second mode image XH2 and the button image XH3 are displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. The first mode image XH1 is composed of a mode A image XH11 representing mode A, a mode B image XH12 representing mode B, and a mode C image XH13 representing mode C. The second mode image XH2 is composed of a mode A image XH21 representing mode A, a mode B image XH22 representing mode B, and a mode C image XH23 representing mode C. Each mode has its own settings for background images, music, sound effects, frequency of appearance of specific characters, character types, frequency of appearance of Chance Up, and expected jackpot probability of Chance Up. Modes A to C also have different settings for these settings. In the first mode image XH1, the Mode A image XH11, the Mode B image XH12, and the Mode C image XH13 are displayed side by side without overlapping. Meanwhile, in the second mode image XH2, the Mode A image XH21, the Mode B image XH22, and the Mode C image XH23 are displayed so as to overlap. The button image XH3 is an image representing the select button 68 and is intended to prompt the player to change modes by operating the select button 68. In this W-mode display presentation, the mode can be changed whether the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating or whether a reach presentation is in progress. In the example of Fig. 149(A), mode A is selected, and in the first mode image XH1, the mode A image XH11 is displayed dark (indicated by hatching in the figure), and in the second mode image XH2, the mode A image XH21 is placed at the top, suggesting that mode A is selected. In addition, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R pass at high speed over the mode A image XH11, mode B image XH12, and mode C image XH13, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 149 (B), a decorative pattern slow-changing effect is performed. In this decorative pattern slow-changing effect, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R slowly fluctuate, passing over the Mode A image XH11, Mode B image XH12, and Mode C image XH13, respectively. In this case, when decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the foreground, the Mode A image XH11, Mode B image XH12, and Mode C image XH13 are hidden by the decorative patterns and cannot be seen. Furthermore, a player who sees button image XH3 operates select button 68 to change the mode from Mode A to Mode B. Therefore, in the first mode image XH1, the Mode B image XH12 is displayed darker (indicated by hatching in the figure), and in the second mode image XH2, the Mode B image XH22 is positioned at the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(C), a decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stopped on the Mode A image XH11, Mode B image XH12, and Mode C image XH13, respectively. In this case, the Mode A image XH11, Mode B image XH12, and Mode C image XH13 are hidden by the decorative symbols in the foreground of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In FIG. 149(C), the Mode B image XH12 is displayed darker on the first mode image XH1, and the Mode B image XH22 is displayed on the second mode image XH2, i.e., Mode B remains.
After this decorative symbol stopping performance, in the case of a big win, a big win symbol arrangement is displayed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and in the case of a loss, a loss symbol arrangement is displayed.

[W mode display effect B]
FIG. 150 is a diagram illustrating the W-mode display effect B. In this W-mode display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 150(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the left decorative symbol 8L, the center decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are used to display the varying decorative symbols, and a first mode image XH1, a second mode image XH2, and a button image XH3 are displayed. The first mode image XH1 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the second mode image XH2 and the button image XH3 are displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. The first mode image XH1 is composed of a mode A image XH11 representing mode A, a mode B image XH12 representing mode B, and a mode C image XH13 representing mode C. The second mode image XH2 is composed of a mode A image XH21 representing mode A, a mode B image XH22 representing mode B, and a mode C image XH23 representing mode C. Each mode has its own settings for background images, music, sound effects, frequency of appearance of specific characters, character types, frequency of appearance of Chance Up, and expected jackpot probability of Chance Up. Modes A to C also have different settings for these settings. In the first mode image XH1, the Mode A image XH11, the Mode B image XH12, and the Mode C image XH13 are displayed side by side without overlapping. Meanwhile, in the second mode image XH2, the Mode A image XH21, the Mode B image XH22, and the Mode C image XH23 are displayed so as to overlap. The button image XH3 is an image representing the select button 68 and is intended to prompt the player to change modes by operating the select button 68. In this W-mode display presentation, the mode can be changed whether the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating or whether a reach presentation is in progress. In the example of Figure 150(A), mode A is selected, and in the first mode image XH1, the mode A image XH11 is displayed dark (indicated by hatching in the figure), and in the second mode image XH2, the mode A image XH21 is placed at the top, suggesting that mode A is selected. In addition, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R pass at high speed over the mode A image XH11, mode B image XH12, and mode C image XH13, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 150 (B), character appearance presentation 1 is performed. In this character appearance presentation 1, character image XH4 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and this character image XH4 moves across the main display screen 7a, passing over Mode A image XH11, Mode B image XH12, and Mode C image XH13. In this case, when character image XH4 is in the foreground, the Mode A image XH11, Mode B image XH12, and Mode C image XH13 are hidden by character image XH4 and cannot be seen. Furthermore, a player who sees button image XH3 operates select button 68 to change the mode from Mode A to Mode B. Therefore, in the first mode image XH1, Mode B image XH12 is displayed darker (indicated by hatching in the figure), and in the second mode image XH2, Mode B image XH22 is placed at the top.

Next, as shown in Figure 150(C), character appearance effect 2 is performed. In this character appearance effect 2, character image XH4 moves to the left sub-display screen 64L and moves to the position of the second mode image XH2. In this case, character image XH4 moves behind the second mode image XH2, and the Mode A image XH11, Mode B image XH12, and Mode C image XH13 are always visible. In Figure 150(C), the Mode B image XH12 is displayed darkly in the first mode image XH1, and the Mode B image XH22 is displayed in the second mode image XH2, i.e., Mode B remains.
After this character appearance performance 2, in the case of a big win, a big win pattern arrangement is displayed by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and in the case of a loss, a loss pattern arrangement is displayed.

[W mode display effect C]
FIG. 151 is a diagram illustrating the W-mode display effect C. In this W-mode display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 151(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the left decorative symbol 8L, the center decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are used to display the varying decorative symbols, and a first mode image XH1, a second mode image XH2, and a button image XH3 are displayed. The first mode image XH1 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the second mode image XH2 and the button image XH3 are displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. The first mode image XH1 is composed of a mode A image XH11 representing mode A, a mode B image XH12 representing mode B, and a mode C image XH13 representing mode C. The second mode image XH2 is composed of a mode A image XH21 representing mode A, a mode B image XH22 representing mode B, and a mode C image XH23 representing mode C. Each mode has its own settings for background images, music, sound effects, frequency of appearance of specific characters, character types, frequency of appearance of Chance Up, and expected jackpot probability of Chance Up. Modes A to C also have different settings for these settings. In the first mode image XH1, the Mode A image XH11, the Mode B image XH12, and the Mode C image XH13 are displayed side by side without overlapping. Meanwhile, in the second mode image XH2, the Mode A image XH21, the Mode B image XH22, and the Mode C image XH23 are displayed so as to overlap. The button image XH3 is an image representing the select button 68 and is intended to prompt the player to change modes by operating the select button 68. In this W-mode display presentation, the mode can be changed whether the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating or whether a reach presentation is in progress. In the example of Fig. 151(A), mode A is selected, and in the first mode image XH1, the mode A image XH11 is displayed dark (indicated by hatching in the figure), and in the second mode image XH2, the mode A image XH21 is placed at the top, suggesting that mode A is selected. In addition, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R pass at high speed over the mode A image XH11, mode B image XH12, and mode C image XH13, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 151 (B), a mode change effect is performed. In this mode change effect, the player looks at button image XH3 and operates select button 68 to change the mode from mode A to mode B. Therefore, in this mode change effect, the mode B image XH12 is displayed darkly (indicated by hatching in the figure) in the first mode image XH1, and the mode B image XH22 is placed at the top in the second mode image XH2.

Next, as shown in Figure 151 (C), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed as a stopped "7" symbol, and decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner to create a reach state. Also, in this reach effect, character image XH4 is displayed on main display screen 7a, and this character image XH4 moves across main display screen 7a, passing over mode A image XH11, mode B image XH12, and mode C image XH13. In this case, when character image XH4 is in the foreground, the mode A image XH11, mode B image XH12, and mode C image XH13 are hidden by character image XH4 and cannot be seen. Note that in this reach effect, mode B remains selected.

Next, as shown in Figure 151 (D), a button press effect is performed. In this button press effect, a button image XH5 is displayed together with a character image XH4. This button image XH5 represents the effect button 63, and is an image intended to encourage the player to press the effect button 63. Note that in this button press effect, mode B remains selected.

Next, as shown in Figure 151 (E), a chance-up effect is performed. In this chance-up effect, when a player sees the button image XH5 and presses the effect button 63, a character image XH6 is displayed. This character image XH6 reads "Super Hot," which is a chance-up effect that suggests a relatively high probability of winning a jackpot. Note that in this chance-up effect, mode B continues to be selected.
After this chance-up effect, in the case of a big win, a big win pattern arrangement is displayed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and in the case of a loss, a loss pattern arrangement is displayed.

[Modification]
In the W mode display effect described above, the Mode A image XH21, Mode B image XH22, and Mode C image XH23 are arranged to overlap in the second mode image XH2 of the left sub-display screen 64L, but this is not limited to this, and the Mode A image XH11, Mode B image XH12, and Mode C image XH13 may be arranged to overlap in the first mode image XH1. Also, in the second mode image XH2, the Mode A image XH21, Mode B image XH22, and Mode C image XH23 may be arranged in parallel without overlapping.
In the W-mode display presentation described above, the first mode image XH1 and the second mode image XH2 are respectively composed of a mode A image, a mode B image, and a mode C image, but this is not limited to this. For example, the first mode image XH1 and the second mode image XH2 may each be composed of different mode images. For example, the first mode image XH1 may be a mode A image XH11, a mode B image XH12, and a mode C image XH13, and the second mode image XH2 may be a mode D image representing a mode D different from modes A to C, a mode E image different from modes A to D, and a mode F image different from modes A to E. Alternatively, the first mode image XH1 may be a mode A image XH11, a mode B image XH12, and a mode C image XH13, and the second mode image XH2 may be a mode A image XH21, a mode B image XH22, and a mode D image different from modes A to C.

[Example of effect]
In the W mode display effect, the first mode image XH1 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the second mode image XH2 is displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. With this configuration, the mode is displayed on each of the two display devices, so the player can easily recognize which mode is currently selected and enjoy the mode effect. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.
In the W-mode display effect, the first mode image XH1 displayed on the main display screen 7a and the second mode image XH2 displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L indicate the same mode. With this configuration, the same mode is displayed on each of the two display devices, allowing the player to easily recognize one mode and enjoy the mode effect. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.
In the W-mode display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed variably on the main display screen 7a. The display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed when the first-mode image XH1 is displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may overlap the first-mode image XH1. In such cases, the first-mode image XH1 is positioned behind the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and is at least partially obscured by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this configuration, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R takes priority over the mode display on the main display screen 7a, and the mode display takes priority over the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left sub-display screen 64L. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the mode and enjoy the mode display while enjoying the game effect. This increases the interest in the game.
In the W-mode display effect, the character image XH4 is displayed on the main display screen 7a. The character image XH4 is displayed when the first mode image XH1 is displayed. The character image XH4 and the first mode image XH1 may overlap. In such cases, the first mode image XH1 is positioned behind the character image XH4 and is at least partially hidden by the character image XH4. According to this configuration, the display of the changing character image XH4 takes priority over the mode display on the main display screen 7a, and the display of the mode takes priority over the display of the changing character image XH4 on the left sub-display screen 64L. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the modes and enjoy the mode effects while enjoying the game effects. This increases the interest in the game.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect XH-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
the display means includes a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means,
A first display effect may be performed as one effect of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
the first display effect is an effect of displaying a first mode suggestion display on the first display means, the first mode suggestion display suggesting a mode;
the second display effect is an effect of displaying a second mode suggestion display on the second display means, the second mode suggestion display suggesting a mode,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XH-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XH-1,
the mode indicated by the first mode suggestion display is the same as the mode indicated by the second mode suggestion display;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XH-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XH-2,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is an effect in which decorative symbols are variably displayed on the first display means,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XH-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XH-3,
In the combination presentation, when the third display presentation is performed while the first display presentation is being performed, if the first mode suggestion display and the decorative pattern overlap on the first display means, the first mode suggestion display is disposed behind the decorative pattern and is hidden by the decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XH-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XH-4,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect in which a predetermined image different from the decorative pattern is displayed on the first display means,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is being performed, the fourth display effect is performed, and when the first mode suggestion display and the predetermined image overlap, the first mode suggestion display is disposed behind the predetermined image and is hidden by the predetermined image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
The following aspects may also be used.
The first mode suggestion display (first mode image XH1) and the second mode suggestion display (second mode image XH2) are displayed simultaneously.
The first mode suggestion display includes a plurality of mode displays, and these plurality of mode displays are displayed so as not to overlap each other.
The second mode suggestion display includes a plurality of mode displays, and these plurality of mode displays are displayed so as to overlap each other.
The first display means (main display screen 7a) has a display screen area larger than that of the second display means (left sub-display screen 64L).
A predetermined image (such as a character image XH4, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, etc.) may be displayed on the first display means and the second display means, and when the predetermined image is positioned so as to overlap with the second mode suggestion display, the second mode suggestion display is positioned in front of the predetermined image and is visible, and when the predetermined image is positioned so as to overlap with the first mode suggestion display, the first mode suggestion display is positioned behind the predetermined image and the overlapping portion is not visible.
In the second display means, the second mode suggestion display is displayed in association with a first operation unit image (e.g., button image XH3) representing a first operation unit (e.g., select button 68) for changing the mode, and in the first display means, a second operation unit image (e.g., button image XH5) representing a second operation unit (e.g., effect button 63) is displayed, and when the player operates the second operation unit, a predetermined effect (e.g., display of character image XH6) different from the change of mode is performed (see W mode display effect C).

The movable part operation warning display will be explained below using Figures 152 to 154. In Figures 152 to 154, for ease of viewing, the first movable part 14, second movable part 15, and other movable parts arranged around the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted.

This moving part operation warning effect can be executed after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, and can also be executed during the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (e.g., a variation effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the moving part operation warning effect is included, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and top sub-display screen 64U).

Here, we will explain how to lock the sword member 65 to the upper tray 61, and then explain moving part operation warning effects A and B in order.

[Method of locking the blade member 65 to the upper tray 61]
First, a method for locking the blade member 65 to the upper tray 61 will be described with reference to Fig. 152. Fig. 152 is a diagram for explaining a method for locking the blade member 65 to the upper tray 61.

As described above, the sword member 65 is an operating part shaped like a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses. For this reason, the sword member 65 is a movable part that can be pushed downward in its entirety by the player. A sword button (not shown) is provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 65, i.e., the end of the sword handle. This sword button is an operating part that is operated (pressed) by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses. For this reason, the sword button is a movable part that can be operated (pressed) by the player. The sword member 65 is configured to be able to perform two different operations: a first operation in which the entire sword member 65 is pushed downward, and a second operation in which the sword button at the tip is pressed.

The sword and handle portions of the sword component 65 are made of luminous decorative components, and are capable of emitting light in a predetermined manner as the performance progresses. In other words, the sword component 65 has decorative components, and the illumination of these decorative components allows it to emit light in a variety of different ways.

To lock the blade member 65 to the upper tray 61, first, as shown in Figure 152 (A), insert the blade member 65 into the insertion port (not shown) located on the top left side of the upper surface of the upper tray 61 and rotate it counterclockwise HTY while pushing it downward. Then, as shown in Figure 152 (B), continue rotating it until you hear a click, which completes the locking of the blade member 65 and the upper tray 61.

When this locking is complete, the sword member 65 is slightly rotated around the vertical axis of the sword member 65 relative to the player seated in front of the gaming machine 1, making it easy for the player to grasp the handle of the sword member 65 with both hands and push the sword member 65 downward.

A lock completion sensor (not shown) is provided inside the upper tray 61 to detect when the blade member 65 has been locked, and the detection signal from the lock completion sensor is input to the sub-control board 90. The electrical circuit is configured so that the detection signal from the lock completion sensor becomes lock completion logic when the blade member 65 is locked to the upper tray 61 (hereinafter referred to as "lock completion"), and becomes lock incompletion logic, which is the inverse of the lock completion logic, when the blade member 65 is not locked to the upper tray 61 (hereinafter referred to as "lock incompletion").

The electrical circuit is pre-configured so that if the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the locking complete sensor is disconnected due to fraudulent activity, or if the connector at one end of this wiring comes close to disconnecting from the connector on the board, the logic of the detection signal from the locking complete sensor will become lock incomplete. This allows the sub-CPU 92 of the sub-control board 90 to be notified that there is some kind of problem with the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the locking complete sensor, and the sub-CPU 92 of the sub-control board 90 can then alert the user to this problem with a warning image or warning sound (specific sound).

In addition to the sword member 65 that can be operated by the player, the upper tray 61 is also provided with an effect button 63 and a select button 68 that can be operated by the player. The effect button 63 is operated (pressed) by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses. For this reason, the effect button 63 is a movable part that can be operated (pressed) by the player. Furthermore, the select button 68 is operated (pressed) by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses, and when changing predetermined settings on the gaming machine 1. For this reason, the select button 68 is a movable part that can be operated (pressed) by the player. In this way, the upper tray 61 is provided with multiple movable parts that can be operated (pressed) by the player, including the sword member 65, the sword button on the sword member 65, the effect button 63, and the select button 68. Furthermore, all of the movable parts are located on the upper tray 61 where they are easily visible, and therefore all of the movable parts are located in positions that are easily visible to the player.

The effect button 63 has a transparent pressing member that is operated (pressed) by the player, and a light-emitting decorative member is provided inside the pressing member. When this decorative member emits light, the light passes through the pressing member, causing the effect button 63 to emit light in a predetermined lighting pattern.

The select button 68 has a transparent pressing member that is operated (pressed) by the player, and a light-emitting decorative member is provided inside the pressing member. When this decorative member emits light, the light passes through the pressing member, causing the select button 68 to emit light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern. Note that the pressing member of the select button 68 may be made of an opaque member (e.g., a black member). In this case, no light-emitting decorative member is provided inside the pressing member of the select button 68, and the select button 68 does not emit light.

[Movable part operation warning performance A]
Next, the movable part operation warning effect A will be described with reference to Fig. 153. Fig. 153 is a diagram for explaining the movable part operation warning effect A. The movable part operation warning effect A can be executed after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, and can also be executed during the decorative pattern change effect (during the change display). Here, the movable part operation warning effect A executed during the decorative pattern change effect (during the change display) will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 153(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a left 3D decorative symbol 8L, a center 3D decorative symbol 8C, and a right 3D decorative symbol 8R, spinning from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a decorative symbol (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") variation effect (variable display) begins. When the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) begins, the stopped decorative symbol gradually increases in speed from a low speed, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state and changing at high speed. This allows the background image behind the decorative symbol to be viewed through the rapidly changing translucent decorative symbol. The decorative symbol slows down just before stopping, changing from a translucent state back to an opaque state, and then temporarily stops and then stops (temporarily stops and then stops and displays). When temporarily stops, the decorative symbol moves slowly up and down.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R currently changing as the first special symbol is consumed are displayed in the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area is provided for the first special symbol hold in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed in four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), allowing a maximum of four hold icons to be stored. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a black spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the third hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icon is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there are only three hold icons that have not been consumed and are stocked. For the sake of convenience, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol change presentation (change display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the top center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, at the top center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, and are therefore difficult to distinguish from the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, these numbers are positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with the other images displayed behind them, so visibility is not obstructed by the other images.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icons are further set with increasing expectations of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the decorative pattern change effect (change display) begins in Figure 153 (A), a large effect button image BG resembling the effect button 63 is then displayed in the center of the display screen 7a as shown in Figure 153 (B), an arrow image YBG moving up and down is displayed above the effect button image BG, and a message MG1 urging the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 is displayed near the top edge of the display screen 7a. At this time, the change display position 9Cd, hold display position 9Ad, change icon 9C, and hold icon 9A all disappear from the display screen 7a.

If the player then rotates the sword 65 in the opposite direction to the counterclockwise direction HTY shown in Figure 152(A), i.e., clockwise, without operating (pressing) the effect button 63, the image shown in Figure 153(B) will continue to be displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 153(C), prompting the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, and a warning image will be displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L of the sub-display screen 64. In other words, a warning is issued because the player has operated (rotated clockwise) the sword 65. In this case, the warning is issued because the player has not gained anything from operating (rotating in the statistical direction) the sword 65 and has not received any sense of accomplishment from it.

This warning image notifies the user that the sword member 65 has not yet been locked, and also provides instructions on how to cancel the warning. In other words, the warning image notifies the user that the sword member 65 has not yet been locked, and also provides instructions on how to complete the locking of the sword member 65.

In the center of the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, an incompletely locked sword image KG is displayed, modeled after the sword 65 and in the same position as the sword 65 is in when it is not yet locked. Below the incompletely locked sword image KG, a message MG2 reading "Warning" is displayed, and below the message MG2, a message MG3 reading "Please rotate the sword in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the lock," is displayed, and a counterclockwise arrow image YG indicating the direction of rotation is displayed around the center of the incompletely locked sword image KG.

Note that while the warning image is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, the audio of the message MG3 saying "Please turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the locking" is repeatedly played from the speaker 67 as a warning sound (specific sound). In other words, in this embodiment, there is no dedicated sound for warnings, and the audio of the message MG3 that conveys how to cancel the warning is also used as the sound to notify the warning. In other words, the warning sound has the functions of both a sound for reporting a warning and the audio of the message MG3 that conveys how to cancel the warning.

Next, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the effect condition is met in which an ally character CRA appears in the center of the display screen 7a as a result of the player's operation (pressing), as shown in Figure 153 (D). At this time, the warning image shown in Figure 153 (C) continues to be displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L of the sub-display screen 64.

In this embodiment, when the ally character CRA is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, it indicates the start of a presentation with a high probability of winning a jackpot, so when the player sees the ally character CRA displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, their anticipation for the presentation that will progress increases.

Here, the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, causing an ally character CRA to appear, giving the player a sense of accomplishment. However, even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, there are cases in which the ally character CRA does not appear in the center of the display screen 7a.

The various effects may then continue, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R stop and display the same pattern (for example, the number "7"), a jackpot is reached and the jackpot game (jackpot effect) begins. However, when the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R do not stop and display the same pattern (for example, the number "7"), a loss occurs. When a jackpot or loss is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, reserve display position 9Ad, and reserve icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is no longer displayed due to the end of the variation.

Furthermore, if, after Figure 153 (D), the player accidentally rotates the sword 65 counterclockwise to return it to its original state after having rotated it clockwise, the warning image will disappear from the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L of the sub-display screen 64, and the audio message MG3 saying "Please rotate the sword in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the locking" will no longer be played from the speaker 67.

[Movable part operation warning performance B]
Next, the moving part operation warning effect B will be described with reference to Fig. 154. Fig. 154 is a diagram for explaining the moving part operation warning effect B. The moving part operation warning effect B can be executed after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, and can also be executed during the decorative pattern change effect (during change display). Here, the moving part operation warning effect B executed during the decorative pattern change effect (during change display) will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 154(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a left three-dimensional decorative symbol 8L, a center three-dimensional decorative symbol 8C, and a right three-dimensional decorative symbol 8R, spinning the reels from top to bottom of the display screen 7a, and a decorative symbol (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") variation effect (variable display) begins. When the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) begins, the stopped decorative symbols change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state as they slowly increase in speed, changing at high speed. This allows the background image behind the decorative symbols to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative symbols as they rapidly change. The decorative symbols slow down just before stopping, changing from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, and then temporarily stopping, or stopping (temporarily stopping, then stopping). When temporarily stopping, the decorative symbols move slowly up and down.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R currently changing as the first special symbol is consumed are displayed in the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area is provided for the first special symbol hold in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed in four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), allowing a maximum of four hold icons to be stored. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving toward the left edge of the display screen 7a, in the order of first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the third hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icon is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there are only three hold icons that have not been consumed and are stocked. For the sake of convenience, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol change presentation (change display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the top center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, at the top center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, and are therefore difficult to distinguish from the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, these numbers are positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with the other images displayed behind them, so visibility is not obstructed by the other images.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icons are further set with increasing expectations of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the decorative pattern change effect (change display) begins in Figure 154 (A), a locked sword image PG, which resembles the sword 65 and is in the same position as the sword 65 when it is fully locked, is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 154 (B), and an arrow image YPG moving up and down is displayed to the right of the locked sword image PG, and a message MG1 prompting the player to operate the sword 65 (push it downward) is displayed near the top edge of the display screen 7a. At this time, the change display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A all disappear from the display screen 7a.

If the player then rotates the sword 65 in the opposite direction to the counterclockwise direction HTY shown in FIG. 152(A), i.e., clockwise, without operating the sword 65 (pushing it downward), the image shown in FIG. 154(B) will continue to be displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 154(C), prompting the player to operate the sword 65 (pushing it downward), and a warning image will be displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L of the sub-display screen 64. In other words, a warning is issued because the player has operated the sword 65 (rotated clockwise). In this case, the warning is issued because the player has not gained anything or felt a sense of accomplishment by operating the sword 65 (rotating it in the statistical direction).

This warning image notifies the user that the sword member 65 has not yet been locked, and also provides instructions on how to cancel the warning. In other words, the warning image notifies the user that the sword member 65 has not yet been locked, and also provides instructions on how to complete the locking of the sword member 65.

In the center of the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, an incompletely locked sword image KG is displayed, modeled after the sword 65 and in the same position as the sword 65 is in when it is not yet locked. Below the incompletely locked sword image KG, a message MG2 reading "Warning" is displayed, and below the message MG2, a message MG3 reading "Please rotate the sword in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the lock," is displayed, and a counterclockwise arrow image YG indicating the direction of rotation is displayed around the center of the incompletely locked sword image KG.

Note that while the warning image is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, the audio of the message MG3 saying "Please turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the locking" is repeatedly played from the speaker 67 as a warning sound (specific sound). In other words, in this embodiment, there is no dedicated sound for warnings, and the audio of the message MG3 that conveys how to cancel the warning is also used as the sound to notify the warning. In other words, the warning sound has the functions of both a sound for reporting a warning and the audio of the message MG3 that conveys how to cancel the warning.

Next, when the player operates the sword member 65 (pushes it downward), as shown in Figure 154 (D), the player's operation (pressing) achieves the effect condition in which an ally character CRA appears in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the warning image shown in Figure 154 (C) continues to be displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L of the sub-display screen 64.

In this embodiment, when the ally character CRA is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, it indicates the start of a presentation with a high probability of winning a jackpot, so when the player sees the ally character CRA displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, their anticipation for the presentation that will progress increases.

Here, the player operates the sword member 65 (pushes it downward), causing an ally character CRA to appear, giving the player a sense of accomplishment. However, even if the player operates the sword member 65 (pushes it downward), there may be cases where the ally character CRA does not appear in the center of the display screen 7a.

The various effects may then continue, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R stop and display the same pattern (for example, the number "7"), a jackpot is reached and the jackpot game (jackpot effect) begins. However, when the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R do not stop and display the same pattern (for example, the number "7"), a loss occurs. When a jackpot or loss is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, reserve display position 9Ad, and reserve icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is no longer displayed due to the end of the variation.

Furthermore, if, after Figure 154 (D), the player accidentally rotates the sword 65 counterclockwise to return it to its original state after having rotated it clockwise, the warning image will disappear from the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L of the sub-display screen 64, and the audio message MG3 saying "Please rotate the sword in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the locking" will no longer be played from the speaker 67.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the moving part operation warning display.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable part operation warning display A of Figure 153 and the movable part operation warning display B of Figure 154, there are display buttons 63 and sword members 65 (movable parts) that can be operated by the player (there are multiple movable parts), and the displays using the movable parts can execute a first display in which the display conditions can be achieved by the player's operation (Figure 153 (D) for movable part operation warning display A, Figure 154 (D) for movable part operation warning display B), and a second display in which a warning is issued by the player's operation (Figures 153 (C) and (D) for movable part operation warning display A, Figures 154 (C) and (D) for movable part operation warning display B). With this configuration, there are cases where the player's operation achieves the performance conditions and gives a sense of accomplishment, and cases where the player's operation does not give a sense of accomplishment and a warning is issued, and since the effect obtained can be made different depending on the moving part operated by the player, when there are multiple moving parts that the player can operate, it is possible to clearly emphasize which moving part gives a sense of accomplishment, thereby increasing the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable part operation warning effect A in Fig. 153 and the movable part operation warning effect B in Fig. 154, while the first effect is in progress, the second effect can be executed simultaneously. With this configuration, even if the effect condition is achieved through the player's operation and the player feels a sense of accomplishment, by always maintaining a situation in which a warning can be issued, it is possible to contribute to deterring the player from performing an operation that would result in a warning being issued.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153 and the movable part operation warning effect B of FIG. 154, a sub-display screen 64 (display means) capable of displaying multiple types of images is provided, and in the second effect, a warning image (specific image) informing the player how to cancel the warning is displayed. With this configuration, the sub-display screen 64 (display means) displays a warning image (specific image) informing the player how to cancel the warning, allowing the player to quickly respond by knowing the procedure for canceling the warning. Furthermore, this makes it easier for the player to notice problems with the operation of the movable part, which can contribute to preventing the player from operating the movable part that has triggered the warning.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effect of the movable part operation warning effect A in Fig. 153 and the movable part operation warning effect B in Fig. 154, it is possible to output a notification sound (specific sound) that notifies the player of a warning. According to this configuration, the notification sound (specific sound) first makes the player aware that a warning has been issued, and can convey that the action performed by the player immediately before the notification sound (specific sound) was issued was an improper action.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the effect button 63 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning effect A in Fig. 153 and the sword member 65 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning effect B in Fig. 154 can emit light. With this configuration, the movable parts that can be operated by the player are further decorated and emphasized by being illuminated, which can contribute to encouraging the player to operate the movable parts.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the effect button 63 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning effect A in Fig. 153 and the sword member 65 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning effect B in Fig. 154 are configured to have decorative members. With this configuration, the movable parts that can be operated by the player can be decorated and emphasized with decorative members, which can contribute to making the presence of the movable parts noticeable to the player in an easily understandable manner.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the effect button 63 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning effect A in Fig. 153 and the sword member 65 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning effect B in Fig. 154 are arranged in positions that are easy to see. This configuration makes it possible for the player to easily understand the arrangement of the movable parts.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the movable part operation warning display are shown.
[Modification 1]
The movable part operation warning presentation A in Fig. 153 and the movable part operation warning presentation B in Fig. 154 are performed when a gaming ball has entered the first starting hole 20. In other words, they are performed in a gaming state known as a left-handed hit. However, they may also be performed when a gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 21. In other words, they may also be performed in a gaming state known as a right-handed hit.

[Modification 2]
In the moving part operation warning effect A in FIG. 153(C) and the moving part operation warning effect B in FIG. 154(C), a notification sound (specific sound) to notify the player of the warning can be output. However, the notification sound (specific sound) may not be output. That is, the warning image may be displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L. Furthermore, the volume of the notification sound (specific sound) may be lowered compared to the volume of the sound associated with the effect being displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this way, the sound associated with the effect being displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 does not interfere with the sound associated with the effect being displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the lottery result, which is of greatest interest to the player, can be displayed by proceeding with the effect on the display screen 7a.

[Modification 3]
In the moving part operation warning presentation A of Fig. 153(C) and the moving part operation warning presentation B of Fig. 154(C), the first special symbol reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. These numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, so that they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a and are intuitively easy to understand. Furthermore, because they are arranged at the forefront of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, visibility is not obstructed by other images. In this embodiment, when the movable part operation warning effect is initiated, a warning image is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L of the sub-display screen 64. Therefore, when the warning image is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R, a number indicating the number of reserved balls may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L, and when the warning image is displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L, a number indicating the number of reserved balls may be displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R. In this way, the number indicating the number of reserved balls can be displayed on a sub-display screen other than the warning image. Furthermore, the number indicating the number of reserved balls can be prevented from being easily distinguished by blending in with the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making it intuitively easy to understand.

[Modification 4]
The moving part operation warning effect A in FIG. 153(C) and the moving part operation warning effect B in FIG. 154(C) were executed during the decorative symbol change effect (change display). However, the moving part operation warning effect can be executed after the gaming machine 1 is powered on. Once the gaming machine 1 is powered on, it can be executed even during the change effect (change display), for example, during a demo effect for waiting for customers. In other words, when the sub-CPU 92 of the sub-control board 90 determines that the sword 65 is not yet locked based on the detection signal from the lock completion sensor, it can notify the user by issuing a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound). In this way, regardless of the progress of the effect or the state of the game, if the sword 65 is not yet locked, it can be notified by issuing a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound).

[Modification 5]
In the moving part operation warning display A in FIG. 153(C) and the moving part operation warning display B in FIG. 154(C), when the sub-CPU 92 of the sub-control board 90 determines that the sword 65 is not fully locked based on the detection signal from the lock completion sensor, it can notify the player by displaying a warning image or sound (specific sound). However, a special lever that can be operated by the player may also be located near the cylinder lock CYK (see FIGS. 152(A) and 152(B)) on the front frame 53 in a visible position. When a key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and rotated in a predetermined direction, the special lever is operated (pushed downward), releasing the front frame 53 from the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached. When this special lever is operated (pushed downward), it is detected by a special lever detection sensor, and the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor is input to the sub-control board 90. The electrical circuit is configured so that the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor becomes open operation logic when the special lever is operated (pushed downward), and becomes closed logic, which is the inverse of the open operation logic, when the special lever is not operated (pushed downward).

In addition, when a key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and turned in a predetermined direction, this operation is detected by a cylinder lock detection sensor, and a detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor is input to the dispensing control board 110. The electrical circuit is configured so that the detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor becomes open logic when a key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and turned in the predetermined direction, and becomes closed logic, which is the inverse of the open logic, when a key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and not turned in the predetermined direction. When a key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and turned in the predetermined direction, the dispensing control board 110 sends a command to the main control board 80, and the main control board 80, which receives this command, sends a command to the sub-control board 90. This allows the sub-CPU 92 of the sub-control board 90 to determine that a key has been inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and turned in the predetermined direction.

When the sub-CPU 92 determines that the special lever has been operated (pushed downward) based on the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor while it is not yet certain that the key has been inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and rotated in the specified direction, it can display a warning image on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L and play a warning sound (specific sound) from the speaker 67. Note that instead of the incomplete lock sword image KG shown in Figures 153(C), (D) and 154(C), (D), the warning image will be an image resembling a special lever, and a message MG3 will be displayed stating, "Please raise the special lever in the direction of the arrow until it clicks." Additionally, instead of the counterclockwise arrow image YG shown in Figures 153(C), (D) and 154(C), (D), an upward arrow image YG will be displayed.

The electrical circuit is pre-programmed so that, at least, if the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor is disconnected due to fraudulent activity, or if the connector at one end of this wiring is about to come loose from the connector on the circuit board, the logic of the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor becomes open operation logic. This allows the sub-CPU 92 of the sub-control board 90 to be notified that some kind of trouble has occurred in the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor, and the sub-CPU 92 of the sub-control board 90 can alert the user to this trouble by displaying a warning image or warning sound (specific sound). The electrical circuit may also be pre-programmed so that, if the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor is disconnected due to fraudulent activity, or if the connector at one end of this wiring is about to come loose from the connector on the circuit board, the logic of the detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor becomes open logic.

The open or closed state of the front frame 53 and the inner frame in which the gaming board 2 is attached is detected by a front frame closed detection sensor, and the detection signal from the front frame closed detection sensor is input to the payout control board 110. The electrical circuit is configured so that the detection signal from the front frame closed detection sensor is closed logic when the front frame 53 and the inner frame in which the gaming board 2 is attached are closed, and is open logic, which is the inverse of the closed logic, when the front frame 53 and the inner frame in which the gaming board 2 is attached are open.

The electrical circuit is pre-configured so that if the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the closure detection sensor is disconnected due to fraudulent activity, or if the connector at one end of this wiring becomes disconnected from the connector on the board, the logic of the detection signal from the closure detection sensor becomes open logic. This allows the payout control board 110 to be notified that there is some kind of problem with the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the closure detection sensor. The payout control board 110 then sends this problem as a command to the main control board 80, and the main control board 80, upon receiving this command, sends a command to the sub-control board 90. This allows the sub-control board 90 to alert the user by displaying a door-open image and sound when the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are open.

The front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached are opened by an attendant or worker, but because there is a risk that they may be opened due to fraudulent activity, the state (open state, closed state) of the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached is monitored. For this reason, when the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached are opened, it is necessary to display an image with a higher level of notification that can be conveyed to the surrounding area of the gaming machine 1 than a warning image, and furthermore, it is necessary to display a sound with a higher level of notification that can be conveyed to the surrounding area of the gaming machine 1 than a warning sound (specific sound).

In other words, when the sub-CPU 92 is not sure that a key has been inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and turned in a predetermined direction, and determines based on the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor that the special lever has been operated (pushed downward), it displays a warning image on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L and plays a warning sound (specific sound) from the speaker 67. On the other hand, when the sub-CPU 92 is sure that a key has been inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and turned in a predetermined direction, and determines based on the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor that the special lever has been operated (pushed downward), it displays a door-opening image, which provides greater notice to those around the gaming machine 1 than a warning image, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, rather than on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, and plays a door-opening sound, which provides greater notice to those around the gaming machine 1 than a warning sound (specific sound), from the speaker 67.

[Modification 6]
In the movable part operation warning display A in FIG. 153(C) and the movable part operation warning display B in FIG. 154(C), when the sub-CPU 92 of the sub-control board 90 determines that the sword 65 is not yet locked based on the detection signal from the lock completion sensor, it can issue a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound). However, the specific decorative element attached to the front frame 53 (which can also be illuminated) may be provided with a movable part that functions to secure other components placed on the front frame 53 or other components placed on the game board 2. This movable part is located in a position visible to the player and can be operated by touch. This movable part is generally operated by an attendant or worker when installing the gaming machine 1 in an amusement parlor. By continuing to rotate the movable part, for example, counterclockwise until a "click" is heard, other components placed on the front frame 53 or other components placed on the game board 2 can be secured, and the locking process is completed.

A specific decorative part lock completion sensor is provided inside the front frame 53, to which the specific decorative part is attached, to detect when the movable part is locked, and the detection signal from the specific decorative part lock completion sensor is input to the sub-control board 90. The detection signal from the specific decorative part lock completion sensor becomes specific decorative part lock completion logic when other components placed on the front frame 53 or other components placed on the game board 2 are fixed and locked (hereinafter referred to as "specific decorative part lock completion"). The electrical circuit is configured so that the detection signal from the specific decorative part lock completion sensor becomes specific decorative part lock incomplete logic, which is the inverse of the specific decorative part lock completion logic, when the movable part is not rotated, for example, counterclockwise until a "click" is heard, or when the movable part is fixed but is deliberately rotated, for example, clockwise, and other components placed on the front frame 53 or other components placed on the game board 2 are not fixed (hereinafter referred to as "specific decorative part lock incomplete"). When the sub-CPU 92 of the sub-control board 90 determines that the specific decorative part has not been locked based on the detection signal from the specific decorative part lock completion sensor, it can display a warning image on the right sub-display screen 64R or left sub-display screen 64L and play a warning sound (specific sound) from the speaker 67. Note that instead of the incomplete lock sword image KG shown in Figures 153(C), (D) and 154(C), (D), the warning image will be an image that resembles the specific decorative part, and a message MG3 will be displayed stating, "Please turn the specific decorative part in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the lock."

The electrical circuit is pre-configured so that if the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the specific decorative part lock completion sensor is disconnected due to tampering, or if the connector at one end of this wiring comes close to disconnecting from the connector on the board, the logic of the detection signal from the specific decorative part lock completion sensor will indicate that the specific decorative part is not yet locked. This allows the sub-CPU 92 of the sub-control board 90 to be notified that there is some kind of problem with the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the specific decorative part lock completion sensor, and the sub-CPU 92 of the sub-control board 90 can then alert the user to this problem with a warning image or warning sound (specific sound).

[Modification 7]
In the moving part operation warning presentation A in FIG. 153(C) and the moving part operation warning presentation B in FIG. 154(C), when the sub-CPU 92 of the sub-control board 90 determines that the sword 65 is not fully locked based on the detection signal from the lock completion sensor, it can issue a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound). However, it is also possible to detect the insertion of an illegal device into the cylinder lock CYK (see FIGS. 152(A) and 152(B)) and issue a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound). When an illegal device is inserted into the key insertion port of the cylinder lock CYK, the internal cylinder (moving part) may rotate slightly (or partially). In other words, the internal cylinder (moving part) may be operated by the player.

When an unauthorized device is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the internal cylinder (movable part) rotates slightly, the cylinder lock detection sensor detects that the internal cylinder (movable part) is not fully rotated, and the detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor is input to the dispensing control board 110. The electrical circuit is configured so that the detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor becomes unauthorized open logic when an unauthorized device is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the internal cylinder (movable part) is not fully rotated, and becomes normal close logic, which is the inverse of the unauthorized open logic, when an unauthorized device is not inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the internal cylinder (movable part) is not rotated. When an unauthorized device is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the internal cylinder (movable part) is not fully rotated, the dispensing control board 110 sends a command to the main control board 80, and the main control board 80, which receives this command, sends a command to the sub-control board 90. This allows the sub-CPU 92 of the sub-control board 90 to determine that an unauthorized tool has been inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and that the internal cylinder (movable part) has not been fully rotated. Note that instead of the incomplete lock sword image KG shown in Figures 153(C), (D) and 154(C), (D), the warning image displays an image of the cylinder lock, along with a message MG3 stating, "Please lock the cylinder lock by turning it in the direction of the arrow until it clicks."

When the sub-CPU 92 determines that an unauthorized tool has been inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and that the internal cylinder (movable part) has not been fully rotated, it can display a warning image on the right sub-display screen 64R or left sub-display screen 64L, or play a warning sound (specific sound) from the speaker 67. Note that the warning image will be an image that resembles the cylinder lock CYK, instead of the incomplete lock sword image KG shown in Figures 153 (C), (D) and 154 (C), (D).

The electrical circuit is pre-configured so that if the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor is broken due to fraudulent activity, or if the connector at one end of this wiring comes close to disconnecting from the connector on the circuit board, the logic of the detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor becomes unauthorized open logic. This allows the sub-CPU 92 of the sub-control board 90 to be notified that there is some kind of problem with the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor, and the sub-CPU 92 of the sub-control board 90 can then alert the user to this problem with a warning image or warning sound (specific sound).

The open or closed state of the front frame 53 and the inner frame in which the gaming board 2 is attached is detected by a front frame closed detection sensor, and the detection signal from the front frame closed detection sensor is input to the payout control board 110. The electrical circuit is configured so that the detection signal from the front frame closed detection sensor is closed logic when the front frame 53 and the inner frame in which the gaming board 2 is attached are closed, and is open logic, which is the inverse of the closed logic, when the front frame 53 and the inner frame in which the gaming board 2 is attached are open.

The electrical circuit is pre-configured so that if the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the closure detection sensor is disconnected due to fraudulent activity, or if the connector at one end of this wiring becomes disconnected from the connector on the board, the logic of the detection signal from the closure detection sensor becomes open logic. This allows the payout control board 110 to be notified that there is some kind of problem with the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the closure detection sensor. The payout control board 110 then sends this problem as a command to the main control board 80, and the main control board 80, upon receiving this command, sends a command to the sub-control board 90. This allows the sub-control board 90 to alert the user by displaying a door-open image and sound when the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are open.

The front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached are opened by an attendant or worker, but because there is a risk that they may be opened due to fraudulent activity, the state (open state, closed state) of the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached is monitored. For this reason, when the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached are opened, it is necessary to display an image with a higher level of notification that can be conveyed to the surrounding area of the gaming machine 1 than a warning image, and furthermore, it is necessary to display a sound with a higher level of notification that can be conveyed to the surrounding area of the gaming machine 1 than a warning sound (specific sound).

In other words, when the sub-CPU 92 determines that an illegal device has been inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and that the internal cylinder (movable part) has not been fully rotated, it displays a warning image on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L and plays a warning sound (specific sound) from the speaker 67. In contrast, when the sub-CPU 92 determines that an illegal device has been inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and that the internal cylinder (movable part) has been fully rotated, it displays a door-opening image, which is more noticeable to those around the gaming machine 1 than the warning image, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, rather than the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, and further plays a door-opening sound, which is more noticeable to those around the gaming machine 1 than the warning sound (specific sound), from the speaker 67.

[Modification 8]
In the moving part operation warning effect A in FIG. 153 and the moving part operation warning effect B in FIG. 154, a warning image is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L. However, instead of displaying a message MG2 reading "Warning" and a message MG3 below the message MG2 saying "Please turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the locking process," and a counterclockwise arrow image YG, an error code (e.g., "Warning: Error Code E4") may be displayed. The sudden display of the error code can cause anxiety to the player and convey to them that the action the player performed immediately before the error code was displayed was not a good one.

[Modification 9]
The movable part operation warning display A in Figure 153 and the movable part operation warning display B in Figure 154 may not include some of the effects described above, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect E4-1]
A gaming machine having a plurality of movable parts that can be operated by a player,
The effects produced by the movable part can include a first effect in which an effect condition can be achieved by operation by the player, and a second effect in which a warning is issued by operation by the player.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect E4-2
The gaming machine according to aspect E4-1,
When the first performance is in progress, the second performance can be executed simultaneously.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect E4-3
A gaming machine according to aspect E4-1 or E4-2,
a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
In the second effect, a specific image informing the user of how to cancel the warning is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect E4-4
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects E4-1 to E4-3,
In the second effect, a specific sound that notifies the warning can be output.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect E4-5
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects E4-1 to E4-4,
The movable part is capable of emitting light.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect E4-6
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects E4-1 to E4-5,
The movable part may have a decorative member.
A gaming machine characterized by

Aspect E4-7
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects E4-1 to E4-65,
The movable part is disposed in a position where it is easily visible.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Other Modifications]
The various display effects described above may not include some of the effects, or may include effects other than those described above.

In the above embodiment, the gaming machine 1 has been described using a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of a pachinko gaming machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel-type gaming machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball gaming machine, or a mahjong ball gaming machine. If the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the gaming medium can be changed from gaming balls to gaming medals.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the operation units operated by the player are equipped with the effect button 63, the sword member 65, and the select button 68, but are not limited to these; the operation units operated by the player may also be levers, triggers, etc. Also, in the display effects of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display effects may be executed using a button image representing the effect button 63, but instead, the display effects may be executed using an image representing the sword member 65, or the display effects may be executed using an image representing a lever or trigger.

The gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but this is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1 described above, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that does not have a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured to execute various effects using the display devices (main display screen 7a, sub-display screen 64, etc.). In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, these effects may be combined with each other to form a single display effect. In other words, two or more of the above-described multiple effect examples and/or modified examples may be combined.
Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 is equipped with a sub-display screen 64 in addition to the image display device 7 (main display screen 7a), and the display effects performed on the main display screen 7a may be performed on the sub-display screen 64, or the display effects performed on the sub-display screen 64 may be performed on the main display screen 7a.

This aspect has been described above based on embodiments and modifications, but the above-described embodiments are intended to facilitate understanding of this aspect and are not intended to limit this aspect. This aspect may be modified or improved without departing from its spirit or the scope of the claims, and equivalents thereof are also included in this aspect.

1... Gaming machine 3... Play area 5... Board lamp 7... Image display device 9A, 9B... Hold image (hold icon)
9C...Relevant hold image (hold icon)
13...Third movable device 14...First movable device 15...Second movable device 17...Large prize opening start port 20...First start port (first ball entrance port)
21...Second starting port (second ball entry port)
64... Sub-display screen 66... Frame lamp 81... Game control microcomputer 91... Presentation control microcomputer 101... Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

A gaming machine,
When a predetermined row of performance symbols among those fluctuating in a plurality of rows is stopped to perform a reach formation performance, a color change stop performance can be executed in which a display color of a second pattern, which is a performance symbol to be temporarily stopped to form a reach, is changed for a first pattern, which is a performance symbol that has already been temporarily stopped, and then the second pattern is temporarily stopped;
In the color change stop effect , the display color of the second symbol is temporarily changed, and the display color of the second symbol is returned to the original display color at the stop position of the second symbol in accordance with the temporary stop of the second symbol,
In association with the color change stop effect, the second symbol is enlarged and displayed, and thereafter, when the second symbol is determined and stopped, the size of the second symbol returns to the original size before the enlarged display.
A gaming machine characterized by: